diff --git a/docs/dws/tool/ALL_META.TXT.json b/docs/dws/tool/ALL_META.TXT.json
index d6430abbb..712027def 100644
--- a/docs/dws/tool/ALL_META.TXT.json
+++ b/docs/dws/tool/ALL_META.TXT.json
@@ -1,20 +1,21 @@
[
{
- "dockw":"Tool Guide"
+ "dockw":"Tools Guide"
},
{
"uri":"dws_07_0001.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001233800667.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860318433.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
"code":"1",
"des":"This document describes how to use GaussDB(DWS) tools, including client tools, as shown in Table 1, and server tools, as shown in Table 2.The client tools can be obtained",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Overview,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Overview,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Overview",
@@ -22,17 +23,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_07_0002.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001515111185.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813598792.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
"code":"2",
- "des":"Log in to the GaussDB(DWS) management console at: https://console.otc.t-systems.com/dws/You can download the following tools:gsql CLI client: The gsql tool package contai",
+ "des":"You can download the following tools:CLI client: The gsql tool package contains the gsql client tool, GDS (parallel data loading tool), gs_dump, gs_dumpall, and gs_restor",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Downloading Related Tools,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Downloading Related Tools,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Downloading Related Tools",
@@ -40,7 +42,7 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_gsql_index.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188521128.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813598748.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
"code":"3",
"des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
@@ -50,7 +52,8 @@
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"gsql",
@@ -58,53 +61,132 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_gsql_002.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001234200693.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813599036.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
"code":"4",
"des":"Connect to the database: Use the gsql client to remotely connect to the GaussDB(DWS) database. If the gsql client is used to connect to a database, the connection timeout",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Overview,gsql,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Overview,gsql,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Overview",
"githuburl":""
},
{
- "uri":"dws_gsql_003.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188521082.xml",
+ "uri":"dws_gsql_004.html",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860318413.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
"code":"5",
- "des":"For details about how to download and install gsql and connect it to the cluster database, see section \"Using the gsql CLI Client to Connect to a Cluster\" in the Data War",
+ "des":"GaussDB(DWS) provides client tool packages that match the cluster versions. You can download the desired client tool package on the GaussDB(DWS) console.The client tool p",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Instruction,gsql,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Downloading the Client,gsql,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
+ }
+ ],
+ "title":"Downloading the Client",
+ "githuburl":""
+ },
+ {
+ "uri":"dws_gsql_003.html",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860318533.xml",
+ "product_code":"dws",
+ "code":"6",
+ "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
+ "doc_type":"tg",
+ "kw":"Instruction",
+ "search_title":"",
+ "metedata":[
+ {
+ "prodname":"dws",
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Instruction",
"githuburl":""
},
{
- "uri":"dws_gsql_005.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001234200681.xml",
+ "uri":"dws_gsql_009.html",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813438768.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"6",
- "des":"When a database is being connected, run the following commands to obtain the help information:gsql --helpThe following information is displayed:......\nUsage:\n gsql [OPTI",
+ "code":"7",
+ "des":"This section describes how to connect to a database through an SQL client after you create a data warehouse cluster and before you use the cluster's database. GaussDB(DWS",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Online Help,gsql,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Using the Linux gsql Client to Connect to a Cluster,Instruction,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
+ }
+ ],
+ "title":"Using the Linux gsql Client to Connect to a Cluster",
+ "githuburl":""
+ },
+ {
+ "uri":"dws_gsql_010.html",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813598572.xml",
+ "product_code":"dws",
+ "code":"8",
+ "des":"This section describes how to connect to a database through an SQL client after you create a data warehouse cluster and before you use the cluster's database. GaussDB(DWS",
+ "doc_type":"tg",
+ "kw":"Using the Windows gsql Client to Connect to a Cluster,Instruction,Tools Guide",
+ "search_title":"",
+ "metedata":[
+ {
+ "prodname":"dws",
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
+ }
+ ],
+ "title":"Using the Windows gsql Client to Connect to a Cluster",
+ "githuburl":""
+ },
+ {
+ "uri":"dws_gsql_011.html",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813438712.xml",
+ "product_code":"dws",
+ "code":"9",
+ "des":"GaussDB(DWS) supports the standard SSL. As a highly secure protocol, SSL authenticates bidirectional identification between the server and client using digital signatures",
+ "doc_type":"tg",
+ "kw":"Establishing Secure TCP/IP Connections in SSL Mode,Instruction,Tools Guide",
+ "search_title":"",
+ "metedata":[
+ {
+ "prodname":"dws",
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
+ }
+ ],
+ "title":"Establishing Secure TCP/IP Connections in SSL Mode",
+ "githuburl":""
+ },
+ {
+ "uri":"dws_gsql_005.html",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813439056.xml",
+ "product_code":"dws",
+ "code":"10",
+ "des":"When a database is being connected, run the following commands to obtain the help information:gsql --helpThe following information is displayed:......\nUsage:\n gsql [OPTI",
+ "doc_type":"tg",
+ "kw":"Online Help,gsql,Tools Guide",
+ "search_title":"",
+ "metedata":[
+ {
+ "prodname":"dws",
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Online Help",
@@ -112,17 +194,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_gsql_006.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001233922173.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813438884.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"7",
+ "code":"11",
"des":"For details about gsql parameters, see Table 1, Table 2, Table 3, and Table 4.",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Command Reference,gsql,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Command Reference,gsql,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Command Reference",
@@ -130,17 +213,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_gsql_007.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001233922235.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813598728.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"8",
+ "code":"12",
"des":"This section describes meta-commands provided by gsql after the GaussDB(DWS) database CLI tool is used to connect to a database. A gsql meta-command can be anything that ",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Meta-Command Reference,gsql,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Meta-Command Reference,gsql,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Meta-Command Reference",
@@ -148,17 +232,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_gsql_008.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188681032.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860198837.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"9",
+ "code":"13",
"des":"The database kernel slowly runs the initialization statement.Problems are difficult to locate in this scenario. Try using the strace Linux trace command.strace gsql -U My",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Troubleshooting,gsql,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Troubleshooting,gsql,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Troubleshooting",
@@ -166,9 +251,9 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_ds_index.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188202556.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860198757.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"10",
+ "code":"14",
"des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
"doc_type":"tg",
"kw":"Data Studio",
@@ -176,17 +261,18 @@
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Data Studio",
"githuburl":""
},
{
- "uri":"DWS_DS_09.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001233922147.xml",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_001.html",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860198933.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"11",
+ "code":"15",
"des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
"doc_type":"tg",
"kw":"About Data Studio",
@@ -194,7 +280,8 @@
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"About Data Studio",
@@ -202,2447 +289,778 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_07_0012.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001233800675.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860318645.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"12",
+ "code":"16",
"des":"Data Studio provides a graphical interface which supports essential features of the database. This simplifies database development and application building tasks.Data Stu",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Overview,About Data Studio,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Overview,About Data Studio,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Overview",
"githuburl":""
},
{
- "uri":"DWS_DS_12.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001233800651.xml",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_003.html",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813598852.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"13",
- "des":"This section describes the constraints and limitations for using Data Studio.The filter count and filtering status of the tree are not supported.If the SQL statement, DDL",
+ "code":"17",
+ "des":"This section describes the constraints and limitations for using Data Studio.If the SQL statement, DDL, object name, or data to be viewed contains Chinese characters, set",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Constraints and Limitations,About Data Studio,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Constraints and Limitations,About Data Studio,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Constraints and Limitations",
"githuburl":""
},
{
- "uri":"DWS_DS_13.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001233922187.xml",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_004.html",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860318917.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"14",
- "des":"The release package structure of Data Studio is as follows:",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Structure of a Release Package,About Data Studio,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Structure of a Release Package",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_14.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188362538.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"15",
+ "code":"18",
"des":"This section describes the minimum system requirements for using Data Studio.OSThe following table lists the OS requirements of Data Studio.BrowserThe following table lis",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"System Requirements,About Data Studio,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"System Requirements,About Data Studio,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"System Requirements",
"githuburl":""
},
{
- "uri":"DWS_DS_16.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188521096.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"16",
- "des":"This section describes the installation and configuration steps to use Data Studio. It also explains the steps to configure servers for debugging PL/SQL Functions.On the ",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Installing and Configuring Data Studio,Data Studio,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Installing and Configuring Data Studio",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_19.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001233922169.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"17",
- "des":"This section describes how to start Data Studio.The StartDataStudio.bat batch file checks the version of Operating System (OS), Java and Data Studio as a prerequisite to ",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Quick Start,Data Studio,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Quick Start",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_20.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188521104.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"18",
- "des":"This section describes the Data Studio GUI.The Data Studio GUI contains the following:Main Menu provides basic operations.Toolbarcontains buttons for easy access to frequ",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Data Studio GUI,Data Studio,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Data Studio GUI",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_21.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188680990.xml",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_005.html",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813438860.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
"code":"19",
- "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
+ "des":"In the navigation pane on the left, choose Settings > Preferences. You can customize Data Studio based on preferences.",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Data Studio Menus",
+ "kw":"Customizing Data Studio,About Data Studio,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
- "title":"Data Studio Menus",
+ "title":"Customizing Data Studio",
"githuburl":""
},
{
- "uri":"DWS_DS_22.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001234042089.xml",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_006.html",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860198941.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
"code":"20",
- "des":"The Filemenu contains database connection options. Click File from main menu or press Alt+F to open the File menu.Follow the steps below to stop Data Studio:Alternatively",
+ "des":"Only JDK 1.8 is supported.In the Windows operating system, you can download the required JDK version from the official website of SDK, and install it by following the ins",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"File,Data Studio Menus,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Downloading and Installing the Data Studio Client,Data Studio,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
- "title":"File",
+ "title":"Downloading and Installing the Data Studio Client",
"githuburl":""
},
{
- "uri":"DWS_DS_23.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188362522.xml",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_007.html",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813599008.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
"code":"21",
- "des":"The Editmenu contains clipboard, Format, Find and Replace, andSearch Objectsoperations to use in the PL/SQL Viewer and SQL Terminal tab. Press Alt+E to open the Edit menu",
+ "des":"This section describes the configuration steps to use Data Studio. It also explains the steps to configure servers for debugging PL/SQL Functions.Steps to configure Data ",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Edit,Data Studio Menus,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Configuring Data Studio,Data Studio,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
- "title":"Edit",
+ "title":"Configuring Data Studio",
"githuburl":""
},
{
- "uri":"DWS_DS_24.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001233922223.xml",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_008.html",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860198653.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
"code":"22",
- "des":"The Runmenu contains options to execute a database object in the PL/SQL Viewer tab and to execute SQL statements in the SQL Terminal tab. Press Alt+R to open the Run menu",
+ "des":"Data Studio can connect to the database using the Secure Sockets Layer [SSL] option. To use the SSL connection mode, you must configure related parameters on the client o",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Run,Data Studio Menus,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Configuring SSL Connection,Data Studio,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
- "title":"Run",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_25.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001234042151.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"23",
- "des":"The Debugmenu contains debug operations in the PL/SQL Viewer and SQL Terminal tab. Press Alt+D to open the Debug menu.",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Debug,Data Studio Menus,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Debug",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_26.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188202542.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"24",
- "des":"The Settingsmenu contains the option to change the language. Press Alt+G to open the Settings menu.",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Settings,Data Studio Menus,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Settings",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_27.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188362534.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"25",
- "des":"The Helpmenu contains the user manual and version information of Data Studio. Press Alt+H to open the Help menu.Visit https://java.com/en/download/help/path.xml to set th",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Help,Data Studio Menus,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Help",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_28.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001233922201.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"26",
- "des":"The following image shows the toolbar:The toolbar contains the following operations:Adding a ConnectionRemoving a ConnectionConnecting to a DatabaseDisconnecting a Databa",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Data Studio Toolbar,Data Studio,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Data Studio Toolbar",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_29.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188362536.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"27",
- "des":"This section describes the right-click menus of Data Studio.The following figure shows the Object Browser pane.Right-clicking the connection name allows you to select Ren",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Data Studio Right-Click Menus,Data Studio,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Data Studio Right-Click Menus",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_32.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001233800653.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"28",
- "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Connection Profiles",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Connection Profiles",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_33.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001234042087.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"29",
- "des":"When Data Studio is started, the New Database Connection dialog box will open by default. To perform any DB operations, Data Studio must be connected to at least one data",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Overview,Connection Profiles,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Overview",
+ "title":"Configuring SSL Connection",
"githuburl":""
},
{
"uri":"DWS_DS_34.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188521154.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813598612.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"30",
- "des":"Performing the following steps to establish a new database connection.click on the toolbar, or press Ctrl+N to connect to the database. The New Database Connection dialo",
+ "code":"23",
+ "des":"When Data Studio is started, the New Database Connection dialog box is displayed by default. To perform database operations, Data Studio must be connected to at least one",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Adding a Connection,Connection Profiles,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Connection Management,Data Studio,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
- "title":"Adding a Connection",
+ "title":"Connection Management",
"githuburl":""
},
{
- "uri":"DWS_DS_35.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001233800689.xml",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_012.html",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813439188.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"31",
- "des":"Follow the steps below to rename a database connection:A Rename Connection dialog box is displayed prompting you to provide the new name for the connection.The status bar",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Renaming a Connection,Connection Profiles,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Renaming a Connection",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_36.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001233800713.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"32",
- "des":"Follow the steps below to edit the database connection properties:Editing an active connection will require closing the connection and then reopening the connection with ",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Editing a Connection,Connection Profiles,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Editing a Connection",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_37.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001234042191.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"33",
- "des":"Follow the steps below to remove an existing database connection:A confirmation dialog box is displayed to remove the connection.The status bar displays the status of the",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Removing a Connection,Connection Profiles,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Removing a Connection",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_38.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001233800737.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"34",
- "des":"Follow the steps below to view the properties of a connection:The status bar displays the status of the completed operation.Properties of the selected connection is displ",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Viewing Connection Properties,Connection Profiles,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Viewing Connection Properties",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_39.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001233800723.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"35",
- "des":"Follow the steps below to refresh the database connection:The status bar displays the status of the completed operation.The time taken to refresh the database depends on ",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Refreshing a Database Connection,Connection Profiles,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Refreshing a Database Connection",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_40.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188521168.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"36",
+ "code":"24",
"des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Databases",
+ "kw":"Database Management",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
- "title":"Databases",
+ "title":"Database Management",
"githuburl":""
},
{
- "uri":"DWS_DS_41.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001233922161.xml",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_013.html",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813598724.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"37",
- "des":"A relational database is a database that has a set of tables which is manipulated in accordance with the relational model of data. It contains a set of data objects used ",
+ "code":"25",
+ "des":"A relational database contains a set of tables that can be operated based on the relational model of data. A relational database contains a group of data objects for stor",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Creating a Database,Databases,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Database Management,Database Management,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
- "title":"Creating a Database",
+ "title":"Database Management",
"githuburl":""
},
{
- "uri":"DWS_DS_42.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001234200579.xml",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_014.html",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813438788.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"38",
- "des":"You can disconnect all the databases from a connection.Follow the steps below to disconnect all the databases from a connection:This operation can be performed only when ",
+ "code":"26",
+ "des":"This section introduces how to use the database schema. All system schemas are grouped in Catalogs, and user schemas are grouped in Schemas.Only refresh can be performed ",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Disconnecting All Databases,Databases,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Schema Management,Database Management,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
- "title":"Disconnecting All Databases",
+ "title":"Schema Management",
"githuburl":""
},
{
- "uri":"DWS_DS_43.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188362552.xml",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_015.html",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860318801.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"39",
- "des":"You can connect to the database.Follow the steps below to connect a database:This operation can be performed only on an inactive database.The database is connected.The st",
+ "code":"27",
+ "des":"Right-click Functions/Procedures and a menu is displayed.The asterisk (*) next to the procedure name indicates that the procedure is not compiled or added to Object Brows",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Connecting to a Database,Databases,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Function/Procedure Management,Database Management,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
- "title":"Connecting to a Database",
+ "title":"Function/Procedure Management",
"githuburl":""
},
{
- "uri":"DWS_DS_44.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001234200657.xml",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_016.html",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813439196.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"40",
- "des":"You can disconnect the database.Follow the steps below to disconnect a database:This operation can be performed only on an active database.A confirmation dialog box is di",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Disconnecting a Database,Databases,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Disconnecting a Database",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_45.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188681058.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"41",
- "des":"Follow the steps below to rename a database:This operation can be performed only on an inactive database.A Rename Database dialog box is displayed prompting you to provid",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Renaming a Database,Databases,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Renaming a Database",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_46.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001233800731.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"42",
- "des":"Individual or batch drop can be performed on databases. Refer to Dropping a Batch of Objects section for batch drop.Follow the steps below to drop a database:This operati",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Dropping a Database,Databases,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Dropping a Database",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_47.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188202536.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"43",
- "des":"Follow the steps below to view the properties of a database:This operation can be performed only on an active database.The status bar displays the status of the completed",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Viewing Properties of a Database,Databases,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Viewing Properties of a Database",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_48.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001234200609.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"44",
+ "code":"28",
"des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Schemas",
+ "kw":"Table Management",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
- "title":"Schemas",
+ "title":"Table Management",
"githuburl":""
},
{
- "uri":"DWS_DS_49.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001234200683.xml",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_017.html",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860198601.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"45",
- "des":"This section describes working with database schemas. All system schemas are grouped under Catalogs and user schemas under Schemas.",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Overview,Schemas,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Overview",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_50.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188202546.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"46",
- "des":"In relational database technology, schemas provide a logical classification of objects in the database. Some of the objects that a schema may contain include functions/pr",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Creating a Schema,Schemas,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Creating a Schema",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_51.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001233800745.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"47",
- "des":"Exporting the schema DDL exports the DDLs of functions/procedures, tables, sequences and views of the schema.Follow the steps to export the schema DDL:The Data Studio Sec",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Exporting Schema DDL,Schemas,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Exporting Schema DDL",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_52.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188681084.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"48",
- "des":"The exported schema DDL and data include the following:DDLs of functions/procedures of the schema.DDLs and data of tables of the schema.DDLs of views of the schema.DDLs o",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Exporting Schema DDL and Data,Schemas,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Exporting Schema DDL and Data",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_53.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188202598.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"49",
- "des":"Follow the steps to rename a schema:You can view the renamed schema in the Object Browser.The status bar displays the status of the completed operation.",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Renaming a Schema,Schemas,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Renaming a Schema",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_201.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001234042201.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"50",
- "des":"Data Studio provides the option to show sequence DDL or allow users to export sequence DDL. It provides \"Show DDL\", \"Export DDL\", \"Export DDL and Data\"Follow the steps to",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Supporting Sequence DDL,Schemas,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Supporting Sequence DDL",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_54.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001233800657.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"51",
- "des":"Follow the steps below to grant/revoke a privilege:The Grant/Revoke dialog is displayed.In SQL Preview tab, you can view the SQL query automatically generated for the inp",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Granting/Revoking a Privilege,Schemas,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Granting/Revoking a Privilege",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_55.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188362532.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"52",
- "des":"Individual or batch dropping can be performed on schemas. Refer to Dropping a Batch of Objects section for batch dropping.Follow the steps below to drop a schema:A confir",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Dropping a Schema,Schemas,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Dropping a Schema",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_57.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001233800753.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"53",
- "des":"Perform the following steps to create a function/procedure and SQL function:The selected template is displayed in the new tab of Data Studio.The Created function/procedur",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Creating a Function/Procedure,Data Studio,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Creating a Function/Procedure",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_58.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188681048.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"54",
- "des":"Follow the steps below to open and edit the function/procedure or SQL function:The function/procedure or SQL function based on your selection is displayed.Only one functi",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Editing a Function/Procedure,Data Studio,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Editing a Function/Procedure",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_59.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001233922149.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"55",
- "des":"Perform the following steps to grant or revoke a permission:The Grant/Revoke dialog box is displayed.The Privilege Selection tab is displayed.The SQL Preview tab displays",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Granting/Revoking a Permission (Function/Procedure),Data Studio,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Granting/Revoking a Permission (Function/Procedure)",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_62.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001233922213.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"56",
+ "code":"29",
"des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Debugging a PL/SQL Function",
+ "kw":"Creating a Regular Table",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
- "title":"Debugging a PL/SQL Function",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_621.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188521056.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"57",
- "des":"During debugging, if the connection is lost but the database remains connected to Object Browser, the Connection Errordialog box is displayed with the following options:Y",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Overview,Debugging a PL/SQL Function,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Overview",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_622.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188202610.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"58",
- "des":"This section contains the following topics:Using the Breakpoints PaneSetting or Adding Breakpoints on a RowEnabling or Disabling a Breakpoint on a RowRemoving a Breakpoin",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Using Breakpoints,Debugging a PL/SQL Function,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Using Breakpoints",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_623.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188680998.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"59",
- "des":"This section contains the following topics:Starting DebuggingStepping Through a PL/SQL FunctionContinuing the Debug ExecutionViewing CallstackSelect the function that you",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Controlling Execution,Debugging a PL/SQL Function,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Controlling Execution",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_624.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001233800681.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"60",
- "des":"When you use Data Studio, you can examine debugging information through several debugging tabs. This section describes how to check the debugging information:Operating on",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Checking Debugging Information,Debugging a PL/SQL Function,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Checking Debugging Information",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_60.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001233800643.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"61",
- "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Working with Functions/Procedures",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Working with Functions/Procedures",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_61.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188521112.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"62",
- "des":"This section provides you with details on working with functions/procedures and SQL functions in Data Studio.Data Studio supports PL/pgSQL and SQL languages for the opera",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Overview,Working with Functions/Procedures,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Overview",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_63.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001234042115.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"63",
- "des":"Data Studio suggests a list of possible schema names, table names, column names, views, sequences, and functions in thePL/SQL Viewer.Follow the steps below to select a DB",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Selecting a DB Object in the PL/SQL Viewer,Working with Functions/Procedures,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Selecting a DB Object in the PL/SQL Viewer",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_64.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188521072.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"64",
- "des":"Follow the steps below to export the function/procedure DDL:The Data Studio Security Disclaimer dialog box is displayed.The Save As dialog box is displayed.To cancel the ",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Exporting a Function/Procedure DDL,Working with Functions/Procedures,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Exporting a Function/Procedure DDL",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_65.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188362616.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"65",
- "des":"Data Studio allows you to view table properties, procedures/functions and SQL functions.Follow the steps below to view table properties:The properties of the selected tab",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Viewing Object Properties in the PL/SQL Viewer,Working with Functions/Procedures,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Viewing Object Properties in the PL/SQL Viewer",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_66.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188680984.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"66",
- "des":"Individual or batch drop can be performed on functions/procedures. Refer to Dropping a Batch of Objects section for batch drop.Follow the steps below to drop a function/p",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Dropping a Function/Procedure,Working with Functions/Procedures,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Dropping a Function/Procedure",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_67.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188362510.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"67",
- "des":"After you connect to the database, all the stored functions/procedures and tables will be automatically populated in the Object Browser pane. You can use Data Studio to e",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Executing a Function/Procedure,Working with Functions/Procedures,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Executing a Function/Procedure",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_68.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001234042107.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"68",
- "des":"Follow the steps below to grant/revoke a privilege:The Grant/Revoke dialog box is displayed.",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Granting/Revoking a Privilege,Working with Functions/Procedures,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Granting/Revoking a Privilege",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_69.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188681080.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"69",
- "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"GaussDB(DWS) Tables",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"GaussDB(DWS) Tables",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_70.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188362526.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"70",
- "des":"This section describes how to manage tables efficiently.You need to configure all mandatory parameters to complete the operation. Mandatory parameters are marked with an ",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Table Management Overview,GaussDB(DWS) Tables,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Table Management Overview",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_71.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001233800761.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"71",
- "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Creating Regular Table",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Creating Regular Table",
+ "title":"Creating a Regular Table",
"githuburl":""
},
{
"uri":"DWS_DS_72.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001234200603.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860199097.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"72",
- "des":"This section describes how to create a common table.A table is a logical structure maintained by a database administrator and consists of rows and columns. You can define",
+ "code":"30",
+ "des":"A table is a logical structure maintained by a database administrator and consists of rows and columns. You can define a table as a part of your data definitions from the",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Overview,Creating Regular Table,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Defining a Regular Table,Creating a Regular Table,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
- "title":"Overview",
+ "title":"Defining a Regular Table",
"githuburl":""
},
{
"uri":"DWS_DS_73.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188202570.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860318529.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"73",
- "des":"After creating a table, you can add new columns in that table. You can also perform the following operations on the existing column only for a Regular table:Creating a Ne",
+ "code":"31",
+ "des":"After creating a table, you can create a new column, rename a column, and modify attributes in the table.The Add New Column dialog box is displayed prompting you to add i",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Working with Columns,Creating Regular Table,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Managing Columns,Creating a Regular Table,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
- "title":"Working with Columns",
+ "title":"Managing Columns",
"githuburl":""
},
{
"uri":"DWS_DS_74.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188521088.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860198789.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"74",
- "des":"You can perform the following operations after a table is created only for a Regular table:Creating a ConstraintRenaming a ConstraintDropping a ConstraintFollow the steps",
+ "code":"32",
+ "des":"Creating, dropping, and renaming constraints for a created table.Constraints cannot be added to column-store tables.The Add New Constraint dialog box is displayed prompti",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Working with Constraints,Creating Regular Table,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Managing Constraints,Creating a Regular Table,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
- "title":"Working with Constraints",
+ "title":"Managing Constraints",
"githuburl":""
},
{
"uri":"DWS_DS_75.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188362546.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813598984.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"75",
- "des":"You can create indexes in a table to search for data efficiently.After a table is created, you can add indexes to it. You can perform the following operations only in a c",
+ "code":"33",
+ "des":"You can create indexes in a table to search for data efficiently.After a table is created, you can add indexes to it.The Create Index dialog box is displayed.The Set Tabl",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Managing Indexes,Creating Regular Table,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Managing Indexes,Creating a Regular Table,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Managing Indexes",
"githuburl":""
},
{
- "uri":"DWS_DS_76.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001234042145.xml",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_018.html",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813598940.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"76",
- "des":"Foreign tables created using query execution in SQL Terminal or any other tool can be viewed in the Object browser after refresh.GDS Foreign table is denoted with icon b",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Creating Foreign Table,GaussDB(DWS) Tables,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Creating Foreign Table",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_77.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001233922175.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"77",
- "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Creating Partition Table",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Creating Partition Table",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_78.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001233922163.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"78",
+ "code":"34",
"des":"Partitioning refers to splitting what is logically one large table into smaller physical pieces based on specific schemes. The table based on the logic is called a partit",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Overview,Creating Partition Table,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Creating a Partitioned Table,Table Management,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
- "title":"Overview",
+ "title":"Creating a Partitioned Table",
"githuburl":""
},
{
- "uri":"DWS_DS_79.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188362578.xml",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_98.html",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860318649.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"79",
- "des":"After creating a table, you can add/modify partitions. You can also perform the following operations on an existing partition:Renaming a PartitionDropping a PartitionFoll",
+ "code":"35",
+ "des":"After creating a table, you can query, edit, and analyze the table and table data.Right-click the selected table and select View Table Data. The View Table Data tab is di",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Working with Partitions,Creating Partition Table,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Managing Table Data,Table Management,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Working with Partitions",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_80.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001234200591.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"80",
- "des":"Follow the steps below to grant/revoke a privilege:The Grant/Revoke dialog box is displayed.In the SQL Preview tab, you can view the SQL query automatically generated for",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Grant/Revoke Privilege - Regular/Partition Table,GaussDB(DWS) Tables,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Grant/Revoke Privilege - Regular/Partition Table",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_81.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001233800751.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"81",
- "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Managing Table",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Managing Table",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_82.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188202566.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"82",
- "des":"This section describes how to manage tables efficiently.You need to configure all mandatory parameters to complete the operation. Mandatory parameters are marked with ast",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Overview,Managing Table,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Overview",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_83.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188202534.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"83",
- "des":"Follow the steps below to rename a table:The Rename Table dialog box is displayed prompting you to provide the new name.Data Studio displays the status of the operation i",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Renaming a Table,Managing Table,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Renaming a Table",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_84.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188521080.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"84",
- "des":"Follow the steps below to truncate a table:Data Studio prompts you to confirm this operation.A popup message and status bar display the status of the completed operation.",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Truncating a Table,Managing Table,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Truncating a Table",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_85.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188521078.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"85",
- "des":"Index facilitate lookup of records. You need to reindex tables in the following scenarios:The index is corrupted and no longer contains valid data. Although in theory thi",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Reindexing a Table,Managing Table,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Reindexing a Table",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_86.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188362590.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"86",
- "des":"The analyzing table operation collects statistics about tables and table indicies and stores the collected information in internal tables of the database where the query ",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Analyzing a Table,Managing Table,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Analyzing a Table",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_87.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001234042113.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"87",
- "des":"Vacuuming table operation reclaims space and makes it available for re-use.Follow the steps below to vacuum the table:The Vacuum Table message and status bar display the ",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Vacuuming a Table,Managing Table,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Vacuuming a Table",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_88.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188202572.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"88",
- "des":"Follow the steps below to set the description of a table:The Update Table Description dialog box is displayed. It prompts you to set the table description.The status bar ",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Setting the Table Description,Managing Table,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Setting the Table Description",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_90.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188362518.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"89",
- "des":"Follow the steps below to set a schema:The Set Schema dialog box is displayed, prompting you to select the new schema for the selected table.The status bar displays the s",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Setting the Schema,Managing Table,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Setting the Schema",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_91.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188362504.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"90",
- "des":"Individual or batch dropping can be performed on tables. Refer to Dropping a Batch of Objects section for batch dropping.This operation removes the complete table structu",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Dropping a Table,Managing Table,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Dropping a Table",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_92.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001234200673.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"91",
- "des":"Perform the following operations to view the table properties:Data Studio displays the properties (General, Columns, Constraints, and Index) of the selected table in diff",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Viewing Table Properties,Managing Table,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Viewing Table Properties",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_93.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001233922151.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"92",
- "des":"Follow the steps below to grant/revoke a privilege:The Grant/Revoke dialog is displayed.",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Grant/Revoke Privilege,Managing Table,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Grant/Revoke Privilege",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_94.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188521098.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"93",
- "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Managing Table Data",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Managing Table Data",
"githuburl":""
},
{
- "uri":"DWS_DS_95.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188202638.xml",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_020.html",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860318829.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"94",
- "des":"This section describes how to manage table data.",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Overview,Managing Table Data,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Overview",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_96.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188521108.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"95",
- "des":"Follow the steps below to export the table DDL:The Data Studio Security Disclaimer dialog box is displayed.The Save As dialog box is displayed.To cancel the export operat",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Exporting Table DDL,Managing Table Data,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Exporting Table DDL",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_97.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001233800663.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"96",
- "des":"The exported table DDL and data include the following:DDL of the table.Columns and rows of the table.Follow the steps below to export the table DDL:The Data Studio Securi",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Exporting Table DDL and Data,Managing Table Data,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Exporting Table DDL and Data",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_98.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188521136.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"97",
- "des":"Perform the following steps to export table data:The Export Table Datadialog box is displayed with the following options:Format: Table data can be exported in Excel (xlsx",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Exporting Table Data,Managing Table Data,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Exporting Table Data",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_99.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001234042205.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"98",
- "des":"To display a DDL query for a table, perform the following steps:Data Studio displays the DDL of the selected table.A new terminal window is opened each time you select to",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Show DDL,Managing Table Data,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Show DDL",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_100.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188680976.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"99",
- "des":"Prerequisites:If the definition of the source file does not match that of the destination table, modify the properties of the destination table in the Import Table Data d",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Importing Table Data,Managing Table Data,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Importing Table Data",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_101.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001234200597.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"100",
- "des":"Follow the steps to view table data:The View Table Data tab is displayed where you can view the table data information.Toolbar menu in the View Table Data window:Icons in",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Viewing Table Data,Managing Table Data,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Viewing Table Data",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_102.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001233800701.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"101",
- "des":"Follow the steps below to edit table data:The Edit Table data tab is displayed.Refer to Viewing Table Data for description on copy and search toolbar options.Data Studio ",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Editing Table Data,Managing Table Data,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Editing Table Data",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_103.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001234042149.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"102",
+ "code":"36",
"des":"Data Studio allows you to edit temporary tables. Temporary tables are deleted automatically when you close the connection that was used to create the table.Ensure that co",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Editing Temporary Tables,GaussDB(DWS) Tables,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Editing Temporary Tables,Table Management,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Editing Temporary Tables",
"githuburl":""
},
{
- "uri":"DWS_DS_104.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188521138.xml",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_021.html",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813598992.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"103",
- "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
+ "code":"37",
+ "des":"Currently, Data Studio does not support foreign table creation. You can only view foreign tables.Foreign tables created using query execution in SQL Terminal or any other",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Sequences",
+ "kw":"Creating a Foreign Table,Table Management,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
- "title":"Sequences",
+ "title":"Creating a Foreign Table",
"githuburl":""
},
{
- "uri":"DWS_DS_105.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001233922155.xml",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_022.html",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813438776.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"104",
- "des":"Follow the steps below to create a sequence:The Create New Sequence dialog box is displayed.Enter a name in the Sequence Name field.Select theCase check box to retain the",
+ "code":"38",
+ "des":"Right-click the Views and select Create View. The DDL template for the view is displayed in the SQL Terminal tab.Right-click the selected view and select Show DDL.The DDL",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Creating Sequence,Sequences,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"View Management,Database Management,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
- "title":"Creating Sequence",
+ "title":"View Management",
"githuburl":""
},
{
- "uri":"DWS_DS_106.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188681038.xml",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_023.html",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860198753.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"105",
- "des":"Follow the steps below to grant/revoke a privilege:The Grant/Revoke dialog is displayed.In the SQL Preview tab, you can view the SQL query automatically generated for the",
+ "code":"39",
+ "des":"Enter a name in the Sequence Name field.Select the Case check box to retain the capitalization of the text entered in Sequence Name field. For example, if the entered seq",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Grant/Revoke Privilege,Sequences,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Sequence Management,Database Management,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
- "title":"Grant/Revoke Privilege",
+ "title":"Sequence Management",
"githuburl":""
},
{
- "uri":"DWS_DS_107.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001233800647.xml",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_024.html",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813598668.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"106",
- "des":"You can perform the following operations on an existing sequence:Granting/Revoking a PrivilegeDropping a SequenceDropping a Sequence CascadeIndividual or batch dropping c",
+ "code":"40",
+ "des":"A database is used by many users, and the users are grouped for management convenience. A database role represents a database user or a group of database users.Users and ",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Working with Sequences,Sequences,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Users/Roles,Database Management,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Working with Sequences",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_108.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001233922181.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"107",
- "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Views",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Views",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_109.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001234042187.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"108",
- "des":"Follow the steps below to create a new view:The DDL template for the view is displayed in the SQL Terminal tab.You can view the new view in the Object Browser.The status ",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Creating a View,Views,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Creating a View",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_110.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001234200689.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"109",
- "des":"Follow the steps below to grant/revoke a privilege:The Grant/Revoke dialog box is displayed.In the SQL Preview tab, you can view the SQL query automatically generated for",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Granting/Revoking a Privilege,Views,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Granting/Revoking a Privilege",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_111.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001233800703.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"110",
- "des":"Views can be created to restrict access to specific rows or columns of a table. A view can be created from one or more tables and is determined by the query used to creat",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Working with Views,Views,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Working with Views",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_115.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001234200687.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"111",
- "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Users/Roles",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Users/Roles",
"githuburl":""
},
{
- "uri":"DWS_DS_116.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188202538.xml",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_025.html",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813598884.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"112",
- "des":"A database is used by many users, and the users are grouped for management convenience. A database role can be one or a group of database users.Users and roles have simil",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Creating a User/Role,Users/Roles,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Creating a User/Role",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_117.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001234200577.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"113",
- "des":"You can perform the following operations on an existing user/role:Dropping a User/RoleViewing/Editing User/Role PropertiesViewing the User/Role DDLFollow the steps below ",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Working with Users/Roles,Users/Roles,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Working with Users/Roles",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_118.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001233800679.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"114",
+ "code":"41",
"des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"SQL Terminal",
+ "kw":"SQL Terminal Management",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
- "title":"SQL Terminal",
+ "title":"SQL Terminal Management",
"githuburl":""
},
{
- "uri":"DWS_DS_119.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001233800741.xml",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_026.html",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813439224.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"115",
+ "code":"42",
"des":"You can open multiple SQL Terminal tabs in Data Studio to execute multiple SQL statements for query in the current SQL Terminal tab. Perform the following steps to open a",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Opening Multiple SQL Terminal Tabs,SQL Terminal,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Opening Multiple SQL Terminal Tabs,SQL Terminal Management,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Opening Multiple SQL Terminal Tabs",
"githuburl":""
},
{
- "uri":"DWS_DS_120.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188521134.xml",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_027.html",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813598768.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"116",
- "des":"Data Studio allows viewing and managing frequently used SQL queries. The history of executed SQL queries is maintained only for the SQL Terminal.Follow the steps to view ",
+ "code":"43",
+ "des":"Data Studio allows viewing and managing frequently used SQL queries. The history of executed SQL queries is maintained only for the SQL Terminal.SQL history scripts are n",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Managing the SQL Query Execution History,SQL Terminal,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Managing the SQL Query Execution History,SQL Terminal Management,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Managing the SQL Query Execution History",
"githuburl":""
},
{
- "uri":"DWS_DS_121.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188521062.xml",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_028.html",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860198725.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"117",
+ "code":"44",
"des":"Follow the steps to open an SQL script:If the SQL Terminal has existing content, then there will be an option to overwrite the existing content or append content to it.Th",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Opening and Saving SQL Scripts,SQL Terminal,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Opening and Saving SQL Scripts,SQL Terminal Management,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Opening and Saving SQL Scripts",
"githuburl":""
},
{
- "uri":"DWS_DS_122.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188680986.xml",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_029.html",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860318905.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"118",
- "des":"Data Studio allows you to view table properties and functions/procedures.Follow the steps to view table properties:The table properties are read-only.Follow the steps to ",
+ "code":"45",
+ "des":"You can view table properties and functions/procedures in Data Studio.Perform the following steps to view table properties:All table properties are read-only.To view a fu",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Viewing Object Properties in the SQL Terminal,SQL Terminal,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Viewing Table Properties, PL/SQL Functions/Procedures on the SQL Terminal Page,SQL Terminal Manageme",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
- "title":"Viewing Object Properties in the SQL Terminal",
+ "title":"Viewing Table Properties, PL/SQL Functions/Procedures on the SQL Terminal Page",
"githuburl":""
},
{
- "uri":"DWS_DS_123.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188681012.xml",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_030.html",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813439004.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"119",
- "des":"Data Studio allows you to cancel the execution of an SQL query being executed in the SQL Terminal.Follow the steps to cancel execution of an SQL query:Alternatively, you",
+ "code":"46",
+ "des":"You can terminate an ongoing SQL query on the SQL Terminal tab page of Data Studio.To terminate an ongoing SQL query, perform the following steps:You can also choose Run ",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Canceling the Execution of SQL Queries,SQL Terminal,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Terminating an Ongoing SQL Query,SQL Terminal Management,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
- "title":"Canceling the Execution of SQL Queries",
+ "title":"Terminating an Ongoing SQL Query",
"githuburl":""
},
{
- "uri":"DWS_DS_124.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188521090.xml",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_031.html",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813438812.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"120",
+ "code":"47",
"des":"Data Studio supports formatting and highlighting of SQL queries and PL/SQL statements.Follow the steps to format PL/SQL statements:Alternatively, use the key combination ",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Formatting of SQL Queries,SQL Terminal,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Formatting of SQL Queries,SQL Terminal Management,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Formatting of SQL Queries",
"githuburl":""
},
{
- "uri":"DWS_DS_125.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001233922141.xml",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_032.html",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860318781.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"121",
- "des":"Data Studio suggests a list of possible schema names, table names and column names, and views in theSQL Terminal.Follow the steps below to select a DB object:On selection",
+ "code":"48",
+ "des":"Data Studio suggests a list of possible schema names, table names and column names, and views in the SQL Terminal.Follow the steps below to select a DB object:On selectio",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Selecting a DB Object in the SQL Terminal,SQL Terminal,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Selecting a DB Object in the SQL Terminal,SQL Terminal Management,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Selecting a DB Object in the SQL Terminal",
"githuburl":""
},
{
- "uri":"DWS_DS_126.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188362512.xml",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_033.html",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813439072.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"122",
- "des":"The execution plan shows how the table(s) referenced by the SQL statement will be scanned (plain sequential scan and index scan).The SQL statement execution cost is the e",
+ "code":"49",
+ "des":"The execution plan shows how the table referenced by the SQL statement will be scanned (sequential scan or index scan).The SQL statement execution cost indicates the dura",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Viewing the Query Execution Plan and Cost,SQL Terminal,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Viewing the Execution Plan and Costs,SQL Terminal Management,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
- "title":"Viewing the Query Execution Plan and Cost",
+ "title":"Viewing the Execution Plan and Costs",
"githuburl":""
},
{
- "uri":"DWS_DS_127.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001234042185.xml",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_034.html",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813598684.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"123",
- "des":"Visual Explain plan displays a graphical representation of the SQL query using information from the extended JSON format. This helps to refine query to enhance query and ",
+ "code":"50",
+ "des":"Visual Explain plan displays a graphical representation of the SQL query using information from the extended JSON format. This function improves the query and server perf",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Viewing the Query Execution Plan and Cost Graphically,SQL Terminal,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Viewing the Query Execution Plan and Cost Graphically,SQL Terminal Management,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Viewing the Query Execution Plan and Cost Graphically",
"githuburl":""
},
{
- "uri":"DWS_DS_128.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001234200573.xml",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_035.html",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860318949.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"124",
+ "code":"51",
"des":"In SQL Terminal, you canAutomatically Commit a TransactionExecute SQL QueriesMulti-Column SortBackuping Unsaved Queries/Functions/ProceduresError LocatorSearch in PL/SQL ",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Working with SQL Terminals,SQL Terminal,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Working with SQL Terminals,SQL Terminal Management,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Working with SQL Terminals",
"githuburl":""
},
{
- "uri":"DWS_DS_129.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188680978.xml",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_036.html",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860318913.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"125",
+ "code":"52",
"des":"You can export the results of an SQL query into a CSV, Text or Binary file.This section contains the following topics:Exporting all dataExporting Data On the Current Page",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Exporting Query Results,SQL Terminal,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Exporting Query Results,SQL Terminal Management,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Exporting Query Results",
"githuburl":""
},
{
- "uri":"DWS_DS_130.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001234042141.xml",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_037.html",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860198717.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"126",
- "des":"Data Studio allows you to reuse an existing SQL Terminal connection or create a new SQL Terminal connection for execution plan and cost, visual explain plan, and operatio",
+ "code":"53",
+ "des":"In Data Studio, you can either use an existing connection or set up a new one in the SQL terminal to view the execution plan and cost, visualize the plan explanation, and",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Managing SQL Terminal Connections,SQL Terminal,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Managing Connections in the SQL Terminal,SQL Terminal Management,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
- "title":"Managing SQL Terminal Connections",
+ "title":"Managing Connections in the SQL Terminal",
"githuburl":""
},
{
- "uri":"DWS_DS_131.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001234042129.xml",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_038.html",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813598788.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"127",
- "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
+ "code":"54",
+ "des":"Ensure that the operating system and the required software (refer to System Requirements for more details) are updated with the latest patches to prevent vulnerabilities ",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Batch Operation",
+ "kw":"Security Management,Data Studio,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Batch Operation",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_132.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188521094.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"128",
- "des":"You can view accessible database objects in the navigation tree in Object Browser. Schema are displayed under databases, and tables are displayed under schemas.Object Bro",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Overview,Batch Operation,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Overview",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_133.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001234200613.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"129",
- "des":"The batch drop operation allows you select multiple objects to drop. You can also perform batch drop operation on searched objects.Batch drop is allowed only within a dat",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Dropping a Batch of Objects,Batch Operation,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Dropping a Batch of Objects",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_134.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188202544.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"130",
- "des":"The batch grant/revoke operation allows you select multiple objects to grant/revoke privileges. You can also perform batch grant/revoke operation on searched objects.This",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Granting/Revoking Privileges,Batch Operation,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Granting/Revoking Privileges",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_135.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188202634.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"131",
- "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Personalizing Data Studio",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Personalizing Data Studio",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_137.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001234042091.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"132",
- "des":"This section provides details on how to customize shortcut keys.You can customize the Data Studio shortcut keys as required.Follow the steps below to set or modify the sh",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"General,Personalizing Data Studio,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"General",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_138.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188521052.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"133",
- "des":"This section provides details on how to personalize syntax coloring, SQL history information, templates, and formatter.Follow the steps to customize the SQL highlight col",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Editor,Personalizing Data Studio,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Editor",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_139.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001234200631.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"134",
- "des":"Follow the steps to set Data Studio and file encoding:The Preferences dialog box is displayed.The Session Setting pane is displayed.Data Studio supports only UTF-8 and GB",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Environment,Personalizing Data Studio,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Environment",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_141.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188202558.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"135",
- "des":"This section provides details on how to personalize the column width, number of records to be fetched in the query results, and result copy of column header or row number",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Result Management,Personalizing Data Studio,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Result Management",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_142.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001234042179.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"136",
- "des":"This section provides details on how to personalize password and security disclaimer display.You can enable/disable to display the permanent option to save password in th",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Security,Personalizing Data Studio,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Security",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_144.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001234200679.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"137",
- "des":"The loading and operation performance of Data Studio depends on the number of objects to be loaded in Object Browser, including tables, views, and columns.Memory consumpt",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Performance Specifications,Data Studio,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Performance Specifications",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_146.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001233922177.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"138",
- "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Security Management",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Security Management",
"githuburl":""
},
{
- "uri":"DWS_DS_147.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001233800685.xml",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_039.html",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813439016.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"139",
- "des":"Ensure that the operating system and the required software's (refer to System Requirements for more details) are updated with the latest patches to prevent vulnerabilitie",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Overview,Security Management,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Overview",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_148.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188680974.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"140",
- "des":"The following information is critical to the security management for Data Studio:When you log into a database, Data Studio displays a pop-up with details of the last succ",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Login History,Security Management,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Login History",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_149.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001233922215.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"141",
- "des":"The following information is critical to manage security for Data Studio:Your password will expire within 7 days from the date of notification. If the password expires, c",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Password Expiry Notification,Security Management,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Password Expiry Notification",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_151.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001233800659.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"142",
- "des":"The following information is critical to manage security for Data Studio:While running Data Studio in a trusted environment, user must ensure to prevent malicious softwar",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Securing the Application In-Memory Data,Security Management,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Securing the Application In-Memory Data",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_152.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001233800743.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"143",
- "des":"The following information is critical to manage security for Data Studio:You can ensure encryption of auto saved data by enabling encryption option from Preferences page.",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Data Encryption for Saved Data,Security Management,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Data Encryption for Saved Data",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_153.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188521114.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"144",
- "des":"The following information is critical to manage security for Data Studio:SQL History scripts are not encrypted.The SQL History list does not display sensitive queries tha",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"SQL History,Security Management,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"SQL History",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_154.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001233800747.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"145",
- "des":"The information on using SSL certificates is for reference only. For details on the certificates and for security guidelines for managing the certificates and related fil",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"SSL Certificates,Security Management,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"SSL Certificates",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"DWS_DS_145.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188362524.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"146",
+ "code":"55",
"des":"Data Studio does not open.Solution: Check whether JRE is missing. Verify the Java path in the environment. For details about the supported Java JDK versions, see System R",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Troubleshooting,Data Studio,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Troubleshooting,Data Studio,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Troubleshooting",
"githuburl":""
},
{
- "uri":"DWS_DS_155.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188681066.xml",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_040.html",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813598528.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"147",
+ "code":"56",
"des":"What do I need to check if my connection fails?Answer: Check the following items:Check whether Connection Properties are properly configured.Check whether the server vers",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"FAQs,Data Studio,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"FAQs,Data Studio,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"FAQs",
@@ -2650,9 +1068,9 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_gds_index.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188521102.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813438908.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"148",
+ "code":"57",
"des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
"doc_type":"tg",
"kw":"GDS",
@@ -2660,7 +1078,8 @@
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"GDS",
@@ -2668,17 +1087,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_07_0759.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001503363660.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813598840.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"149",
+ "code":"58",
"des":"GaussDB(DWS) uses GDS to allocate the source data for parallel data import. Deploy GDS on the data server.If a large volume of data is stored on multiple data servers, in",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Installing, Configuring, and Starting GDS,GDS,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Installing, Configuring, and Starting GDS,GDS,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Installing, Configuring, and Starting GDS",
@@ -2686,17 +1106,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_07_0128.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001503523556.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860318873.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"150",
+ "code":"59",
"des":"Stop GDS after data is imported successfully.If GDS is started using the gds command, perform the following operations to stop GDS:Query the GDS process ID:ps -ef|grep gd",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Stopping GDS,GDS,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Stopping GDS,GDS,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Stopping GDS",
@@ -2704,17 +1125,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_07_0692.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188202652.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860318761.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"151",
+ "code":"60",
"des":"The data servers reside on the same intranet as the cluster. Their IP addresses are 192.168.0.90 and 192.168.0.91. Source data files are in CSV format.Create the target t",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Example of Importing Data Using GDS,GDS,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Example of Importing Data Using GDS,GDS,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Example of Importing Data Using GDS",
@@ -2722,17 +1144,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"gds_cmd_reference.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188202560.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813438748.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"152",
+ "code":"61",
"des":"gds is used to import and export data of GaussDB(DWS). For details, see \"Importing Data\" and \"Exporting Data\" in the Developer Guide.The -d and -H parameters are mandator",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"gds,GDS,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"gds,GDS,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"gds",
@@ -2740,17 +1163,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_07_0129.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001233922183.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813438732.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"153",
+ "code":"62",
"des":"gds_ctl.py can be used to start and stop gds if gds.conf has been configured.Run the following commands on Linux OS: You need to ensure that the directory structure is as",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"gds_ctl.py,GDS,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"gds_ctl.py,GDS,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"gds_ctl.py",
@@ -2758,17 +1182,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_07_0056.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188681008.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813439232.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"154",
+ "code":"63",
"des":"Handle errors that occurred during data import.Errors that occur when data is imported are divided into data format errors and non-data format errors.Data format errorWhe",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Handling Import Errors,GDS,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Handling Import Errors,GDS,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Handling Import Errors",
@@ -2776,9 +1201,9 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_mt_index.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772696040.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860318657.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"155",
+ "code":"64",
"des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
"doc_type":"tg",
"kw":"DSC",
@@ -2786,7 +1211,8 @@
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"DSC",
@@ -2794,17 +1220,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0001.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772536368.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813598652.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"156",
+ "code":"65",
"des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
"doc_type":"tg",
"kw":"About This Document",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"About This Document",
@@ -2812,17 +1239,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0002.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819416073.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813598576.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"157",
+ "code":"66",
"des":"This document is intended for the following DSC users:Database migration engineersDatabase administratorsTechnical support engineersDSC users need to have a basic knowled",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Intended Audience,About This Document,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Intended Audience,About This Document,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Intended Audience",
@@ -2830,17 +1258,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0003.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819336045.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860318473.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"158",
- "des":"This section describes the content, symbol, and command conventions of this document.The purchased products, services, and features are subject to the signed contract. Al",
+ "code":"67",
+ "des":"This section describes the content, symbol, and command conventions of this document.Symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows:Commands in this do",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Document Conventions,About This Document,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Document Conventions,About This Document,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Document Conventions",
@@ -2848,17 +1277,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0005.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772536372.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813439076.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"159",
+ "code":"68",
"des":"This section lists the applicable third-party licenses.ANTLR v4.9.3Apache Commons IO 2.11Apache Commons CLI 1.5Apache Log4j 2.17.2JSON.org json 20220320postgresql 42.4.1s",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Third-party Licenses,About This Document,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Third-party Licenses,About This Document,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Third-party Licenses",
@@ -2866,17 +1296,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0006.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819416077.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813438792.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"160",
+ "code":"69",
"des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
"doc_type":"tg",
"kw":"Introduction to DSC",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Introduction to DSC",
@@ -2884,17 +1315,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"mt_tool_index.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819336049.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860198581.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"161",
+ "code":"70",
"des":"After switching to GaussDB(DWS) databases, you may need to migrate user data and application SQL scripts to new databases. In particular,the migration of application SQL ",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Overview,Introduction to DSC,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Overview,Introduction to DSC,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Overview",
@@ -2902,17 +1334,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0008.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772696052.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860198637.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"162",
+ "code":"71",
"des":"The following table lists the source databases supported by DSC.The following table lists the destination databases supported by DSC.Table 3 lists the hardware requiremen",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Operating Environment,Introduction to DSC,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Operating Environment,Introduction to DSC,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Operating Environment",
@@ -2920,17 +1353,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0009.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772536376.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813439092.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"163",
+ "code":"72",
"des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
"doc_type":"tg",
"kw":"Using DSC",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Using DSC",
@@ -2938,17 +1372,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0010.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819416081.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860318557.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"164",
+ "code":"73",
"des":"This chapter describes how to use DSC, including how to install and configure DSC and how to use DSC to migrate data.Use the latest patches to update the operating system",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Overview,Using DSC,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Overview,Using DSC,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Overview",
@@ -2956,17 +1391,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0212.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819336053.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813438740.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"165",
+ "code":"74",
"des":"Before using DSC, install it on a Linux or Windows server. DSC supports 64-bit Linux OSs. For details about other OSs supported by DSC, see Table 4.In Linux, do not insta",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Downloading and Installing DSC,Using DSC,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Downloading and Installing DSC,Using DSC,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Downloading and Installing DSC",
@@ -2974,17 +1410,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0012.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772696056.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860318421.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"166",
+ "code":"75",
"des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
"doc_type":"tg",
"kw":"Configuring DSC",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Configuring DSC",
@@ -2992,17 +1429,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0013.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772536384.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860198709.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"167",
+ "code":"76",
"des":"Configure the following items:Setting application.properties: Configure the migration behavior of DSC, for example, whether to overwrite the files in the target folder an",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"DSC Configuration,Configuring DSC,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"DSC Configuration,Configuring DSC,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"DSC Configuration",
@@ -3010,17 +1448,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0014.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819416085.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813438796.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"168",
+ "code":"77",
"des":"Teradata parameters are used to customize rules for Teradata script migration.Open the features-teradata.properties file in the config folder and set the parameters in Ta",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Teradata SQL Configuration,Configuring DSC,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Teradata SQL Configuration,Configuring DSC,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Teradata SQL Configuration",
@@ -3028,17 +1467,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0015.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819336057.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813439212.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"169",
+ "code":"78",
"des":"Teradata Perl parameters are used to customize rules for Teradata Perl script migration.Open the perl-migration.properties file in the config folder and set parameters in",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Teradata Perl Configuration,Configuring DSC,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Teradata Perl Configuration,Configuring DSC,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Teradata Perl Configuration",
@@ -3046,35 +1486,56 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0016.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772696060.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860318481.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"170",
+ "code":"79",
"des":"MySQL parameters are used to customize rules for MySQL script migration.Open the features-mysql.properties file in the config folder and configure Parameters in the featu",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"MySQL Configuration,Configuring DSC,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"MySQL Configuration,Configuring DSC,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"MySQL Configuration",
"githuburl":""
},
{
- "uri":"dws_16_0213.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772536388.xml",
+ "uri":"dws_07_0186.html",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000002160142072.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"171",
- "des":"Oracle parameters are used to customize rules for Oracle script migration.Open the features-oracle.properties file in the config folder and set parameters in Table 1 as n",
+ "code":"80",
+ "des":"You can customize the behavior of the migration tool when migrating SQL Server database scripts by setting SQL Server configuration parameters.Open the features-mysql.pro",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Oracle SQL Configuration,Configuring DSC,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"SQL Server Configuration,Configuring DSC,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
+ }
+ ],
+ "title":"SQL Server Configuration",
+ "githuburl":""
+ },
+ {
+ "uri":"dws_16_0213.html",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813438716.xml",
+ "product_code":"dws",
+ "code":"81",
+ "des":"Oracle parameters are used to customize rules for Oracle script migration.Open the features-oracle.properties file in the config folder and set parameters in Table 1 as n",
+ "doc_type":"tg",
+ "kw":"Oracle SQL Configuration,Configuring DSC,Tools Guide",
+ "search_title":"",
+ "metedata":[
+ {
+ "prodname":"dws",
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Oracle SQL Configuration",
@@ -3082,17 +1543,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0214.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819416089.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813439152.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"172",
+ "code":"82",
"des":"Netezza parameters are used to customize rules for Netezza script migration.Open the features-netezza.properties file in the config folder and set parameters in Table 1 a",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Netezza Configuration,Configuring DSC,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Netezza Configuration,Configuring DSC,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Netezza Configuration",
@@ -3100,17 +1562,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0017.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819336065.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860198777.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"173",
+ "code":"83",
"des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
"doc_type":"tg",
"kw":"Migration Process",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Migration Process",
@@ -3118,17 +1581,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0018.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772696064.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860198829.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"174",
+ "code":"84",
"des":"Custom scripts are executed to support input keywords that do not exist in certain versions of the target database. These scripts must be executed in each target database",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Prerequisites,Migration Process,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Prerequisites,Migration Process,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Prerequisites",
@@ -3136,17 +1600,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0019.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772536392.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813439236.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"175",
+ "code":"85",
"des":"Before the migration, create an input folder and an output folder, and copy all the SQL scripts to be migrated to the input folder. The following procedure describes how ",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Preparations,Migration Process,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Preparations,Migration Process,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Preparations",
@@ -3154,17 +1619,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0020.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819416093.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813598740.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"176",
+ "code":"86",
"des":"Before starting DSC, specify the output folder path. Separate the input folder path, output folder path, and log path with spaces. The input folder path cannot contain sp",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Executing DSC,Migration Process,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Executing DSC,Migration Process,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Executing DSC",
@@ -3172,17 +1638,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0021.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819336069.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860318773.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"177",
+ "code":"87",
"des":"After the migration is complete, you can use a comparison tool (for example, BeyondCompare®) to compare the output file with its input file. Input SQL files can also be f",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Viewing Output Files and Logs,Migration Process,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Viewing Output Files and Logs,Migration Process,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Viewing Output Files and Logs",
@@ -3190,53 +1657,37 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0022.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772696072.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860318609.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"178",
+ "code":"88",
"des":"Migration related issues can be classified into:Tool execution issues: No output or incorrect output is displayed because DSC partially or fully failed to be executed. Fo",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Troubleshooting,Migration Process,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Troubleshooting,Migration Process,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Troubleshooting",
"githuburl":""
},
- {
- "uri":"dws_16_0023.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772536400.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"179",
- "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"CLI Reference",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
- }
- ],
- "title":"CLI Reference",
- "githuburl":""
- },
{
"uri":"dws_16_0024.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819416101.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813438760.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"180",
+ "code":"89",
"des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
"doc_type":"tg",
"kw":"Database Schema Conversion",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Database Schema Conversion",
@@ -3244,17 +1695,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0025.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819336077.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813438928.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"181",
+ "code":"90",
"des":"It is mandatory to specify the source database, input folder path, and output folder path, and optional to specify the migration type and log path.If a user does not spec",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Migration Parameters,Database Schema Conversion,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Migration Parameters,Database Schema Conversion,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Migration Parameters",
@@ -3262,17 +1714,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0026.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772696076.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860198977.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"182",
+ "code":"91",
"des":"DSC supports the migration from Teradata to GaussDB(DWS), including the migration of schemas, DML, queries, system functions, and type conversion.Run the following comman",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Teradata SQL Migration,Database Schema Conversion,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Teradata SQL Migration,Database Schema Conversion,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Teradata SQL Migration",
@@ -3280,17 +1733,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0027.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772536404.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860318449.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"183",
+ "code":"92",
"des":"This section describes how to migrate Teradata Perl files.Run the runDSC.shor runDSC.bat command and set --application-lang to perl to migrate Teradata BTEQ or SQL_LANG s",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Teradata Perl Migration,Database Schema Conversion,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Teradata Perl Migration,Database Schema Conversion,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Teradata Perl Migration",
@@ -3298,17 +1752,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0028.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819416105.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860198801.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"184",
+ "code":"93",
"des":"DSC supports the migration from MySQL to GaussDB(DWS), including the migration of schemas, DML, queries, system functions, and PL/SQL.Run the following command on Linux t",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"MySQL SQL Migration,Database Schema Conversion,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"MySQL SQL Migration,Database Schema Conversion,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"MySQL SQL Migration",
@@ -3316,17 +1771,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0215.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819336081.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860318909.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"185",
+ "code":"94",
"des":"DSC supports the migration from Oracle to GaussDB(DWS), including the migration of schemas, DML, queries, system functions, and PL/SQL.Run the following commands to set t",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Oracle SQL Migration,Database Schema Conversion,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Oracle SQL Migration,Database Schema Conversion,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Oracle SQL Migration",
@@ -3334,17 +1790,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0216.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772696084.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860318721.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"186",
+ "code":"95",
"des":"DSC supports the migration from Netezza to GaussDB(DWS), including the migration of schemas, DML, queries, system functions, and PL/SQL.Run the following commands to set ",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Netezza SQL Migration,Database Schema Conversion,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Netezza SQL Migration,Database Schema Conversion,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Netezza SQL Migration",
@@ -3352,17 +1809,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0029.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772536408.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860198701.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"187",
+ "code":"96",
"des":"After DSC converts the source sql files, execute the converted files on target GaussDB(DWS) and provide a report with details of number of statements succeeded and failed",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Verification,Database Schema Conversion,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Verification,Database Schema Conversion,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Verification",
@@ -3370,53 +1828,56 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0030.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819416113.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813438960.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"188",
+ "code":"97",
"des":"The version command is used to display the version number of the DSC.Linux:Windows:Linux:Windows:",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"VERSION,CLI Reference,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Version Command Migration,Using DSC,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
- "title":"VERSION",
+ "title":"Version Command Migration",
"githuburl":""
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0031.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819336085.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813599040.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"189",
+ "code":"98",
"des":"The help command is used to provide the help information for the commands supported by DSC.Linux:Windows:Linux:Windows:Linux:Windows:",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"HELP,CLI Reference,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Help Command Migration,Using DSC,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
- "title":"HELP",
+ "title":"Help Command Migration",
"githuburl":""
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0032.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772696088.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813598960.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"190",
+ "code":"99",
"des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
"doc_type":"tg",
"kw":"Log Reference",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Log Reference",
@@ -3424,17 +1885,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0217.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772536412.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813599016.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"191",
+ "code":"100",
"des":"The log files are the repository for all operations and status of the DSC. The following log files are available:SQL Migration LogsDSC.log: SQL Migration all activities.D",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Overview,Log Reference,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Overview,Log Reference,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Overview",
@@ -3442,17 +1904,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0033.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819416117.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813598760.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"192",
+ "code":"101",
"des":"The SQL DSC (DSC.jar) supports the following types of logging:Activity loggingError loggingsuccessReadsuccessWriteIf a user specifies a log path, then all the logs are sa",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"SQL Migration Logs,Log Reference,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"SQL Migration Logs,Log Reference,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"SQL Migration Logs",
@@ -3460,53 +1923,37 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0034.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819336089.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860318581.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"193",
+ "code":"102",
"des":"The DSC writes all log information to a single file, perlDSC.log.Since the DSC will execute the SQL to migrate the SQL scripts inside Perl files, the following SQL migrat",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Perl Migration Logs,Log Reference,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Perl Migration Logs,Log Reference,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Perl Migration Logs",
"githuburl":""
},
- {
- "uri":"dws_16_0035.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772696092.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"194",
- "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"SQL Syntax Migration Reference",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
- }
- ],
- "title":"SQL Syntax Migration Reference",
- "githuburl":""
- },
{
"uri":"dws_16_0036.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772536416.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813598900.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"195",
+ "code":"103",
"des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
"doc_type":"tg",
"kw":"Teradata Syntax Migration",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Teradata Syntax Migration",
@@ -3514,17 +1961,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0038.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819416121.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860198849.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"196",
+ "code":"104",
"des":"Table 1 lists the Teradata keywords and features that can be migrated.The Version column contains the earliest versions that support the keywords or features.The Remarks ",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Supported Keywords and Features,Teradata Syntax Migration,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Supported Keywords and Features,Teradata Syntax Migration,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Supported Keywords and Features",
@@ -3532,17 +1980,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0039.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819336093.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860198689.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"197",
+ "code":"105",
"des":"The restrictions on using DSC to migrate data from TD are as follows:DSC is used only for syntax migration and not for data migration.If the SELECT clause of a subquery c",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Constraints and Limitations,Teradata Syntax Migration,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Constraints and Limitations,Teradata Syntax Migration,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Constraints and Limitations",
@@ -3550,17 +1999,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0040.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772696096.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813438968.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"198",
+ "code":"106",
"des":"InputOutput",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Data Type,Teradata Syntax Migration,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Data Type,Teradata Syntax Migration,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Data Type",
@@ -3568,17 +2018,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0041.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772536420.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813439248.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"199",
+ "code":"107",
"des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
"doc_type":"tg",
"kw":"Functions and Operators",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Functions and Operators",
@@ -3586,17 +2037,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0043.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819416125.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860199061.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"200",
+ "code":"108",
"des":"Analytical functions are collectively called ordered analytical functions in Teradata, and they provide powerful analytical abilities for data mining, analysis and busine",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Analytical Functions,Functions and Operators,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Analytical Functions,Functions and Operators,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Analytical Functions",
@@ -3604,17 +2056,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0044.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819336097.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860198681.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"201",
- "des":"Input: **OutputInput: MODOutputUse the tdMigrateNULLIFZERO configuration parameter to configure migration of NULLIFZERO.Input: NULLIFZEROSELECT NULLIFZERO(expr1) FROM tab",
+ "code":"109",
+ "des":"Input: **Output:Input: MODOutput:Use the tdMigrateNULLIFZERO configuration parameter to configure migration of NULLIFZERO.Input: NULLIFZEROSELECT NULLIFZERO(expr1) FROM t",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Math Functions,Functions and Operators,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Math Functions,Functions and Operators,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Math Functions",
@@ -3622,17 +2075,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0045.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772696100.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860318637.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"202",
- "des":"Input: CHAROutputInput: CHARACTERSOutputInput: INDEXOutputInput: STRREPLACESELECT STRREPLACE(c2, '.', '')\n FROM tab1\n WHERE ...;OutputInput: OREPLACESELECT OREPLACE (c2,",
+ "code":"110",
+ "des":"Input: CHAROutput:Input: CHARACTERSOutput:Input: INDEXOutput:Input: STRREPLACESELECT STRREPLACE(c2, '.', '')\n FROM tab1\n WHERE ...;Output:Input: OREPLACESELECT OREPLACE ",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"String Functions,Functions and Operators,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"String Functions,Functions and Operators,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"String Functions",
@@ -3640,17 +2094,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0046.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772536424.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813598892.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"203",
- "des":"Migration tools support the migration of Teradata DATE FORMAT in SELECT statements, using TO_CHAR to display the date in the source format. This conversion is not done if",
+ "code":"111",
+ "des":"DSC supports the migration of Teradata SELECT statements that contain DATE FORMAT, using TO_CHAR to display the date in the source format. This conversion is not done if ",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Date and Time Functions,Functions and Operators,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Date and Time Functions,Functions and Operators,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Date and Time Functions",
@@ -3658,17 +2113,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0047.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819416129.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860318805.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"204",
- "des":"The comparison operators LT, LE, GT, GE, EQ, and NE must not be used as TABLE alias or COLUMN alias.The following comparison and list operators are supported:Input: Compa",
+ "code":"112",
+ "des":"The following comparison and list operators are supported:The comparison operators LT, LE, GT, GE, EQ, and NE must not be used as TABLE alias or COLUMN alias.Input: Compa",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Comparison and List Operators,Functions and Operators,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Comparison and List Operators,Functions and Operators,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Comparison and List Operators",
@@ -3676,53 +2132,56 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0048.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819336101.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813439172.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"205",
+ "code":"113",
"des":"The functions that can be called in the FROM clause of a query are from the table operator.Input: Table operator with RETURNSSELECT * \n FROM TABLE( sales_retrieve (9005)",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Table Operators,Functions and Operators,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Table Operators,Functions and Operators,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Table Operators",
"githuburl":""
},
{
- "uri":"dws_16_0049.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772696104.xml",
+ "uri":"dws_16_0056.html",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813598972.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"206",
- "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
+ "code":"114",
+ "des":"This section describes the syntax for migrating Teradata query optimization operators. The migration syntax determines how the keywords and features are migrated.Use the ",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Query Migration Operators",
+ "kw":"Query Optimization Operators,Functions and Operators,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
- "title":"Query Migration Operators",
+ "title":"Query Optimization Operators",
"githuburl":""
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0051.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772536428.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860318953.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"207",
+ "code":"115",
"des":"In general, the QUALIFY clause is accompanied by analytic functions (window functions) such as CSUM(), MDIFF(), ROW_NUMBER() and RANK(). This is addressed using sub-query",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"QUALIFY,Query Migration Operators,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"QUALIFY,Functions and Operators,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"QUALIFY",
@@ -3730,17 +2189,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0052.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819416133.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860318749.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"208",
+ "code":"116",
"des":"ALIAS is supported by all databases. In Teradata, an ALIAS can be referred in SELECT and WHERE clauses of the same statement where the alias is defined. Since ALIAS is no",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"ALIAS,Query Migration Operators,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"ALIAS,Functions and Operators,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"ALIAS",
@@ -3748,17 +2208,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0053.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819336105.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860318893.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"209",
+ "code":"117",
"des":"In Teradata, the FORMAT keyword is used for formatting a column/expression. For example, FORMAT '9(n)' and 'z(n)' are addressed using LPAD with 0 and space (' ') respecti",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"FORMAT and CAST,Query Migration Operators,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"FORMAT and CAST,Functions and Operators,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"FORMAT and CAST",
@@ -3766,17 +2227,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0054.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772696108.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860198793.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"210",
- "des":"Table 1 lists the abbreviation keywords supported by Teradata and the corresponding syntax in GaussDB A and GaussDB(DWS).Input - BTOutput",
+ "code":"118",
+ "des":"Table 1 lists the short keys supported by Teradata and their equivalent syntax in GaussDB(DWS).Input - BTOutput:",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Short Keys Migration,Query Migration Operators,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Short Keys Migration,Functions and Operators,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Short Keys Migration",
@@ -3784,71 +2246,37 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0055.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772536432.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813439124.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"211",
+ "code":"119",
"des":"This section describes the migration of object names starting with $.The migration behavior for object names starting with $ is explained in the following table. Use the ",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Object Names Starting with $,Query Migration Operators,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Migration of Object Names Starting with $,Functions and Operators,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
- "title":"Object Names Starting with $",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"dws_16_0056.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819416137.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"212",
- "des":"This section describes the syntax for migrating Teradata query optimization operators. The migration syntax determines how the keywords and features are migrated.Use the ",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Query Optimization Operators,Functions and Operators,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Query Optimization Operators",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"dws_16_0059.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819336109.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"213",
- "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Schema Objects and Data Definition Language (DDL)",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Schema Objects and Data Definition Language (DDL)",
+ "title":"Migration of Object Names Starting with $",
"githuburl":""
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0061.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772696112.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813598512.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"214",
+ "code":"120",
"des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
"doc_type":"tg",
"kw":"Migrating Tables",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Migrating Tables",
@@ -3856,17 +2284,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0063.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772536436.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813439116.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"215",
- "des":"The Teradata CREATE TABLE (short key CT) statements are used to create new tables.Example:Input: CREATE TABLEOutputWhen CREATE tab2 AS tab1 is executed, the structure cop",
+ "code":"121",
+ "des":"The Teradata CREATE TABLE (short key CT) statements are used to create new tables.Example:Input: CREATE TABLEOutput:When CREATE tab2 AS tab1 is executed, the structure co",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"CREATE TABLE,Migrating Tables,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"CREATE TABLE,Migrating Tables,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"CREATE TABLE",
@@ -3874,17 +2303,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0064.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819416141.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860318937.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"216",
+ "code":"122",
"des":"CHARACTER SET is used to specify the server character set for a character column. CASESPECIFIC specifies the case for character data comparisons and collations.Use the td",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"CHARACTER SET and CASESPECIFIC,Migrating Tables,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"CHARACTER SET and CASESPECIFIC,Migrating Tables,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"CHARACTER SET and CASESPECIFIC",
@@ -3892,17 +2322,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0065.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819336113.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860199029.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"217",
+ "code":"123",
"des":"The table-specific keyword VOLATILE is provided in the input file, but the keyword is not supported by GaussDB(DWS). The tool replaces it with the LOCAL TEMPORARYkeyword ",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"VOLATILE,Migrating Tables,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"VOLATILE,Migrating Tables,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"VOLATILE",
@@ -3910,17 +2341,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0066.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772696116.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860199041.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"218",
+ "code":"124",
"des":"SET is a unique feature in Teradata. It does not allow duplicate records. It is addressed using the MINUSset operator. Migration tool supports MULTISET and SET tables. SE",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"SET,Migrating Tables,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"SET,Migrating Tables,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"SET",
@@ -3928,17 +2360,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0067.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772536440.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860318713.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"219",
+ "code":"125",
"des":"MULTISETis a normal table, which is supported by all the DBs. Migration tool supports MULTISET and SET tables.MULTISET table can be used with VOLATILE.Input: CREATE MULTI",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"MULTISET,Migrating Tables,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"MULTISET,Migrating Tables,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"MULTISET",
@@ -3946,17 +2379,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0068.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819416145.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860198845.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"220",
+ "code":"126",
"des":"The keyword TITLE is supported for Teradata Permanent, Global Temporary and Volatile tables. In the migration process, the TITLE text is migrated as a comment.If the TITL",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"TITLE,Migrating Tables,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"TITLE,Migrating Tables,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"TITLE",
@@ -3964,17 +2398,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0069.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819336117.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813598696.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"221",
+ "code":"127",
"des":"The CREATE TABLE statement supports creation of an index. Migration tool supports the TABLE statement with PRIMARY INDEX and UNIQUE INDEX.The tool will not add DISTRIBUTE",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Indexes,Migrating Tables,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Indexes,Migrating Tables,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Indexes",
@@ -3982,17 +2417,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0070.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772696120.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860318621.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"222",
- "des":"A table CONSTRAINT is applied to multiple columns. Migration tool supports the following constraints:CHECK constraint: supported by GaussDB T, GaussDB A, and GaussDB(DWS)",
+ "code":"128",
+ "des":"A table CONSTRAINT is applied to multiple columns. Migration tool supports the following constraints:REFERENCES constraint / FOREIGN KEY: migration currently NOT supporte",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"CONSTRAINT,Migrating Tables,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"CONSTRAINT,Migrating Tables,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"CONSTRAINT",
@@ -4000,17 +2436,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0071.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772536444.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860318785.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"223",
+ "code":"129",
"des":"The table orientation can be converted from ROW-STORE to COLUMN store using the WITH (ORIENTATION=COLUMN) in the CREATE TABLE statement. This feature can be enabled/disab",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"COLUMN STORE,Migrating Tables,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"COLUMN STORE,Migrating Tables,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"COLUMN STORE",
@@ -4018,17 +2455,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0072.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819416149.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860198773.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"224",
+ "code":"130",
"des":"The tool does not support migration of partitions/subpartitions and the partition/subpartition keywords are commented in the migrated scripts:Range partition/subpartition",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"PARTITION,Migrating Tables,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"PARTITION,Migrating Tables,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"PARTITION",
@@ -4036,17 +2474,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0073.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819336121.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860318745.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"225",
- "des":"Input - CREATE TABLE with INDEXOutput",
+ "code":"131",
+ "des":"The ANALYZE statement of Teradata is used to migrate tables.Input: CREATE TABLE with INDEXOutput:",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"ANALYZE,Migrating Tables,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"ANALYZE,Migrating Tables,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"ANALYZE",
@@ -4054,17 +2493,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0074.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772696124.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813598856.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"226",
+ "code":"132",
"des":"Migration tool supports queries that specify number of columns (not all columns specified) during INSERT. This can happen when the input INSERT statement does not contain",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Support for Specified Columns,Migrating Tables,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Support for Specified Columns,Migrating Tables,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Support for Specified Columns",
@@ -4072,17 +2512,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0075.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772536448.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813598564.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"227",
- "des":"The sequence of columns and table names in CREATE INDEX in Teradata is different from that in GaussDB T, GaussDB A, and GaussDB(DWS). Use the configuration parameter dist",
+ "code":"133",
+ "des":"The sequence of CREATE INDEX columns and table names in Teradata is different from that in GaussDB(DWS). Use the configuration parameter distributeByHash to configure how",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Migrating Indexes,Schema Objects and Data Definition Language (DDL),Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Migrating Indexes,Teradata Syntax Migration,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Migrating Indexes",
@@ -4090,17 +2531,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0076.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819416153.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860198893.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"228",
- "des":"CREATE VIEW (short key CV) is used together with SELECT to create a view.Teradata, GaussDB T, GaussDB A, and GaussDB(DWS) all support the keyword VIEW. It is enclosed by ",
+ "code":"134",
+ "des":"CREATE VIEW (short key CV) is used together with SELECT to create a view.The keyword VIEW is supported by both Teradata and GaussDB(DWS), but the SELECT statements are en",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Migrating Views,Schema Objects and Data Definition Language (DDL),Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Migrating Views,Teradata Syntax Migration,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Migrating Views",
@@ -4108,17 +2550,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0077.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819336125.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860198781.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"229",
- "des":"COLLECT STAT is used in Teradata for collecting optimizer statistics, which will be used for query performance. GaussDB T, GaussDB A, and GaussDB(DWS) use the ANALYZE sta",
+ "code":"135",
+ "des":"COLLECT STAT is used in Teradata for collecting optimizer statistics, which will be used for query performance. GaussDB(DWS) uses the ANALYZE statement to replace COLLECT",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"COLLECT STATISTICS,Schema Objects and Data Definition Language (DDL),Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"COLLECT STATISTICS,Teradata Syntax Migration,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"COLLECT STATISTICS",
@@ -4126,17 +2569,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0078.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772696128.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860318493.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"230",
+ "code":"136",
"des":"ACCESS LOCK allows you to read the data from a table that may have been locked for the READ or WRITE.Use the tdMigrateLOCKoption configuration parameter to configure migr",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"ACCESS LOCK,Schema Objects and Data Definition Language (DDL),Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"ACCESS LOCK,Teradata Syntax Migration,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"ACCESS LOCK",
@@ -4144,17 +2588,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0079.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772536452.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813439028.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"231",
+ "code":"137",
"des":"DBC.COLUMNSview is a table containing information about table and view columns, stored procedures, or macro parameters. The view includes the following column names: Data",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"DBC.COLUMNS,Schema Objects and Data Definition Language (DDL),Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"DBC.COLUMNS,Teradata Syntax Migration,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"DBC.COLUMNS",
@@ -4162,17 +2607,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0080.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819416157.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813598720.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"232",
- "des":"The DSC migrates dbc.tables to their corresponding mig_td_ext.vw_td_dbc_tables.Example: databasename is migrated as mig_td_ext.vw_td_dbc_tables.schemaname.InputOutput",
+ "code":"138",
+ "des":"The DSC migrates dbc.tables to their corresponding mig_td_ext.vw_td_dbc_tables.Example: databasename is migrated as mig_td_ext.vw_td_dbc_tables.schemaname.Input:Output:",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"DBC.TABLES,Schema Objects and Data Definition Language (DDL),Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"DBC.TABLES,Teradata Syntax Migration,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"DBC.TABLES",
@@ -4180,17 +2626,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0081.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819336129.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860199085.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"233",
- "des":"DSC migrates dbc.indices to the corresponding mig_td_ext.vw_td_dbc_indices.Example: databasename is migrated as mig_td_ext.vw_td_dbc_tables.schemaname.InputOutputIn dbc.i",
+ "code":"139",
+ "des":"DSC migrates dbc.indices to the corresponding mig_td_ext.vw_td_dbc_indices.Example: databasename is migrated as mig_td_ext.vw_td_dbc_tables.schemaname.Input:Output:In dbc",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"DBC.INDICES,Schema Objects and Data Definition Language (DDL),Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"DBC.INDICES,Teradata Syntax Migration,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"DBC.INDICES",
@@ -4198,17 +2645,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0082.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772696132.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813598556.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"234",
+ "code":"140",
"des":"This command displays the COLLECT STATISTICS statement with statistics. Gauss does not have an equivalent for this. Since it does not affect the functionality, this comma",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"SHOW STATS VALUES SEQUENCED,Schema Objects and Data Definition Language (DDL),Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"SHOW STATS VALUES SEQUENCED,Teradata Syntax Migration,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"SHOW STATS VALUES SEQUENCED",
@@ -4216,17 +2664,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0083.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772536456.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860198609.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"235",
- "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
+ "code":"141",
+ "des":"The figure below illustrates the process of simplifying COMMENT statements. A complex statement is entered and then simplified through migration.Input:Output:",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"COMMENT,Schema Objects and Data Definition Language (DDL),Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"COMMENT,Teradata Syntax Migration,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"COMMENT",
@@ -4234,17 +2683,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0084.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819416161.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860198881.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"236",
+ "code":"142",
"des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
"doc_type":"tg",
"kw":"Data Manipulation Language (DML)",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Data Manipulation Language (DML)",
@@ -4252,17 +2702,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0086.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819336133.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813598824.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"237",
+ "code":"143",
"des":"The Teradata INSERT (short key INS) statement is used to insert records into a table. DSC supports the INSERT statement.The INSERT INTO TABLE table_name syntax is used in",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"INSERT,Data Manipulation Language (DML),Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"INSERT,Data Manipulation Language (DML),Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"INSERT",
@@ -4270,125 +2721,37 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0087.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772696136.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860198961.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"238",
- "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
+ "code":"144",
+ "des":"The Teradata SELECT command (short key SEL) is used to specify the table columns from which data is to be retrieved.ANALYZE is used in GaussDB(DWS) for collecting optimiz",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"SELECT",
+ "kw":"SELECT,Data Manipulation Language (DML),Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"SELECT",
"githuburl":""
},
- {
- "uri":"dws_16_0088.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772536460.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"239",
- "des":"The Teradata SELECT command (short key SEL) is used to specify the table columns from which data is to be retrieved.ANALYZE is used in GaussDB(DWS) for collecting optimiz",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"ANALYZE,SELECT,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
- }
- ],
- "title":"ANALYZE",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"dws_16_0089.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819416169.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"240",
- "des":"For Teradata migration of SELECTstatements, all the clauses (FROM, WHERE, HAVING and GROUP BY) can be listed in any order. The tool will not migrate the statement if it c",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Order of Clauses,SELECT,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Order of Clauses",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"dws_16_0090.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819336145.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"241",
- "des":"The GROUP BY clause can be specified if you want the database to group the selected rows based on the value of expr(s). If this clause contains CUBE, ROLLUPor GROUPING SE",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Extended Group By Clause,SELECT,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Extended Group By Clause",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"dws_16_0091.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772696140.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"242",
- "des":"GaussDB(DWS) variable names are case insensitive, and TD variable names are case sensitive. To ensure that the TD script is correct before and after the migration, retain",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"SELECT AS,SELECT,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
- }
- ],
- "title":"SELECT AS",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"dws_16_0092.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772536464.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"243",
- "des":"The TOP and SAMPLE clauses of Teradata are migrated to LIMIT in GaussDB(DWS).The DSC also supports migration of TOPstatements with dynamic parameters.For TOPclauses conta",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"TOP and SAMPLE,SELECT,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
- }
- ],
- "title":"TOP and SAMPLE",
- "githuburl":""
- },
{
"uri":"dws_16_0093.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819416173.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860199049.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"244",
- "des":"The tool supports and migrates the UPDATE(short key UPD) statements.Input: UPDATE with TABLE ALIASOutputInput: UPDATE with TABLE ALIASusing a sub queryOutputInput: UPDATE",
+ "code":"145",
+ "des":"DSC supports migration of the UPDATE(short keyUPD) statements.Input: UPDATE with TABLE ALIASOutputInput: UPDATE with TABLE ALIASusing a sub queryOutputInput: UPDATE with ",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"UPDATE,Data Manipulation Language (DML),Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"UPDATE,Data Manipulation Language (DML),Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"UPDATE",
@@ -4396,17 +2759,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0094.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819336149.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860198905.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"245",
+ "code":"146",
"des":"DELETE (short key abbreviated as DEL) is an ANSI-compliant SQL syntax operator used to delete existing records from a table. DSC supports the Teradata DELETE statement an",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"DELETE,Data Manipulation Language (DML),Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"DELETE,Data Manipulation Language (DML),Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"DELETE",
@@ -4414,17 +2778,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0095.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772696144.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813598944.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"246",
- "des":"Gauss database in 6.5.0 or later versions support the MERGE function.MERGEis an ANSI-standard SQL syntax operator used to select rows from one or more sources for updatin",
+ "code":"147",
+ "des":"MERGEis an ANSI-standard SQL syntax operator used to select rows from one or more sources for updating or inserting into a table or view. The conditions to update or inse",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"MERGE,Data Manipulation Language (DML),Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"MERGE,Data Manipulation Language (DML),Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"MERGE",
@@ -4432,17 +2797,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0096.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772536468.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860198785.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"247",
- "des":"NAMED is used in Teradata to assign a temporary name to an expression or column. NAMED statements used for expressions are migrated to AS in GaussDB T, GaussDB A, and Gau",
+ "code":"148",
+ "des":"NAMED is used in Teradata to assign a temporary name to an expression or column. The NAMED statements for expression names are migrated to AS in GaussDB(DWS). The NAMED s",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"NAMED,Data Manipulation Language (DML),Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"NAMED,Data Manipulation Language (DML),Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"NAMED",
@@ -4450,17 +2816,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0097.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819416181.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813598736.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"248",
+ "code":"149",
"des":"ACTIVITYCOUNTInputIt is a status variable that returns the number of rows affected by an SQL DML statement in an embedded SQL.Output",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"ACTIVITYCOUNT,Data Manipulation Language (DML),Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"ACTIVITYCOUNT,Data Manipulation Language (DML),Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"ACTIVITYCOUNT",
@@ -4468,17 +2835,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0098.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819336153.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813598680.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"249",
+ "code":"150",
"des":"Input - TIMESTAMP with FORMATThe FORMAT phrase sets the format for a specific TIME or TIMESTAMP column or value. A FORMAT phrase overrides the system format.OutputInputOu",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"TIMESTAMP,Data Manipulation Language (DML),Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"TIMESTAMP,Data Manipulation Language (DML),Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"TIMESTAMP",
@@ -4486,17 +2854,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0099.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772696148.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860318709.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"250",
+ "code":"151",
"des":"This section contains the migration syntax for migrating Teradata type casting and formatting syntax. The migration syntax determines how the keywords and features are mi",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Type Casting and Formatting,Teradata Syntax Migration,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Type Casting and Formatting,Teradata Syntax Migration,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Type Casting and Formatting",
@@ -4504,17 +2873,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0100.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772536472.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813598536.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"251",
+ "code":"152",
"des":"GaussDB(DWS) provides gsql meta-commands that can be used to replace common BTEQ tool commands. The mostly used replacements are as follows:The meta-command \\q [value] ca",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"BTEQ Utility Command,Teradata Syntax Migration,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"BTEQ Utility Command,Teradata Syntax Migration,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"BTEQ Utility Command",
@@ -4522,17 +2892,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0101.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819416185.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813598692.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"252",
+ "code":"153",
"des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Teradata Formats,Teradata Syntax Migration,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Teradata Formats,Teradata Syntax Migration,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Teradata Formats",
@@ -4540,17 +2911,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0102.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819336157.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813598784.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"253",
- "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
+ "code":"154",
+ "des":"DSC migrates the system views dbc.columnsV and dbc.IndicesV, and the resulting output is displayed below.Input:Output:",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"System Views,Teradata Syntax Migration,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"System Views,Teradata Syntax Migration,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"System Views",
@@ -4558,17 +2930,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0103.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772696152.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860198873.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"254",
+ "code":"155",
"des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
"doc_type":"tg",
"kw":"MySQL Syntax Migrating",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"MySQL Syntax Migrating",
@@ -4576,17 +2949,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0105.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772536476.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813598896.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"255",
+ "code":"156",
"des":"Table 1 lists the MySQL keywords and features that can be migrated.The Version column contains the earliest versions that support the keywords or features.The Remarks col",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Supported Keywords and Features,MySQL Syntax Migrating,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Supported Keywords and Features,MySQL Syntax Migrating,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Supported Keywords and Features",
@@ -4594,17 +2968,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0106.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819416189.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813598772.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"256",
+ "code":"157",
"des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
"doc_type":"tg",
"kw":"Data Types",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Data Types",
@@ -4612,17 +2987,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0108.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819336161.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813438780.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"257",
+ "code":"158",
"des":"A data type is a basic data attribute. Occupied storage space and allowed operations vary according to data types. In a database, data is stored in tables, in which a dat",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Numeric Types,Data Types,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Numeric Types,Data Types,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Numeric Types",
@@ -4630,17 +3006,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0109.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772696156.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813439228.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"258",
+ "code":"159",
"des":"This section describes the following date and time types: DATETIME, TIME, TIMESTAMP, and YEAR. GaussDB(DWS) does not support these types, and DSC will convert them.The va",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Date/Time Types,Data Types,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Date/Time Types,Data Types,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Date/Time Types",
@@ -4648,17 +3025,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0110.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772536480.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813439036.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"259",
+ "code":"160",
"des":"MySQL interprets length specifications in character column definitions in character units. This applies to the CHAR, VARCHAR, and TEXT types. DSC supports the following t",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"String Types,Data Types,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"String Types,Data Types,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"String Types",
@@ -4666,17 +3044,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0111.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819416193.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813598864.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"260",
+ "code":"161",
"des":"MySQL has spatial data types corresponding to the OpenGIS class. DSC supports the following type conversions:GEOMETRY can store geometry values of any type. The other sin",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Spatial Data Types,Data Types,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Spatial Data Types,Data Types,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Spatial Data Types",
@@ -4684,17 +3063,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0112.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819336165.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860198993.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"261",
+ "code":"162",
"des":"A BLOB is a binary large object that can hold a variable amount of data. The four BLOB types are TINYBLOB, BLOB, MEDIUMBLOB, and LONGBLOB. The only difference between the",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"LOB Types,Data Types,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"LOB Types,Data Types,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"LOB Types",
@@ -4702,17 +3082,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0113.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772696160.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813598588.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"262",
+ "code":"163",
"des":"In MySQL, an ENUM is a string object with a value chosen from a list of permitted values that are enumerated explicitly in the column specification at table creation.A SE",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Set Types,Data Types,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Set Types,Data Types,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Set Types",
@@ -4720,17 +3101,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0114.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772536484.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860198945.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"263",
+ "code":"164",
"des":"MySQL supports both BOOL and BOOLEAN. DSC supports the following type conversions:Input: BOOL/BOOLEANOutput",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Boolean,Data Types,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Boolean,Data Types,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Boolean",
@@ -4738,17 +3120,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0115.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819416197.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860318453.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"264",
- "des":"In MySQL, the BIT data type is used to store bit values. A type of BIT(M) enables storage of M-bit values. M can range from 1 to 64.MySQL BINARY and VARBINARY types are s",
+ "code":"165",
+ "des":"In MySQL, the BIT data type is used to store bit values, ranging from 1 to 64.MySQL BINARY and VARBINARY types are similar to CHAR and VARCHAR, except that they contain b",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Binary Types,Data Types,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Binary Types,Data Types,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Binary Types",
@@ -4756,17 +3139,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0116.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819336169.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813439240.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"265",
+ "code":"166",
"des":"The JSON data type can be used to store JavaScript Object Notation (JSON) data. DSC supports the following type conversions:Input Example (JSON)Output",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"JSON Types,Data Types,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"JSON Types,Data Types,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"JSON Types",
@@ -4774,53 +3158,37 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0117.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772696164.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860198665.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"266",
+ "code":"167",
"des":"The functions and expressions in MySQL do not exist in GaussDB(DWS) or are different from those in GaussDB(DWS). DSC migrates the functions and expressions based on the s",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Functions and Expressions,MySQL Syntax Migrating,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Functions and Expressions,MySQL Syntax Migrating,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Functions and Expressions",
"githuburl":""
},
- {
- "uri":"dws_16_0118.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772536488.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"267",
- "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Schema Objects and Data Definition Language (DDL)",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Schema Objects and Data Definition Language (DDL)",
- "githuburl":""
- },
{
"uri":"dws_16_0119.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819416201.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860198949.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"268",
+ "code":"168",
"des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
"doc_type":"tg",
"kw":"Table (Optional Parameters and Operations)",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Table (Optional Parameters and Operations)",
@@ -4828,17 +3196,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0120.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819336173.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860198985.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"269",
- "des":"MySQL 8.0.29 has extended the support for ALTER TABLE... ALGORITHM=INSTANT: Users can add columns instantly and delete columns instantly anywhere in a table, and evaluate",
+ "code":"169",
+ "des":"MySQL has extended the support for ALTER TABLE... ALGORITHM=INSTANT: Users can add columns instantly and delete columns instantly anywhere in a table, and evaluate row si",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"ALGORITHM,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"ALGORITHM,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"ALGORITHM",
@@ -4846,17 +3215,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0121.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772696168.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813598732.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"270",
- "des":"In GaussDB(DWS), the rename clause cannot contain the schema name. The DSC tool supports only the rename operation in the same schema. After the rename operation, the sch",
+ "code":"170",
+ "des":"GaussDB(DWS) prohibits including schema names in the rename clause, therefore, DSC supports renaming solely within the same schema. Renaming within the same schema omits ",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"ALTER TABLE RENAME,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"ALTER TABLE RENAME,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"ALTER TABLE RENAME",
@@ -4864,17 +3234,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0122.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772536492.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813439100.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"271",
+ "code":"171",
"des":"In database application, unique numbers that increase automatically are needed to identify records. In MySQL, the AUTO_INCREMENT attribute of a data column can be used to",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"AUTO_INCREMENT,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"AUTO_INCREMENT,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"AUTO_INCREMENT",
@@ -4882,17 +3253,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0123.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819416205.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813438948.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"272",
+ "code":"172",
"des":"In MySQL, AVG_ROW_LENGTH indicates the average length of each row. This is not supported by GaussDB(DWS) and is deleted by DSC during the migration.InputOutput",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"AVG_ROW_LENGTH,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"AVG_ROW_LENGTH,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"AVG_ROW_LENGTH",
@@ -4900,17 +3272,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0124.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819336177.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813599020.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"273",
+ "code":"173",
"des":"In ADB, this parameter specifies the number of values stored in each block in columnar storage, which is also the minimum I/O unit. GaussDB(DWS does not support table def",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"BLOCK_SIZE,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"BLOCK_SIZE,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"BLOCK_SIZE",
@@ -4918,17 +3291,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0125.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772696172.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813439112.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"274",
+ "code":"174",
"des":"CHARSET specifies the default character set for a table. GaussDB(DWS) does not support table definition modification using this attribute. DSC will delete the keyword dur",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"CHARSET,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"CHARSET,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"CHARSET",
@@ -4936,17 +3310,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0126.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772536496.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813438824.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"275",
+ "code":"175",
"des":"In MySQL, CHECKSUM maintains a live checksum for all rows. GaussDB(DWS) does not support table definition modification using this attribute. DSC will delete the keyword d",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"CHECKSUM,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"CHECKSUM,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"CHECKSUM",
@@ -4954,17 +3329,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0127.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819416209.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813439000.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"276",
+ "code":"176",
"des":"It is a clustered index in ADB that defines the sorting sequence in a table. The logical sequence of key values in a clustered index determines the physical sequence of r",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"CLUSTERED KEY,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"CLUSTERED KEY,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"CLUSTERED KEY",
@@ -4972,17 +3348,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0128.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819336181.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860318605.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"277",
+ "code":"177",
"des":"In MySQL, COLLATE specifies a default database sorting rule. GaussDB(DWS) does not support table definition modification using this attribute. DSC will delete the keyword",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"COLLATE,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"COLLATE,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"COLLATE",
@@ -4990,17 +3367,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0129.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772696176.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813598904.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"278",
+ "code":"178",
"des":"In MySQL, COMMENT is a comment for a table. In GaussDB(DWS), this attribute can be used to modify table definition. During migration using DSC, additional table attribute",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"COMMENT,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"COMMENT,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"COMMENT",
@@ -5008,17 +3386,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0130.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772536500.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813438980.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"279",
+ "code":"179",
"des":"GaussDB(DWS) does not support table definition modification using this attribute. DSC will delete the attribute during migration.In MySQL, the keyword CONNECTION is used ",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"CONNECTION,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"CONNECTION,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"CONNECTION",
@@ -5026,17 +3405,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0131.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819416213.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860318469.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"280",
+ "code":"180",
"des":"In MySQL, when using ALTER TABLE to add a column with the not null constraint, if no value is specified, a default value is inserted. However, an error will be reported a",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"DEFAULT,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"DEFAULT,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"DEFAULT",
@@ -5044,17 +3424,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0132.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819336185.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860318729.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"281",
+ "code":"181",
"des":"DELAY_KEY_WRITE is valid only for MyISAM tables. It is used to delay updates until the table is closed. GaussDB(DWS) does not support table definition modification using ",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"DELAY_KEY_WRITE,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"DELAY_KEY_WRITE,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"DELAY_KEY_WRITE",
@@ -5062,17 +3443,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0133.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772696180.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860199077.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"282",
+ "code":"182",
"des":"ADB supports distribution keys. During DSC migration, the corresponding distribution keys are retained.InputOutput",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"DISTRIBUTE BY,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"DISTRIBUTE BY,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"DISTRIBUTE BY",
@@ -5080,17 +3462,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0134.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772536504.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813438832.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"283",
+ "code":"183",
"des":"DIRECTORY enables a tablespace to be created outside the data directory and index directory. It allows DATA DIRECTORY and INDEX DIRECTORY. GaussDB(DWS) does not support t",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"DIRECTORY,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"DIRECTORY,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"DIRECTORY",
@@ -5098,17 +3481,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0135.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819416217.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860198693.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"284",
+ "code":"184",
"des":"In MySQL, ENGINE specifies the storage engine for a table. When the storage engine is ARCHIVE, BLACKHOLE, CSV, FEDERATED, INNODB, MYISAM, MEMORY, MRG_MYISAM, NDB, NDBCLUS",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"ENGINE,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"ENGINE,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"ENGINE",
@@ -5116,17 +3500,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0136.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819336189.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860318565.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"285",
+ "code":"185",
"des":"For foreign key constraints in MySQL, GaussDB(DWS) does not support them modifying table definition. They will be deleted during DSC migration.InputOutput",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"FOREIGN_KEY_CHECKS,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"FOREIGN_KEY_CHECKS,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"FOREIGN_KEY_CHECKS",
@@ -5134,17 +3519,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0137.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772696184.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813438976.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"286",
+ "code":"186",
"des":"DSC supports the conversion of IF NOT EXISTS, which is reserved during the migration.InputOutput",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"IF NOT EXISTS,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"IF NOT EXISTS,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"IF NOT EXISTS",
@@ -5152,17 +3538,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0138.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772536508.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813439216.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"287",
+ "code":"187",
"des":"In the ADB, index_all='Y' is used to create the full-column index. GaussDB(DWS) does not support table definition modification using this attribute. DSC will delete the a",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"INDEX_ALL,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"INDEX_ALL,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"INDEX_ALL",
@@ -5170,17 +3557,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0139.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819416225.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813599012.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"288",
+ "code":"188",
"des":"INSERT_METHOD specifies the table into which the row should be inserted. Use a value of FIRST or LAST to have inserts go to the first or last table, or a value of NO to p",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"INSERT_METHOD,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"INSERT_METHOD,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"INSERT_METHOD",
@@ -5188,17 +3576,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0140.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819336193.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860318505.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"289",
+ "code":"189",
"des":"KEY_BLOCK_SIZE choices vary depending on the storage engine used for a table. For MyISAM tables, KEY_BLOCK_SIZE optionally specifies the size in bytes to be used for inde",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"KEY_BLOCK_SIZE,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"KEY_BLOCK_SIZE,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"KEY_BLOCK_SIZE",
@@ -5206,17 +3595,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0141.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772696188.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813439132.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"290",
+ "code":"190",
"des":"GaussDB(DWS) does not support the ALTER TABLEtbNameLOCK statement of MySQL, which will be deleted by DSC during migration.InputOutput",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"LOCK,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"LOCK,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"LOCK",
@@ -5224,17 +3614,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0142.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772536512.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860199005.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"291",
+ "code":"191",
"des":"In MySQL, MAX_ROWS indicates the maximum number of rows that can be stored in a table. This attribute will be deleted during migration using DSC.InputOutput",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"MAX_ROWS,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"MAX_ROWS,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"MAX_ROWS",
@@ -5242,17 +3633,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0143.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819416229.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813438728.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"292",
+ "code":"192",
"des":"MIN_ROWS indicates the minimum number of rows that can be stored in a table. This attribute will be deleted during migration using DSC.InputOutput",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"MIN_ROWS,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"MIN_ROWS,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"MIN_ROWS",
@@ -5260,17 +3652,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0145.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819336201.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860318733.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"293",
+ "code":"193",
"des":"In MySQL, PACK_KEYS specifies the index compression mode in the MyISAM storage engine. GaussDB(DWS) does not support this attribute, which will be deleted by DSC during m",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"PACK_KEYS,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"PACK_KEYS,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"PACK_KEYS",
@@ -5278,17 +3671,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0146.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772696192.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860198625.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"294",
+ "code":"194",
"des":"In MySQL, PARTITION BY is used to create partitioned tables. Currently, GaussDB(DWS) supports only range and list partitions in MySQL.Hash partitions of PARTITION BY are ",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"PARTITION BY,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"PARTITION BY,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"PARTITION BY",
@@ -5296,17 +3690,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0147.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772536516.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860318933.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"295",
+ "code":"195",
"des":"In MySQL, PASSWORD indicates the user password. GaussDB(DWS) does not support this attribute, which will be deleted by DSC during migration.InputOutput",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"PASSWORD,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"PASSWORD,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"PASSWORD",
@@ -5314,17 +3709,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0148.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819416233.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813598796.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"296",
+ "code":"196",
"des":"ROW_FORMAT defines the physical format in which the rows are stored. Row format choices vary depending on the storage engine used for the table. If you specify a row form",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"ROW_FORMAT,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"ROW_FORMAT,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"ROW_FORMAT",
@@ -5332,17 +3728,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0149.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819336205.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813439120.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"297",
+ "code":"197",
"des":"STATS_AUTO_RECALC specifies whether to automatically recalculate persistent statistics for an InnoDB table. GaussDB(DWS) does not support this attribute, which will be de",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"STATS_AUTO_RECALC,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"STATS_AUTO_RECALC,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"STATS_AUTO_RECALC",
@@ -5350,17 +3747,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0150.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772696196.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813598704.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"298",
+ "code":"198",
"des":"In MySQL, STATS_PERSISTENT specifies whether to enable persistence statistics for an InnoDB table. The CREATE TABLE and ALTER TABLE statements can be used to enable persi",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"STATS_PERSISTENT,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"STATS_PERSISTENT,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"STATS_PERSISTENT",
@@ -5368,17 +3766,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0151.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772536520.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813598664.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"299",
+ "code":"199",
"des":"STATS_SAMPLE_PAGES specifies the number of index pages to sample when cardinality and other statistics for an indexed column are estimated. DSC will delete this attribute",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"STATS_SAMPLE_PAGES,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"STATS_SAMPLE_PAGES,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"STATS_SAMPLE_PAGES",
@@ -5386,17 +3785,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0152.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819416237.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860318541.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"300",
+ "code":"200",
"des":"UNION is a table creation parameter of the MERGE storage engine. Creating a table using this keyword is similar to creating a common view. The created table logically com",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"UNION,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"UNION,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"UNION",
@@ -5404,17 +3804,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0153.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819336209.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813598820.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"301",
+ "code":"201",
"des":"WITH AS is used in GaussDB(DWS) to declare one or more subqueries that can be referenced by name in the main query. It is equivalent to a temporary table. DSC supports th",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"WITH AS,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"WITH AS,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"WITH AS",
@@ -5422,17 +3823,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0154.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772696200.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860198661.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"302",
+ "code":"202",
"des":"MySQL uses the CHANGE keyword to change column names and data types and set NOT NULL constraints. DSC will perform adaptation based on GaussDB(DWS) features during migrat",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"CHANGE (Column Modification),Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"CHANGE (Column Modification),Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"CHANGE (Column Modification)",
@@ -5440,17 +3842,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0155.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772536524.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813438988.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"303",
+ "code":"203",
"des":"Specifies an expression producing a Boolean result which new or updated rows must satisfy for an insert or update operation to succeed. Expressions evaluating to TRUE or ",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"CHECK Constraint,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"CHECK Constraint,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"CHECK Constraint",
@@ -5458,17 +3861,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0156.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819416241.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860318549.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"304",
+ "code":"204",
"des":"Both GaussDB(DWS) and MySQL support using the DROP statement to delete tables. However, GaussDB(DWS) does not support the RESTRICT | CASCADE keyword in the DROP statement",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"DROP (Table Deletion),Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"DROP (Table Deletion),Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"DROP (Table Deletion)",
@@ -5476,17 +3880,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0157.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819336213.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860198729.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"305",
- "des":"MySQL databases support CREATE TABLE. LIKE is a method with which a table is created by cloning the old table structure, It is also supported by GaussDB(DWS). DSC will ad",
+ "code":"205",
+ "des":"In the MySQL database, you can use the CREATE TABLE .. LIKE .. method to clone the old table structure to create a table. It is also supported by GaussDB(DWS). DSC will a",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"LIKE (Table Cloning),Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"LIKE (Table Cloning),Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"LIKE (Table Cloning)",
@@ -5494,35 +3899,37 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0158.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772696204.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860318461.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"306",
+ "code":"206",
"des":"MySQL uses the MODIFY keyword to change column data types and set NOT NULL constraints. DSC will perform adaptation based on GaussDB(DWS) features during migration.InputO",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"MODIFY (Modifying a Cloumn),Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"MODIFY (Modifying a Column),Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
- "title":"MODIFY (Modifying a Cloumn)",
+ "title":"MODIFY (Modifying a Column)",
"githuburl":""
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0159.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772536528.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813439008.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"307",
+ "code":"207",
"des":"In MySQL, the TABLE keyword can be omitted when the TRUNCATE statement is used to delete table data. GaussDB(DWS) does not support this usage. In addition, DSC will add C",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"TRUNCATE (Table Deletion),Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"TRUNCATE (Table Deletion),Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"TRUNCATE (Table Deletion)",
@@ -5530,17 +3937,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0160.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819416245.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813438720.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"308",
- "des":"GaussDB(DWS) supports the creation of roundrobin tables. You can set the table.type in Table 1. Set table.type=ROUND-ROBIN.InputOutput",
+ "code":"208",
+ "des":"GaussDB(DWS) supports the creation of roundrobin tables. You can set table.type in Table 1. Set table.type=ROUND-ROBIN.InputOutput",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"ROUNDROBIN Table,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"ROUNDROBIN Table,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"ROUNDROBIN Table",
@@ -5548,17 +3956,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0161.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819336217.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813598560.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"309",
+ "code":"209",
"des":"The statement for renaming a table in MySQL is slightly different from that in GaussDB(DWS). DSC will perform adaptation based on GaussDB(DWS) features during migration.C",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"RENAME (Table Renaming),Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"RENAME (Table Renaming),Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"RENAME (Table Renaming)",
@@ -5566,17 +3975,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0162.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772696208.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860198981.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"310",
+ "code":"210",
"des":"In MySQL, the COLUMN keyword can be omitted when the ALTER statement is used to set the default value of a column. DSC will perform adaptation based on GaussDB(DWS) featu",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"SET|DROP COLUMN DEFAULT VALUE,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"SET|DROP COLUMN DEFAULT VALUE,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"SET|DROP COLUMN DEFAULT VALUE",
@@ -5584,17 +3994,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0163.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772536532.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860198673.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"311",
+ "code":"211",
"des":"In GaussDB(DWS), reserved keywords must be enclosed in double quotation marks when they are used as column names. The following reserved keywords are supported: desc, che",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Renaming a Column,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Renaming a Column,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Renaming a Column",
@@ -5602,17 +4013,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0164.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819416249.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813439156.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"312",
- "des":"GaussDB(DWS) supports column-store table compression, but does not support row-store table compression. DSC performs migration based on GaussDB(DWS) features.Compression ",
+ "code":"212",
+ "des":"In GaussDB(DWS), only column-store tables can be compressed. Row-store tables cannot be compressed. The row-column storage compression mechanism is optimized. DSC perform",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Row-Store/Column-Store Table Compression,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Row-Store/Column-Store Table Compression,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Row-Store/Column-Store Table Compression",
@@ -5620,17 +4032,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0165.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819336221.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813598868.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"313",
+ "code":"213",
"des":"The statements for adding and deleting columns in MySQL are different from those in GaussDB(DWS). DSC will perform adaptation based on GaussDB(DWS) features during migrat",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Adding/Deleting a Column,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Adding/Deleting a Column,Table (Optional Parameters and Operations),Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Adding/Deleting a Column",
@@ -5638,17 +4051,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0166.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772696212.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860198641.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"314",
+ "code":"214",
"des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
"doc_type":"tg",
"kw":"Indexes",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Indexes",
@@ -5656,17 +4070,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0167.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772536536.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813598644.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"315",
+ "code":"215",
"des":"GaussDB(DWS) does not support the combination of unique indexes (constraints) and primary key constraints. DSC will perform adaptation based on GaussDB(DWS) features duri",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Unique Indexes,Indexes,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Unique Indexes,Indexes,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Unique Indexes",
@@ -5674,17 +4089,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0168.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819416253.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860198649.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"316",
+ "code":"216",
"des":"GaussDB(DWS) does not support prefix indexes or inline normal indexes. DSC will replace these indexes with normal indexes based on GaussDB(DWS) features.Inline normal/pre",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Normal and Prefix Indexes,Indexes,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Normal and Prefix Indexes,Indexes,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Normal and Prefix Indexes",
@@ -5692,17 +4108,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0169.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819336225.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813598584.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"317",
+ "code":"217",
"des":"GaussDB(DWS) does not support hash indexes. DSC will replace these indexes with normal indexes based on GaussDB(DWS) features.Inline hash indexesInputCREATE TABLE `public",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Hash Indexes,Indexes,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Hash Indexes,Indexes,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Hash Indexes",
@@ -5710,17 +4127,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0170.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772696216.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860199101.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"318",
+ "code":"218",
"des":"GaussDB(DWS) supports B-tree indexes, but the position of the USING BTREE keyword in a statement is different from that in MySQL. DSC will perform adaptation based on Gau",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"B-tree Indexes,Indexes,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"B-tree Indexes,Indexes,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"B-tree Indexes",
@@ -5728,17 +4146,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0171.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772536540.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860198745.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"319",
+ "code":"219",
"des":"GaussDB(DWS) does not support spatial indexes. DSC will perform adaptation based on GaussDB(DWS) features during migration.Inline spatial indexInputCREATE TABLE `public`.",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Spatial Indexes,Indexes,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Spatial Indexes,Indexes,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Spatial Indexes",
@@ -5746,17 +4165,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0172.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819416257.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813438916.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"320",
+ "code":"220",
"des":"GaussDB(DWS) does not support full-text indexes. DSC will perform adaptation based on GaussDB(DWS) features during migration.Inline full-text indexInput## A.\nCREATE TABLE",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Full-Text Indexes,Indexes,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Full-Text Indexes,Indexes,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Full-Text Indexes",
@@ -5764,17 +4184,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0173.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819336229.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813598872.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"321",
+ "code":"221",
"des":"MySQL supports both DROP INDEX and ALTER TABLE DROP INDEX for deleting indexes. DSC will perform adaptation based on GaussDB(DWS) features during migration.DROP INDEXInpu",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Deleting an Index,Indexes,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Deleting an Index,Indexes,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Deleting an Index",
@@ -5782,17 +4203,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0174.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772696220.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860318821.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"322",
+ "code":"222",
"des":"DSC supports renaming indexes. Prefix a table name to an index name to prevent name conflicts. (Only DDL statements with specific index names can be created. Currently, t",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Renaming an Index,Indexes,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Renaming an Index,Indexes,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Renaming an Index",
@@ -5800,17 +4222,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0175.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772536544.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813439064.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"323",
+ "code":"223",
"des":"To comment out a single line, MySQL uses # or --, and GaussDB(DWS) uses --. DSC will replace # with -- for commenting out a single line during migration.InputOutput",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Comment,Schema Objects and Data Definition Language (DDL),Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Comment,MySQL Syntax Migrating,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Comment",
@@ -5818,17 +4241,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0176.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819416265.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860318693.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"324",
+ "code":"224",
"des":"In MySQL, DATABASE is a schema object, which is equivalent to the SCHEMA of Oracle and GaussDB(DWS). DSC supports the following two scenarios:Database creationInputcreate",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Databases,Schema Objects and Data Definition Language (DDL),Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Databases,MySQL Syntax Migrating,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Databases",
@@ -5836,53 +4260,94 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0177.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819336233.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860318489.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"325",
+ "code":"225",
"des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
"doc_type":"tg",
"kw":"Data Manipulation Language (DML)",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Data Manipulation Language (DML)",
"githuburl":""
},
{
- "uri":"dws_16_0178.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772696224.xml",
+ "uri":"dws_16_0184.html",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860198669.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"326",
- "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
+ "code":"226",
+ "des":"In MySQL, INSERT allows the following keywords: HIGH_PRIORITY, LOW_PRIORITY, PARTITION, DELAYED, IGNORE, VALUES, and ON DUPLICATE KEY UPDATE.MySQL uses HIGH_PRIORITY will",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"SELECT",
+ "kw":"INSERT,Data Manipulation Language (DML),Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
- "title":"SELECT",
+ "title":"INSERT",
+ "githuburl":""
+ },
+ {
+ "uri":"dws_16_0193.html",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813438744.xml",
+ "product_code":"dws",
+ "code":"227",
+ "des":"In MySQL, UPDATE allows the following keywords: LOW_PRIORITY, ORDER BY, LIMIT, and IGNORE.With the LOW_PRIORITY modifier, execution of UPDATE is delayed.InputOutputIn MyS",
+ "doc_type":"tg",
+ "kw":"UPDATE,Data Manipulation Language (DML),Tools Guide",
+ "search_title":"",
+ "metedata":[
+ {
+ "prodname":"dws",
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
+ }
+ ],
+ "title":"UPDATE",
+ "githuburl":""
+ },
+ {
+ "uri":"dws_16_0198.html",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860318485.xml",
+ "product_code":"dws",
+ "code":"228",
+ "des":"In MySQL, REPLACE allows the following keywords: LOW_PRIORITY, PARTITION, DELAYED, VALUES, and SET. The following examples are temporary migration solutions only.REPLACE ",
+ "doc_type":"tg",
+ "kw":"REPLACE,Data Manipulation Language (DML),Tools Guide",
+ "search_title":"",
+ "metedata":[
+ {
+ "prodname":"dws",
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
+ }
+ ],
+ "title":"REPLACE",
"githuburl":""
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0179.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772536548.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860198593.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"327",
+ "code":"229",
"des":"Aliases in MySQL contain single quotation marks, which are not supported by GaussDB(DWS). DSC changes them to double quotation marks during migration.InputOutputAliases a",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Quotation Marks,SELECT,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Quotation Marks,Data Manipulation Language (DML),Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Quotation Marks",
@@ -5890,17 +4355,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0180.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819416269.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813438896.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"328",
+ "code":"230",
"des":"In MySQL, the interval expression format is INTERVAL N, which is not supported by GaussDB(DWS) and needs to be converted to INTERVAL'N'.InputOutput",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"INTERVAL,SELECT,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"INTERVAL,Data Manipulation Language (DML),Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"INTERVAL",
@@ -5908,17 +4374,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0181.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819336237.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860198957.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"329",
+ "code":"231",
"des":"In MySQL, in a division expression, if the divisor is 0, null is returned. GaussDB(DWS) reports an error. Therefore, the division expression is converted by adding an if ",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Division Expressions,SELECT,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Division Expressions,Data Manipulation Language (DML),Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Division Expressions",
@@ -5926,17 +4393,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0182.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772696228.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860199045.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"330",
+ "code":"232",
"des":"During MySQL/ADB group query, non-group columns can be queried. During GaussDB(DWS) group query, only group columns and aggregate functions can be queried, and if non-gro",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"GROUP BY Conversion,SELECT,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"GROUP BY Conversion,Data Manipulation Language (DML),Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"GROUP BY Conversion",
@@ -5944,395 +4412,37 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0183.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772536552.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813598888.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"331",
+ "code":"233",
"des":"group by column with rollup in MySQL needs to be converted to group by rollup (column) in GaussDB(DWS).InputOutput",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"ROLLUP,SELECT,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"ROLLUP,Data Manipulation Language (DML),Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"ROLLUP",
"githuburl":""
},
- {
- "uri":"dws_16_0184.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819416273.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"332",
- "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"INSERT",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
- }
- ],
- "title":"INSERT",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"dws_16_0185.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819336241.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"333",
- "des":"MySQL uses HIGH_PRIORITY will override the effect of the LOW_PRIORITY option.InputOutput",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"HIGH_PRIORITY,INSERT,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
- }
- ],
- "title":"HIGH_PRIORITY",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"dws_16_0186.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772696232.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"334",
- "des":"When the LOW_PRIORITY modifier is used, execution of INSERT is delayed.InputOutput",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"LOW_PRIORITY,INSERT,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
- }
- ],
- "title":"LOW_PRIORITY",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"dws_16_0187.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772536556.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"335",
- "des":"When inserting into a partitioned table, you can control which partitions and subpartitions accept new rows.InputOutput",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"PARTITION,INSERT,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
- }
- ],
- "title":"PARTITION",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"dws_16_0188.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819416277.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"336",
- "des":"In MySQL 5.7, the DELAYED keyword is recognized but ignored by the server.InputOutput",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"DELAYED,INSERT,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
- }
- ],
- "title":"DELAYED",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"dws_16_0189.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819336245.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"337",
- "des":"When the IGNORE modifier is used, errors that occur during INSERT execution are ignored.InputOutput",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"IGNORE,INSERT,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
- }
- ],
- "title":"IGNORE",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"dws_16_0190.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772696236.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"338",
- "des":"INSERT statements that use the VALUES syntax can insert multiple lines, separated by commas.InputOutput",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"VALUES,INSERT,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
- }
- ],
- "title":"VALUES",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"dws_16_0191.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772536560.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"339",
- "des":"INSERT uses the ON DUPLICATE KEY UPDATE clause to update existing rows.InputOutput",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"ON DUPLICATE KEY UPDATE,INSERT,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
- }
- ],
- "title":"ON DUPLICATE KEY UPDATE",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"dws_16_0192.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819416281.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"340",
- "des":"MySQL INSERT...SET statement inserts rows based on explicitly specified values.InputOutput",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"SET,INSERT,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
- }
- ],
- "title":"SET",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"dws_16_0193.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819336249.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"341",
- "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"UPDATE",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
- }
- ],
- "title":"UPDATE",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"dws_16_0194.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772696240.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"342",
- "des":"With the LOW_PRIORITY modifier, execution of UPDATE is delayed.InputOutput",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"LOW_PRIORITY,UPDATE,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
- }
- ],
- "title":"LOW_PRIORITY",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"dws_16_0195.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772536564.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"343",
- "des":"In MySQL, if an UPDATE statement includes an ORDER BY clause, the rows will be updated in the order specified by the clause.InputOutput",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"ORDER BY,UPDATE,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
- }
- ],
- "title":"ORDER BY",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"dws_16_0196.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819416285.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"344",
- "des":"UPDATE LIMIT syntax can be used to limit the scope. A clause is a limit on row matching. As long as the rows that satisfy the clause are found, the statements will stop, ",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"LIMIT,UPDATE,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
- }
- ],
- "title":"LIMIT",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"dws_16_0197.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819336253.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"345",
- "des":"With the IGNORE modifier, the UPDATE statement does not abort even if errors occur during execution.InputOutput",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"IGNORE,UPDATE,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
- }
- ],
- "title":"IGNORE",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"dws_16_0198.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772696244.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"346",
- "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"REPLACE",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
- }
- ],
- "title":"REPLACE",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"dws_16_0199.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772536568.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"347",
- "des":"MySQL REPLACE supports the use of LOW_PRIORITY, which is converted by the Migration tool.InputOutput",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"LOW_PRIORITY,REPLACE,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
- }
- ],
- "title":"LOW_PRIORITY",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"dws_16_0200.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819416289.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"348",
- "des":"MySQL REPLACE supports explicit partitioning selection using the PARTITION keyword and a comma-separated name list for partitions, subpartitions, or both.InputOutput",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"PARTITION,REPLACE,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
- }
- ],
- "title":"PARTITION",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"dws_16_0201.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819336257.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"349",
- "des":"DELAYED INSERT and REPLACE operations were deprecated in MySQL 5.6. In MySQL 5.7, DELAYED was not supported. The server recognizes but ignores the DELAYED keyword, handle",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"DELAYED,REPLACE,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
- }
- ],
- "title":"DELAYED",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"dws_16_0202.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772696248.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"350",
- "des":"MySQL REPLACE supports a statement to insert or delete multiple values, separated by commas.InputOutput",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"VALUES,REPLACE,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
- }
- ],
- "title":"VALUES",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"dws_16_0203.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772536572.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"351",
- "des":"MySQL REPLACE supports the use of SET settings, which the Migration tool will convert.InputOutput",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"SET,REPLACE,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
- }
- ],
- "title":"SET",
- "githuburl":""
- },
{
"uri":"dws_16_0204.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819416293.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860198965.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"352",
+ "code":"234",
"des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
"doc_type":"tg",
"kw":"Transaction Management and Database Management",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Transaction Management and Database Management",
@@ -6340,99 +4450,104 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0205.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819336261.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813438924.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"353",
- "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
+ "code":"235",
+ "des":"DSC will perform adaptation based on GaussDB(DWS) features during MySQL transaction statement migration.InputOutputDSC will perform adaptation based on GaussDB(DWS) featu",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Transaction Management",
+ "kw":"Transaction Management,Transaction Management and Database Management,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Transaction Management",
"githuburl":""
},
- {
- "uri":"dws_16_0206.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772696252.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"354",
- "des":"DSC will perform adaptation based on GaussDB features during MySQL transaction statement migration.InputOutput",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"TRANSACTION,Transaction Management,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
- }
- ],
- "title":"TRANSACTION",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"dws_16_0207.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772536576.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"355",
- "des":"DSC will perform adaptation based on GaussDB features during the migration of MySQL table locking statements which are used in transaction processing.InputOutput",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"LOCK,Transaction Management,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
- }
- ],
- "title":"LOCK",
- "githuburl":""
- },
{
"uri":"dws_16_0208.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819416297.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813438772.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"356",
- "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
+ "code":"236",
+ "des":"DSC will replace MySQL SET CHARACTER SET with SET SESSION NAMES during migration. The following table lists the character sets.InputOutput",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Database Management",
+ "kw":"Database Management,Transaction Management and Database Management,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Database Management",
"githuburl":""
},
{
- "uri":"dws_16_0209.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819336265.xml",
+ "uri":"dws_07_0187.html",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000002160142912.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"357",
- "des":"DSC will replace MySQL SET CHARACTER SET with SET SESSION NAMES during migration. The following table lists character set mapping.InputOutput",
+ "code":"237",
+ "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"SET CHARACTER,Database Management,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"SQL-Server Syntax Migration",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
- "title":"SET CHARACTER",
+ "title":"SQL-Server Syntax Migration",
+ "githuburl":""
+ },
+ {
+ "uri":"dws_07_0188.html",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000002195544841.xml",
+ "product_code":"dws",
+ "code":"238",
+ "des":"GaussDB(DWS) does not support the Database name.Schema name.Table name format. You need to convert it to the Schema name.Table name format.SQL Server supports the creatio",
+ "doc_type":"tg",
+ "kw":"Migrating Tables,SQL-Server Syntax Migration,Tools Guide",
+ "search_title":"",
+ "metedata":[
+ {
+ "prodname":"dws",
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
+ }
+ ],
+ "title":"Migrating Tables",
+ "githuburl":""
+ },
+ {
+ "uri":"dws_07_0189.html",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000002160303756.xml",
+ "product_code":"dws",
+ "code":"239",
+ "des":"A data type is a basic data attribute. Occupied storage space and allowed operations vary according to data types. In a database, data is stored in tables, in which a dat",
+ "doc_type":"tg",
+ "kw":"Migrating Data Types,SQL-Server Syntax Migration,Tools Guide",
+ "search_title":"",
+ "metedata":[
+ {
+ "prodname":"dws",
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
+ }
+ ],
+ "title":"Migrating Data Types",
"githuburl":""
},
{
"uri":"dws_mt_0104.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772696256.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000002076392553.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"358",
+ "code":"240",
"des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
"doc_type":"tg",
"kw":"Oracle Syntax Migration",
@@ -6440,35 +4555,18 @@
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Oracle Syntax Migration",
"githuburl":""
},
- {
- "uri":"dws_mt_0105.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772536580.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"359",
- "des":"This section lists the Oracle features supported by the syntax migration tool, and provides the Oracle syntax and the equivalent GaussDB(DWS) syntax for each feature. The",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Overview,Oracle Syntax Migration,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Overview",
- "githuburl":""
- },
{
"uri":"dws_mt_0106.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819416301.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000002040353158.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"360",
+ "code":"241",
"des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
"doc_type":"tg",
"kw":"Schema Objects",
@@ -6476,7 +4574,8 @@
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Schema Objects",
@@ -6484,17 +4583,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_mt_0108.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819336269.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000002076353953.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"361",
+ "code":"242",
"des":"The CREATE TABLE statement in Oracle databases is used to create new tables. GaussDB(DWS) also supports this statement. So it does not need to be migrated.The ALTER TABLE",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Tables,Schema Objects,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Tables,Schema Objects,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Tables",
@@ -6502,17 +4602,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_mt_0109.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772696260.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000002076392557.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"362",
- "des":"GaussDB(DWS) does not support GLOBAL TEMPORARY TABLE, and it will be migrated to LOCAL TEMPORARY TABLE.ON COMMIT DELETE ROWS is also not supported, and will be migrated t",
+ "code":"243",
+ "des":"GaussDB(DWS) does not support GLOBAL TEMPORARY TABLE, It migrates GLOBAL TEMPORARY TABLE to LOCAL TEMPORARY TABLE.ON COMMIT DELETE ROWS is also not supported and will be ",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Temporary Tables,Schema Objects,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Temporary Tables,Schema Objects,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Temporary Tables",
@@ -6520,17 +4621,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_mt_0212.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772536584.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000002040194846.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"363",
+ "code":"244",
"des":"Global temporary tables are converted to local temporary tables.Input - GLOBAL TEMPORARY TABLEOutput",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Global Temporary Tables,Schema Objects,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Global Temporary Tables,Schema Objects,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Global Temporary Tables",
@@ -6538,17 +4640,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_mt_0110.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819416305.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000002040353162.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"364",
+ "code":"245",
"des":"When an index is created in GaussDB(DWS), a schema name cannot be specified along with the index name. The index will be automatically created in the schema where the ind",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Indexes,Schema Objects,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Indexes,Schema Objects,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Indexes",
@@ -6556,17 +4659,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_mt_0111.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819336273.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000002076353957.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"365",
- "des":"A view is a logical table that is based on one or more tables or views. A view itself contains no data.In the source file, if the table names are not qualified with the s",
+ "code":"246",
+ "des":"A view is a logical table based on one or more tables or views. A view itself contains no data.In the source file, if the table names are not qualified with the schema na",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Views,Schema Objects,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Views,Schema Objects,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Views",
@@ -6574,17 +4678,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_mt_0112.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772696264.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000002076392561.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"366",
+ "code":"247",
"des":"A sequence is an Oracle object used to generate a number sequence. This can be useful when you need to create an autonumber column to act as a primary key.If MigSupportSe",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Sequences,Schema Objects,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Sequences,Schema Objects,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Sequences",
@@ -6592,17 +4697,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_mt_0113.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772536588.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000002040194850.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"367",
- "des":"In Oracle, the DROP TABLE statement moves a table to the recycle bin. The PURGE statement is used to remove a table or index from the recycle bin and release all of the s",
+ "code":"248",
+ "des":"In Oracle, the DROP TABLE statement moves a table to the recycle bin, allowing for potential recovery. In contrast, the PURGE statement permanently deletes a table or ind",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"PURGE,Schema Objects,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"PURGE,Schema Objects,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"PURGE",
@@ -6610,17 +4716,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_mt_0114.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819416309.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000002040353166.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"368",
+ "code":"249",
"des":"DSC supports GaussDB(DWS) keywords, such as NAME, LIMIT, OWNER, KEY, and CAST. These keywords must be enclosed in double quotation marks.The keywords NAME, VERSION, LABEL",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Database Keywords,Schema Objects,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Database Keywords,Schema Objects,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Database Keywords",
@@ -6628,17 +4735,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_07_6814.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819336277.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000002076353961.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"369",
- "des":"Input – COMPRESS PhraseOutput",
+ "code":"250",
+ "des":"This function is used to comment out the COMPRESS phrase by default during the migration.Input – COMPRESS PhraseOutput",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"COMPRESS Phrase,Oracle Syntax Migration,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"COMPRESS Phrase,Oracle Syntax Migration,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"COMPRESS Phrase",
@@ -6646,17 +4754,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_07_6815.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772696268.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000002076392569.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"370",
+ "code":"251",
"des":"There is a configuration parameter that is introduced for this feature named BitmapIndexSupport which default value is comment, then the sample input and output are as fo",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Bitmap Index,Oracle Syntax Migration,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Bitmap Index,Oracle Syntax Migration,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Bitmap Index",
@@ -6664,17 +4773,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_07_6816.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772536592.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000002040194854.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"371",
- "des":"Input – custom tablespaceOutput",
+ "code":"252",
+ "des":"This section describes the syntax for migrating a custom tablespace.Input – custom tablespaceOutput",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Custom Tablespace,Oracle Syntax Migration,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Custom Tablespace,Oracle Syntax Migration,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Custom Tablespace",
@@ -6682,17 +4792,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_07_6817.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819416317.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000002040353170.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"372",
+ "code":"253",
"des":"Supplemental columns can be recorded in redo log files. The process of recording these additional columns is called supplemental logging. Oracle supports this function, b",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Supplemental Log Data,Oracle Syntax Migration,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Supplemental Log Data,Oracle Syntax Migration,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Supplemental Log Data",
@@ -6700,17 +4811,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_07_6818.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819336281.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000002076353965.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"373",
+ "code":"254",
"des":"\"Data type LONG RAW\" is not supported in the CREATE TABLE statement. LONG RAW data type needs to be replaced with Byte.InputOutput",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"LONG RAW,Oracle Syntax Migration,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"LONG RAW,Oracle Syntax Migration,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"LONG RAW",
@@ -6718,17 +4830,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_07_6819.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772696272.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000002076392573.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"374",
+ "code":"255",
"des":"SYS_GUID is a built-in function which returns the Global Unique Identifier (GUID) for a row in a table. It accepts no arguments and returns a RAW value of 16 bytes.InputO",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"SYS_GUID,Oracle Syntax Migration,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"SYS_GUID,Oracle Syntax Migration,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"SYS_GUID",
@@ -6736,17 +4849,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_mt_0115.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772536600.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000002040194858.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"375",
+ "code":"256",
"des":"This section describes the migration syntax of Oracle DML. The migration syntax decides how the keywords/features are migrated.For details, see the following topics:SELEC",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"DML,Oracle Syntax Migration,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"DML,Oracle Syntax Migration,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"DML",
@@ -6754,17 +4868,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_mt_0128.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819416321.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000002040353174.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"376",
+ "code":"257",
"des":"This section contains the migration syntax of Oracle Pseudo Columns. The migration syntax decides how the keywords/features are migrated.A pseudo column is similar to a t",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Pseudo Columns,Oracle Syntax Migration,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Pseudo Columns,Oracle Syntax Migration,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Pseudo Columns",
@@ -6772,17 +4887,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_mt_0132.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819336285.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000002076353969.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"377",
+ "code":"258",
"des":"This section describes the migration syntax of Oracle OUTER JOIN. The migration syntax determines how the keywords/features are migrated.An OUTER JOIN returns all rows th",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"OUTER JOIN,Oracle Syntax Migration,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"OUTER JOIN,Oracle Syntax Migration,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"OUTER JOIN",
@@ -6790,17 +4906,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_mt_0215.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772696284.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000002076392577.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"378",
+ "code":"259",
"des":"Join is supported by GaussDB(DWS), so parameter supportJoinOperatoris added.OUTER QUERY (+)can be migrated when supportJoinOperatoris set to false.Input-OUTER QUERY(+)Out",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"OUTER QUERY (+),Oracle Syntax Migration,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"OUTER QUERY (+),Oracle Syntax Migration,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"OUTER QUERY (+)",
@@ -6808,17 +4925,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_mt_0216.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772536604.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000002040194862.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"379",
+ "code":"260",
"des":"Input-CONNECT BYOutputInput - CONNECT BY multiple tablesThe syntax shows the relationship between each child row and its parent row. It uses the CONNECT BY xxx PRIOR clau",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"CONNECT BY,Oracle Syntax Migration,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"CONNECT BY,Oracle Syntax Migration,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"CONNECT BY",
@@ -6826,9 +4944,9 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_mt_0133.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819416325.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000002040353178.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"380",
+ "code":"261",
"des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
"doc_type":"tg",
"kw":"System Functions",
@@ -6836,7 +4954,8 @@
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"System Functions",
@@ -6844,17 +4963,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_mt_0135.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819336293.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000002076353973.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"381",
+ "code":"262",
"des":"This section describes the following date functions:ADD_MONTHSDATE_TRUNCLAST_DAYMONTHS_BETWEENSYSTIMESTAMPADD_MONTHS is an Oracle system function and is not implicitly su",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Date Functions,System Functions,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Date Functions,System Functions,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Date Functions",
@@ -6862,17 +4982,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_mt_0136.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772696288.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000002076392581.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"382",
+ "code":"263",
"des":"This section describes the following LOB functions:DBMS_LOB.APPENDDBMS_LOB.COMPAREDBMS_LOB.CREATETEMPORARYDBMS_LOB.INSTRDBMS_LOB.SUBSTRDBMS_LOB.APPEND function appends th",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"LOB Functions,System Functions,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"LOB Functions,System Functions,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"LOB Functions",
@@ -6880,17 +5001,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_mt_0137.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772536612.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000002040194866.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"383",
+ "code":"264",
"des":"This section describes the following string functions:LISTAGGSTRAGGWM_CONCATNVL2 and REPLACEQUOTELISTAGG is used to order data in columns within each group specified in t",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"String Functions,System Functions,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"String Functions,System Functions,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"String Functions",
@@ -6898,17 +5020,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_mt_0138.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819416329.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000002040353182.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"384",
+ "code":"265",
"des":"Analytical functions compute an aggregate value based on a group of rows. They differ from aggregate functions in that they return multiple rows for each group. Analytica",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Analytical Functions,System Functions,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Analytical Functions,System Functions,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Analytical Functions",
@@ -6916,17 +5039,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_mt_0139.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819336297.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000002076353977.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"385",
+ "code":"266",
"des":"Regular expressions specify patterns to match strings using standardized syntax conventions. In Oracle, regular expressions are implemented using a set of SQL functions t",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Regular Expression Functions,System Functions,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Regular Expression Functions,System Functions,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Regular Expression Functions",
@@ -6934,17 +5058,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_mt_0141.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772536616.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000002040194870.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"386",
+ "code":"267",
"des":"This section describes the migration syntax of Oracle PL/SQL. The migration syntax determines how the keywords and features are migrated.PL/SQL combines the procedural fe",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"PL/SQL,Oracle Syntax Migration,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"PL/SQL,Oracle Syntax Migration,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"PL/SQL",
@@ -6952,17 +5077,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_mt_0155.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819416333.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000002040353186.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"387",
- "des":"This section descripes the migration syntax of Oracle PL/SQL Collections. The migration syntax decides how the keywords/features are migrated.A user-defined type (UDT) is",
+ "code":"268",
+ "des":"This section describes the migration syntax of Oracle PL/SQL Collections. The migration syntax decides how the keywords/features are migrated.A user-defined type (UDT) is",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"PL/SQL Collections (Using User-Defined Types),Oracle Syntax Migration,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"PL/SQL Collections (Using User-Defined Types),Oracle Syntax Migration,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"PL/SQL Collections (Using User-Defined Types)",
@@ -6970,9 +5096,9 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_mt_0156.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819336301.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000002076353981.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"388",
+ "code":"269",
"des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
"doc_type":"tg",
"kw":"PL/SQL Packages",
@@ -6980,7 +5106,8 @@
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"PL/SQL Packages",
@@ -6988,17 +5115,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_mt_0158.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772696296.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000002076392593.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"389",
+ "code":"270",
"des":"Packages are schema objects that group logically related PL/SQL types, variables, functions and procedures. In Oracle, each package consists of two parts: package specifi",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Packages,PL/SQL Packages,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Packages,PL/SQL Packages,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Packages",
@@ -7006,17 +5134,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_mt_0159.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772536624.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000002040194874.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"390",
+ "code":"271",
"des":"Package variables are available in Oracle packages that allow variables to retain all the functions and procedures in the package. DSC uses customized functions to help G",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Package Variables,PL/SQL Packages,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Package Variables,PL/SQL Packages,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Package Variables",
@@ -7024,17 +5153,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_mt_0301.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819416341.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000002040353190.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"391",
+ "code":"272",
"des":"The package specification is migrated as a schema named after the package and the procedures and functions in the package body is migrated as Packagename.procedurenameand",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Splitting Packages,PL/SQL Packages,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Splitting Packages,PL/SQL Packages,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Splitting Packages",
@@ -7042,17 +5172,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_mt_0302.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819336305.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000002076353985.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"392",
+ "code":"273",
"des":"REF Cursor is a data type that can store the database cursor values and is used to return query results. DSC supports migration of REF CURSOR. The example below shows how",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"REF CURSOR,PL/SQL Packages,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"REF CURSOR,PL/SQL Packages,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"REF CURSOR",
@@ -7060,17 +5191,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_mt_0221.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772696304.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000002076392597.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"393",
+ "code":"274",
"des":"The package declaration is migrated as a schema named after the package. The migration can be performed after pkgSchemaNaming is set to false.Input – Create schema for Pa",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Creating a Schema for Package,PL/SQL Packages,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Creating a Schema for Package,PL/SQL Packages,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Creating a Schema for Package",
@@ -7078,17 +5210,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_mt_0303.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772536628.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000002040194882.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"394",
+ "code":"275",
"des":"REF CURSOR is defined as a return parameter.It can be migrated after plsqlCollectionis set tovarray.Input - VARRAYOutput",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"VARRAY,Oracle Syntax Migration,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"VARRAY,Oracle Syntax Migration,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"VARRAY",
@@ -7096,17 +5229,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_mt_0304.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819416345.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000002040353202.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"395",
+ "code":"276",
"des":"This feature is used to give privileges to users for specific packages. All the procedures and functions defined in the specific packages will be granted the execution pe",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Granting Execution Permissions,Oracle Syntax Migration,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Granting Execution Permissions,Oracle Syntax Migration,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Granting Execution Permissions",
@@ -7114,17 +5248,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_mt_0305.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819336309.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000002076353989.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"396",
+ "code":"277",
"des":"Enable & DisableSet package_name_list to bas_lookup_misc_pkg.Enable and disable the function based on configuration parameters.InputOutput",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Package Name List,Oracle Syntax Migration,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Package Name List,Oracle Syntax Migration,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Package Name List",
@@ -7132,45 +5267,28 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_mt_0306.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772696308.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000002076392601.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"397",
+ "code":"278",
"des":"SubtypeCustomized types in the package cannot be converted.SUBTYPE error_msg IS sad_products_t.exception_description%TYPE;SUBTYPE AR_FLAG IS SAD_RA_LINES_TI.AR_FLAG%TYPE;",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Data Type,Oracle Syntax Migration,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Data Type,Oracle Syntax Migration,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Data Type",
"githuburl":""
},
- {
- "uri":"dws_mt_0222.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772536632.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"398",
- "des":"Input-Chinese (OutputInput-Chinese )OutputInput-Chinese,OutputInput-Support Chinese SPACEOutput",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Chinese Character Support,Oracle Syntax Migration,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"Chinese Character Support",
- "githuburl":""
- },
{
"uri":"dws_07_0682.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819416349.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000002040353234.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"399",
+ "code":"279",
"des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
"doc_type":"tg",
"kw":"Netezza Syntax Migration",
@@ -7178,7 +5296,8 @@
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Netezza Syntax Migration",
@@ -7186,17 +5305,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_07_6821.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819336317.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000002076354025.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"400",
+ "code":"280",
"des":"DISTRIBUTE ON (column) should be migrated to DISTRIBUTE BY HASH (column).ORGANIZE ON will be commented out.The row-store supports BLOB and CLOB. Column storage does not s",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Tables,Netezza Syntax Migration,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Tables,Netezza Syntax Migration,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Tables",
@@ -7204,17 +5324,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_07_6822.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772696312.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000002076392637.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"401",
+ "code":"281",
"des":"PROCEDURE with RETURNS will be modified to FUNCTION with RETURN.Migrate the nzplSQL language to the plpgSQL language or delete the language.The process which is started w",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"PROCEDURE with RETURNS,Netezza Syntax Migration,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"PROCEDURE with RETURNS,Netezza Syntax Migration,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"PROCEDURE with RETURNS",
@@ -7222,17 +5343,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_07_6823.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772536640.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000002040194930.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"402",
+ "code":"282",
"des":"NVARCHAR changed to NCHAR VARING.The row_count function is supported for affected row counting.ROW_COUNT identifies the number of rows associated with the previous SQL st",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Procedure,Netezza Syntax Migration,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Procedure,Netezza Syntax Migration,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Procedure",
@@ -7240,17 +5362,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_07_6824.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819416353.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000002040353246.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"403",
+ "code":"283",
"des":"Second parameter is missing.Casting the data type.",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"System Functions,Netezza Syntax Migration,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"System Functions,Netezza Syntax Migration,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"System Functions",
@@ -7258,17 +5381,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_07_6825.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819336321.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000002076354033.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"404",
+ "code":"284",
"des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Operator,Netezza Syntax Migration,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Operator,Netezza Syntax Migration,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Operator",
@@ -7276,17 +5400,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_07_6826.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772696320.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000002076392645.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"405",
+ "code":"285",
"des":"A new configuration parameter \"keywords_addressed_using_doublequote\" should be introduced with the below value:keywords_addressed_using_doublequote=freezekeywords_address",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"DML,Netezza Syntax Migration,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"DML,Netezza Syntax Migration,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"DML",
@@ -7294,17 +5419,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_07_6827.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772536644.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000002040194938.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"406",
+ "code":"286",
"des":"This feature is applicable only for COLUMN store. For ROW store, Unique Index should not be commented.",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Unique Index,Netezza Syntax Migration,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Unique Index,Netezza Syntax Migration,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Unique Index",
@@ -7312,17 +5438,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_mt_0192.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819416357.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860318513.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"407",
+ "code":"287",
"des":"This section covers the frequently asked questions.Q1: During installation, I get an error \"Root privileged users are not allowed to install the DSC for Linux.\" What is t",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"FAQs,DSC,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"FAQs,DSC,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"FAQs",
@@ -7330,17 +5457,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0210.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001819336325.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813598928.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"408",
+ "code":"288",
"des":"This section contains a list of troubleshooting steps and solutions for issues encountered while using DSC.The table lists the troubleshooting symptoms/issues along with ",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Troubleshooting,DSC,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Troubleshooting,DSC,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Troubleshooting",
@@ -7348,53 +5476,246 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_16_0211.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001772696324.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860199105.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"409",
+ "code":"289",
"des":"The following table lists the acronyms, abbreviations, terms, and their descriptions.",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Glossary,DSC,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Glossary,DSC,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
+ "prodname":"dws",
"documenttype":"tg",
- "prodname":"dws"
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Glossary",
"githuburl":""
},
{
- "uri":"dws_07_0100.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188202642.xml",
+ "uri":"dws_07_0200.html",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813598592.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"410",
+ "code":"290",
"des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Server Tool",
+ "kw":"DataCheck",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
- "title":"Server Tool",
+ "title":"DataCheck",
+ "githuburl":""
+ },
+ {
+ "uri":"dws_07_0201.html",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813438820.xml",
+ "product_code":"dws",
+ "code":"291",
+ "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
+ "doc_type":"tg",
+ "kw":"Introduction to DataCheck",
+ "search_title":"",
+ "metedata":[
+ {
+ "prodname":"dws",
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
+ }
+ ],
+ "title":"Introduction to DataCheck",
+ "githuburl":""
+ },
+ {
+ "uri":"dws_07_0202.html",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860198909.xml",
+ "product_code":"dws",
+ "code":"292",
+ "des":"To ensure a complete and accurate database migration when switching to GaussDB(DWS) database, you need to migrate your data and SQL scripts, and check the data after migr",
+ "doc_type":"tg",
+ "kw":"Overview,Introduction to DataCheck,Tools Guide",
+ "search_title":"",
+ "metedata":[
+ {
+ "prodname":"dws",
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
+ }
+ ],
+ "title":"Overview",
+ "githuburl":""
+ },
+ {
+ "uri":"dws_07_0203.html",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860318861.xml",
+ "product_code":"dws",
+ "code":"293",
+ "des":"The following table lists the source databases supported by DataCheck.The following table lists the destination databases supported by DataCheck.Hardware requirementsTabl",
+ "doc_type":"tg",
+ "kw":"Operating Environment,Introduction to DataCheck,Tools Guide",
+ "search_title":"",
+ "metedata":[
+ {
+ "prodname":"dws",
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
+ }
+ ],
+ "title":"Operating Environment",
+ "githuburl":""
+ },
+ {
+ "uri":"dws_07_0204.html",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813439080.xml",
+ "product_code":"dws",
+ "code":"294",
+ "des":"Support data check for source databases such as GaussDB(DWS), MySQL, and PostgreSQL, with the destination database being GaussDB(DWS).Check common fields, such as numeric",
+ "doc_type":"tg",
+ "kw":"Basic Functions of DataCheck,DataCheck,Tools Guide",
+ "search_title":"",
+ "metedata":[
+ {
+ "prodname":"dws",
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
+ }
+ ],
+ "title":"Basic Functions of DataCheck",
+ "githuburl":""
+ },
+ {
+ "uri":"dws_07_0205.html",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813598956.xml",
+ "product_code":"dws",
+ "code":"295",
+ "des":"The server is compatible with 64-bit operating systems and can run on either Linux or Windows.Either JDK 1.8 or JRE 1.8 has been installed on the system.The DataCheck too",
+ "doc_type":"tg",
+ "kw":"Downloading and Installing DataCheck,DataCheck,Tools Guide",
+ "search_title":"",
+ "metedata":[
+ {
+ "prodname":"dws",
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
+ }
+ ],
+ "title":"Downloading and Installing DataCheck",
+ "githuburl":""
+ },
+ {
+ "uri":"dws_07_0206.html",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813438708.xml",
+ "product_code":"dws",
+ "code":"296",
+ "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
+ "doc_type":"tg",
+ "kw":"Configuring DataCheck",
+ "search_title":"",
+ "metedata":[
+ {
+ "prodname":"dws",
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
+ }
+ ],
+ "title":"Configuring DataCheck",
+ "githuburl":""
+ },
+ {
+ "uri":"dws_07_0207.html",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813598816.xml",
+ "product_code":"dws",
+ "code":"297",
+ "des":"The dbinfo.properties file contains a series of application configuration parameters, which are used to connect the source database and the destination GaussDB(DWS) datab",
+ "doc_type":"tg",
+ "kw":"Configuration of dbinfo.properties,Configuring DataCheck,Tools Guide",
+ "search_title":"",
+ "metedata":[
+ {
+ "prodname":"dws",
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
+ }
+ ],
+ "title":"Configuration of dbinfo.properties",
+ "githuburl":""
+ },
+ {
+ "uri":"dws_07_0208.html",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860318817.xml",
+ "product_code":"dws",
+ "code":"298",
+ "des":"The check_input.xlsx file includes user input details such as schema, original table name, destination table name, specified column name (all columns are checked by defau",
+ "doc_type":"tg",
+ "kw":"Configuration of check_input.xlsx,Configuring DataCheck,Tools Guide",
+ "search_title":"",
+ "metedata":[
+ {
+ "prodname":"dws",
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
+ }
+ ],
+ "title":"Configuration of check_input.xlsx",
+ "githuburl":""
+ },
+ {
+ "uri":"dws_07_0209.html",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860318517.xml",
+ "product_code":"dws",
+ "code":"299",
+ "des":"Before starting DataCheck, configure the dbinfo.properties and check_input.xlsx files in the config folder. Incorrect parameter settings will cause DataCheck execution er",
+ "doc_type":"tg",
+ "kw":"Using DataCheck,DataCheck,Tools Guide",
+ "search_title":"",
+ "metedata":[
+ {
+ "prodname":"dws",
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
+ }
+ ],
+ "title":"Using DataCheck",
+ "githuburl":""
+ },
+ {
+ "uri":"dws_07_0100.html",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813598780.xml",
+ "product_code":"dws",
+ "code":"300",
+ "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
+ "doc_type":"tg",
+ "kw":"Server Tools",
+ "search_title":"",
+ "metedata":[
+ {
+ "prodname":"dws",
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
+ }
+ ],
+ "title":"Server Tools",
"githuburl":""
},
{
"uri":"dws_07_0101.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188362608.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860198597.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"411",
+ "code":"301",
"des":"gs_dump is tool provided by GaussDB(DWS) to export database information. You can export a database or its objects, such as schemas, tables, and views. The database can be",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"gs_dump,Server Tool,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"gs_dump,Server Tools,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"gs_dump",
@@ -7402,17 +5723,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_07_0102.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001233922249.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860318545.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"412",
+ "code":"302",
"des":"gs_dumpall is a tool provided by GaussDB(DWS) to export all database information, including the data of the default postgres database, data of user-specified databases, a",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"gs_dumpall,Server Tool,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"gs_dumpall,Server Tools,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"gs_dumpall",
@@ -7420,17 +5742,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_07_0103.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188521068.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860198833.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"413",
+ "code":"303",
"des":"gs_restore is a tool provided by GaussDB(DWS) to import data that was exported using gs_dump. It can also be used to import files that were exported using gs_dump.It has ",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"gs_restore,Server Tool,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"gs_restore,Server Tools,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"gs_restore",
@@ -7438,17 +5761,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_07_0104.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001234200661.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860318753.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"414",
+ "code":"304",
"des":"gds_check is used to check the GDS deployment environment, including the OS parameters, network environment, and disk usage. It also supports the recovery of system param",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"gds_check,Server Tool,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"gds_check,Server Tools,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"gds_check",
@@ -7456,17 +5780,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_07_0106.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001234200667.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860198857.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"415",
+ "code":"305",
"des":"gds_install is a script tool used to install GDS in batches, improving GDS deployment efficiency.Configure environment variables before executing the script. For details,",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"gds_install,Server Tool,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"gds_install,Server Tools,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"gds_install",
@@ -7474,17 +5799,18 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_07_0107.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001234042127.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001860198605.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"416",
+ "code":"306",
"des":"gds_uninstall is a script tool used to uninstall GDS in batches.Set environment variables before executing the script. For details, see \"Importing Data > Using a Foreign ",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"gds_uninstall,Server Tool,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"gds_uninstall,Server Tools,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"gds_uninstall",
@@ -7492,53 +5818,37 @@
},
{
"uri":"dws_07_0105.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188362580.xml",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001813598708.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"417",
+ "code":"307",
"des":"gds_ctl is a script tool used for starting or stopping GDS service processes in batches. You can start or stop GDS service processes, which use the same port, on multiple",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"gds_ctl,Server Tool,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"gds_ctl,Server Tools,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"gds_ctl",
"githuburl":""
},
{
- "uri":"dws_07_0108.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001188202530.xml",
+ "uri":"dws_07_3333.html",
+ "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000002222945173.xml",
"product_code":"dws",
- "code":"418",
- "des":"During cluster installation, you need to execute commands and transfer files among hosts in the cluster. Therefore, mutual trust relationships must be established among t",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"gs_sshexkey,Server Tool,Tool Guide",
- "search_title":"",
- "metedata":[
- {
- "prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
- }
- ],
- "title":"gs_sshexkey",
- "githuburl":""
- },
- {
- "uri":"dws_07_0173.html",
- "node_id":"en-us_topic_0000001376268154.xml",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "code":"419",
+ "code":"308",
"des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "kw":"Change History,Tool Guide",
+ "kw":"Change History,Tools Guide",
"search_title":"",
"metedata":[
{
"prodname":"dws",
- "documenttype":"tg"
+ "documenttype":"tg",
+ "opensource":"true"
}
],
"title":"Change History",
diff --git a/docs/dws/tool/CLASS.TXT.json b/docs/dws/tool/CLASS.TXT.json
index 79577b629..34c09234f 100644
--- a/docs/dws/tool/CLASS.TXT.json
+++ b/docs/dws/tool/CLASS.TXT.json
@@ -9,7 +9,7 @@
"code":"1"
},
{
- "desc":"Log in to the GaussDB(DWS) management console at: https://console.otc.t-systems.com/dws/You can download the following tools:gsql CLI client: The gsql tool package contai",
+ "desc":"You can download the following tools:CLI client: The gsql tool package contains the gsql client tool, GDS (parallel data loading tool), gs_dump, gs_dumpall, and gs_restor",
"product_code":"dws",
"title":"Downloading Related Tools",
"uri":"dws_07_0002.html",
@@ -36,13 +36,49 @@
"code":"4"
},
{
- "desc":"For details about how to download and install gsql and connect it to the cluster database, see section \"Using the gsql CLI Client to Connect to a Cluster\" in the Data War",
+ "desc":"GaussDB(DWS) provides client tool packages that match the cluster versions. You can download the desired client tool package on the GaussDB(DWS) console.The client tool p",
+ "product_code":"dws",
+ "title":"Downloading the Client",
+ "uri":"dws_gsql_004.html",
+ "doc_type":"tg",
+ "p_code":"3",
+ "code":"5"
+ },
+ {
+ "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
"product_code":"dws",
"title":"Instruction",
"uri":"dws_gsql_003.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
"p_code":"3",
- "code":"5"
+ "code":"6"
+ },
+ {
+ "desc":"This section describes how to connect to a database through an SQL client after you create a data warehouse cluster and before you use the cluster's database. GaussDB(DWS",
+ "product_code":"dws",
+ "title":"Using the Linux gsql Client to Connect to a Cluster",
+ "uri":"dws_gsql_009.html",
+ "doc_type":"tg",
+ "p_code":"6",
+ "code":"7"
+ },
+ {
+ "desc":"This section describes how to connect to a database through an SQL client after you create a data warehouse cluster and before you use the cluster's database. GaussDB(DWS",
+ "product_code":"dws",
+ "title":"Using the Windows gsql Client to Connect to a Cluster",
+ "uri":"dws_gsql_010.html",
+ "doc_type":"tg",
+ "p_code":"6",
+ "code":"8"
+ },
+ {
+ "desc":"GaussDB(DWS) supports the standard SSL. As a highly secure protocol, SSL authenticates bidirectional identification between the server and client using digital signatures",
+ "product_code":"dws",
+ "title":"Establishing Secure TCP/IP Connections in SSL Mode",
+ "uri":"dws_gsql_011.html",
+ "doc_type":"tg",
+ "p_code":"6",
+ "code":"9"
},
{
"desc":"When a database is being connected, run the following commands to obtain the help information:gsql --helpThe following information is displayed:......\nUsage:\n gsql [OPTI",
@@ -51,7 +87,7 @@
"uri":"dws_gsql_005.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
"p_code":"3",
- "code":"6"
+ "code":"10"
},
{
"desc":"For details about gsql parameters, see Table 1, Table 2, Table 3, and Table 4.",
@@ -60,7 +96,7 @@
"uri":"dws_gsql_006.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
"p_code":"3",
- "code":"7"
+ "code":"11"
},
{
"desc":"This section describes meta-commands provided by gsql after the GaussDB(DWS) database CLI tool is used to connect to a database. A gsql meta-command can be anything that ",
@@ -69,7 +105,7 @@
"uri":"dws_gsql_007.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
"p_code":"3",
- "code":"8"
+ "code":"12"
},
{
"desc":"The database kernel slowly runs the initialization statement.Problems are difficult to locate in this scenario. Try using the strace Linux trace command.strace gsql -U My",
@@ -78,7 +114,7 @@
"uri":"dws_gsql_008.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
"p_code":"3",
- "code":"9"
+ "code":"13"
},
{
"desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
@@ -87,16 +123,16 @@
"uri":"dws_ds_index.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
"p_code":"",
- "code":"10"
+ "code":"14"
},
{
"desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
"product_code":"dws",
"title":"About Data Studio",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_09.html",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_001.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"10",
- "code":"11"
+ "p_code":"14",
+ "code":"15"
},
{
"desc":"Data Studio provides a graphical interface which supports essential features of the database. This simplifies database development and application building tasks.Data Stu",
@@ -104,1223 +140,368 @@
"title":"Overview",
"uri":"dws_07_0012.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"11",
- "code":"12"
+ "p_code":"15",
+ "code":"16"
},
{
- "desc":"This section describes the constraints and limitations for using Data Studio.The filter count and filtering status of the tree are not supported.If the SQL statement, DDL",
+ "desc":"This section describes the constraints and limitations for using Data Studio.If the SQL statement, DDL, object name, or data to be viewed contains Chinese characters, set",
"product_code":"dws",
"title":"Constraints and Limitations",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_12.html",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_003.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"11",
- "code":"13"
- },
- {
- "desc":"The release package structure of Data Studio is as follows:",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Structure of a Release Package",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_13.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"11",
- "code":"14"
+ "p_code":"15",
+ "code":"17"
},
{
"desc":"This section describes the minimum system requirements for using Data Studio.OSThe following table lists the OS requirements of Data Studio.BrowserThe following table lis",
"product_code":"dws",
"title":"System Requirements",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_14.html",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_004.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"11",
- "code":"15"
- },
- {
- "desc":"This section describes the installation and configuration steps to use Data Studio. It also explains the steps to configure servers for debugging PL/SQL Functions.On the ",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Installing and Configuring Data Studio",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_16.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"10",
- "code":"16"
- },
- {
- "desc":"This section describes how to start Data Studio.The StartDataStudio.bat batch file checks the version of Operating System (OS), Java and Data Studio as a prerequisite to ",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Quick Start",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_19.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"10",
- "code":"17"
- },
- {
- "desc":"This section describes the Data Studio GUI.The Data Studio GUI contains the following:Main Menu provides basic operations.Toolbarcontains buttons for easy access to frequ",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Data Studio GUI",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_20.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"10",
+ "p_code":"15",
"code":"18"
},
+ {
+ "desc":"In the navigation pane on the left, choose Settings > Preferences. You can customize Data Studio based on preferences.",
+ "product_code":"dws",
+ "title":"Customizing Data Studio",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_005.html",
+ "doc_type":"tg",
+ "p_code":"15",
+ "code":"19"
+ },
+ {
+ "desc":"Only JDK 1.8 is supported.In the Windows operating system, you can download the required JDK version from the official website of SDK, and install it by following the ins",
+ "product_code":"dws",
+ "title":"Downloading and Installing the Data Studio Client",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_006.html",
+ "doc_type":"tg",
+ "p_code":"14",
+ "code":"20"
+ },
+ {
+ "desc":"This section describes the configuration steps to use Data Studio. It also explains the steps to configure servers for debugging PL/SQL Functions.Steps to configure Data ",
+ "product_code":"dws",
+ "title":"Configuring Data Studio",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_007.html",
+ "doc_type":"tg",
+ "p_code":"14",
+ "code":"21"
+ },
+ {
+ "desc":"Data Studio can connect to the database using the Secure Sockets Layer [SSL] option. To use the SSL connection mode, you must configure related parameters on the client o",
+ "product_code":"dws",
+ "title":"Configuring SSL Connection",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_008.html",
+ "doc_type":"tg",
+ "p_code":"14",
+ "code":"22"
+ },
+ {
+ "desc":"When Data Studio is started, the New Database Connection dialog box is displayed by default. To perform database operations, Data Studio must be connected to at least one",
+ "product_code":"dws",
+ "title":"Connection Management",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_34.html",
+ "doc_type":"tg",
+ "p_code":"14",
+ "code":"23"
+ },
{
"desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
"product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Data Studio Menus",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_21.html",
+ "title":"Database Management",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_012.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"10",
- "code":"19"
- },
- {
- "desc":"The Filemenu contains database connection options. Click File from main menu or press Alt+F to open the File menu.Follow the steps below to stop Data Studio:Alternatively",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"File",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_22.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"19",
- "code":"20"
- },
- {
- "desc":"The Editmenu contains clipboard, Format, Find and Replace, andSearch Objectsoperations to use in the PL/SQL Viewer and SQL Terminal tab. Press Alt+E to open the Edit menu",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Edit",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_23.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"19",
- "code":"21"
- },
- {
- "desc":"The Runmenu contains options to execute a database object in the PL/SQL Viewer tab and to execute SQL statements in the SQL Terminal tab. Press Alt+R to open the Run menu",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Run",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_24.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"19",
- "code":"22"
- },
- {
- "desc":"The Debugmenu contains debug operations in the PL/SQL Viewer and SQL Terminal tab. Press Alt+D to open the Debug menu.",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Debug",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_25.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"19",
- "code":"23"
- },
- {
- "desc":"The Settingsmenu contains the option to change the language. Press Alt+G to open the Settings menu.",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Settings",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_26.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"19",
+ "p_code":"14",
"code":"24"
},
{
- "desc":"The Helpmenu contains the user manual and version information of Data Studio. Press Alt+H to open the Help menu.Visit https://java.com/en/download/help/path.xml to set th",
+ "desc":"A relational database contains a set of tables that can be operated based on the relational model of data. A relational database contains a group of data objects for stor",
"product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Help",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_27.html",
+ "title":"Database Management",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_013.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"19",
+ "p_code":"24",
"code":"25"
},
{
- "desc":"The following image shows the toolbar:The toolbar contains the following operations:Adding a ConnectionRemoving a ConnectionConnecting to a DatabaseDisconnecting a Databa",
+ "desc":"This section introduces how to use the database schema. All system schemas are grouped in Catalogs, and user schemas are grouped in Schemas.Only refresh can be performed ",
"product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Data Studio Toolbar",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_28.html",
+ "title":"Schema Management",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_014.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"10",
+ "p_code":"24",
"code":"26"
},
{
- "desc":"This section describes the right-click menus of Data Studio.The following figure shows the Object Browser pane.Right-clicking the connection name allows you to select Ren",
+ "desc":"Right-click Functions/Procedures and a menu is displayed.The asterisk (*) next to the procedure name indicates that the procedure is not compiled or added to Object Brows",
"product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Data Studio Right-Click Menus",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_29.html",
+ "title":"Function/Procedure Management",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_015.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"10",
+ "p_code":"24",
"code":"27"
},
{
"desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
"product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Connection Profiles",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_32.html",
+ "title":"Table Management",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_016.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"10",
+ "p_code":"24",
"code":"28"
},
{
- "desc":"When Data Studio is started, the New Database Connection dialog box will open by default. To perform any DB operations, Data Studio must be connected to at least one data",
+ "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
"product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Overview",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_33.html",
+ "title":"Creating a Regular Table",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_017.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
"p_code":"28",
"code":"29"
},
{
- "desc":"Performing the following steps to establish a new database connection.click on the toolbar, or press Ctrl+N to connect to the database. The New Database Connection dialo",
+ "desc":"A table is a logical structure maintained by a database administrator and consists of rows and columns. You can define a table as a part of your data definitions from the",
"product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Adding a Connection",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_34.html",
+ "title":"Defining a Regular Table",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_72.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"28",
+ "p_code":"29",
"code":"30"
},
{
- "desc":"Follow the steps below to rename a database connection:A Rename Connection dialog box is displayed prompting you to provide the new name for the connection.The status bar",
+ "desc":"After creating a table, you can create a new column, rename a column, and modify attributes in the table.The Add New Column dialog box is displayed prompting you to add i",
"product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Renaming a Connection",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_35.html",
+ "title":"Managing Columns",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_73.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"28",
+ "p_code":"29",
"code":"31"
},
{
- "desc":"Follow the steps below to edit the database connection properties:Editing an active connection will require closing the connection and then reopening the connection with ",
+ "desc":"Creating, dropping, and renaming constraints for a created table.Constraints cannot be added to column-store tables.The Add New Constraint dialog box is displayed prompti",
"product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Editing a Connection",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_36.html",
+ "title":"Managing Constraints",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_74.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"28",
+ "p_code":"29",
"code":"32"
},
{
- "desc":"Follow the steps below to remove an existing database connection:A confirmation dialog box is displayed to remove the connection.The status bar displays the status of the",
+ "desc":"You can create indexes in a table to search for data efficiently.After a table is created, you can add indexes to it.The Create Index dialog box is displayed.The Set Tabl",
"product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Removing a Connection",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_37.html",
+ "title":"Managing Indexes",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_75.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"28",
+ "p_code":"29",
"code":"33"
},
{
- "desc":"Follow the steps below to view the properties of a connection:The status bar displays the status of the completed operation.Properties of the selected connection is displ",
+ "desc":"Partitioning refers to splitting what is logically one large table into smaller physical pieces based on specific schemes. The table based on the logic is called a partit",
"product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Viewing Connection Properties",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_38.html",
+ "title":"Creating a Partitioned Table",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_018.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
"p_code":"28",
"code":"34"
},
{
- "desc":"Follow the steps below to refresh the database connection:The status bar displays the status of the completed operation.The time taken to refresh the database depends on ",
+ "desc":"After creating a table, you can query, edit, and analyze the table and table data.Right-click the selected table and select View Table Data. The View Table Data tab is di",
"product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Refreshing a Database Connection",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_39.html",
+ "title":"Managing Table Data",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_98.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
"p_code":"28",
"code":"35"
},
- {
- "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Databases",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_40.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"10",
- "code":"36"
- },
- {
- "desc":"A relational database is a database that has a set of tables which is manipulated in accordance with the relational model of data. It contains a set of data objects used ",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Creating a Database",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_41.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"36",
- "code":"37"
- },
- {
- "desc":"You can disconnect all the databases from a connection.Follow the steps below to disconnect all the databases from a connection:This operation can be performed only when ",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Disconnecting All Databases",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_42.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"36",
- "code":"38"
- },
- {
- "desc":"You can connect to the database.Follow the steps below to connect a database:This operation can be performed only on an inactive database.The database is connected.The st",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Connecting to a Database",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_43.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"36",
- "code":"39"
- },
- {
- "desc":"You can disconnect the database.Follow the steps below to disconnect a database:This operation can be performed only on an active database.A confirmation dialog box is di",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Disconnecting a Database",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_44.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"36",
- "code":"40"
- },
- {
- "desc":"Follow the steps below to rename a database:This operation can be performed only on an inactive database.A Rename Database dialog box is displayed prompting you to provid",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Renaming a Database",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_45.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"36",
- "code":"41"
- },
- {
- "desc":"Individual or batch drop can be performed on databases. Refer to Dropping a Batch of Objects section for batch drop.Follow the steps below to drop a database:This operati",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Dropping a Database",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_46.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"36",
- "code":"42"
- },
- {
- "desc":"Follow the steps below to view the properties of a database:This operation can be performed only on an active database.The status bar displays the status of the completed",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Viewing Properties of a Database",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_47.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"36",
- "code":"43"
- },
- {
- "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Schemas",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_48.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"10",
- "code":"44"
- },
- {
- "desc":"This section describes working with database schemas. All system schemas are grouped under Catalogs and user schemas under Schemas.",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Overview",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_49.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"44",
- "code":"45"
- },
- {
- "desc":"In relational database technology, schemas provide a logical classification of objects in the database. Some of the objects that a schema may contain include functions/pr",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Creating a Schema",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_50.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"44",
- "code":"46"
- },
- {
- "desc":"Exporting the schema DDL exports the DDLs of functions/procedures, tables, sequences and views of the schema.Follow the steps to export the schema DDL:The Data Studio Sec",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Exporting Schema DDL",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_51.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"44",
- "code":"47"
- },
- {
- "desc":"The exported schema DDL and data include the following:DDLs of functions/procedures of the schema.DDLs and data of tables of the schema.DDLs of views of the schema.DDLs o",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Exporting Schema DDL and Data",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_52.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"44",
- "code":"48"
- },
- {
- "desc":"Follow the steps to rename a schema:You can view the renamed schema in the Object Browser.The status bar displays the status of the completed operation.",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Renaming a Schema",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_53.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"44",
- "code":"49"
- },
- {
- "desc":"Data Studio provides the option to show sequence DDL or allow users to export sequence DDL. It provides \"Show DDL\", \"Export DDL\", \"Export DDL and Data\"Follow the steps to",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Supporting Sequence DDL",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_201.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"44",
- "code":"50"
- },
- {
- "desc":"Follow the steps below to grant/revoke a privilege:The Grant/Revoke dialog is displayed.In SQL Preview tab, you can view the SQL query automatically generated for the inp",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Granting/Revoking a Privilege",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_54.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"44",
- "code":"51"
- },
- {
- "desc":"Individual or batch dropping can be performed on schemas. Refer to Dropping a Batch of Objects section for batch dropping.Follow the steps below to drop a schema:A confir",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Dropping a Schema",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_55.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"44",
- "code":"52"
- },
- {
- "desc":"Perform the following steps to create a function/procedure and SQL function:The selected template is displayed in the new tab of Data Studio.The Created function/procedur",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Creating a Function/Procedure",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_57.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"10",
- "code":"53"
- },
- {
- "desc":"Follow the steps below to open and edit the function/procedure or SQL function:The function/procedure or SQL function based on your selection is displayed.Only one functi",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Editing a Function/Procedure",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_58.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"10",
- "code":"54"
- },
- {
- "desc":"Perform the following steps to grant or revoke a permission:The Grant/Revoke dialog box is displayed.The Privilege Selection tab is displayed.The SQL Preview tab displays",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Granting/Revoking a Permission (Function/Procedure)",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_59.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"10",
- "code":"55"
- },
- {
- "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Debugging a PL/SQL Function",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_62.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"10",
- "code":"56"
- },
- {
- "desc":"During debugging, if the connection is lost but the database remains connected to Object Browser, the Connection Errordialog box is displayed with the following options:Y",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Overview",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_621.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"56",
- "code":"57"
- },
- {
- "desc":"This section contains the following topics:Using the Breakpoints PaneSetting or Adding Breakpoints on a RowEnabling or Disabling a Breakpoint on a RowRemoving a Breakpoin",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Using Breakpoints",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_622.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"56",
- "code":"58"
- },
- {
- "desc":"This section contains the following topics:Starting DebuggingStepping Through a PL/SQL FunctionContinuing the Debug ExecutionViewing CallstackSelect the function that you",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Controlling Execution",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_623.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"56",
- "code":"59"
- },
- {
- "desc":"When you use Data Studio, you can examine debugging information through several debugging tabs. This section describes how to check the debugging information:Operating on",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Checking Debugging Information",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_624.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"56",
- "code":"60"
- },
- {
- "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Working with Functions/Procedures",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_60.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"10",
- "code":"61"
- },
- {
- "desc":"This section provides you with details on working with functions/procedures and SQL functions in Data Studio.Data Studio supports PL/pgSQL and SQL languages for the opera",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Overview",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_61.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"61",
- "code":"62"
- },
- {
- "desc":"Data Studio suggests a list of possible schema names, table names, column names, views, sequences, and functions in thePL/SQL Viewer.Follow the steps below to select a DB",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Selecting a DB Object in the PL/SQL Viewer",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_63.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"61",
- "code":"63"
- },
- {
- "desc":"Follow the steps below to export the function/procedure DDL:The Data Studio Security Disclaimer dialog box is displayed.The Save As dialog box is displayed.To cancel the ",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Exporting a Function/Procedure DDL",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_64.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"61",
- "code":"64"
- },
- {
- "desc":"Data Studio allows you to view table properties, procedures/functions and SQL functions.Follow the steps below to view table properties:The properties of the selected tab",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Viewing Object Properties in the PL/SQL Viewer",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_65.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"61",
- "code":"65"
- },
- {
- "desc":"Individual or batch drop can be performed on functions/procedures. Refer to Dropping a Batch of Objects section for batch drop.Follow the steps below to drop a function/p",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Dropping a Function/Procedure",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_66.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"61",
- "code":"66"
- },
- {
- "desc":"After you connect to the database, all the stored functions/procedures and tables will be automatically populated in the Object Browser pane. You can use Data Studio to e",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Executing a Function/Procedure",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_67.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"61",
- "code":"67"
- },
- {
- "desc":"Follow the steps below to grant/revoke a privilege:The Grant/Revoke dialog box is displayed.",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Granting/Revoking a Privilege",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_68.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"61",
- "code":"68"
- },
- {
- "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"GaussDB(DWS) Tables",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_69.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"10",
- "code":"69"
- },
- {
- "desc":"This section describes how to manage tables efficiently.You need to configure all mandatory parameters to complete the operation. Mandatory parameters are marked with an ",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Table Management Overview",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_70.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"69",
- "code":"70"
- },
- {
- "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Creating Regular Table",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_71.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"69",
- "code":"71"
- },
- {
- "desc":"This section describes how to create a common table.A table is a logical structure maintained by a database administrator and consists of rows and columns. You can define",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Overview",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_72.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"71",
- "code":"72"
- },
- {
- "desc":"After creating a table, you can add new columns in that table. You can also perform the following operations on the existing column only for a Regular table:Creating a Ne",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Working with Columns",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_73.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"71",
- "code":"73"
- },
- {
- "desc":"You can perform the following operations after a table is created only for a Regular table:Creating a ConstraintRenaming a ConstraintDropping a ConstraintFollow the steps",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Working with Constraints",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_74.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"71",
- "code":"74"
- },
- {
- "desc":"You can create indexes in a table to search for data efficiently.After a table is created, you can add indexes to it. You can perform the following operations only in a c",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Managing Indexes",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_75.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"71",
- "code":"75"
- },
- {
- "desc":"Foreign tables created using query execution in SQL Terminal or any other tool can be viewed in the Object browser after refresh.GDS Foreign table is denoted with icon b",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Creating Foreign Table",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_76.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"69",
- "code":"76"
- },
- {
- "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Creating Partition Table",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_77.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"69",
- "code":"77"
- },
- {
- "desc":"Partitioning refers to splitting what is logically one large table into smaller physical pieces based on specific schemes. The table based on the logic is called a partit",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Overview",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_78.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"77",
- "code":"78"
- },
- {
- "desc":"After creating a table, you can add/modify partitions. You can also perform the following operations on an existing partition:Renaming a PartitionDropping a PartitionFoll",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Working with Partitions",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_79.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"77",
- "code":"79"
- },
- {
- "desc":"Follow the steps below to grant/revoke a privilege:The Grant/Revoke dialog box is displayed.In the SQL Preview tab, you can view the SQL query automatically generated for",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Grant/Revoke Privilege - Regular/Partition Table",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_80.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"69",
- "code":"80"
- },
- {
- "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Managing Table",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_81.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"69",
- "code":"81"
- },
- {
- "desc":"This section describes how to manage tables efficiently.You need to configure all mandatory parameters to complete the operation. Mandatory parameters are marked with ast",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Overview",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_82.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"81",
- "code":"82"
- },
- {
- "desc":"Follow the steps below to rename a table:The Rename Table dialog box is displayed prompting you to provide the new name.Data Studio displays the status of the operation i",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Renaming a Table",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_83.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"81",
- "code":"83"
- },
- {
- "desc":"Follow the steps below to truncate a table:Data Studio prompts you to confirm this operation.A popup message and status bar display the status of the completed operation.",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Truncating a Table",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_84.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"81",
- "code":"84"
- },
- {
- "desc":"Index facilitate lookup of records. You need to reindex tables in the following scenarios:The index is corrupted and no longer contains valid data. Although in theory thi",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Reindexing a Table",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_85.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"81",
- "code":"85"
- },
- {
- "desc":"The analyzing table operation collects statistics about tables and table indicies and stores the collected information in internal tables of the database where the query ",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Analyzing a Table",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_86.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"81",
- "code":"86"
- },
- {
- "desc":"Vacuuming table operation reclaims space and makes it available for re-use.Follow the steps below to vacuum the table:The Vacuum Table message and status bar display the ",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Vacuuming a Table",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_87.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"81",
- "code":"87"
- },
- {
- "desc":"Follow the steps below to set the description of a table:The Update Table Description dialog box is displayed. It prompts you to set the table description.The status bar ",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Setting the Table Description",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_88.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"81",
- "code":"88"
- },
- {
- "desc":"Follow the steps below to set a schema:The Set Schema dialog box is displayed, prompting you to select the new schema for the selected table.The status bar displays the s",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Setting the Schema",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_90.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"81",
- "code":"89"
- },
- {
- "desc":"Individual or batch dropping can be performed on tables. Refer to Dropping a Batch of Objects section for batch dropping.This operation removes the complete table structu",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Dropping a Table",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_91.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"81",
- "code":"90"
- },
- {
- "desc":"Perform the following operations to view the table properties:Data Studio displays the properties (General, Columns, Constraints, and Index) of the selected table in diff",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Viewing Table Properties",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_92.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"81",
- "code":"91"
- },
- {
- "desc":"Follow the steps below to grant/revoke a privilege:The Grant/Revoke dialog is displayed.",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Grant/Revoke Privilege",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_93.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"81",
- "code":"92"
- },
- {
- "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Managing Table Data",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_94.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"69",
- "code":"93"
- },
- {
- "desc":"This section describes how to manage table data.",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Overview",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_95.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"93",
- "code":"94"
- },
- {
- "desc":"Follow the steps below to export the table DDL:The Data Studio Security Disclaimer dialog box is displayed.The Save As dialog box is displayed.To cancel the export operat",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Exporting Table DDL",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_96.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"93",
- "code":"95"
- },
- {
- "desc":"The exported table DDL and data include the following:DDL of the table.Columns and rows of the table.Follow the steps below to export the table DDL:The Data Studio Securi",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Exporting Table DDL and Data",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_97.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"93",
- "code":"96"
- },
- {
- "desc":"Perform the following steps to export table data:The Export Table Datadialog box is displayed with the following options:Format: Table data can be exported in Excel (xlsx",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Exporting Table Data",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_98.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"93",
- "code":"97"
- },
- {
- "desc":"To display a DDL query for a table, perform the following steps:Data Studio displays the DDL of the selected table.A new terminal window is opened each time you select to",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Show DDL",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_99.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"93",
- "code":"98"
- },
- {
- "desc":"Prerequisites:If the definition of the source file does not match that of the destination table, modify the properties of the destination table in the Import Table Data d",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Importing Table Data",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_100.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"93",
- "code":"99"
- },
- {
- "desc":"Follow the steps to view table data:The View Table Data tab is displayed where you can view the table data information.Toolbar menu in the View Table Data window:Icons in",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Viewing Table Data",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_101.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"93",
- "code":"100"
- },
- {
- "desc":"Follow the steps below to edit table data:The Edit Table data tab is displayed.Refer to Viewing Table Data for description on copy and search toolbar options.Data Studio ",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Editing Table Data",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_102.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"93",
- "code":"101"
- },
{
"desc":"Data Studio allows you to edit temporary tables. Temporary tables are deleted automatically when you close the connection that was used to create the table.Ensure that co",
"product_code":"dws",
"title":"Editing Temporary Tables",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_103.html",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_020.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"69",
- "code":"102"
+ "p_code":"28",
+ "code":"36"
},
{
- "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
+ "desc":"Currently, Data Studio does not support foreign table creation. You can only view foreign tables.Foreign tables created using query execution in SQL Terminal or any other",
"product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Sequences",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_104.html",
+ "title":"Creating a Foreign Table",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_021.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"10",
- "code":"103"
+ "p_code":"28",
+ "code":"37"
},
{
- "desc":"Follow the steps below to create a sequence:The Create New Sequence dialog box is displayed.Enter a name in the Sequence Name field.Select theCase check box to retain the",
+ "desc":"Right-click the Views and select Create View. The DDL template for the view is displayed in the SQL Terminal tab.Right-click the selected view and select Show DDL.The DDL",
"product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Creating Sequence",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_105.html",
+ "title":"View Management",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_022.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"103",
- "code":"104"
+ "p_code":"24",
+ "code":"38"
},
{
- "desc":"Follow the steps below to grant/revoke a privilege:The Grant/Revoke dialog is displayed.In the SQL Preview tab, you can view the SQL query automatically generated for the",
+ "desc":"Enter a name in the Sequence Name field.Select the Case check box to retain the capitalization of the text entered in Sequence Name field. For example, if the entered seq",
"product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Grant/Revoke Privilege",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_106.html",
+ "title":"Sequence Management",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_023.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"103",
- "code":"105"
+ "p_code":"24",
+ "code":"39"
},
{
- "desc":"You can perform the following operations on an existing sequence:Granting/Revoking a PrivilegeDropping a SequenceDropping a Sequence CascadeIndividual or batch dropping c",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Working with Sequences",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_107.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"103",
- "code":"106"
- },
- {
- "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Views",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_108.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"10",
- "code":"107"
- },
- {
- "desc":"Follow the steps below to create a new view:The DDL template for the view is displayed in the SQL Terminal tab.You can view the new view in the Object Browser.The status ",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Creating a View",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_109.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"107",
- "code":"108"
- },
- {
- "desc":"Follow the steps below to grant/revoke a privilege:The Grant/Revoke dialog box is displayed.In the SQL Preview tab, you can view the SQL query automatically generated for",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Granting/Revoking a Privilege",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_110.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"107",
- "code":"109"
- },
- {
- "desc":"Views can be created to restrict access to specific rows or columns of a table. A view can be created from one or more tables and is determined by the query used to creat",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Working with Views",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_111.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"107",
- "code":"110"
- },
- {
- "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
+ "desc":"A database is used by many users, and the users are grouped for management convenience. A database role represents a database user or a group of database users.Users and ",
"product_code":"dws",
"title":"Users/Roles",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_115.html",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_024.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"10",
- "code":"111"
- },
- {
- "desc":"A database is used by many users, and the users are grouped for management convenience. A database role can be one or a group of database users.Users and roles have simil",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Creating a User/Role",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_116.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"111",
- "code":"112"
- },
- {
- "desc":"You can perform the following operations on an existing user/role:Dropping a User/RoleViewing/Editing User/Role PropertiesViewing the User/Role DDLFollow the steps below ",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Working with Users/Roles",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_117.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"111",
- "code":"113"
+ "p_code":"24",
+ "code":"40"
},
{
"desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
"product_code":"dws",
- "title":"SQL Terminal",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_118.html",
+ "title":"SQL Terminal Management",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_025.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"10",
- "code":"114"
+ "p_code":"14",
+ "code":"41"
},
{
"desc":"You can open multiple SQL Terminal tabs in Data Studio to execute multiple SQL statements for query in the current SQL Terminal tab. Perform the following steps to open a",
"product_code":"dws",
"title":"Opening Multiple SQL Terminal Tabs",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_119.html",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_026.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"114",
- "code":"115"
+ "p_code":"41",
+ "code":"42"
},
{
- "desc":"Data Studio allows viewing and managing frequently used SQL queries. The history of executed SQL queries is maintained only for the SQL Terminal.Follow the steps to view ",
+ "desc":"Data Studio allows viewing and managing frequently used SQL queries. The history of executed SQL queries is maintained only for the SQL Terminal.SQL history scripts are n",
"product_code":"dws",
"title":"Managing the SQL Query Execution History",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_120.html",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_027.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"114",
- "code":"116"
+ "p_code":"41",
+ "code":"43"
},
{
"desc":"Follow the steps to open an SQL script:If the SQL Terminal has existing content, then there will be an option to overwrite the existing content or append content to it.Th",
"product_code":"dws",
"title":"Opening and Saving SQL Scripts",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_121.html",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_028.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"114",
- "code":"117"
+ "p_code":"41",
+ "code":"44"
},
{
- "desc":"Data Studio allows you to view table properties and functions/procedures.Follow the steps to view table properties:The table properties are read-only.Follow the steps to ",
+ "desc":"You can view table properties and functions/procedures in Data Studio.Perform the following steps to view table properties:All table properties are read-only.To view a fu",
"product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Viewing Object Properties in the SQL Terminal",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_122.html",
+ "title":"Viewing Table Properties, PL/SQL Functions/Procedures on the SQL Terminal Page",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_029.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"114",
- "code":"118"
+ "p_code":"41",
+ "code":"45"
},
{
- "desc":"Data Studio allows you to cancel the execution of an SQL query being executed in the SQL Terminal.Follow the steps to cancel execution of an SQL query:Alternatively, you",
+ "desc":"You can terminate an ongoing SQL query on the SQL Terminal tab page of Data Studio.To terminate an ongoing SQL query, perform the following steps:You can also choose Run ",
"product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Canceling the Execution of SQL Queries",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_123.html",
+ "title":"Terminating an Ongoing SQL Query",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_030.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"114",
- "code":"119"
+ "p_code":"41",
+ "code":"46"
},
{
"desc":"Data Studio supports formatting and highlighting of SQL queries and PL/SQL statements.Follow the steps to format PL/SQL statements:Alternatively, use the key combination ",
"product_code":"dws",
"title":"Formatting of SQL Queries",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_124.html",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_031.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"114",
- "code":"120"
+ "p_code":"41",
+ "code":"47"
},
{
- "desc":"Data Studio suggests a list of possible schema names, table names and column names, and views in theSQL Terminal.Follow the steps below to select a DB object:On selection",
+ "desc":"Data Studio suggests a list of possible schema names, table names and column names, and views in the SQL Terminal.Follow the steps below to select a DB object:On selectio",
"product_code":"dws",
"title":"Selecting a DB Object in the SQL Terminal",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_125.html",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_032.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"114",
- "code":"121"
+ "p_code":"41",
+ "code":"48"
},
{
- "desc":"The execution plan shows how the table(s) referenced by the SQL statement will be scanned (plain sequential scan and index scan).The SQL statement execution cost is the e",
+ "desc":"The execution plan shows how the table referenced by the SQL statement will be scanned (sequential scan or index scan).The SQL statement execution cost indicates the dura",
"product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Viewing the Query Execution Plan and Cost",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_126.html",
+ "title":"Viewing the Execution Plan and Costs",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_033.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"114",
- "code":"122"
+ "p_code":"41",
+ "code":"49"
},
{
- "desc":"Visual Explain plan displays a graphical representation of the SQL query using information from the extended JSON format. This helps to refine query to enhance query and ",
+ "desc":"Visual Explain plan displays a graphical representation of the SQL query using information from the extended JSON format. This function improves the query and server perf",
"product_code":"dws",
"title":"Viewing the Query Execution Plan and Cost Graphically",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_127.html",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_034.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"114",
- "code":"123"
+ "p_code":"41",
+ "code":"50"
},
{
"desc":"In SQL Terminal, you canAutomatically Commit a TransactionExecute SQL QueriesMulti-Column SortBackuping Unsaved Queries/Functions/ProceduresError LocatorSearch in PL/SQL ",
"product_code":"dws",
"title":"Working with SQL Terminals",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_128.html",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_035.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"114",
- "code":"124"
+ "p_code":"41",
+ "code":"51"
},
{
"desc":"You can export the results of an SQL query into a CSV, Text or Binary file.This section contains the following topics:Exporting all dataExporting Data On the Current Page",
"product_code":"dws",
"title":"Exporting Query Results",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_129.html",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_036.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"114",
- "code":"125"
+ "p_code":"41",
+ "code":"52"
},
{
- "desc":"Data Studio allows you to reuse an existing SQL Terminal connection or create a new SQL Terminal connection for execution plan and cost, visual explain plan, and operatio",
+ "desc":"In Data Studio, you can either use an existing connection or set up a new one in the SQL terminal to view the execution plan and cost, visualize the plan explanation, and",
"product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Managing SQL Terminal Connections",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_130.html",
+ "title":"Managing Connections in the SQL Terminal",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_037.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"114",
- "code":"126"
+ "p_code":"41",
+ "code":"53"
},
{
- "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Batch Operation",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_131.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"10",
- "code":"127"
- },
- {
- "desc":"You can view accessible database objects in the navigation tree in Object Browser. Schema are displayed under databases, and tables are displayed under schemas.Object Bro",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Overview",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_132.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"127",
- "code":"128"
- },
- {
- "desc":"The batch drop operation allows you select multiple objects to drop. You can also perform batch drop operation on searched objects.Batch drop is allowed only within a dat",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Dropping a Batch of Objects",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_133.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"127",
- "code":"129"
- },
- {
- "desc":"The batch grant/revoke operation allows you select multiple objects to grant/revoke privileges. You can also perform batch grant/revoke operation on searched objects.This",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Granting/Revoking Privileges",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_134.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"127",
- "code":"130"
- },
- {
- "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Personalizing Data Studio",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_135.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"10",
- "code":"131"
- },
- {
- "desc":"This section provides details on how to customize shortcut keys.You can customize the Data Studio shortcut keys as required.Follow the steps below to set or modify the sh",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"General",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_137.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"131",
- "code":"132"
- },
- {
- "desc":"This section provides details on how to personalize syntax coloring, SQL history information, templates, and formatter.Follow the steps to customize the SQL highlight col",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Editor",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_138.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"131",
- "code":"133"
- },
- {
- "desc":"Follow the steps to set Data Studio and file encoding:The Preferences dialog box is displayed.The Session Setting pane is displayed.Data Studio supports only UTF-8 and GB",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Environment",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_139.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"131",
- "code":"134"
- },
- {
- "desc":"This section provides details on how to personalize the column width, number of records to be fetched in the query results, and result copy of column header or row number",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Result Management",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_141.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"131",
- "code":"135"
- },
- {
- "desc":"This section provides details on how to personalize password and security disclaimer display.You can enable/disable to display the permanent option to save password in th",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Security",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_142.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"131",
- "code":"136"
- },
- {
- "desc":"The loading and operation performance of Data Studio depends on the number of objects to be loaded in Object Browser, including tables, views, and columns.Memory consumpt",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Performance Specifications",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_144.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"10",
- "code":"137"
- },
- {
- "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
+ "desc":"Ensure that the operating system and the required software (refer to System Requirements for more details) are updated with the latest patches to prevent vulnerabilities ",
"product_code":"dws",
"title":"Security Management",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_146.html",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_038.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"10",
- "code":"138"
- },
- {
- "desc":"Ensure that the operating system and the required software's (refer to System Requirements for more details) are updated with the latest patches to prevent vulnerabilitie",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Overview",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_147.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"138",
- "code":"139"
- },
- {
- "desc":"The following information is critical to the security management for Data Studio:When you log into a database, Data Studio displays a pop-up with details of the last succ",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Login History",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_148.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"138",
- "code":"140"
- },
- {
- "desc":"The following information is critical to manage security for Data Studio:Your password will expire within 7 days from the date of notification. If the password expires, c",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Password Expiry Notification",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_149.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"138",
- "code":"141"
- },
- {
- "desc":"The following information is critical to manage security for Data Studio:While running Data Studio in a trusted environment, user must ensure to prevent malicious softwar",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Securing the Application In-Memory Data",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_151.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"138",
- "code":"142"
- },
- {
- "desc":"The following information is critical to manage security for Data Studio:You can ensure encryption of auto saved data by enabling encryption option from Preferences page.",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Data Encryption for Saved Data",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_152.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"138",
- "code":"143"
- },
- {
- "desc":"The following information is critical to manage security for Data Studio:SQL History scripts are not encrypted.The SQL History list does not display sensitive queries tha",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"SQL History",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_153.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"138",
- "code":"144"
- },
- {
- "desc":"The information on using SSL certificates is for reference only. For details on the certificates and for security guidelines for managing the certificates and related fil",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"SSL Certificates",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_154.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"138",
- "code":"145"
+ "p_code":"14",
+ "code":"54"
},
{
"desc":"Data Studio does not open.Solution: Check whether JRE is missing. Verify the Java path in the environment. For details about the supported Java JDK versions, see System R",
"product_code":"dws",
"title":"Troubleshooting",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_145.html",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_039.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"10",
- "code":"146"
+ "p_code":"14",
+ "code":"55"
},
{
"desc":"What do I need to check if my connection fails?Answer: Check the following items:Check whether Connection Properties are properly configured.Check whether the server vers",
"product_code":"dws",
"title":"FAQs",
- "uri":"DWS_DS_155.html",
+ "uri":"DWS_DS_040.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"10",
- "code":"147"
+ "p_code":"14",
+ "code":"56"
},
{
"desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
@@ -1329,7 +510,7 @@
"uri":"dws_gds_index.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
"p_code":"",
- "code":"148"
+ "code":"57"
},
{
"desc":"GaussDB(DWS) uses GDS to allocate the source data for parallel data import. Deploy GDS on the data server.If a large volume of data is stored on multiple data servers, in",
@@ -1337,8 +518,8 @@
"title":"Installing, Configuring, and Starting GDS",
"uri":"dws_07_0759.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"148",
- "code":"149"
+ "p_code":"57",
+ "code":"58"
},
{
"desc":"Stop GDS after data is imported successfully.If GDS is started using the gds command, perform the following operations to stop GDS:Query the GDS process ID:ps -ef|grep gd",
@@ -1346,8 +527,8 @@
"title":"Stopping GDS",
"uri":"dws_07_0128.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"148",
- "code":"150"
+ "p_code":"57",
+ "code":"59"
},
{
"desc":"The data servers reside on the same intranet as the cluster. Their IP addresses are 192.168.0.90 and 192.168.0.91. Source data files are in CSV format.Create the target t",
@@ -1355,8 +536,8 @@
"title":"Example of Importing Data Using GDS",
"uri":"dws_07_0692.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"148",
- "code":"151"
+ "p_code":"57",
+ "code":"60"
},
{
"desc":"gds is used to import and export data of GaussDB(DWS). For details, see \"Importing Data\" and \"Exporting Data\" in the Developer Guide.The -d and -H parameters are mandator",
@@ -1364,8 +545,8 @@
"title":"gds",
"uri":"gds_cmd_reference.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"148",
- "code":"152"
+ "p_code":"57",
+ "code":"61"
},
{
"desc":"gds_ctl.py can be used to start and stop gds if gds.conf has been configured.Run the following commands on Linux OS: You need to ensure that the directory structure is as",
@@ -1373,8 +554,8 @@
"title":"gds_ctl.py",
"uri":"dws_07_0129.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"148",
- "code":"153"
+ "p_code":"57",
+ "code":"62"
},
{
"desc":"Handle errors that occurred during data import.Errors that occur when data is imported are divided into data format errors and non-data format errors.Data format errorWhe",
@@ -1382,8 +563,8 @@
"title":"Handling Import Errors",
"uri":"dws_07_0056.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"148",
- "code":"154"
+ "p_code":"57",
+ "code":"63"
},
{
"desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
@@ -1392,7 +573,7 @@
"uri":"dws_mt_index.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
"p_code":"",
- "code":"155"
+ "code":"64"
},
{
"desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
@@ -1400,8 +581,8 @@
"title":"About This Document",
"uri":"dws_16_0001.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"155",
- "code":"156"
+ "p_code":"64",
+ "code":"65"
},
{
"desc":"This document is intended for the following DSC users:Database migration engineersDatabase administratorsTechnical support engineersDSC users need to have a basic knowled",
@@ -1409,17 +590,17 @@
"title":"Intended Audience",
"uri":"dws_16_0002.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"156",
- "code":"157"
+ "p_code":"65",
+ "code":"66"
},
{
- "desc":"This section describes the content, symbol, and command conventions of this document.The purchased products, services, and features are subject to the signed contract. Al",
+ "desc":"This section describes the content, symbol, and command conventions of this document.Symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows:Commands in this do",
"product_code":"dws",
"title":"Document Conventions",
"uri":"dws_16_0003.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"156",
- "code":"158"
+ "p_code":"65",
+ "code":"67"
},
{
"desc":"This section lists the applicable third-party licenses.ANTLR v4.9.3Apache Commons IO 2.11Apache Commons CLI 1.5Apache Log4j 2.17.2JSON.org json 20220320postgresql 42.4.1s",
@@ -1427,8 +608,8 @@
"title":"Third-party Licenses",
"uri":"dws_16_0005.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"156",
- "code":"159"
+ "p_code":"65",
+ "code":"68"
},
{
"desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
@@ -1436,8 +617,8 @@
"title":"Introduction to DSC",
"uri":"dws_16_0006.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"155",
- "code":"160"
+ "p_code":"64",
+ "code":"69"
},
{
"desc":"After switching to GaussDB(DWS) databases, you may need to migrate user data and application SQL scripts to new databases. In particular,the migration of application SQL ",
@@ -1445,8 +626,8 @@
"title":"Overview",
"uri":"mt_tool_index.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"160",
- "code":"161"
+ "p_code":"69",
+ "code":"70"
},
{
"desc":"The following table lists the source databases supported by DSC.The following table lists the destination databases supported by DSC.Table 3 lists the hardware requiremen",
@@ -1454,8 +635,8 @@
"title":"Operating Environment",
"uri":"dws_16_0008.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"160",
- "code":"162"
+ "p_code":"69",
+ "code":"71"
},
{
"desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
@@ -1463,8 +644,8 @@
"title":"Using DSC",
"uri":"dws_16_0009.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"155",
- "code":"163"
+ "p_code":"64",
+ "code":"72"
},
{
"desc":"This chapter describes how to use DSC, including how to install and configure DSC and how to use DSC to migrate data.Use the latest patches to update the operating system",
@@ -1472,8 +653,8 @@
"title":"Overview",
"uri":"dws_16_0010.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"163",
- "code":"164"
+ "p_code":"72",
+ "code":"73"
},
{
"desc":"Before using DSC, install it on a Linux or Windows server. DSC supports 64-bit Linux OSs. For details about other OSs supported by DSC, see Table 4.In Linux, do not insta",
@@ -1481,8 +662,8 @@
"title":"Downloading and Installing DSC",
"uri":"dws_16_0212.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"163",
- "code":"165"
+ "p_code":"72",
+ "code":"74"
},
{
"desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
@@ -1490,8 +671,8 @@
"title":"Configuring DSC",
"uri":"dws_16_0012.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"163",
- "code":"166"
+ "p_code":"72",
+ "code":"75"
},
{
"desc":"Configure the following items:Setting application.properties: Configure the migration behavior of DSC, for example, whether to overwrite the files in the target folder an",
@@ -1499,8 +680,8 @@
"title":"DSC Configuration",
"uri":"dws_16_0013.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"166",
- "code":"167"
+ "p_code":"75",
+ "code":"76"
},
{
"desc":"Teradata parameters are used to customize rules for Teradata script migration.Open the features-teradata.properties file in the config folder and set the parameters in Ta",
@@ -1508,8 +689,8 @@
"title":"Teradata SQL Configuration",
"uri":"dws_16_0014.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"166",
- "code":"168"
+ "p_code":"75",
+ "code":"77"
},
{
"desc":"Teradata Perl parameters are used to customize rules for Teradata Perl script migration.Open the perl-migration.properties file in the config folder and set parameters in",
@@ -1517,8 +698,8 @@
"title":"Teradata Perl Configuration",
"uri":"dws_16_0015.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"166",
- "code":"169"
+ "p_code":"75",
+ "code":"78"
},
{
"desc":"MySQL parameters are used to customize rules for MySQL script migration.Open the features-mysql.properties file in the config folder and configure Parameters in the featu",
@@ -1526,8 +707,17 @@
"title":"MySQL Configuration",
"uri":"dws_16_0016.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"166",
- "code":"170"
+ "p_code":"75",
+ "code":"79"
+ },
+ {
+ "desc":"You can customize the behavior of the migration tool when migrating SQL Server database scripts by setting SQL Server configuration parameters.Open the features-mysql.pro",
+ "product_code":"dws",
+ "title":"SQL Server Configuration",
+ "uri":"dws_07_0186.html",
+ "doc_type":"tg",
+ "p_code":"75",
+ "code":"80"
},
{
"desc":"Oracle parameters are used to customize rules for Oracle script migration.Open the features-oracle.properties file in the config folder and set parameters in Table 1 as n",
@@ -1535,8 +725,8 @@
"title":"Oracle SQL Configuration",
"uri":"dws_16_0213.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"166",
- "code":"171"
+ "p_code":"75",
+ "code":"81"
},
{
"desc":"Netezza parameters are used to customize rules for Netezza script migration.Open the features-netezza.properties file in the config folder and set parameters in Table 1 a",
@@ -1544,8 +734,8 @@
"title":"Netezza Configuration",
"uri":"dws_16_0214.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"166",
- "code":"172"
+ "p_code":"75",
+ "code":"82"
},
{
"desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
@@ -1553,8 +743,8 @@
"title":"Migration Process",
"uri":"dws_16_0017.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"163",
- "code":"173"
+ "p_code":"72",
+ "code":"83"
},
{
"desc":"Custom scripts are executed to support input keywords that do not exist in certain versions of the target database. These scripts must be executed in each target database",
@@ -1562,8 +752,8 @@
"title":"Prerequisites",
"uri":"dws_16_0018.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"173",
- "code":"174"
+ "p_code":"83",
+ "code":"84"
},
{
"desc":"Before the migration, create an input folder and an output folder, and copy all the SQL scripts to be migrated to the input folder. The following procedure describes how ",
@@ -1571,8 +761,8 @@
"title":"Preparations",
"uri":"dws_16_0019.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"173",
- "code":"175"
+ "p_code":"83",
+ "code":"85"
},
{
"desc":"Before starting DSC, specify the output folder path. Separate the input folder path, output folder path, and log path with spaces. The input folder path cannot contain sp",
@@ -1580,8 +770,8 @@
"title":"Executing DSC",
"uri":"dws_16_0020.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"173",
- "code":"176"
+ "p_code":"83",
+ "code":"86"
},
{
"desc":"After the migration is complete, you can use a comparison tool (for example, BeyondCompare®) to compare the output file with its input file. Input SQL files can also be f",
@@ -1589,8 +779,8 @@
"title":"Viewing Output Files and Logs",
"uri":"dws_16_0021.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"173",
- "code":"177"
+ "p_code":"83",
+ "code":"87"
},
{
"desc":"Migration related issues can be classified into:Tool execution issues: No output or incorrect output is displayed because DSC partially or fully failed to be executed. Fo",
@@ -1598,17 +788,8 @@
"title":"Troubleshooting",
"uri":"dws_16_0022.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"173",
- "code":"178"
- },
- {
- "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"CLI Reference",
- "uri":"dws_16_0023.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"163",
- "code":"179"
+ "p_code":"83",
+ "code":"88"
},
{
"desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
@@ -1616,8 +797,8 @@
"title":"Database Schema Conversion",
"uri":"dws_16_0024.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"179",
- "code":"180"
+ "p_code":"72",
+ "code":"89"
},
{
"desc":"It is mandatory to specify the source database, input folder path, and output folder path, and optional to specify the migration type and log path.If a user does not spec",
@@ -1625,8 +806,8 @@
"title":"Migration Parameters",
"uri":"dws_16_0025.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"180",
- "code":"181"
+ "p_code":"89",
+ "code":"90"
},
{
"desc":"DSC supports the migration from Teradata to GaussDB(DWS), including the migration of schemas, DML, queries, system functions, and type conversion.Run the following comman",
@@ -1634,8 +815,8 @@
"title":"Teradata SQL Migration",
"uri":"dws_16_0026.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"180",
- "code":"182"
+ "p_code":"89",
+ "code":"91"
},
{
"desc":"This section describes how to migrate Teradata Perl files.Run the runDSC.shor runDSC.bat command and set --application-lang to perl to migrate Teradata BTEQ or SQL_LANG s",
@@ -1643,8 +824,8 @@
"title":"Teradata Perl Migration",
"uri":"dws_16_0027.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"180",
- "code":"183"
+ "p_code":"89",
+ "code":"92"
},
{
"desc":"DSC supports the migration from MySQL to GaussDB(DWS), including the migration of schemas, DML, queries, system functions, and PL/SQL.Run the following command on Linux t",
@@ -1652,8 +833,8 @@
"title":"MySQL SQL Migration",
"uri":"dws_16_0028.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"180",
- "code":"184"
+ "p_code":"89",
+ "code":"93"
},
{
"desc":"DSC supports the migration from Oracle to GaussDB(DWS), including the migration of schemas, DML, queries, system functions, and PL/SQL.Run the following commands to set t",
@@ -1661,8 +842,8 @@
"title":"Oracle SQL Migration",
"uri":"dws_16_0215.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"180",
- "code":"185"
+ "p_code":"89",
+ "code":"94"
},
{
"desc":"DSC supports the migration from Netezza to GaussDB(DWS), including the migration of schemas, DML, queries, system functions, and PL/SQL.Run the following commands to set ",
@@ -1670,8 +851,8 @@
"title":"Netezza SQL Migration",
"uri":"dws_16_0216.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"180",
- "code":"186"
+ "p_code":"89",
+ "code":"95"
},
{
"desc":"After DSC converts the source sql files, execute the converted files on target GaussDB(DWS) and provide a report with details of number of statements succeeded and failed",
@@ -1679,26 +860,26 @@
"title":"Verification",
"uri":"dws_16_0029.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"180",
- "code":"187"
+ "p_code":"89",
+ "code":"96"
},
{
"desc":"The version command is used to display the version number of the DSC.Linux:Windows:Linux:Windows:",
"product_code":"dws",
- "title":"VERSION",
+ "title":"Version Command Migration",
"uri":"dws_16_0030.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"179",
- "code":"188"
+ "p_code":"72",
+ "code":"97"
},
{
"desc":"The help command is used to provide the help information for the commands supported by DSC.Linux:Windows:Linux:Windows:Linux:Windows:",
"product_code":"dws",
- "title":"HELP",
+ "title":"Help Command Migration",
"uri":"dws_16_0031.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"179",
- "code":"189"
+ "p_code":"72",
+ "code":"98"
},
{
"desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
@@ -1706,8 +887,8 @@
"title":"Log Reference",
"uri":"dws_16_0032.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"163",
- "code":"190"
+ "p_code":"72",
+ "code":"99"
},
{
"desc":"The log files are the repository for all operations and status of the DSC. The following log files are available:SQL Migration LogsDSC.log: SQL Migration all activities.D",
@@ -1715,8 +896,8 @@
"title":"Overview",
"uri":"dws_16_0217.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"190",
- "code":"191"
+ "p_code":"99",
+ "code":"100"
},
{
"desc":"The SQL DSC (DSC.jar) supports the following types of logging:Activity loggingError loggingsuccessReadsuccessWriteIf a user specifies a log path, then all the logs are sa",
@@ -1724,8 +905,8 @@
"title":"SQL Migration Logs",
"uri":"dws_16_0033.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"190",
- "code":"192"
+ "p_code":"99",
+ "code":"101"
},
{
"desc":"The DSC writes all log information to a single file, perlDSC.log.Since the DSC will execute the SQL to migrate the SQL scripts inside Perl files, the following SQL migrat",
@@ -1733,17 +914,8 @@
"title":"Perl Migration Logs",
"uri":"dws_16_0034.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"190",
- "code":"193"
- },
- {
- "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"SQL Syntax Migration Reference",
- "uri":"dws_16_0035.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"155",
- "code":"194"
+ "p_code":"99",
+ "code":"102"
},
{
"desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
@@ -1751,8 +923,8 @@
"title":"Teradata Syntax Migration",
"uri":"dws_16_0036.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"194",
- "code":"195"
+ "p_code":"64",
+ "code":"103"
},
{
"desc":"Table 1 lists the Teradata keywords and features that can be migrated.The Version column contains the earliest versions that support the keywords or features.The Remarks ",
@@ -1760,8 +932,8 @@
"title":"Supported Keywords and Features",
"uri":"dws_16_0038.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"195",
- "code":"196"
+ "p_code":"103",
+ "code":"104"
},
{
"desc":"The restrictions on using DSC to migrate data from TD are as follows:DSC is used only for syntax migration and not for data migration.If the SELECT clause of a subquery c",
@@ -1769,8 +941,8 @@
"title":"Constraints and Limitations",
"uri":"dws_16_0039.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"195",
- "code":"197"
+ "p_code":"103",
+ "code":"105"
},
{
"desc":"InputOutput",
@@ -1778,8 +950,8 @@
"title":"Data Type",
"uri":"dws_16_0040.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"195",
- "code":"198"
+ "p_code":"103",
+ "code":"106"
},
{
"desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
@@ -1787,8 +959,8 @@
"title":"Functions and Operators",
"uri":"dws_16_0041.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"195",
- "code":"199"
+ "p_code":"103",
+ "code":"107"
},
{
"desc":"Analytical functions are collectively called ordered analytical functions in Teradata, and they provide powerful analytical abilities for data mining, analysis and busine",
@@ -1796,44 +968,44 @@
"title":"Analytical Functions",
"uri":"dws_16_0043.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"199",
- "code":"200"
+ "p_code":"107",
+ "code":"108"
},
{
- "desc":"Input: **OutputInput: MODOutputUse the tdMigrateNULLIFZERO configuration parameter to configure migration of NULLIFZERO.Input: NULLIFZEROSELECT NULLIFZERO(expr1) FROM tab",
+ "desc":"Input: **Output:Input: MODOutput:Use the tdMigrateNULLIFZERO configuration parameter to configure migration of NULLIFZERO.Input: NULLIFZEROSELECT NULLIFZERO(expr1) FROM t",
"product_code":"dws",
"title":"Math Functions",
"uri":"dws_16_0044.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"199",
- "code":"201"
+ "p_code":"107",
+ "code":"109"
},
{
- "desc":"Input: CHAROutputInput: CHARACTERSOutputInput: INDEXOutputInput: STRREPLACESELECT STRREPLACE(c2, '.', '')\n FROM tab1\n WHERE ...;OutputInput: OREPLACESELECT OREPLACE (c2,",
+ "desc":"Input: CHAROutput:Input: CHARACTERSOutput:Input: INDEXOutput:Input: STRREPLACESELECT STRREPLACE(c2, '.', '')\n FROM tab1\n WHERE ...;Output:Input: OREPLACESELECT OREPLACE ",
"product_code":"dws",
"title":"String Functions",
"uri":"dws_16_0045.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"199",
- "code":"202"
+ "p_code":"107",
+ "code":"110"
},
{
- "desc":"Migration tools support the migration of Teradata DATE FORMAT in SELECT statements, using TO_CHAR to display the date in the source format. This conversion is not done if",
+ "desc":"DSC supports the migration of Teradata SELECT statements that contain DATE FORMAT, using TO_CHAR to display the date in the source format. This conversion is not done if ",
"product_code":"dws",
"title":"Date and Time Functions",
"uri":"dws_16_0046.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"199",
- "code":"203"
+ "p_code":"107",
+ "code":"111"
},
{
- "desc":"The comparison operators LT, LE, GT, GE, EQ, and NE must not be used as TABLE alias or COLUMN alias.The following comparison and list operators are supported:Input: Compa",
+ "desc":"The following comparison and list operators are supported:The comparison operators LT, LE, GT, GE, EQ, and NE must not be used as TABLE alias or COLUMN alias.Input: Compa",
"product_code":"dws",
"title":"Comparison and List Operators",
"uri":"dws_16_0047.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"199",
- "code":"204"
+ "p_code":"107",
+ "code":"112"
},
{
"desc":"The functions that can be called in the FROM clause of a query are from the table operator.Input: Table operator with RETURNSSELECT * \n FROM TABLE( sales_retrieve (9005)",
@@ -1841,62 +1013,8 @@
"title":"Table Operators",
"uri":"dws_16_0048.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"199",
- "code":"205"
- },
- {
- "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Query Migration Operators",
- "uri":"dws_16_0049.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"199",
- "code":"206"
- },
- {
- "desc":"In general, the QUALIFY clause is accompanied by analytic functions (window functions) such as CSUM(), MDIFF(), ROW_NUMBER() and RANK(). This is addressed using sub-query",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"QUALIFY",
- "uri":"dws_16_0051.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"206",
- "code":"207"
- },
- {
- "desc":"ALIAS is supported by all databases. In Teradata, an ALIAS can be referred in SELECT and WHERE clauses of the same statement where the alias is defined. Since ALIAS is no",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"ALIAS",
- "uri":"dws_16_0052.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"206",
- "code":"208"
- },
- {
- "desc":"In Teradata, the FORMAT keyword is used for formatting a column/expression. For example, FORMAT '9(n)' and 'z(n)' are addressed using LPAD with 0 and space (' ') respecti",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"FORMAT and CAST",
- "uri":"dws_16_0053.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"206",
- "code":"209"
- },
- {
- "desc":"Table 1 lists the abbreviation keywords supported by Teradata and the corresponding syntax in GaussDB A and GaussDB(DWS).Input - BTOutput",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Short Keys Migration",
- "uri":"dws_16_0054.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"206",
- "code":"210"
- },
- {
- "desc":"This section describes the migration of object names starting with $.The migration behavior for object names starting with $ is explained in the following table. Use the ",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Object Names Starting with $",
- "uri":"dws_16_0055.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"206",
- "code":"211"
+ "p_code":"107",
+ "code":"113"
},
{
"desc":"This section describes the syntax for migrating Teradata query optimization operators. The migration syntax determines how the keywords and features are migrated.Use the ",
@@ -1904,17 +1022,53 @@
"title":"Query Optimization Operators",
"uri":"dws_16_0056.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"199",
- "code":"212"
+ "p_code":"107",
+ "code":"114"
},
{
- "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
+ "desc":"In general, the QUALIFY clause is accompanied by analytic functions (window functions) such as CSUM(), MDIFF(), ROW_NUMBER() and RANK(). This is addressed using sub-query",
"product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Schema Objects and Data Definition Language (DDL)",
- "uri":"dws_16_0059.html",
+ "title":"QUALIFY",
+ "uri":"dws_16_0051.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"195",
- "code":"213"
+ "p_code":"107",
+ "code":"115"
+ },
+ {
+ "desc":"ALIAS is supported by all databases. In Teradata, an ALIAS can be referred in SELECT and WHERE clauses of the same statement where the alias is defined. Since ALIAS is no",
+ "product_code":"dws",
+ "title":"ALIAS",
+ "uri":"dws_16_0052.html",
+ "doc_type":"tg",
+ "p_code":"107",
+ "code":"116"
+ },
+ {
+ "desc":"In Teradata, the FORMAT keyword is used for formatting a column/expression. For example, FORMAT '9(n)' and 'z(n)' are addressed using LPAD with 0 and space (' ') respecti",
+ "product_code":"dws",
+ "title":"FORMAT and CAST",
+ "uri":"dws_16_0053.html",
+ "doc_type":"tg",
+ "p_code":"107",
+ "code":"117"
+ },
+ {
+ "desc":"Table 1 lists the short keys supported by Teradata and their equivalent syntax in GaussDB(DWS).Input - BTOutput:",
+ "product_code":"dws",
+ "title":"Short Keys Migration",
+ "uri":"dws_16_0054.html",
+ "doc_type":"tg",
+ "p_code":"107",
+ "code":"118"
+ },
+ {
+ "desc":"This section describes the migration of object names starting with $.The migration behavior for object names starting with $ is explained in the following table. Use the ",
+ "product_code":"dws",
+ "title":"Migration of Object Names Starting with $",
+ "uri":"dws_16_0055.html",
+ "doc_type":"tg",
+ "p_code":"107",
+ "code":"119"
},
{
"desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
@@ -1922,17 +1076,17 @@
"title":"Migrating Tables",
"uri":"dws_16_0061.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"213",
- "code":"214"
+ "p_code":"103",
+ "code":"120"
},
{
- "desc":"The Teradata CREATE TABLE (short key CT) statements are used to create new tables.Example:Input: CREATE TABLEOutputWhen CREATE tab2 AS tab1 is executed, the structure cop",
+ "desc":"The Teradata CREATE TABLE (short key CT) statements are used to create new tables.Example:Input: CREATE TABLEOutput:When CREATE tab2 AS tab1 is executed, the structure co",
"product_code":"dws",
"title":"CREATE TABLE",
"uri":"dws_16_0063.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"214",
- "code":"215"
+ "p_code":"120",
+ "code":"121"
},
{
"desc":"CHARACTER SET is used to specify the server character set for a character column. CASESPECIFIC specifies the case for character data comparisons and collations.Use the td",
@@ -1940,8 +1094,8 @@
"title":"CHARACTER SET and CASESPECIFIC",
"uri":"dws_16_0064.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"214",
- "code":"216"
+ "p_code":"120",
+ "code":"122"
},
{
"desc":"The table-specific keyword VOLATILE is provided in the input file, but the keyword is not supported by GaussDB(DWS). The tool replaces it with the LOCAL TEMPORARYkeyword ",
@@ -1949,8 +1103,8 @@
"title":"VOLATILE",
"uri":"dws_16_0065.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"214",
- "code":"217"
+ "p_code":"120",
+ "code":"123"
},
{
"desc":"SET is a unique feature in Teradata. It does not allow duplicate records. It is addressed using the MINUSset operator. Migration tool supports MULTISET and SET tables. SE",
@@ -1958,8 +1112,8 @@
"title":"SET",
"uri":"dws_16_0066.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"214",
- "code":"218"
+ "p_code":"120",
+ "code":"124"
},
{
"desc":"MULTISETis a normal table, which is supported by all the DBs. Migration tool supports MULTISET and SET tables.MULTISET table can be used with VOLATILE.Input: CREATE MULTI",
@@ -1967,8 +1121,8 @@
"title":"MULTISET",
"uri":"dws_16_0067.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"214",
- "code":"219"
+ "p_code":"120",
+ "code":"125"
},
{
"desc":"The keyword TITLE is supported for Teradata Permanent, Global Temporary and Volatile tables. In the migration process, the TITLE text is migrated as a comment.If the TITL",
@@ -1976,8 +1130,8 @@
"title":"TITLE",
"uri":"dws_16_0068.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"214",
- "code":"220"
+ "p_code":"120",
+ "code":"126"
},
{
"desc":"The CREATE TABLE statement supports creation of an index. Migration tool supports the TABLE statement with PRIMARY INDEX and UNIQUE INDEX.The tool will not add DISTRIBUTE",
@@ -1985,17 +1139,17 @@
"title":"Indexes",
"uri":"dws_16_0069.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"214",
- "code":"221"
+ "p_code":"120",
+ "code":"127"
},
{
- "desc":"A table CONSTRAINT is applied to multiple columns. Migration tool supports the following constraints:CHECK constraint: supported by GaussDB T, GaussDB A, and GaussDB(DWS)",
+ "desc":"A table CONSTRAINT is applied to multiple columns. Migration tool supports the following constraints:REFERENCES constraint / FOREIGN KEY: migration currently NOT supporte",
"product_code":"dws",
"title":"CONSTRAINT",
"uri":"dws_16_0070.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"214",
- "code":"222"
+ "p_code":"120",
+ "code":"128"
},
{
"desc":"The table orientation can be converted from ROW-STORE to COLUMN store using the WITH (ORIENTATION=COLUMN) in the CREATE TABLE statement. This feature can be enabled/disab",
@@ -2003,8 +1157,8 @@
"title":"COLUMN STORE",
"uri":"dws_16_0071.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"214",
- "code":"223"
+ "p_code":"120",
+ "code":"129"
},
{
"desc":"The tool does not support migration of partitions/subpartitions and the partition/subpartition keywords are commented in the migrated scripts:Range partition/subpartition",
@@ -2012,17 +1166,17 @@
"title":"PARTITION",
"uri":"dws_16_0072.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"214",
- "code":"224"
+ "p_code":"120",
+ "code":"130"
},
{
- "desc":"Input - CREATE TABLE with INDEXOutput",
+ "desc":"The ANALYZE statement of Teradata is used to migrate tables.Input: CREATE TABLE with INDEXOutput:",
"product_code":"dws",
"title":"ANALYZE",
"uri":"dws_16_0073.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"214",
- "code":"225"
+ "p_code":"120",
+ "code":"131"
},
{
"desc":"Migration tool supports queries that specify number of columns (not all columns specified) during INSERT. This can happen when the input INSERT statement does not contain",
@@ -2030,35 +1184,35 @@
"title":"Support for Specified Columns",
"uri":"dws_16_0074.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"214",
- "code":"226"
+ "p_code":"120",
+ "code":"132"
},
{
- "desc":"The sequence of columns and table names in CREATE INDEX in Teradata is different from that in GaussDB T, GaussDB A, and GaussDB(DWS). Use the configuration parameter dist",
+ "desc":"The sequence of CREATE INDEX columns and table names in Teradata is different from that in GaussDB(DWS). Use the configuration parameter distributeByHash to configure how",
"product_code":"dws",
"title":"Migrating Indexes",
"uri":"dws_16_0075.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"213",
- "code":"227"
+ "p_code":"103",
+ "code":"133"
},
{
- "desc":"CREATE VIEW (short key CV) is used together with SELECT to create a view.Teradata, GaussDB T, GaussDB A, and GaussDB(DWS) all support the keyword VIEW. It is enclosed by ",
+ "desc":"CREATE VIEW (short key CV) is used together with SELECT to create a view.The keyword VIEW is supported by both Teradata and GaussDB(DWS), but the SELECT statements are en",
"product_code":"dws",
"title":"Migrating Views",
"uri":"dws_16_0076.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"213",
- "code":"228"
+ "p_code":"103",
+ "code":"134"
},
{
- "desc":"COLLECT STAT is used in Teradata for collecting optimizer statistics, which will be used for query performance. GaussDB T, GaussDB A, and GaussDB(DWS) use the ANALYZE sta",
+ "desc":"COLLECT STAT is used in Teradata for collecting optimizer statistics, which will be used for query performance. GaussDB(DWS) uses the ANALYZE statement to replace COLLECT",
"product_code":"dws",
"title":"COLLECT STATISTICS",
"uri":"dws_16_0077.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"213",
- "code":"229"
+ "p_code":"103",
+ "code":"135"
},
{
"desc":"ACCESS LOCK allows you to read the data from a table that may have been locked for the READ or WRITE.Use the tdMigrateLOCKoption configuration parameter to configure migr",
@@ -2066,8 +1220,8 @@
"title":"ACCESS LOCK",
"uri":"dws_16_0078.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"213",
- "code":"230"
+ "p_code":"103",
+ "code":"136"
},
{
"desc":"DBC.COLUMNSview is a table containing information about table and view columns, stored procedures, or macro parameters. The view includes the following column names: Data",
@@ -2075,26 +1229,26 @@
"title":"DBC.COLUMNS",
"uri":"dws_16_0079.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"213",
- "code":"231"
+ "p_code":"103",
+ "code":"137"
},
{
- "desc":"The DSC migrates dbc.tables to their corresponding mig_td_ext.vw_td_dbc_tables.Example: databasename is migrated as mig_td_ext.vw_td_dbc_tables.schemaname.InputOutput",
+ "desc":"The DSC migrates dbc.tables to their corresponding mig_td_ext.vw_td_dbc_tables.Example: databasename is migrated as mig_td_ext.vw_td_dbc_tables.schemaname.Input:Output:",
"product_code":"dws",
"title":"DBC.TABLES",
"uri":"dws_16_0080.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"213",
- "code":"232"
+ "p_code":"103",
+ "code":"138"
},
{
- "desc":"DSC migrates dbc.indices to the corresponding mig_td_ext.vw_td_dbc_indices.Example: databasename is migrated as mig_td_ext.vw_td_dbc_tables.schemaname.InputOutputIn dbc.i",
+ "desc":"DSC migrates dbc.indices to the corresponding mig_td_ext.vw_td_dbc_indices.Example: databasename is migrated as mig_td_ext.vw_td_dbc_tables.schemaname.Input:Output:In dbc",
"product_code":"dws",
"title":"DBC.INDICES",
"uri":"dws_16_0081.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"213",
- "code":"233"
+ "p_code":"103",
+ "code":"139"
},
{
"desc":"This command displays the COLLECT STATISTICS statement with statistics. Gauss does not have an equivalent for this. Since it does not affect the functionality, this comma",
@@ -2102,17 +1256,17 @@
"title":"SHOW STATS VALUES SEQUENCED",
"uri":"dws_16_0082.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"213",
- "code":"234"
+ "p_code":"103",
+ "code":"140"
},
{
- "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
+ "desc":"The figure below illustrates the process of simplifying COMMENT statements. A complex statement is entered and then simplified through migration.Input:Output:",
"product_code":"dws",
"title":"COMMENT",
"uri":"dws_16_0083.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"213",
- "code":"235"
+ "p_code":"103",
+ "code":"141"
},
{
"desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
@@ -2120,8 +1274,8 @@
"title":"Data Manipulation Language (DML)",
"uri":"dws_16_0084.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"195",
- "code":"236"
+ "p_code":"103",
+ "code":"142"
},
{
"desc":"The Teradata INSERT (short key INS) statement is used to insert records into a table. DSC supports the INSERT statement.The INSERT INTO TABLE table_name syntax is used in",
@@ -2129,71 +1283,26 @@
"title":"INSERT",
"uri":"dws_16_0086.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"236",
- "code":"237"
- },
- {
- "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"SELECT",
- "uri":"dws_16_0087.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"236",
- "code":"238"
+ "p_code":"142",
+ "code":"143"
},
{
"desc":"The Teradata SELECT command (short key SEL) is used to specify the table columns from which data is to be retrieved.ANALYZE is used in GaussDB(DWS) for collecting optimiz",
"product_code":"dws",
- "title":"ANALYZE",
- "uri":"dws_16_0088.html",
+ "title":"SELECT",
+ "uri":"dws_16_0087.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"238",
- "code":"239"
+ "p_code":"142",
+ "code":"144"
},
{
- "desc":"For Teradata migration of SELECTstatements, all the clauses (FROM, WHERE, HAVING and GROUP BY) can be listed in any order. The tool will not migrate the statement if it c",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Order of Clauses",
- "uri":"dws_16_0089.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"238",
- "code":"240"
- },
- {
- "desc":"The GROUP BY clause can be specified if you want the database to group the selected rows based on the value of expr(s). If this clause contains CUBE, ROLLUPor GROUPING SE",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Extended Group By Clause",
- "uri":"dws_16_0090.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"238",
- "code":"241"
- },
- {
- "desc":"GaussDB(DWS) variable names are case insensitive, and TD variable names are case sensitive. To ensure that the TD script is correct before and after the migration, retain",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"SELECT AS",
- "uri":"dws_16_0091.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"238",
- "code":"242"
- },
- {
- "desc":"The TOP and SAMPLE clauses of Teradata are migrated to LIMIT in GaussDB(DWS).The DSC also supports migration of TOPstatements with dynamic parameters.For TOPclauses conta",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"TOP and SAMPLE",
- "uri":"dws_16_0092.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"238",
- "code":"243"
- },
- {
- "desc":"The tool supports and migrates the UPDATE(short key UPD) statements.Input: UPDATE with TABLE ALIASOutputInput: UPDATE with TABLE ALIASusing a sub queryOutputInput: UPDATE",
+ "desc":"DSC supports migration of the UPDATE(short keyUPD) statements.Input: UPDATE with TABLE ALIASOutputInput: UPDATE with TABLE ALIASusing a sub queryOutputInput: UPDATE with ",
"product_code":"dws",
"title":"UPDATE",
"uri":"dws_16_0093.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"236",
- "code":"244"
+ "p_code":"142",
+ "code":"145"
},
{
"desc":"DELETE (short key abbreviated as DEL) is an ANSI-compliant SQL syntax operator used to delete existing records from a table. DSC supports the Teradata DELETE statement an",
@@ -2201,26 +1310,26 @@
"title":"DELETE",
"uri":"dws_16_0094.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"236",
- "code":"245"
+ "p_code":"142",
+ "code":"146"
},
{
- "desc":"Gauss database in 6.5.0 or later versions support the MERGE function.MERGEis an ANSI-standard SQL syntax operator used to select rows from one or more sources for updatin",
+ "desc":"MERGEis an ANSI-standard SQL syntax operator used to select rows from one or more sources for updating or inserting into a table or view. The conditions to update or inse",
"product_code":"dws",
"title":"MERGE",
"uri":"dws_16_0095.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"236",
- "code":"246"
+ "p_code":"142",
+ "code":"147"
},
{
- "desc":"NAMED is used in Teradata to assign a temporary name to an expression or column. NAMED statements used for expressions are migrated to AS in GaussDB T, GaussDB A, and Gau",
+ "desc":"NAMED is used in Teradata to assign a temporary name to an expression or column. The NAMED statements for expression names are migrated to AS in GaussDB(DWS). The NAMED s",
"product_code":"dws",
"title":"NAMED",
"uri":"dws_16_0096.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"236",
- "code":"247"
+ "p_code":"142",
+ "code":"148"
},
{
"desc":"ACTIVITYCOUNTInputIt is a status variable that returns the number of rows affected by an SQL DML statement in an embedded SQL.Output",
@@ -2228,8 +1337,8 @@
"title":"ACTIVITYCOUNT",
"uri":"dws_16_0097.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"236",
- "code":"248"
+ "p_code":"142",
+ "code":"149"
},
{
"desc":"Input - TIMESTAMP with FORMATThe FORMAT phrase sets the format for a specific TIME or TIMESTAMP column or value. A FORMAT phrase overrides the system format.OutputInputOu",
@@ -2237,8 +1346,8 @@
"title":"TIMESTAMP",
"uri":"dws_16_0098.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"236",
- "code":"249"
+ "p_code":"142",
+ "code":"150"
},
{
"desc":"This section contains the migration syntax for migrating Teradata type casting and formatting syntax. The migration syntax determines how the keywords and features are mi",
@@ -2246,8 +1355,8 @@
"title":"Type Casting and Formatting",
"uri":"dws_16_0099.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"195",
- "code":"250"
+ "p_code":"103",
+ "code":"151"
},
{
"desc":"GaussDB(DWS) provides gsql meta-commands that can be used to replace common BTEQ tool commands. The mostly used replacements are as follows:The meta-command \\q [value] ca",
@@ -2255,8 +1364,8 @@
"title":"BTEQ Utility Command",
"uri":"dws_16_0100.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"195",
- "code":"251"
+ "p_code":"103",
+ "code":"152"
},
{
"desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
@@ -2264,17 +1373,17 @@
"title":"Teradata Formats",
"uri":"dws_16_0101.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"195",
- "code":"252"
+ "p_code":"103",
+ "code":"153"
},
{
- "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
+ "desc":"DSC migrates the system views dbc.columnsV and dbc.IndicesV, and the resulting output is displayed below.Input:Output:",
"product_code":"dws",
"title":"System Views",
"uri":"dws_16_0102.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"195",
- "code":"253"
+ "p_code":"103",
+ "code":"154"
},
{
"desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
@@ -2282,8 +1391,8 @@
"title":"MySQL Syntax Migrating",
"uri":"dws_16_0103.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"194",
- "code":"254"
+ "p_code":"64",
+ "code":"155"
},
{
"desc":"Table 1 lists the MySQL keywords and features that can be migrated.The Version column contains the earliest versions that support the keywords or features.The Remarks col",
@@ -2291,8 +1400,8 @@
"title":"Supported Keywords and Features",
"uri":"dws_16_0105.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"254",
- "code":"255"
+ "p_code":"155",
+ "code":"156"
},
{
"desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
@@ -2300,8 +1409,8 @@
"title":"Data Types",
"uri":"dws_16_0106.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"254",
- "code":"256"
+ "p_code":"155",
+ "code":"157"
},
{
"desc":"A data type is a basic data attribute. Occupied storage space and allowed operations vary according to data types. In a database, data is stored in tables, in which a dat",
@@ -2309,8 +1418,8 @@
"title":"Numeric Types",
"uri":"dws_16_0108.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"256",
- "code":"257"
+ "p_code":"157",
+ "code":"158"
},
{
"desc":"This section describes the following date and time types: DATETIME, TIME, TIMESTAMP, and YEAR. GaussDB(DWS) does not support these types, and DSC will convert them.The va",
@@ -2318,8 +1427,8 @@
"title":"Date/Time Types",
"uri":"dws_16_0109.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"256",
- "code":"258"
+ "p_code":"157",
+ "code":"159"
},
{
"desc":"MySQL interprets length specifications in character column definitions in character units. This applies to the CHAR, VARCHAR, and TEXT types. DSC supports the following t",
@@ -2327,8 +1436,8 @@
"title":"String Types",
"uri":"dws_16_0110.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"256",
- "code":"259"
+ "p_code":"157",
+ "code":"160"
},
{
"desc":"MySQL has spatial data types corresponding to the OpenGIS class. DSC supports the following type conversions:GEOMETRY can store geometry values of any type. The other sin",
@@ -2336,8 +1445,8 @@
"title":"Spatial Data Types",
"uri":"dws_16_0111.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"256",
- "code":"260"
+ "p_code":"157",
+ "code":"161"
},
{
"desc":"A BLOB is a binary large object that can hold a variable amount of data. The four BLOB types are TINYBLOB, BLOB, MEDIUMBLOB, and LONGBLOB. The only difference between the",
@@ -2345,8 +1454,8 @@
"title":"LOB Types",
"uri":"dws_16_0112.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"256",
- "code":"261"
+ "p_code":"157",
+ "code":"162"
},
{
"desc":"In MySQL, an ENUM is a string object with a value chosen from a list of permitted values that are enumerated explicitly in the column specification at table creation.A SE",
@@ -2354,8 +1463,8 @@
"title":"Set Types",
"uri":"dws_16_0113.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"256",
- "code":"262"
+ "p_code":"157",
+ "code":"163"
},
{
"desc":"MySQL supports both BOOL and BOOLEAN. DSC supports the following type conversions:Input: BOOL/BOOLEANOutput",
@@ -2363,17 +1472,17 @@
"title":"Boolean",
"uri":"dws_16_0114.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"256",
- "code":"263"
+ "p_code":"157",
+ "code":"164"
},
{
- "desc":"In MySQL, the BIT data type is used to store bit values. A type of BIT(M) enables storage of M-bit values. M can range from 1 to 64.MySQL BINARY and VARBINARY types are s",
+ "desc":"In MySQL, the BIT data type is used to store bit values, ranging from 1 to 64.MySQL BINARY and VARBINARY types are similar to CHAR and VARCHAR, except that they contain b",
"product_code":"dws",
"title":"Binary Types",
"uri":"dws_16_0115.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"256",
- "code":"264"
+ "p_code":"157",
+ "code":"165"
},
{
"desc":"The JSON data type can be used to store JavaScript Object Notation (JSON) data. DSC supports the following type conversions:Input Example (JSON)Output",
@@ -2381,8 +1490,8 @@
"title":"JSON Types",
"uri":"dws_16_0116.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"256",
- "code":"265"
+ "p_code":"157",
+ "code":"166"
},
{
"desc":"The functions and expressions in MySQL do not exist in GaussDB(DWS) or are different from those in GaussDB(DWS). DSC migrates the functions and expressions based on the s",
@@ -2390,17 +1499,8 @@
"title":"Functions and Expressions",
"uri":"dws_16_0117.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"254",
- "code":"266"
- },
- {
- "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Schema Objects and Data Definition Language (DDL)",
- "uri":"dws_16_0118.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"254",
- "code":"267"
+ "p_code":"155",
+ "code":"167"
},
{
"desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
@@ -2408,26 +1508,26 @@
"title":"Table (Optional Parameters and Operations)",
"uri":"dws_16_0119.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"267",
- "code":"268"
+ "p_code":"155",
+ "code":"168"
},
{
- "desc":"MySQL 8.0.29 has extended the support for ALTER TABLE... ALGORITHM=INSTANT: Users can add columns instantly and delete columns instantly anywhere in a table, and evaluate",
+ "desc":"MySQL has extended the support for ALTER TABLE... ALGORITHM=INSTANT: Users can add columns instantly and delete columns instantly anywhere in a table, and evaluate row si",
"product_code":"dws",
"title":"ALGORITHM",
"uri":"dws_16_0120.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"268",
- "code":"269"
+ "p_code":"168",
+ "code":"169"
},
{
- "desc":"In GaussDB(DWS), the rename clause cannot contain the schema name. The DSC tool supports only the rename operation in the same schema. After the rename operation, the sch",
+ "desc":"GaussDB(DWS) prohibits including schema names in the rename clause, therefore, DSC supports renaming solely within the same schema. Renaming within the same schema omits ",
"product_code":"dws",
"title":"ALTER TABLE RENAME",
"uri":"dws_16_0121.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"268",
- "code":"270"
+ "p_code":"168",
+ "code":"170"
},
{
"desc":"In database application, unique numbers that increase automatically are needed to identify records. In MySQL, the AUTO_INCREMENT attribute of a data column can be used to",
@@ -2435,8 +1535,8 @@
"title":"AUTO_INCREMENT",
"uri":"dws_16_0122.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"268",
- "code":"271"
+ "p_code":"168",
+ "code":"171"
},
{
"desc":"In MySQL, AVG_ROW_LENGTH indicates the average length of each row. This is not supported by GaussDB(DWS) and is deleted by DSC during the migration.InputOutput",
@@ -2444,8 +1544,8 @@
"title":"AVG_ROW_LENGTH",
"uri":"dws_16_0123.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"268",
- "code":"272"
+ "p_code":"168",
+ "code":"172"
},
{
"desc":"In ADB, this parameter specifies the number of values stored in each block in columnar storage, which is also the minimum I/O unit. GaussDB(DWS does not support table def",
@@ -2453,8 +1553,8 @@
"title":"BLOCK_SIZE",
"uri":"dws_16_0124.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"268",
- "code":"273"
+ "p_code":"168",
+ "code":"173"
},
{
"desc":"CHARSET specifies the default character set for a table. GaussDB(DWS) does not support table definition modification using this attribute. DSC will delete the keyword dur",
@@ -2462,8 +1562,8 @@
"title":"CHARSET",
"uri":"dws_16_0125.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"268",
- "code":"274"
+ "p_code":"168",
+ "code":"174"
},
{
"desc":"In MySQL, CHECKSUM maintains a live checksum for all rows. GaussDB(DWS) does not support table definition modification using this attribute. DSC will delete the keyword d",
@@ -2471,8 +1571,8 @@
"title":"CHECKSUM",
"uri":"dws_16_0126.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"268",
- "code":"275"
+ "p_code":"168",
+ "code":"175"
},
{
"desc":"It is a clustered index in ADB that defines the sorting sequence in a table. The logical sequence of key values in a clustered index determines the physical sequence of r",
@@ -2480,8 +1580,8 @@
"title":"CLUSTERED KEY",
"uri":"dws_16_0127.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"268",
- "code":"276"
+ "p_code":"168",
+ "code":"176"
},
{
"desc":"In MySQL, COLLATE specifies a default database sorting rule. GaussDB(DWS) does not support table definition modification using this attribute. DSC will delete the keyword",
@@ -2489,8 +1589,8 @@
"title":"COLLATE",
"uri":"dws_16_0128.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"268",
- "code":"277"
+ "p_code":"168",
+ "code":"177"
},
{
"desc":"In MySQL, COMMENT is a comment for a table. In GaussDB(DWS), this attribute can be used to modify table definition. During migration using DSC, additional table attribute",
@@ -2498,8 +1598,8 @@
"title":"COMMENT",
"uri":"dws_16_0129.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"268",
- "code":"278"
+ "p_code":"168",
+ "code":"178"
},
{
"desc":"GaussDB(DWS) does not support table definition modification using this attribute. DSC will delete the attribute during migration.In MySQL, the keyword CONNECTION is used ",
@@ -2507,8 +1607,8 @@
"title":"CONNECTION",
"uri":"dws_16_0130.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"268",
- "code":"279"
+ "p_code":"168",
+ "code":"179"
},
{
"desc":"In MySQL, when using ALTER TABLE to add a column with the not null constraint, if no value is specified, a default value is inserted. However, an error will be reported a",
@@ -2516,8 +1616,8 @@
"title":"DEFAULT",
"uri":"dws_16_0131.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"268",
- "code":"280"
+ "p_code":"168",
+ "code":"180"
},
{
"desc":"DELAY_KEY_WRITE is valid only for MyISAM tables. It is used to delay updates until the table is closed. GaussDB(DWS) does not support table definition modification using ",
@@ -2525,8 +1625,8 @@
"title":"DELAY_KEY_WRITE",
"uri":"dws_16_0132.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"268",
- "code":"281"
+ "p_code":"168",
+ "code":"181"
},
{
"desc":"ADB supports distribution keys. During DSC migration, the corresponding distribution keys are retained.InputOutput",
@@ -2534,8 +1634,8 @@
"title":"DISTRIBUTE BY",
"uri":"dws_16_0133.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"268",
- "code":"282"
+ "p_code":"168",
+ "code":"182"
},
{
"desc":"DIRECTORY enables a tablespace to be created outside the data directory and index directory. It allows DATA DIRECTORY and INDEX DIRECTORY. GaussDB(DWS) does not support t",
@@ -2543,8 +1643,8 @@
"title":"DIRECTORY",
"uri":"dws_16_0134.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"268",
- "code":"283"
+ "p_code":"168",
+ "code":"183"
},
{
"desc":"In MySQL, ENGINE specifies the storage engine for a table. When the storage engine is ARCHIVE, BLACKHOLE, CSV, FEDERATED, INNODB, MYISAM, MEMORY, MRG_MYISAM, NDB, NDBCLUS",
@@ -2552,8 +1652,8 @@
"title":"ENGINE",
"uri":"dws_16_0135.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"268",
- "code":"284"
+ "p_code":"168",
+ "code":"184"
},
{
"desc":"For foreign key constraints in MySQL, GaussDB(DWS) does not support them modifying table definition. They will be deleted during DSC migration.InputOutput",
@@ -2561,8 +1661,8 @@
"title":"FOREIGN_KEY_CHECKS",
"uri":"dws_16_0136.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"268",
- "code":"285"
+ "p_code":"168",
+ "code":"185"
},
{
"desc":"DSC supports the conversion of IF NOT EXISTS, which is reserved during the migration.InputOutput",
@@ -2570,8 +1670,8 @@
"title":"IF NOT EXISTS",
"uri":"dws_16_0137.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"268",
- "code":"286"
+ "p_code":"168",
+ "code":"186"
},
{
"desc":"In the ADB, index_all='Y' is used to create the full-column index. GaussDB(DWS) does not support table definition modification using this attribute. DSC will delete the a",
@@ -2579,8 +1679,8 @@
"title":"INDEX_ALL",
"uri":"dws_16_0138.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"268",
- "code":"287"
+ "p_code":"168",
+ "code":"187"
},
{
"desc":"INSERT_METHOD specifies the table into which the row should be inserted. Use a value of FIRST or LAST to have inserts go to the first or last table, or a value of NO to p",
@@ -2588,8 +1688,8 @@
"title":"INSERT_METHOD",
"uri":"dws_16_0139.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"268",
- "code":"288"
+ "p_code":"168",
+ "code":"188"
},
{
"desc":"KEY_BLOCK_SIZE choices vary depending on the storage engine used for a table. For MyISAM tables, KEY_BLOCK_SIZE optionally specifies the size in bytes to be used for inde",
@@ -2597,8 +1697,8 @@
"title":"KEY_BLOCK_SIZE",
"uri":"dws_16_0140.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"268",
- "code":"289"
+ "p_code":"168",
+ "code":"189"
},
{
"desc":"GaussDB(DWS) does not support the ALTER TABLEtbNameLOCK statement of MySQL, which will be deleted by DSC during migration.InputOutput",
@@ -2606,8 +1706,8 @@
"title":"LOCK",
"uri":"dws_16_0141.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"268",
- "code":"290"
+ "p_code":"168",
+ "code":"190"
},
{
"desc":"In MySQL, MAX_ROWS indicates the maximum number of rows that can be stored in a table. This attribute will be deleted during migration using DSC.InputOutput",
@@ -2615,8 +1715,8 @@
"title":"MAX_ROWS",
"uri":"dws_16_0142.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"268",
- "code":"291"
+ "p_code":"168",
+ "code":"191"
},
{
"desc":"MIN_ROWS indicates the minimum number of rows that can be stored in a table. This attribute will be deleted during migration using DSC.InputOutput",
@@ -2624,8 +1724,8 @@
"title":"MIN_ROWS",
"uri":"dws_16_0143.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"268",
- "code":"292"
+ "p_code":"168",
+ "code":"192"
},
{
"desc":"In MySQL, PACK_KEYS specifies the index compression mode in the MyISAM storage engine. GaussDB(DWS) does not support this attribute, which will be deleted by DSC during m",
@@ -2633,8 +1733,8 @@
"title":"PACK_KEYS",
"uri":"dws_16_0145.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"268",
- "code":"293"
+ "p_code":"168",
+ "code":"193"
},
{
"desc":"In MySQL, PARTITION BY is used to create partitioned tables. Currently, GaussDB(DWS) supports only range and list partitions in MySQL.Hash partitions of PARTITION BY are ",
@@ -2642,8 +1742,8 @@
"title":"PARTITION BY",
"uri":"dws_16_0146.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"268",
- "code":"294"
+ "p_code":"168",
+ "code":"194"
},
{
"desc":"In MySQL, PASSWORD indicates the user password. GaussDB(DWS) does not support this attribute, which will be deleted by DSC during migration.InputOutput",
@@ -2651,8 +1751,8 @@
"title":"PASSWORD",
"uri":"dws_16_0147.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"268",
- "code":"295"
+ "p_code":"168",
+ "code":"195"
},
{
"desc":"ROW_FORMAT defines the physical format in which the rows are stored. Row format choices vary depending on the storage engine used for the table. If you specify a row form",
@@ -2660,8 +1760,8 @@
"title":"ROW_FORMAT",
"uri":"dws_16_0148.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"268",
- "code":"296"
+ "p_code":"168",
+ "code":"196"
},
{
"desc":"STATS_AUTO_RECALC specifies whether to automatically recalculate persistent statistics for an InnoDB table. GaussDB(DWS) does not support this attribute, which will be de",
@@ -2669,8 +1769,8 @@
"title":"STATS_AUTO_RECALC",
"uri":"dws_16_0149.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"268",
- "code":"297"
+ "p_code":"168",
+ "code":"197"
},
{
"desc":"In MySQL, STATS_PERSISTENT specifies whether to enable persistence statistics for an InnoDB table. The CREATE TABLE and ALTER TABLE statements can be used to enable persi",
@@ -2678,8 +1778,8 @@
"title":"STATS_PERSISTENT",
"uri":"dws_16_0150.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"268",
- "code":"298"
+ "p_code":"168",
+ "code":"198"
},
{
"desc":"STATS_SAMPLE_PAGES specifies the number of index pages to sample when cardinality and other statistics for an indexed column are estimated. DSC will delete this attribute",
@@ -2687,8 +1787,8 @@
"title":"STATS_SAMPLE_PAGES",
"uri":"dws_16_0151.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"268",
- "code":"299"
+ "p_code":"168",
+ "code":"199"
},
{
"desc":"UNION is a table creation parameter of the MERGE storage engine. Creating a table using this keyword is similar to creating a common view. The created table logically com",
@@ -2696,8 +1796,8 @@
"title":"UNION",
"uri":"dws_16_0152.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"268",
- "code":"300"
+ "p_code":"168",
+ "code":"200"
},
{
"desc":"WITH AS is used in GaussDB(DWS) to declare one or more subqueries that can be referenced by name in the main query. It is equivalent to a temporary table. DSC supports th",
@@ -2705,8 +1805,8 @@
"title":"WITH AS",
"uri":"dws_16_0153.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"268",
- "code":"301"
+ "p_code":"168",
+ "code":"201"
},
{
"desc":"MySQL uses the CHANGE keyword to change column names and data types and set NOT NULL constraints. DSC will perform adaptation based on GaussDB(DWS) features during migrat",
@@ -2714,8 +1814,8 @@
"title":"CHANGE (Column Modification)",
"uri":"dws_16_0154.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"268",
- "code":"302"
+ "p_code":"168",
+ "code":"202"
},
{
"desc":"Specifies an expression producing a Boolean result which new or updated rows must satisfy for an insert or update operation to succeed. Expressions evaluating to TRUE or ",
@@ -2723,8 +1823,8 @@
"title":"CHECK Constraint",
"uri":"dws_16_0155.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"268",
- "code":"303"
+ "p_code":"168",
+ "code":"203"
},
{
"desc":"Both GaussDB(DWS) and MySQL support using the DROP statement to delete tables. However, GaussDB(DWS) does not support the RESTRICT | CASCADE keyword in the DROP statement",
@@ -2732,26 +1832,26 @@
"title":"DROP (Table Deletion)",
"uri":"dws_16_0156.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"268",
- "code":"304"
+ "p_code":"168",
+ "code":"204"
},
{
- "desc":"MySQL databases support CREATE TABLE. LIKE is a method with which a table is created by cloning the old table structure, It is also supported by GaussDB(DWS). DSC will ad",
+ "desc":"In the MySQL database, you can use the CREATE TABLE .. LIKE .. method to clone the old table structure to create a table. It is also supported by GaussDB(DWS). DSC will a",
"product_code":"dws",
"title":"LIKE (Table Cloning)",
"uri":"dws_16_0157.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"268",
- "code":"305"
+ "p_code":"168",
+ "code":"205"
},
{
"desc":"MySQL uses the MODIFY keyword to change column data types and set NOT NULL constraints. DSC will perform adaptation based on GaussDB(DWS) features during migration.InputO",
"product_code":"dws",
- "title":"MODIFY (Modifying a Cloumn)",
+ "title":"MODIFY (Modifying a Column)",
"uri":"dws_16_0158.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"268",
- "code":"306"
+ "p_code":"168",
+ "code":"206"
},
{
"desc":"In MySQL, the TABLE keyword can be omitted when the TRUNCATE statement is used to delete table data. GaussDB(DWS) does not support this usage. In addition, DSC will add C",
@@ -2759,17 +1859,17 @@
"title":"TRUNCATE (Table Deletion)",
"uri":"dws_16_0159.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"268",
- "code":"307"
+ "p_code":"168",
+ "code":"207"
},
{
- "desc":"GaussDB(DWS) supports the creation of roundrobin tables. You can set the table.type in Table 1. Set table.type=ROUND-ROBIN.InputOutput",
+ "desc":"GaussDB(DWS) supports the creation of roundrobin tables. You can set table.type in Table 1. Set table.type=ROUND-ROBIN.InputOutput",
"product_code":"dws",
"title":"ROUNDROBIN Table",
"uri":"dws_16_0160.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"268",
- "code":"308"
+ "p_code":"168",
+ "code":"208"
},
{
"desc":"The statement for renaming a table in MySQL is slightly different from that in GaussDB(DWS). DSC will perform adaptation based on GaussDB(DWS) features during migration.C",
@@ -2777,8 +1877,8 @@
"title":"RENAME (Table Renaming)",
"uri":"dws_16_0161.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"268",
- "code":"309"
+ "p_code":"168",
+ "code":"209"
},
{
"desc":"In MySQL, the COLUMN keyword can be omitted when the ALTER statement is used to set the default value of a column. DSC will perform adaptation based on GaussDB(DWS) featu",
@@ -2786,8 +1886,8 @@
"title":"SET|DROP COLUMN DEFAULT VALUE",
"uri":"dws_16_0162.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"268",
- "code":"310"
+ "p_code":"168",
+ "code":"210"
},
{
"desc":"In GaussDB(DWS), reserved keywords must be enclosed in double quotation marks when they are used as column names. The following reserved keywords are supported: desc, che",
@@ -2795,17 +1895,17 @@
"title":"Renaming a Column",
"uri":"dws_16_0163.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"268",
- "code":"311"
+ "p_code":"168",
+ "code":"211"
},
{
- "desc":"GaussDB(DWS) supports column-store table compression, but does not support row-store table compression. DSC performs migration based on GaussDB(DWS) features.Compression ",
+ "desc":"In GaussDB(DWS), only column-store tables can be compressed. Row-store tables cannot be compressed. The row-column storage compression mechanism is optimized. DSC perform",
"product_code":"dws",
"title":"Row-Store/Column-Store Table Compression",
"uri":"dws_16_0164.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"268",
- "code":"312"
+ "p_code":"168",
+ "code":"212"
},
{
"desc":"The statements for adding and deleting columns in MySQL are different from those in GaussDB(DWS). DSC will perform adaptation based on GaussDB(DWS) features during migrat",
@@ -2813,8 +1913,8 @@
"title":"Adding/Deleting a Column",
"uri":"dws_16_0165.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"268",
- "code":"313"
+ "p_code":"168",
+ "code":"213"
},
{
"desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
@@ -2822,8 +1922,8 @@
"title":"Indexes",
"uri":"dws_16_0166.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"267",
- "code":"314"
+ "p_code":"155",
+ "code":"214"
},
{
"desc":"GaussDB(DWS) does not support the combination of unique indexes (constraints) and primary key constraints. DSC will perform adaptation based on GaussDB(DWS) features duri",
@@ -2831,8 +1931,8 @@
"title":"Unique Indexes",
"uri":"dws_16_0167.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"314",
- "code":"315"
+ "p_code":"214",
+ "code":"215"
},
{
"desc":"GaussDB(DWS) does not support prefix indexes or inline normal indexes. DSC will replace these indexes with normal indexes based on GaussDB(DWS) features.Inline normal/pre",
@@ -2840,8 +1940,8 @@
"title":"Normal and Prefix Indexes",
"uri":"dws_16_0168.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"314",
- "code":"316"
+ "p_code":"214",
+ "code":"216"
},
{
"desc":"GaussDB(DWS) does not support hash indexes. DSC will replace these indexes with normal indexes based on GaussDB(DWS) features.Inline hash indexesInputCREATE TABLE `public",
@@ -2849,8 +1949,8 @@
"title":"Hash Indexes",
"uri":"dws_16_0169.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"314",
- "code":"317"
+ "p_code":"214",
+ "code":"217"
},
{
"desc":"GaussDB(DWS) supports B-tree indexes, but the position of the USING BTREE keyword in a statement is different from that in MySQL. DSC will perform adaptation based on Gau",
@@ -2858,8 +1958,8 @@
"title":"B-tree Indexes",
"uri":"dws_16_0170.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"314",
- "code":"318"
+ "p_code":"214",
+ "code":"218"
},
{
"desc":"GaussDB(DWS) does not support spatial indexes. DSC will perform adaptation based on GaussDB(DWS) features during migration.Inline spatial indexInputCREATE TABLE `public`.",
@@ -2867,8 +1967,8 @@
"title":"Spatial Indexes",
"uri":"dws_16_0171.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"314",
- "code":"319"
+ "p_code":"214",
+ "code":"219"
},
{
"desc":"GaussDB(DWS) does not support full-text indexes. DSC will perform adaptation based on GaussDB(DWS) features during migration.Inline full-text indexInput## A.\nCREATE TABLE",
@@ -2876,8 +1976,8 @@
"title":"Full-Text Indexes",
"uri":"dws_16_0172.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"314",
- "code":"320"
+ "p_code":"214",
+ "code":"220"
},
{
"desc":"MySQL supports both DROP INDEX and ALTER TABLE DROP INDEX for deleting indexes. DSC will perform adaptation based on GaussDB(DWS) features during migration.DROP INDEXInpu",
@@ -2885,8 +1985,8 @@
"title":"Deleting an Index",
"uri":"dws_16_0173.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"314",
- "code":"321"
+ "p_code":"214",
+ "code":"221"
},
{
"desc":"DSC supports renaming indexes. Prefix a table name to an index name to prevent name conflicts. (Only DDL statements with specific index names can be created. Currently, t",
@@ -2894,8 +1994,8 @@
"title":"Renaming an Index",
"uri":"dws_16_0174.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"314",
- "code":"322"
+ "p_code":"214",
+ "code":"222"
},
{
"desc":"To comment out a single line, MySQL uses # or --, and GaussDB(DWS) uses --. DSC will replace # with -- for commenting out a single line during migration.InputOutput",
@@ -2903,8 +2003,8 @@
"title":"Comment",
"uri":"dws_16_0175.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"267",
- "code":"323"
+ "p_code":"155",
+ "code":"223"
},
{
"desc":"In MySQL, DATABASE is a schema object, which is equivalent to the SCHEMA of Oracle and GaussDB(DWS). DSC supports the following two scenarios:Database creationInputcreate",
@@ -2912,8 +2012,8 @@
"title":"Databases",
"uri":"dws_16_0176.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"267",
- "code":"324"
+ "p_code":"155",
+ "code":"224"
},
{
"desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
@@ -2921,17 +2021,35 @@
"title":"Data Manipulation Language (DML)",
"uri":"dws_16_0177.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"254",
- "code":"325"
+ "p_code":"155",
+ "code":"225"
},
{
- "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
+ "desc":"In MySQL, INSERT allows the following keywords: HIGH_PRIORITY, LOW_PRIORITY, PARTITION, DELAYED, IGNORE, VALUES, and ON DUPLICATE KEY UPDATE.MySQL uses HIGH_PRIORITY will",
"product_code":"dws",
- "title":"SELECT",
- "uri":"dws_16_0178.html",
+ "title":"INSERT",
+ "uri":"dws_16_0184.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"325",
- "code":"326"
+ "p_code":"225",
+ "code":"226"
+ },
+ {
+ "desc":"In MySQL, UPDATE allows the following keywords: LOW_PRIORITY, ORDER BY, LIMIT, and IGNORE.With the LOW_PRIORITY modifier, execution of UPDATE is delayed.InputOutputIn MyS",
+ "product_code":"dws",
+ "title":"UPDATE",
+ "uri":"dws_16_0193.html",
+ "doc_type":"tg",
+ "p_code":"225",
+ "code":"227"
+ },
+ {
+ "desc":"In MySQL, REPLACE allows the following keywords: LOW_PRIORITY, PARTITION, DELAYED, VALUES, and SET. The following examples are temporary migration solutions only.REPLACE ",
+ "product_code":"dws",
+ "title":"REPLACE",
+ "uri":"dws_16_0198.html",
+ "doc_type":"tg",
+ "p_code":"225",
+ "code":"228"
},
{
"desc":"Aliases in MySQL contain single quotation marks, which are not supported by GaussDB(DWS). DSC changes them to double quotation marks during migration.InputOutputAliases a",
@@ -2939,8 +2057,8 @@
"title":"Quotation Marks",
"uri":"dws_16_0179.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"326",
- "code":"327"
+ "p_code":"225",
+ "code":"229"
},
{
"desc":"In MySQL, the interval expression format is INTERVAL N, which is not supported by GaussDB(DWS) and needs to be converted to INTERVAL'N'.InputOutput",
@@ -2948,8 +2066,8 @@
"title":"INTERVAL",
"uri":"dws_16_0180.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"326",
- "code":"328"
+ "p_code":"225",
+ "code":"230"
},
{
"desc":"In MySQL, in a division expression, if the divisor is 0, null is returned. GaussDB(DWS) reports an error. Therefore, the division expression is converted by adding an if ",
@@ -2957,8 +2075,8 @@
"title":"Division Expressions",
"uri":"dws_16_0181.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"326",
- "code":"329"
+ "p_code":"225",
+ "code":"231"
},
{
"desc":"During MySQL/ADB group query, non-group columns can be queried. During GaussDB(DWS) group query, only group columns and aggregate functions can be queried, and if non-gro",
@@ -2966,8 +2084,8 @@
"title":"GROUP BY Conversion",
"uri":"dws_16_0182.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"326",
- "code":"330"
+ "p_code":"225",
+ "code":"232"
},
{
"desc":"group by column with rollup in MySQL needs to be converted to group by rollup (column) in GaussDB(DWS).InputOutput",
@@ -2975,188 +2093,8 @@
"title":"ROLLUP",
"uri":"dws_16_0183.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"326",
- "code":"331"
- },
- {
- "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"INSERT",
- "uri":"dws_16_0184.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"325",
- "code":"332"
- },
- {
- "desc":"MySQL uses HIGH_PRIORITY will override the effect of the LOW_PRIORITY option.InputOutput",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"HIGH_PRIORITY",
- "uri":"dws_16_0185.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"332",
- "code":"333"
- },
- {
- "desc":"When the LOW_PRIORITY modifier is used, execution of INSERT is delayed.InputOutput",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"LOW_PRIORITY",
- "uri":"dws_16_0186.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"332",
- "code":"334"
- },
- {
- "desc":"When inserting into a partitioned table, you can control which partitions and subpartitions accept new rows.InputOutput",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"PARTITION",
- "uri":"dws_16_0187.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"332",
- "code":"335"
- },
- {
- "desc":"In MySQL 5.7, the DELAYED keyword is recognized but ignored by the server.InputOutput",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"DELAYED",
- "uri":"dws_16_0188.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"332",
- "code":"336"
- },
- {
- "desc":"When the IGNORE modifier is used, errors that occur during INSERT execution are ignored.InputOutput",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"IGNORE",
- "uri":"dws_16_0189.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"332",
- "code":"337"
- },
- {
- "desc":"INSERT statements that use the VALUES syntax can insert multiple lines, separated by commas.InputOutput",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"VALUES",
- "uri":"dws_16_0190.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"332",
- "code":"338"
- },
- {
- "desc":"INSERT uses the ON DUPLICATE KEY UPDATE clause to update existing rows.InputOutput",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"ON DUPLICATE KEY UPDATE",
- "uri":"dws_16_0191.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"332",
- "code":"339"
- },
- {
- "desc":"MySQL INSERT...SET statement inserts rows based on explicitly specified values.InputOutput",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"SET",
- "uri":"dws_16_0192.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"332",
- "code":"340"
- },
- {
- "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"UPDATE",
- "uri":"dws_16_0193.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"325",
- "code":"341"
- },
- {
- "desc":"With the LOW_PRIORITY modifier, execution of UPDATE is delayed.InputOutput",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"LOW_PRIORITY",
- "uri":"dws_16_0194.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"341",
- "code":"342"
- },
- {
- "desc":"In MySQL, if an UPDATE statement includes an ORDER BY clause, the rows will be updated in the order specified by the clause.InputOutput",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"ORDER BY",
- "uri":"dws_16_0195.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"341",
- "code":"343"
- },
- {
- "desc":"UPDATE LIMIT syntax can be used to limit the scope. A clause is a limit on row matching. As long as the rows that satisfy the clause are found, the statements will stop, ",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"LIMIT",
- "uri":"dws_16_0196.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"341",
- "code":"344"
- },
- {
- "desc":"With the IGNORE modifier, the UPDATE statement does not abort even if errors occur during execution.InputOutput",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"IGNORE",
- "uri":"dws_16_0197.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"341",
- "code":"345"
- },
- {
- "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"REPLACE",
- "uri":"dws_16_0198.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"325",
- "code":"346"
- },
- {
- "desc":"MySQL REPLACE supports the use of LOW_PRIORITY, which is converted by the Migration tool.InputOutput",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"LOW_PRIORITY",
- "uri":"dws_16_0199.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"346",
- "code":"347"
- },
- {
- "desc":"MySQL REPLACE supports explicit partitioning selection using the PARTITION keyword and a comma-separated name list for partitions, subpartitions, or both.InputOutput",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"PARTITION",
- "uri":"dws_16_0200.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"346",
- "code":"348"
- },
- {
- "desc":"DELAYED INSERT and REPLACE operations were deprecated in MySQL 5.6. In MySQL 5.7, DELAYED was not supported. The server recognizes but ignores the DELAYED keyword, handle",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"DELAYED",
- "uri":"dws_16_0201.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"346",
- "code":"349"
- },
- {
- "desc":"MySQL REPLACE supports a statement to insert or delete multiple values, separated by commas.InputOutput",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"VALUES",
- "uri":"dws_16_0202.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"346",
- "code":"350"
- },
- {
- "desc":"MySQL REPLACE supports the use of SET settings, which the Migration tool will convert.InputOutput",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"SET",
- "uri":"dws_16_0203.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"346",
- "code":"351"
+ "p_code":"225",
+ "code":"233"
},
{
"desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
@@ -3164,53 +2102,53 @@
"title":"Transaction Management and Database Management",
"uri":"dws_16_0204.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"254",
- "code":"352"
+ "p_code":"155",
+ "code":"234"
},
{
- "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
+ "desc":"DSC will perform adaptation based on GaussDB(DWS) features during MySQL transaction statement migration.InputOutputDSC will perform adaptation based on GaussDB(DWS) featu",
"product_code":"dws",
"title":"Transaction Management",
"uri":"dws_16_0205.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"352",
- "code":"353"
+ "p_code":"234",
+ "code":"235"
},
{
- "desc":"DSC will perform adaptation based on GaussDB features during MySQL transaction statement migration.InputOutput",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"TRANSACTION",
- "uri":"dws_16_0206.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"353",
- "code":"354"
- },
- {
- "desc":"DSC will perform adaptation based on GaussDB features during the migration of MySQL table locking statements which are used in transaction processing.InputOutput",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"LOCK",
- "uri":"dws_16_0207.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"353",
- "code":"355"
- },
- {
- "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
+ "desc":"DSC will replace MySQL SET CHARACTER SET with SET SESSION NAMES during migration. The following table lists the character sets.InputOutput",
"product_code":"dws",
"title":"Database Management",
"uri":"dws_16_0208.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"352",
- "code":"356"
+ "p_code":"234",
+ "code":"236"
},
{
- "desc":"DSC will replace MySQL SET CHARACTER SET with SET SESSION NAMES during migration. The following table lists character set mapping.InputOutput",
+ "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
"product_code":"dws",
- "title":"SET CHARACTER",
- "uri":"dws_16_0209.html",
+ "title":"SQL-Server Syntax Migration",
+ "uri":"dws_07_0187.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"356",
- "code":"357"
+ "p_code":"64",
+ "code":"237"
+ },
+ {
+ "desc":"GaussDB(DWS) does not support the Database name.Schema name.Table name format. You need to convert it to the Schema name.Table name format.SQL Server supports the creatio",
+ "product_code":"dws",
+ "title":"Migrating Tables",
+ "uri":"dws_07_0188.html",
+ "doc_type":"tg",
+ "p_code":"237",
+ "code":"238"
+ },
+ {
+ "desc":"A data type is a basic data attribute. Occupied storage space and allowed operations vary according to data types. In a database, data is stored in tables, in which a dat",
+ "product_code":"dws",
+ "title":"Migrating Data Types",
+ "uri":"dws_07_0189.html",
+ "doc_type":"tg",
+ "p_code":"237",
+ "code":"239"
},
{
"desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
@@ -3218,17 +2156,8 @@
"title":"Oracle Syntax Migration",
"uri":"dws_mt_0104.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"194",
- "code":"358"
- },
- {
- "desc":"This section lists the Oracle features supported by the syntax migration tool, and provides the Oracle syntax and the equivalent GaussDB(DWS) syntax for each feature. The",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Overview",
- "uri":"dws_mt_0105.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"358",
- "code":"359"
+ "p_code":"64",
+ "code":"240"
},
{
"desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
@@ -3236,8 +2165,8 @@
"title":"Schema Objects",
"uri":"dws_mt_0106.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"358",
- "code":"360"
+ "p_code":"240",
+ "code":"241"
},
{
"desc":"The CREATE TABLE statement in Oracle databases is used to create new tables. GaussDB(DWS) also supports this statement. So it does not need to be migrated.The ALTER TABLE",
@@ -3245,17 +2174,17 @@
"title":"Tables",
"uri":"dws_mt_0108.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"360",
- "code":"361"
+ "p_code":"241",
+ "code":"242"
},
{
- "desc":"GaussDB(DWS) does not support GLOBAL TEMPORARY TABLE, and it will be migrated to LOCAL TEMPORARY TABLE.ON COMMIT DELETE ROWS is also not supported, and will be migrated t",
+ "desc":"GaussDB(DWS) does not support GLOBAL TEMPORARY TABLE, It migrates GLOBAL TEMPORARY TABLE to LOCAL TEMPORARY TABLE.ON COMMIT DELETE ROWS is also not supported and will be ",
"product_code":"dws",
"title":"Temporary Tables",
"uri":"dws_mt_0109.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"360",
- "code":"362"
+ "p_code":"241",
+ "code":"243"
},
{
"desc":"Global temporary tables are converted to local temporary tables.Input - GLOBAL TEMPORARY TABLEOutput",
@@ -3263,8 +2192,8 @@
"title":"Global Temporary Tables",
"uri":"dws_mt_0212.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"360",
- "code":"363"
+ "p_code":"241",
+ "code":"244"
},
{
"desc":"When an index is created in GaussDB(DWS), a schema name cannot be specified along with the index name. The index will be automatically created in the schema where the ind",
@@ -3272,17 +2201,17 @@
"title":"Indexes",
"uri":"dws_mt_0110.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"360",
- "code":"364"
+ "p_code":"241",
+ "code":"245"
},
{
- "desc":"A view is a logical table that is based on one or more tables or views. A view itself contains no data.In the source file, if the table names are not qualified with the s",
+ "desc":"A view is a logical table based on one or more tables or views. A view itself contains no data.In the source file, if the table names are not qualified with the schema na",
"product_code":"dws",
"title":"Views",
"uri":"dws_mt_0111.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"360",
- "code":"365"
+ "p_code":"241",
+ "code":"246"
},
{
"desc":"A sequence is an Oracle object used to generate a number sequence. This can be useful when you need to create an autonumber column to act as a primary key.If MigSupportSe",
@@ -3290,17 +2219,17 @@
"title":"Sequences",
"uri":"dws_mt_0112.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"360",
- "code":"366"
+ "p_code":"241",
+ "code":"247"
},
{
- "desc":"In Oracle, the DROP TABLE statement moves a table to the recycle bin. The PURGE statement is used to remove a table or index from the recycle bin and release all of the s",
+ "desc":"In Oracle, the DROP TABLE statement moves a table to the recycle bin, allowing for potential recovery. In contrast, the PURGE statement permanently deletes a table or ind",
"product_code":"dws",
"title":"PURGE",
"uri":"dws_mt_0113.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"360",
- "code":"367"
+ "p_code":"241",
+ "code":"248"
},
{
"desc":"DSC supports GaussDB(DWS) keywords, such as NAME, LIMIT, OWNER, KEY, and CAST. These keywords must be enclosed in double quotation marks.The keywords NAME, VERSION, LABEL",
@@ -3308,17 +2237,17 @@
"title":"Database Keywords",
"uri":"dws_mt_0114.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"360",
- "code":"368"
+ "p_code":"241",
+ "code":"249"
},
{
- "desc":"Input – COMPRESS PhraseOutput",
+ "desc":"This function is used to comment out the COMPRESS phrase by default during the migration.Input – COMPRESS PhraseOutput",
"product_code":"dws",
"title":"COMPRESS Phrase",
"uri":"dws_07_6814.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"358",
- "code":"369"
+ "p_code":"240",
+ "code":"250"
},
{
"desc":"There is a configuration parameter that is introduced for this feature named BitmapIndexSupport which default value is comment, then the sample input and output are as fo",
@@ -3326,17 +2255,17 @@
"title":"Bitmap Index",
"uri":"dws_07_6815.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"358",
- "code":"370"
+ "p_code":"240",
+ "code":"251"
},
{
- "desc":"Input – custom tablespaceOutput",
+ "desc":"This section describes the syntax for migrating a custom tablespace.Input – custom tablespaceOutput",
"product_code":"dws",
"title":"Custom Tablespace",
"uri":"dws_07_6816.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"358",
- "code":"371"
+ "p_code":"240",
+ "code":"252"
},
{
"desc":"Supplemental columns can be recorded in redo log files. The process of recording these additional columns is called supplemental logging. Oracle supports this function, b",
@@ -3344,8 +2273,8 @@
"title":"Supplemental Log Data",
"uri":"dws_07_6817.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"358",
- "code":"372"
+ "p_code":"240",
+ "code":"253"
},
{
"desc":"\"Data type LONG RAW\" is not supported in the CREATE TABLE statement. LONG RAW data type needs to be replaced with Byte.InputOutput",
@@ -3353,8 +2282,8 @@
"title":"LONG RAW",
"uri":"dws_07_6818.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"358",
- "code":"373"
+ "p_code":"240",
+ "code":"254"
},
{
"desc":"SYS_GUID is a built-in function which returns the Global Unique Identifier (GUID) for a row in a table. It accepts no arguments and returns a RAW value of 16 bytes.InputO",
@@ -3362,8 +2291,8 @@
"title":"SYS_GUID",
"uri":"dws_07_6819.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"358",
- "code":"374"
+ "p_code":"240",
+ "code":"255"
},
{
"desc":"This section describes the migration syntax of Oracle DML. The migration syntax decides how the keywords/features are migrated.For details, see the following topics:SELEC",
@@ -3371,8 +2300,8 @@
"title":"DML",
"uri":"dws_mt_0115.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"358",
- "code":"375"
+ "p_code":"240",
+ "code":"256"
},
{
"desc":"This section contains the migration syntax of Oracle Pseudo Columns. The migration syntax decides how the keywords/features are migrated.A pseudo column is similar to a t",
@@ -3380,8 +2309,8 @@
"title":"Pseudo Columns",
"uri":"dws_mt_0128.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"358",
- "code":"376"
+ "p_code":"240",
+ "code":"257"
},
{
"desc":"This section describes the migration syntax of Oracle OUTER JOIN. The migration syntax determines how the keywords/features are migrated.An OUTER JOIN returns all rows th",
@@ -3389,8 +2318,8 @@
"title":"OUTER JOIN",
"uri":"dws_mt_0132.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"358",
- "code":"377"
+ "p_code":"240",
+ "code":"258"
},
{
"desc":"Join is supported by GaussDB(DWS), so parameter supportJoinOperatoris added.OUTER QUERY (+)can be migrated when supportJoinOperatoris set to false.Input-OUTER QUERY(+)Out",
@@ -3398,8 +2327,8 @@
"title":"OUTER QUERY (+)",
"uri":"dws_mt_0215.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"358",
- "code":"378"
+ "p_code":"240",
+ "code":"259"
},
{
"desc":"Input-CONNECT BYOutputInput - CONNECT BY multiple tablesThe syntax shows the relationship between each child row and its parent row. It uses the CONNECT BY xxx PRIOR clau",
@@ -3407,8 +2336,8 @@
"title":"CONNECT BY",
"uri":"dws_mt_0216.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"358",
- "code":"379"
+ "p_code":"240",
+ "code":"260"
},
{
"desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
@@ -3416,8 +2345,8 @@
"title":"System Functions",
"uri":"dws_mt_0133.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"358",
- "code":"380"
+ "p_code":"240",
+ "code":"261"
},
{
"desc":"This section describes the following date functions:ADD_MONTHSDATE_TRUNCLAST_DAYMONTHS_BETWEENSYSTIMESTAMPADD_MONTHS is an Oracle system function and is not implicitly su",
@@ -3425,8 +2354,8 @@
"title":"Date Functions",
"uri":"dws_mt_0135.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"380",
- "code":"381"
+ "p_code":"261",
+ "code":"262"
},
{
"desc":"This section describes the following LOB functions:DBMS_LOB.APPENDDBMS_LOB.COMPAREDBMS_LOB.CREATETEMPORARYDBMS_LOB.INSTRDBMS_LOB.SUBSTRDBMS_LOB.APPEND function appends th",
@@ -3434,8 +2363,8 @@
"title":"LOB Functions",
"uri":"dws_mt_0136.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"380",
- "code":"382"
+ "p_code":"261",
+ "code":"263"
},
{
"desc":"This section describes the following string functions:LISTAGGSTRAGGWM_CONCATNVL2 and REPLACEQUOTELISTAGG is used to order data in columns within each group specified in t",
@@ -3443,8 +2372,8 @@
"title":"String Functions",
"uri":"dws_mt_0137.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"380",
- "code":"383"
+ "p_code":"261",
+ "code":"264"
},
{
"desc":"Analytical functions compute an aggregate value based on a group of rows. They differ from aggregate functions in that they return multiple rows for each group. Analytica",
@@ -3452,8 +2381,8 @@
"title":"Analytical Functions",
"uri":"dws_mt_0138.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"380",
- "code":"384"
+ "p_code":"261",
+ "code":"265"
},
{
"desc":"Regular expressions specify patterns to match strings using standardized syntax conventions. In Oracle, regular expressions are implemented using a set of SQL functions t",
@@ -3461,8 +2390,8 @@
"title":"Regular Expression Functions",
"uri":"dws_mt_0139.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"380",
- "code":"385"
+ "p_code":"261",
+ "code":"266"
},
{
"desc":"This section describes the migration syntax of Oracle PL/SQL. The migration syntax determines how the keywords and features are migrated.PL/SQL combines the procedural fe",
@@ -3470,17 +2399,17 @@
"title":"PL/SQL",
"uri":"dws_mt_0141.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"358",
- "code":"386"
+ "p_code":"240",
+ "code":"267"
},
{
- "desc":"This section descripes the migration syntax of Oracle PL/SQL Collections. The migration syntax decides how the keywords/features are migrated.A user-defined type (UDT) is",
+ "desc":"This section describes the migration syntax of Oracle PL/SQL Collections. The migration syntax decides how the keywords/features are migrated.A user-defined type (UDT) is",
"product_code":"dws",
"title":"PL/SQL Collections (Using User-Defined Types)",
"uri":"dws_mt_0155.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"358",
- "code":"387"
+ "p_code":"240",
+ "code":"268"
},
{
"desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
@@ -3488,8 +2417,8 @@
"title":"PL/SQL Packages",
"uri":"dws_mt_0156.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"358",
- "code":"388"
+ "p_code":"240",
+ "code":"269"
},
{
"desc":"Packages are schema objects that group logically related PL/SQL types, variables, functions and procedures. In Oracle, each package consists of two parts: package specifi",
@@ -3497,8 +2426,8 @@
"title":"Packages",
"uri":"dws_mt_0158.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"388",
- "code":"389"
+ "p_code":"269",
+ "code":"270"
},
{
"desc":"Package variables are available in Oracle packages that allow variables to retain all the functions and procedures in the package. DSC uses customized functions to help G",
@@ -3506,8 +2435,8 @@
"title":"Package Variables",
"uri":"dws_mt_0159.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"388",
- "code":"390"
+ "p_code":"269",
+ "code":"271"
},
{
"desc":"The package specification is migrated as a schema named after the package and the procedures and functions in the package body is migrated as Packagename.procedurenameand",
@@ -3515,8 +2444,8 @@
"title":"Splitting Packages",
"uri":"dws_mt_0301.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"388",
- "code":"391"
+ "p_code":"269",
+ "code":"272"
},
{
"desc":"REF Cursor is a data type that can store the database cursor values and is used to return query results. DSC supports migration of REF CURSOR. The example below shows how",
@@ -3524,8 +2453,8 @@
"title":"REF CURSOR",
"uri":"dws_mt_0302.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"388",
- "code":"392"
+ "p_code":"269",
+ "code":"273"
},
{
"desc":"The package declaration is migrated as a schema named after the package. The migration can be performed after pkgSchemaNaming is set to false.Input – Create schema for Pa",
@@ -3533,8 +2462,8 @@
"title":"Creating a Schema for Package",
"uri":"dws_mt_0221.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"388",
- "code":"393"
+ "p_code":"269",
+ "code":"274"
},
{
"desc":"REF CURSOR is defined as a return parameter.It can be migrated after plsqlCollectionis set tovarray.Input - VARRAYOutput",
@@ -3542,8 +2471,8 @@
"title":"VARRAY",
"uri":"dws_mt_0303.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"358",
- "code":"394"
+ "p_code":"240",
+ "code":"275"
},
{
"desc":"This feature is used to give privileges to users for specific packages. All the procedures and functions defined in the specific packages will be granted the execution pe",
@@ -3551,8 +2480,8 @@
"title":"Granting Execution Permissions",
"uri":"dws_mt_0304.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"358",
- "code":"395"
+ "p_code":"240",
+ "code":"276"
},
{
"desc":"Enable & DisableSet package_name_list to bas_lookup_misc_pkg.Enable and disable the function based on configuration parameters.InputOutput",
@@ -3560,8 +2489,8 @@
"title":"Package Name List",
"uri":"dws_mt_0305.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"358",
- "code":"396"
+ "p_code":"240",
+ "code":"277"
},
{
"desc":"SubtypeCustomized types in the package cannot be converted.SUBTYPE error_msg IS sad_products_t.exception_description%TYPE;SUBTYPE AR_FLAG IS SAD_RA_LINES_TI.AR_FLAG%TYPE;",
@@ -3569,17 +2498,8 @@
"title":"Data Type",
"uri":"dws_mt_0306.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"358",
- "code":"397"
- },
- {
- "desc":"Input-Chinese (OutputInput-Chinese )OutputInput-Chinese,OutputInput-Support Chinese SPACEOutput",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Chinese Character Support",
- "uri":"dws_mt_0222.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"358",
- "code":"398"
+ "p_code":"240",
+ "code":"278"
},
{
"desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
@@ -3587,8 +2507,8 @@
"title":"Netezza Syntax Migration",
"uri":"dws_07_0682.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"194",
- "code":"399"
+ "p_code":"64",
+ "code":"279"
},
{
"desc":"DISTRIBUTE ON (column) should be migrated to DISTRIBUTE BY HASH (column).ORGANIZE ON will be commented out.The row-store supports BLOB and CLOB. Column storage does not s",
@@ -3596,8 +2516,8 @@
"title":"Tables",
"uri":"dws_07_6821.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"399",
- "code":"400"
+ "p_code":"279",
+ "code":"280"
},
{
"desc":"PROCEDURE with RETURNS will be modified to FUNCTION with RETURN.Migrate the nzplSQL language to the plpgSQL language or delete the language.The process which is started w",
@@ -3605,8 +2525,8 @@
"title":"PROCEDURE with RETURNS",
"uri":"dws_07_6822.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"399",
- "code":"401"
+ "p_code":"279",
+ "code":"281"
},
{
"desc":"NVARCHAR changed to NCHAR VARING.The row_count function is supported for affected row counting.ROW_COUNT identifies the number of rows associated with the previous SQL st",
@@ -3614,8 +2534,8 @@
"title":"Procedure",
"uri":"dws_07_6823.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"399",
- "code":"402"
+ "p_code":"279",
+ "code":"282"
},
{
"desc":"Second parameter is missing.Casting the data type.",
@@ -3623,8 +2543,8 @@
"title":"System Functions",
"uri":"dws_07_6824.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"399",
- "code":"403"
+ "p_code":"279",
+ "code":"283"
},
{
"desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
@@ -3632,8 +2552,8 @@
"title":"Operator",
"uri":"dws_07_6825.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"399",
- "code":"404"
+ "p_code":"279",
+ "code":"284"
},
{
"desc":"A new configuration parameter \"keywords_addressed_using_doublequote\" should be introduced with the below value:keywords_addressed_using_doublequote=freezekeywords_address",
@@ -3641,8 +2561,8 @@
"title":"DML",
"uri":"dws_07_6826.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"399",
- "code":"405"
+ "p_code":"279",
+ "code":"285"
},
{
"desc":"This feature is applicable only for COLUMN store. For ROW store, Unique Index should not be commented.",
@@ -3650,8 +2570,8 @@
"title":"Unique Index",
"uri":"dws_07_6827.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"399",
- "code":"406"
+ "p_code":"279",
+ "code":"286"
},
{
"desc":"This section covers the frequently asked questions.Q1: During installation, I get an error \"Root privileged users are not allowed to install the DSC for Linux.\" What is t",
@@ -3659,8 +2579,8 @@
"title":"FAQs",
"uri":"dws_mt_0192.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"155",
- "code":"407"
+ "p_code":"64",
+ "code":"287"
},
{
"desc":"This section contains a list of troubleshooting steps and solutions for issues encountered while using DSC.The table lists the troubleshooting symptoms/issues along with ",
@@ -3668,8 +2588,8 @@
"title":"Troubleshooting",
"uri":"dws_16_0210.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"155",
- "code":"408"
+ "p_code":"64",
+ "code":"288"
},
{
"desc":"The following table lists the acronyms, abbreviations, terms, and their descriptions.",
@@ -3677,17 +2597,107 @@
"title":"Glossary",
"uri":"dws_16_0211.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"155",
- "code":"409"
+ "p_code":"64",
+ "code":"289"
},
{
"desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
"product_code":"dws",
- "title":"Server Tool",
+ "title":"DataCheck",
+ "uri":"dws_07_0200.html",
+ "doc_type":"tg",
+ "p_code":"",
+ "code":"290"
+ },
+ {
+ "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
+ "product_code":"dws",
+ "title":"Introduction to DataCheck",
+ "uri":"dws_07_0201.html",
+ "doc_type":"tg",
+ "p_code":"290",
+ "code":"291"
+ },
+ {
+ "desc":"To ensure a complete and accurate database migration when switching to GaussDB(DWS) database, you need to migrate your data and SQL scripts, and check the data after migr",
+ "product_code":"dws",
+ "title":"Overview",
+ "uri":"dws_07_0202.html",
+ "doc_type":"tg",
+ "p_code":"291",
+ "code":"292"
+ },
+ {
+ "desc":"The following table lists the source databases supported by DataCheck.The following table lists the destination databases supported by DataCheck.Hardware requirementsTabl",
+ "product_code":"dws",
+ "title":"Operating Environment",
+ "uri":"dws_07_0203.html",
+ "doc_type":"tg",
+ "p_code":"291",
+ "code":"293"
+ },
+ {
+ "desc":"Support data check for source databases such as GaussDB(DWS), MySQL, and PostgreSQL, with the destination database being GaussDB(DWS).Check common fields, such as numeric",
+ "product_code":"dws",
+ "title":"Basic Functions of DataCheck",
+ "uri":"dws_07_0204.html",
+ "doc_type":"tg",
+ "p_code":"290",
+ "code":"294"
+ },
+ {
+ "desc":"The server is compatible with 64-bit operating systems and can run on either Linux or Windows.Either JDK 1.8 or JRE 1.8 has been installed on the system.The DataCheck too",
+ "product_code":"dws",
+ "title":"Downloading and Installing DataCheck",
+ "uri":"dws_07_0205.html",
+ "doc_type":"tg",
+ "p_code":"290",
+ "code":"295"
+ },
+ {
+ "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
+ "product_code":"dws",
+ "title":"Configuring DataCheck",
+ "uri":"dws_07_0206.html",
+ "doc_type":"tg",
+ "p_code":"290",
+ "code":"296"
+ },
+ {
+ "desc":"The dbinfo.properties file contains a series of application configuration parameters, which are used to connect the source database and the destination GaussDB(DWS) datab",
+ "product_code":"dws",
+ "title":"Configuration of dbinfo.properties",
+ "uri":"dws_07_0207.html",
+ "doc_type":"tg",
+ "p_code":"296",
+ "code":"297"
+ },
+ {
+ "desc":"The check_input.xlsx file includes user input details such as schema, original table name, destination table name, specified column name (all columns are checked by defau",
+ "product_code":"dws",
+ "title":"Configuration of check_input.xlsx",
+ "uri":"dws_07_0208.html",
+ "doc_type":"tg",
+ "p_code":"296",
+ "code":"298"
+ },
+ {
+ "desc":"Before starting DataCheck, configure the dbinfo.properties and check_input.xlsx files in the config folder. Incorrect parameter settings will cause DataCheck execution er",
+ "product_code":"dws",
+ "title":"Using DataCheck",
+ "uri":"dws_07_0209.html",
+ "doc_type":"tg",
+ "p_code":"290",
+ "code":"299"
+ },
+ {
+ "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
+ "product_code":"dws",
+ "title":"Server Tools",
"uri":"dws_07_0100.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
"p_code":"",
- "code":"410"
+ "code":"300"
},
{
"desc":"gs_dump is tool provided by GaussDB(DWS) to export database information. You can export a database or its objects, such as schemas, tables, and views. The database can be",
@@ -3695,8 +2705,8 @@
"title":"gs_dump",
"uri":"dws_07_0101.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"410",
- "code":"411"
+ "p_code":"300",
+ "code":"301"
},
{
"desc":"gs_dumpall is a tool provided by GaussDB(DWS) to export all database information, including the data of the default postgres database, data of user-specified databases, a",
@@ -3704,8 +2714,8 @@
"title":"gs_dumpall",
"uri":"dws_07_0102.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"410",
- "code":"412"
+ "p_code":"300",
+ "code":"302"
},
{
"desc":"gs_restore is a tool provided by GaussDB(DWS) to import data that was exported using gs_dump. It can also be used to import files that were exported using gs_dump.It has ",
@@ -3713,8 +2723,8 @@
"title":"gs_restore",
"uri":"dws_07_0103.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"410",
- "code":"413"
+ "p_code":"300",
+ "code":"303"
},
{
"desc":"gds_check is used to check the GDS deployment environment, including the OS parameters, network environment, and disk usage. It also supports the recovery of system param",
@@ -3722,8 +2732,8 @@
"title":"gds_check",
"uri":"dws_07_0104.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"410",
- "code":"414"
+ "p_code":"300",
+ "code":"304"
},
{
"desc":"gds_install is a script tool used to install GDS in batches, improving GDS deployment efficiency.Configure environment variables before executing the script. For details,",
@@ -3731,8 +2741,8 @@
"title":"gds_install",
"uri":"dws_07_0106.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"410",
- "code":"415"
+ "p_code":"300",
+ "code":"305"
},
{
"desc":"gds_uninstall is a script tool used to uninstall GDS in batches.Set environment variables before executing the script. For details, see \"Importing Data > Using a Foreign ",
@@ -3740,8 +2750,8 @@
"title":"gds_uninstall",
"uri":"dws_07_0107.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"410",
- "code":"416"
+ "p_code":"300",
+ "code":"306"
},
{
"desc":"gds_ctl is a script tool used for starting or stopping GDS service processes in batches. You can start or stop GDS service processes, which use the same port, on multiple",
@@ -3749,25 +2759,16 @@
"title":"gds_ctl",
"uri":"dws_07_0105.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"410",
- "code":"417"
- },
- {
- "desc":"During cluster installation, you need to execute commands and transfer files among hosts in the cluster. Therefore, mutual trust relationships must be established among t",
- "product_code":"dws",
- "title":"gs_sshexkey",
- "uri":"dws_07_0108.html",
- "doc_type":"tg",
- "p_code":"410",
- "code":"418"
+ "p_code":"300",
+ "code":"307"
},
{
"desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.",
"product_code":"dws",
"title":"Change History",
- "uri":"dws_07_0173.html",
+ "uri":"dws_07_3333.html",
"doc_type":"tg",
"p_code":"",
- "code":"419"
+ "code":"308"
}
]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_001.html b/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_001.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..1dcc512d1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_001.html
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+
+
+About Data Studio
+
+
+
diff --git a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_003.html b/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_003.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..7d4ff9164
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_003.html
@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
+
+
+Constraints and Limitations
+This section describes the constraints and limitations for using Data Studio.
+
Character Encoding
If the SQL statement, DDL, object name, or data to be viewed contains Chinese characters, set the character encoding to GBK if it is supported by the OS.
+
+
Connection Management
On the Advanced tab of the New Connection and Edit Connection pages, commas (,) are used as separators in the include and exclude columns. Therefore, a schema name that contains a comma (,) is not supported.
+
+
Database Tables
- On the Index tab of the table creation wizard, the sequence of the selected columns in the list view cannot be retained after columns are deleted.
- When an operation has completed, and if the Data Studio window is not the active window of the operating system, then the message dialog is shown only when the Data Studio window becomes active.
- The following limitations are applicable to operations in Editing Table Data:
- Entering expression values in the Edit Table Data tab is not supported.
- Data Studio allows editing of fetched records only.
- The Editing table filter feature will not highlight search words within HTML tags such as <, &, >.
- A cell containing single '&' in it will not be displayed in the tooltip. A cell containing two consecutive '&' will display as a single '&' in the tooltip.
- Row focus is not retained on a newly added row. You need to click the desired cell.
+
+
+
Function/Procedure
Functions/Procedures created in the SQL Terminal or the Create Function/Procedure wizard must end with "/" to indicate the end of functions/procedures. Statements entered after a function/procedure without "/" at the end will be treated as a single query and may trigger errors during execution.
+
+
General
- A maximum of 100 tabs can be opened in the editor area. Tabs are based on available resources of the host machine.
- A maximum of 64 characters (text only) are allowed for database object names (database, schema, function, procedure, table, sequence, constraint, index, view, and tablespace). There is no limit to the number of characters that can be used in expressions and descriptions in Data Studio.
- A maximum of 300 result tabs can be opened on a logged instance of Data Studio.
- If there are large objects loaded in Object Browser and Search Object window, expanding of objects in Object Browser may be slow and Data Studio may become unresponsive.
- Adjusting the cell width may cause Data Studio to fail to respond.
- When the data in a table cell is more than 1,000 characters, it will be trimmed to 1,000 characters with "..." at the end.
- If you copy the data from a cell in a table or the Result tab to any editor, such as SQL terminal/PLSQL source editor, notepad, or any other external editor application, all data is pasted.
- If you copy the data from a cell in a table or the Result tab to an editable cell, the cell displays only the first 1,000 characters and the excess characters are displayed as ....
- When the table/Result tab data is exported, the exported file contains the whole data.
+
+
+
Security
Data Studio validates SSL connection parameters only for the first time of connection. If Enable SSL is selected, the same SSL connection parameters are used when a new connection is opened.
+
- If Enable SSL is not selected during connecting to Data Studio, data is not encrypted by default.
- If the security file is damaged during the SSL connection, Data Studio cannot perform any database operations. To resolve this problem, delete the security folder in the corresponding configuration folder and restart Data Studio.
+
+
+
SQL Terminal
- Opening an SQL file containing a large number of queries may result in an 'Insufficient Memory' error. For details, see Troubleshooting.
- Data Studio does not disable the auto-suggest and hyperlink features in the commented text in the SQL Terminal.
- The Hyperlink feature is not supported if the schema or table name have either spaces or dots (.) in them.
- Auto-suggest is not supported if the object name contains single or double quotes in it.
- DS supports basic formatting of simple SELECT statements only and may not work as expected for complex queries.
+
+
System Requirements
+This section describes the minimum system requirements for using Data Studio.
+
Software Requirements
OS
+
The following table lists the OS requirements of Data Studio.
+
+
Table 1 Supported OSs and corresponding installation packagesServer
+ |
+OS
+ |
+Supported Version
+ |
+
|---|
+
+General-purpose x86 servers
+
+ |
+Windows
+ |
+Windows 7 (64 bit)
+ |
+
+Windows 10 (64 bit)
+ |
+
+Windows 2012 (64 bit)
+ |
+
+Windows 2016 (64 bit)
+ |
+
+
+
+
+
Browser
+
The following table lists the browser requirement of Data Studio.
+
+
OS
+ |
+Version
+ |
+
|---|
+
+Windows
+ |
+Internet Explorer 11 or later
+ |
+
+
+
+
+
Other software requirements
+
The following table lists the software requirement of Data Studio.
+
+
Table 2 Data Studio software requirementSoftware
+ |
+Specifications
+ |
+
|---|
+
+Java
+ |
+Open JDK 1.8 or later corresponding to the OS bit is recommended.
+ |
+
+GNU libc
+ |
+DDL can be displayed, imported, exported; and data operations can be performed only in libc 2.17 and later in GN.
+ |
+
+
+
+
+
+
Table 3 Supported database versionsDatabase
+ |
+Version
+ |
+
|---|
+
+GaussDB(DWS)
+ |
+1.2.x
+1.5.x
+8.0.x
+8.1.x
+8.2.x
+ |
+
+
+
+
+
The recommended minimum screen resolution is 1080 x 768. If the resolution is lower than this value, the page display will be abnormal.
+
+
+
Customizing Data Studio
+In the navigation pane on the left, choose Settings > Preferences. You can customize Data Studio based on preferences.
+
+
Table 1 Functions of preferencesPreferences
+ |
+Options
+ |
+Description
+ |
+
|---|
+
+General
+ |
+Shortcut Keys
+ |
+Modify or cancel the shortcut key. You cannot add shortcut keys.
+For details about the default shortcut keys, see Customizing Data Studio.
+ |
+
+Editor
+ |
+Syntax Coloring
+ |
+You can modify the highlight colors of comments, default values, non-reserved keywords, reserved keywords, data types, symbols, constants, and character strings.
+ |
+
+SQL History
+ |
+You can set the number of SQL history records and the number of SQL query characters.
+- Number of SQL history records
Sets the number of queries that can be saved in historical records. After this parameter is modified, the modification takes effect for new queries.
+The value ranges from 1 to 1000. The default value is 50.
+ - Number of SQL query characters
Sets the number of characters of the queries saved in the SQL historical records. After this parameter is modified, the modification takes effect for new queries.
+The value ranges from 1 to 1000. The default value is 1000. If the characters are not limited, set the parameter to 0.
+
+ |
+
+Template
+ |
+Create, edit, or delete the abbreviation template. For details about how to use the template, see Using Templates.
+ |
+
+Format
+ |
+Sets the tab width and whether to convert tabs to spaces while performing indenting and un-indenting operation.
+ |
+
+Transaction
+ |
+Whether the automatic commit function is enabled.
+- Enable: Transactions are automatically submitted.
- Disable: You need to manually submit or roll back the transaction.
+ |
+
+Folding
+ |
+Whether the SQL folding function is enabled.
+Modification only takes effect in a newly opened editor. The editor which is already opened will remain with previous settings until restart.
+- Enable: SQL statements can be folded or unfolded.
- Disable: SQL statements cannot be folded or unfolded.
+ |
+
+Font
+ |
+Setting the font.
+The value ranges from 1 to 50. The default value is 10.
+ |
+
+Auto Suggest
+ |
+Set the recommended minimum number of characters.
+This field indicates the minimum number of characters required to trigger automatic advice when a user enters an SQL statement.
+The value ranges from 2 to 10. The default value is 2.
+ |
+
+Security
+ |
+Password
+ |
+- Whether the Permanently option is displayed in the Save Password drop-down list.
- Yes: The Permanently option is displayed in the Save Password drop-down list in the connection window.
- No: The Permanently option is displayed in the Save Password drop-down list in the connection window, and the saved password will be deleted.
+ - Whether login is allowed after the password expires.
- Yes: After the password expires, the user can still log in to Data Studio.
- No: After the password expires, the user cannot log in to Data Studio.
+
+ |
+
+Security Disclaimer
+ |
+Whether the security disclaimer is enabled.
+- Enable: The security disclaimer is displayed each time you try to establish an insecure connection or perform a file operation.
- Disable: You need to agree to the security implications that may arise due to insecure connection.
+ |
+
+Environment
+ |
+Session Setting
+ |
+- Setting the Data Studio and file encoding. The default encoding type is UTF-8
- Whether the SQL assistant is enabled. The SQL assistant can provide suggestions or references for the content entered in the SQL terminal and stored procedure/function terminal.
- Setting the interval for automatically saving the data in the SQL terminal and stored procedure/function terminal. The interval ranges from 2 to 60. The default value is 5.
- Setting whether automatically save the result by encrypting the saved data
- Setting the display of imported table data and restrictions on imported file data
+ |
+
+Result Management
+ |
+Query Results
+ |
+- Setting the number of results to be obtained: Obtain all results or a specified number of records
- Setting the width of a column
- Content Length: setting the width of a column based on the content length of the column
- Custom Length: setting the minimum width of a column based on the value length in network mode. The unit is pixel.
+ - Setting advanced copy result: copying the selected content and column title or row number.
- Whether the query result contains the result data code. If the result data code is contained, the result data code option is available when you edit and view the table, and query the results.
- Setting whether the query result contains the result data text mode. If the result data text mode is contained, the result data text mode is available when you query results (up to 30,000,000 characters are supported).
- Setting whether the query result window overwrites the result set.
- Overwrite Resultset: After an opened result set window is closed, a new result set window will be opened.
- Retain Current: Opens a new result set window while the already opened result set window is retained.
+
+ |
+
+Edit Table Data
+ |
+Setting the table data saving mode.
+- Saving valid data. Invalid data is not saved and is highlighted for correction.
- No data is saved when error occurs. Invalid data is highlighted for correction.
+ |
+
+Import/Export
+ |
+Export
+ |
+- Whether tablespace information is contained when DDL data is exported.
- Whether the data export function is enabled.
- Setting the export timeout period. The default value is 86400 seconds.
+ |
+
+
+
+
+
+
Table 2 Default shortcut keys of Data StudioFunction
+ |
+Shortcut Key
+ |
+
|---|
+
+Sorting the result sets of view tables, editing tables, and queries in ascending, descending, or server receiving order
+ |
+Alt+Click
+ |
+
+Opening the Help menu
+ |
+Alt+H
+ |
+
+Saving the SQL script
+ |
+Ctrl+S
+ |
+
+Opening the Edit menu
+ |
+Alt+E
+ |
+
+Compiling/Executing the SQL terminal statements
+ |
+Ctrl+Enter
+ |
+
+Find and Replace
+ |
+Ctrl+F
+ |
+
+Finding the previous one
+ |
+Shift+F3
+ |
+
+Finding the next one
+ |
+F3
+ |
+
+Redoing
+ |
+Ctrl+Y
+ |
+
+Copying the information of Execution Time and Status in the Edit Table Data tab
+ |
+Ctrl+Shift+K
+ |
+
+Copying the database object from the automatic recommendation list
+ |
+Alt+U
+ |
+
+Opening the Callstack, Breakpoints, or Variables pane
+ |
+Alt+V
+ |
+
+Opening the SQL script
+ |
+Ctrl+O
+ |
+
+Skipping a single step
+ |
+F8
+ |
+
+Stepping into
+ |
+F7
+ |
+
+Stepping out
+ |
+Shift+F7
+ |
+
+Commenting out or canceling the comment line
+ |
+Ctrl+/
+ |
+
+Locating the first element in Object Browser
+ |
+Alt+Page Up or Alt+Home
+ |
+
+Locating the last element in Object Browser
+ |
+Alt+Page Down or Alt+End
+ |
+
+Locating to row
+ |
+Ctrl+G
+ |
+
+Disconnecting the connection
+ |
+Ctrl+Shift+D
+ |
+
+Formatting (SQL and PL/SQL)
+ |
+Ctrl+Shift+F
+ |
+
+Changing to uppercase
+ |
+Ctrl+Shift+U
+ |
+
+Changing to lowercase
+ |
+Ctrl+Shift+L
+ |
+
+Updating the cells or columns in the Edit Table Data, Properties, or Results pane Click the cell or column header to enable this option.
+ |
+F2
+ |
+
+Closing the PL/SQL Viewer, View Table Data, Execute Query, or Properties tab
+ |
+Shift+F4
+ |
+
+Continuing the PL/SQL debugging
+ |
+F9
+ |
+
+Cutting content
+ |
+Ctrl+X
+ |
+
+Copying the name of the object modified in Object Browser or in the terminal. You can copy the selected data from the Terminal, Result, View Table Data, or Edit Table Data tab.
+ |
+Ctrl+C
+ |
+
+Copying the data in the Result, View Table Data, or Edit Table Data tab. The data contains/does not contain the column title and row number
+ |
+Ctrl+Shift+C
+ |
+
+Copying queries in the Edit Table Data tab
+ |
+Ctrl+Alt+C
+ |
+
+Copying content of the Variables tab
+ |
+Alt+K
+ |
+
+Copying the content of the Callstack tab
+ |
+Alt+J
+ |
+
+Copying the content of the Breakpoints tab
+ |
+Alt+Y
+ |
+
+Visualized interpretation plan
+ |
+Alt+Ctrl+X
+ |
+
+Displaying online help (user manual)
+ |
+F1
+ |
+
+Template
+ |
+Alt+Ctrl+Space
+ |
+
+Switching to the first SQL Terminal tab
+ |
+Alt+S
+ |
+
+Selecting All
+ |
+Ctrl+A
+ |
+
+Opening the Setting menu
+ |
+Alt+G
+ |
+
+Refreshing the Object Browser pane
+ |
+F5
+ |
+
+Searching for objects
+ |
+Ctrl+Shift+S
+ |
+
+Opening the Debugging menu
+ |
+Alt+D
+ |
+
+Debugging a template
+ |
+F10
+ |
+
+Debugging a database object
+ |
+Ctrl+D
+ |
+
+Highlighting Object Browser
+ |
+Alt+X
+ |
+
+Opening the File menu
+ |
+Alt+F
+ |
+
+Creating a connection
+ |
+Ctrl+N
+ |
+
+Opening the Run menu
+ |
+Alt+R
+ |
+
+Switching between the SQL Terminal tabs
+ |
+Ctrl+Page Up or Ctrl+Page Down
+ |
+
+Expanding or collapsing all objects
+ |
+Ctrl+M
+ |
+
+Pasting content
+ |
+Ctrl+V
+ |
+
+Collapsing objects to browse the navigation tree
+ |
+Alt+Q
+ |
+
+Performing execution
+ |
+Ctrl+E
+ |
+
+Displaying the execution plan and expense
+ |
+Ctrl+Shift+X
+ |
+
+Stopping a running query
+ |
+Shift+Esc
+ |
+
+Commenting/Canceling the comment line or the entire segment
+ |
+Ctrl+Shift+/
+ |
+
+Opening the list of automatically recommended database objects
+ |
+Ctrl+Space
+ |
+
+
+
+
+
Downloading and Installing the Data Studio Client
+- GaussDB(DWS) provides a Windows-based Data Studio client and the tool depends on the JDK. You need to install the JDK on the client host first.
Only JDK 1.8 is supported.
+
In the Windows operating system, you can download the required JDK version from the official website of SDK, and install it by following the installation guidance.
+ - Log in to the GaussDB(DWS) management console. In the navigation pane, choose Management > Client Connections. The Download Client and Driver page is displayed.
- On the Download Client and Driver page, download Data Studio GUI Client.
- Select Windows x86 or Windows x64 based on the OS type and click Download to download a Data Studio version that matches the current cluster.
- Click Historical Version to download the corresponding Data Studio version. You are advised to download Data Studio based on the cluster version.
+Figure 1 Downloading the DSC client
+
+ - Decompress the downloaded client software package (32-bit or 64-bit) to the installation directory.
- Open the installation directory and double-click Data Studio.exe to start the Data Studio client.
Figure 2 Starting the client
+
+Table 1 Data Studio installation package structureFolders/Files
+ |
+Description
+ |
+
|---|
+
+configuration
+ |
+Contains information about the application startup and the required Eclipse plug-in path.
+ |
+
+db_assistant
+ |
+Contains files related to the SQL Assistant function.
+ |
+
+docs
+ |
+- Contains Data Studio User Manual.
+- Contains copyright notices, licenses, and written offer of the open source software used in Data Studio.
+ |
+
+features
+ |
+Contains Eclipse (rich client protocol-GUI) and Data Studio features.
+ |
+
+p2
+ |
+Contains files required for providing and managing Eclipse- and Equinox-based applications.
+ |
+
+plugins
+ |
+Contains the required Eclipse and Data Studio plug-ins.
+ |
+
+tools
+ |
+Contains tools that Data Studio depends on.
+ |
+
+UserData/
+- Autosave
- Logs/
- Preferences/
- Profile/
+
- Security/
+ |
+Contains folders of each OS user of Data Studio.
+Autosave: contains the information of queries and functions/procedures that are automatically saved.
+Logs: contains the Data Studio.log file that logs all the operations performed in Data Studio.
+Preferences: contains the Preferences.prefs file that stores the custom preferences.
+Profile: contains the connection.properties and Profiles.txt files, as well as SQL History, to manage connection information in Data Studio.
+Security: contains the files required for the management security of Data Studio.
+ NOTE: - The UserData folder is created after the first user opens the instance using Data Studio.
- The Logs folder, language, memory settings and log level are common for all users.
- After Data Studio is started, the Logs, Preferences, Profile, and Security folders, as well as the Data Studio.log, Preferences.prefs, connection.properties, and Profiles.txt files, are created.
- If the Logs folder path is specified in the Data Studio.ini file, logs are created in the specified path.
- When you cannot log in to Data Studio due to a damaged security key, perform the following steps to generate a new security key:
- Delete the security folder in Data Studio > UserData.
- Restart Data Studio.
+
+
+ |
+
+artifacts.xml
+ |
+Contains the product build information.
+ |
+
+changelog.txt
+ |
+Contains the detailed log changes of the current release.
+ |
+
+Data Studio.exe/DataStudio.sh
+ |
+Allows you to connect to a server and perform operations, such as managing database objects, editing or executing PL/SQL programs.
+ |
+
+Data Studio.ini
+ |
+Contains the configuration information for running Data Studio.
+ |
+
+readme.txt
+ |
+Contains the features or fixed issues of the current release.
+ |
+
+
+
+
If your computer blocks the running of the application, you can unlock the Data Studio.exe file to start the application.
+
+ - After the installation is complete, double-click the StartDataStudio.bat file in installation directory/tools to check the versions of the OS, Java, and Data Studio.
The batch file checks the version compatibility and will launch Data Studio or display appropriate message based on the OS, Java and Data Studio version installed.
+If the Java version installed is earlier than 1.8, then an error message may be displayed.
+The batch file determines the versions of the OS and Java for Data Studio based on the following scenarios:
+
+DS Installation (32-bit/64-bit)
+ |
+OS (Bit)
+ |
+Java (bit)
+ |
+Result
+ |
+
|---|
+
+32
+ |
+32
+ |
+32
+ |
+Data Studio is launched.
+ |
+
+32
+ |
+64
+ |
+32
+ |
+Data Studio is launched.
+ |
+
+32
+ |
+64
+ |
+64
+ |
+An error message will be displayed.
+ |
+
+64
+ |
+32
+ |
+32
+ |
+An error message will be displayed.
+ |
+
+64
+ |
+64
+ |
+32
+ |
+An error message will be displayed.
+ |
+
+64
+ |
+64
+ |
+64
+ |
+Data Studio is launched.
+ |
+
+
+
+
+
+
Configuring Data Studio
+This section describes the configuration steps to use Data Studio. It also explains the steps to configure servers for debugging PL/SQL Functions.
+
Configuring Data Studio
Steps to configure Data Studio using Data Studio.ini file:
+
+
Restart Data Studio to view parameter changes. Invalid parameters added in the configuration file are ignored by Data Studio.
+
+
The following table lists the configuration parameters used in Data Studio.
+
+
Table 1 Configuration parametersParameter
+ |
+Description
+ |
+Value Range
+ |
+Default Value
+ |
+
|---|
+
+-startup
+ |
+Defines the JAR files required to load Data Studio. This information varies based on the version used.
+ |
+N/A
+ |
+plugins/org.eclipse.equinox.launcher_1.3.100.v20150511-1540.jar
+ |
+
+--launcher.library
+ |
+Specifies the library required for loading Data Studio. The library varies depending on the Data Studio version.
+ |
+N/A
+ |
+plugins/org.eclipse.equinox.launcher.win32.win32.x86_1.1.300.v20150602-1417 or plugins/org.eclipse.equinox.launcher.win32.win32.x86_64_1.1.300.v20150602-1417 depending on the installation package used
+ |
+
+-clearPersistedState
+ |
+Removes any cached content on the GUI and reloads Data Studio.
+ |
+N/A
+ |
+N/A
+ NOTE: You are advised to add this parameter.
+
+ |
+
+-consoleLineCount
+ |
+Defines the maximum number of lines to be displayed in the Messages window.
+ |
+1-5000
+ |
+1000
+ |
+
+-logfolder
+ |
+Used to create the log folder. The user can specify the path to save logs. If the default value "." is used, then the folder is created in Data Studio\UserData\<user name>\logs. For details, see Setting the Location for Creating Log Files.
+ |
+N/A
+ |
+-
+ |
+
+-loginTimeout
+ |
+Defines the connection wait time in seconds. Within the period specified by this parameter, Data Studio continuously attempts to connect to the database. If the connection times out, the system displays a message indicating that the connection times out or the connection fails.
+ |
+N/A
+ |
+180
+ |
+
+-data
+ |
+Defines the instance data location for the session.
+ |
+N/A
+ |
+@none
+ |
+
+@user.home/MyAppWorkspace
+ |
+Eclipse workspace is created in this location while Data Studio is being launched.
+@user.home refers to C:/Users/<username>
+Eclipse log files are available in @user.home/MyAppWorkspace/.metadata
+ |
+N/A
+ |
+N/A
+ |
+
+-detailLogging
+ |
+Defines the criteria with reference to logging error messages.
+Set to True to log all error messages.
+Set to False to log only error messages explicitly specified by Data Studio.
+Refer to Controlling Exception and Error Logs for more information.
+This parameter is not added by default and it can be set manually if logging is required.
+ |
+True/False
+ |
+False
+ |
+
+-logginglevel
+ |
+Creates the log files based on the value specified. If the value provided is arbitrary or empty, log files will be created using WARN value. For details, see Different Types of Log Levels.
+This parameter is not added by default and it can be set manually if logging is required.
+ |
+FATAL, ERROR, WARN, INFO, DEBUG TRACE, ALL, and OFF
+ |
+WARN
+ |
+
+-focusOnFirstResult
+ |
+Defines auto focus behavior for Result window.
+Set to false to automatically set focus to the last opened Result window.
+Set to true to disable the automatic set focus.
+ |
+True/False
+ |
+False
+ |
+
+ NOTE: - All the above parameters must be added before -vmargs.
- -startup and --launcher.library must be added as first and second parameter respectively.
+
+ |
+
+-vmargs
+ |
+Specifies the start of virtual machine arguments.
+ NOTE: -vmargs must be the last parameter in the configuration file.
+
+ |
+N/A
+ |
+N/A
+ |
+
+-vm
+<file name (javaw.exe) with relative path to Java executable>
+ |
+Specifies the file name, for example, javaw.exe, and the relative path to Java.
+ |
+N/A
+ |
+N/A
+ |
+
+-Dosgi.requiredJavaVersion
+ |
+Defines the minimum java version required to run Data Studio. This value must not be modified.
+ |
+N/A
+ |
+1.5
+ NOTE: Note: Recommended Java version is 1.8.0_141
+
+ |
+
+-Xms
+ |
+Defines the initial heap space that Data Studio consumes. This value must be in multiples of 1024 and greater than 40 MB and less than or equal to -Xmx size. Append the letter k or K to indicate kilobytes, m or M to indicate megabytes, g or G to indicate gigabytes. For example:
+-Xms40m
+-Xms120m
+Refer to Java documentation for more information.
+ |
+N/A
+ |
+-Xms40m
+ |
+
+-Xmx
+ |
+Defines the maximum heap space that Data Studio consumes. This value can be modified based on the available RAM space. Append the letter k or K to indicate kilobytes, m or M to indicate megabytes, g or G to indicate gigabytes. For example:
+-Xmx1200m
+-Xmx1000m
+Refer to Java documentation for more information.
+ |
+N/A
+ |
+-Xmx1200m
+ |
+
+-OLTPVersionOldST
+ |
+Used to configure the earlier OLTP versions. You can log in to gsql and run SELECT VERSION() to update the OLTPVersionOldST parameter in the .ini file using the obtained version number.
+ |
+-
+ |
+-
+ |
+
+-OLTPVersionNewST
+ |
+Used to configure the latest OLTP version. You can log in to gsql and run SELECT VERSION() to update the OLTPVersionNewST parameter in the .ini file using the obtained version number.
+ |
+-
+ |
+-
+ |
+
+-testability
+ |
+This parameter is used to enable testability features. For the current version after this function is enabled:
+- The user can copy content of last triggered auto-suggest operation using the Ctrl+Space shortcut key.
- When Include Analyze is selected, Execution Plan and Cost is displayed in tree and graphical view.
+This parameter is unavailable by default and needs to be manually added.
+ |
+True/False
+ |
+False
+ |
+
+-Duser.language
+ |
+Defines the language settings for Data Studio. This parameter is added after the language setting is changed.
+ |
+zh/en
+ |
+N/A
+ |
+
+-Duser.country
+ |
+Specifies the country/region settings of Data Studio. This parameter is added after the language setting is changed.
+ |
+CN/IN
+ |
+N/A
+ |
+
+-Dorg.osgi.framework.bundle.parent=ext
+ |
+This parameter specifies which class loader is used for boot delegation.
+ |
+boot/app/ext
+ |
+boot
+ |
+
+-Dosgi.framework.extensions=org.eclipse.fx.osgi
+ |
+This parameter is used to specify a list of framework extension names. Framework extension bundles are fragments of the system bundle (org.eclipse.osgi). As a fragment, user can provide extra classes with the framework to use.
+ |
+N/A
+ |
+N/A
+ |
+
+
+
+
+
+
- If you receive the message SocketException: Bad Address: Connect:
Check whether the client is connected to the server using the IPv6 or IPv4 protocol. You can also establish the connection by configuring the following parameters in the .ini file:
+-Djava.net.preferIPv4Stack=true
+-Djava.net.preferIPv6Stack=false
+Table 2 lists the supported communication scenarios.
+The first row and first column indicate the types of nodes that attempt to communicate with each other. x indicates that the nodes can communicate with each other.
+
+
+
+
Table 2 Communication scenariosNode
+ |
+V4 Only
+ |
+V4/V6
+ |
+V6 Only
+ |
+
|---|
+
+V4 only
+ |
+x
+ |
+x
+ |
+No communication possible
+ |
+
+V4/V6
+ |
+x
+ |
+x
+ |
+x
+ |
+
+V6 only
+ |
+No communication possible
+ |
+x
+ |
+x
+ |
+
+
+
+
+
Setting the Location for Creating Log Files
- Open the Data Studio.ini file.
- Provide the path for the -logfolder parameter.
For example:
+-logfolder=c:\test1
+In this case, the Data Studio.log file is created in the c:\test1\<user name>\logs path.
+ If any of the users does not have access to the path mentioned in the Data Studio.ini file, then Data Studio closes with the below pop-up message.
+
+
+
+
+
The Data Studio.log file will be created in the Data Studio\UserData\Username\logs path if:
+
+
Refer to the server manual for detailed information.
+
+
You can use any text editor to open and view the Data Studio.log file.
+
+
Controlling Exception and Error Logs
The stack running details of exception, error or throw-able are controlled based on the program argument parameter. This parameter is configured in the Data Studio.ini file.
+
-detailLogging=false
+
If the value of -detailLogging is set to True, errors, exceptions, or stack running details of throwables will be logged.
+
If the value of -detailLogging is set to False, errors, exceptions, or stack running details of throwables will not be logged.
+
+
Description of the Log Message
The log message is described as follows:
+
+
When the size of the Data Studio.log file reaches 10,000 KB (the maximum value), the system automatically creates a file and saves it as Data Studio.log.1. Logs in Data Studio.log are stored in Data Studio.log.1. When the size of the Data Studio.log file reaches the maximum again, the system will automatically create a file and save it as Data Studio.log.2. Latest logs are always written in the Data Studio.log file. This process continues till Data Studio.log.5 reaches the maximum file size and the cycle restarts. Data Studio deletes the earliest log file Data Studio.log.1. For example, the Data Studio.log.5 renames to Data Studio.log.4, the Data Studio.log.4 renames to Data Studio.log.3 and so on.
+
To enable performance logging in the server log file, the configuration parameter log_min_messages must be enabled and value must be set as debug1 in the configuration file data/postgresql.conf, that is, log_min_messages = debug1.
+
+
+
Different Types of Log Levels
The different types of log levels that are displayed in the Data Studio.log file are as follows:
+
- TRACE: The TRACE level provides more detailed information than the DEBUG level.
- DEBUG: The DEBUG level indicates the granular information events that are most useful for debugging an application.
- INFO: The INFO level indicates the information messages that highlight the progress of the application.
- WARN: The WARN level indicates potentially harmful situations.
- ERROR: The ERROR level indicates error events.
- FATAL: The FATAL level indicates event(s) which cause the application to abort.
- ALL: The ALL level turns on all the log levels.
- OFF: The OFF level turns off all the log levels. This is opposite to ALL level.
- If the user enters an invalid value to log level, then log level will be set to WARN.
- If the user does not provide any log level, then log level will be set to WARN.
+
+
+
+
The logger outputs all messages greater than or equal to its log level.
+
The order of the standard log4j levels is as follows:
+
+
Table 3 Log levels-
+ |
+FATAL
+ |
+ERROR
+ |
+WARN
+ |
+INFO
+ |
+DEBUG
+ |
+TRACE
+ |
+
|---|
+
+OFF
+ |
+x
+ |
+x
+ |
+x
+ |
+x
+ |
+x
+ |
+x
+ |
+
+FATAL
+ |
+√
+ |
+x
+ |
+x
+ |
+x
+ |
+x
+ |
+x
+ |
+
+ERROR
+ |
+√
+ |
+√
+ |
+x
+ |
+x
+ |
+x
+ |
+x
+ |
+
+WARN
+ |
+√
+ |
+√
+ |
+√
+ |
+x
+ |
+x
+ |
+x
+ |
+
+INFO
+ |
+√
+ |
+√
+ |
+√
+ |
+√
+ |
+x
+ |
+x
+ |
+
+DEBUG
+ |
+√
+ |
+√
+ |
+√
+ |
+√
+ |
+√
+ |
+x
+ |
+
+TRACE
+ |
+√
+ |
+√
+ |
+√
+ |
+√
+ |
+√
+ |
+√
+ |
+
+ALL
+ |
+√
+ |
+√
+ |
+√
+ |
+√
+ |
+√
+ |
+√
+ |
+
+√- Creating a log file x - Not creating a log file
+ |
+
+
+
+
+
Configuring SSL Connection
+Data Studio can connect to the database using the Secure Sockets Layer [SSL] option. To use the SSL connection mode, you must configure related parameters on the client or in the application code. The GaussDB(DWS) management console provides the SSL certificate required by the client. The SSL certificate contains the default certificate, private key, root certificate, and private key password encryption file required by the client.
+
Server Configuration
After a cluster is deployed, GaussDB(DWS) enables the SSL authentication mode by default. The server certificate, private key, and root certificate have been configured.
+
+
SSL Certificate and Client Configuration
You need to configure the client.
+
- You can download an SSL certificate from GaussDB(DWS).
Log in to the GaussDB(DWS) management console. In the navigation pane, choose Connections. In the Driver area, click download an SSL certificate.
+ - Decompress the downloaded dws_ssl_cert.zip package to obtain the certificate file. Click the SSL tab on the Data Studio client and set the following parameters:
+
Table 1 Configuring SSL parametersParameter
+ |
+Description
+ |
+
|---|
+
+Client SSL Certificate
+ |
+Select the sslcert\client.crt file in the decompressed SSL certificate directory.
+ |
+
+Client SSL Key
+ |
+Only the PK8 format is supported. Select the sslcert\client.key.pk8 file in the directory where the SSL certificate is decompressed.
+ |
+
+Root Certificate
+ |
+When SSL Mode is set to verify-ca or verify-full, the root certificate must be configured. Select the sslcert\cacert.pem file in the decompressed SSL certificate directory.
+ |
+
+SSL Password
+ |
+Set the password for the client SSL key in PK8 format.
+ |
+
+SSL Mode
+ |
+GaussDB(DWS) supports the following SSL modes:
+- require: The SSL factory does not require verification, nor does it check the certificate validity.
- verify-ca: The certificate authority (CA) will be verified using the corresponding SSL factory.
- verify-full: The CA and database will be verified using the corresponding SSL factory.
+GaussDB(DWS) does not support the verify-full mode.
+ |
+
+
+
+
- You can select a valid Client SSL Certificate and Client SSL Key to export DDL and data from Data Studio using secure connections.
- If the selected Client SSL Certificate and Client SSL Key are invalid, the export will fail. For details, see Troubleshooting.
- If you deselect Enable SSL and proceed, the Connection Security Alert dialog box is displayed. Refer to Table 1 to determine whether to display this dialog box.
- Continue: Continues to use insecure connections.
- Cancel: Enables SSL.
- Do not show again: If you select this option, the Connection Security Alert dialog box is not displayed for the subsequent connections of logged Data Studio instances.
+ - Data Studio prompts you to enter the client key upon the first access to the gs_dump feature.
+
+Figure 1 SSL parameters
+
+
+
+
Database Management
+
+
+
+
+
diff --git a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_013.html b/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_013.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..2b0e51ac5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_013.html
@@ -0,0 +1,64 @@
+
+
+Database Management
+A relational database contains a set of tables that can be operated based on the relational model of data. A relational database contains a group of data objects for storing, managing, and accessing data objects, including tables, views, indexes, and functions.
+
Creating a Database
- In the Object Browser pane, right-click the Databases group and select Create Database.
+
+ - A Create Database dialog box is displayed, prompting you to provide the information required for creating a database.
- Enter a database name.
- Select the required type of encoding character set from the Database Encoding drop-down list. The database supports UTF-8, GBK, SQL_ASCII, and LATIN1 encoding character sets. Creating the database with other encoding character sets may result in erroneous operations.
This operation can be performed only when there is at least one active database.
+
+
+ - Select Connect to the DB and click OK.
The status bar displays the status of the completed operation.
+You can view the created database in the Object Browser. The system-related schema in the server is automatically added to the new database.
+
+
+
Connecting to the Database
In the
Object Browser pane, right-click the database name and choose
Connect to DB. The status bar displays the status of the completed operation.
This operation can be performed on a disconnected database.
+
+
+
+
Renames a Database
- In the Object Browser pane, right-click the selected database and select Rename Database.
This operation can be performed on a disconnected database.
+
+The Rename Database dialog box is displayed, prompting you to provide the information required for renaming the database.
+ - Enter a new database name. Select the Connect to the DB check box and click OK.
A confirmation dialog box is displayed, promoting you to confirm the renaming operation.
+
+
+
Disconnecting from a Database
You can disconnect all databases or a specified database under a connection by using the disconnection function.
+
- In the Object Browser pane, right-click the selected the Databases group and select Disconnect All. This will disconnect all the databases under the connection.
+ This operation can be performed only when there is at least one active database.
+
+
A confirmation dialog box is displayed, prompting you to confirm the disconnection operation.
+ - In the Object Browser pane, right-click the selected database name and select Disconnect from DB.
+ This operation can be performed only on the primary database.
+
+
+
+
Dropping a Database
In the Object Browser pane, right-click the selected database and select Drop Database. A confirmation dialog box is displayed, asking you whether to delete the database.
+
+
This operation can be performed on a disconnected database.
+
+
+
+
Viewing Data Properties
Right-click the selected database and select Properties. The status bar displays the status of the completed operation.
+
+
+
The properties of the selected database are displayed.
+
+
+
- This operation can be performed only when there is at least one active database.
- If the property of an opened database is modified, then refresh and open the properties of the database again to view the updated information on the same opened window.
+
+
+
Schema Management
+This section introduces how to use the database schema. All system schemas are grouped in Catalogs, and user schemas are grouped in Schemas.
+
Create Schema
- In the Object Browser pane, right-click the selected Schemas group and select Create Schema.
Only refresh can be performed on Catalogs group.
+
+ - Enter a schema name and click OK. You can create the schema only if the database connection is active.
The status bar displays the status of the completed operation.
+You can view the new schema in the Object Browser pane.
+
+
Data studio displays default schema of the user in the toolbar.
+
+
- When a CREATE query without mentioning the schema name is executed from SQL Terminal, the corresponding objects are created under the default schema of the user.
- When a SELECT query is executed in SQL terminal without mentioning the schema name, the objects are queried based on the default schema.
- When Data Studio starts, the default schemas are set to <username>. The public schemas have the same priority.
- If another schema is selected in the drop-down, the selected schema will be set as the default schema, overriding previous setting.
- The selected schema is set as the default schema for all active connections of the database (selected in database list drop-down).
+
+
+
Exporting Schema DDL and Data
You can right-click Export DDL to export the DDL of functions/procedures, tables, sequences, and views of the schema. To export data, choose Export DDL and Data.
+
- In the Object Browser pane, right-click the selected schema and select Export DDL.
You need to customize the export path. To compress data, select .zip.
+
+
+You must select I Agree under the Security Disclaimer, then click OK. You can select Do not show again. After the disclaimer is disabled, it will not be displayed when you export DDL. For details, see Table 1.
+ - Click OK. The operation progress is displayed on the status bar in the lower right corner.
- If the file name contains characters that are not supported by Windows, the file name will be different from the schema name.
- The Microsoft Visual C Runtime file (msvcrt100.dll) is required for this operation. For details, see Troubleshooting.
- You can select multiple objects and export their DDL. Batch Export lists the objects whose DDL cannot be exported.
+
+The Data Exported Successfully dialog box and status bar display the status of the completed operation.
+
+Table 1 The supported DDL encoding formatsDatabase Encoding
+ |
+File Encoding
+ |
+Support for Exporting a DDL
+ |
+
|---|
+
+UTF-8
+ |
+UTF-8
+ |
+Yes
+ |
+
+GBK
+ |
+Yes
+ |
+
+LATIN1
+ |
+Yes
+ |
+
+GBK
+ |
+GBK
+ |
+Yes
+ |
+
+UTF-8
+ |
+Yes
+ |
+
+LATIN1
+ |
+No
+ |
+
+LATIN1
+ |
+LATIN1
+ |
+Yes
+ |
+
+GBK
+ |
+No
+ |
+
+UTF-8
+ |
+Yes
+ |
+
+
+
+
+
+
Renaming a Schema
- In the Object Browser pane, right-click the selected schema and select Rename Schema.
- Enter a schema name and click OK.
You can view the renamed schema in Object Browser.
+The status bar displays the status of the completed operation.
+
+
+
Granting/Revoking a Privilege
- Right-click the schema group and select Grant/Revoke.
The Grant/Revoke dialog box is displayed.
+ - Open the Object Selection tab to select the desired objects, and click Next.
- Select the role from the Role drop-down list in the Privilege Selection tab. Select the permissions to be granted or revoked.
- On the SQL Preview tab, you can check the automatically generated SQL query. If the result does not meet the expectation, return to the previous step until the result meets the expectation.
- Click Finish.
+
+
Dropping a Schema
- In the Object Browser pane, right-click the selected schema and select Drop Schema. A confirmation dialog is displayed, prompting you to confirm the deletion.
- Click OK. This action will remove the schema from Object Browser.
A pop-up message and the status bar display the status of the completed operation.
+
+
+
Refreshing a Schema
Right-click a schema name and choose Refresh to refresh all objects in the schema.
+
+
Function/Procedure Management
+Creating a Function/Procedure
- In the Object Browser pane, right-click Functions/Procedures under the schema where you want to create the function/procedure. Then select Create Function, Create SQL Function, Create Procedure, or Create C Function as required.
Right-click Functions/Procedures and a menu is displayed.
+
+
+ - The selected template is displayed in the new tab of Data Studio.
+
+ - After adding a function or procedure, you can choose Run > Compile/Execute Statement from the main menu or right-click the tab and select Compile to compile the function or procedure.
+
+ - The new function/procedure is displayed under Object Browser.
- The asterisk (*) next to the procedure name indicates that the procedure is not compiled or added to Object Browser.
- Refresh Object Browser by pressing F5 to view the newly added debugging object.
- C functions do not support debugging operations.
- A pop-up message displays the status of the completed operation, which is not displayed in the status bar.
+
+
+
+
Editing a Function/Procedure
- In the Object Browser pane, double-click or right-click the required function/procedure or SQL function and select View Source.
The selected function/procedure or SQL function is displayed in the PL/SQL Viewer tab page.
+
+ - You must refresh Object Browser to view the latest DDL.
- If multiple functions/procedures or SQL functions have the same schema, name, and input parameters, only one of them can be opened at a time.
+
+ - After editing or updating, compile and execute the PL/SQL program or SQL function.
If you execute the function/procedure or SQL function before compilation, the Source Code Change dialog box is displayed.
+ - Click Yes to compile and execute the PL/SQL function/procedure. The status of the completed operation is displayed in the Message tab page.
- After compiling the function/procedure or SQL function, press F5 to refresh Object Browser to view the updated code.
+
+
Granting or Revoking a Permission
- Right-click Function/Procedure Group and select Grant/Revoke. The Grant/Revoke dialog box is displayed.
- Open the Object Selection tab to select the desired objects, and click Next.
- The Privilege Selection tab is displayed. Select the role from the Role drop-down list.
- On the SQL Preview tab, you can check the automatically generated SQL query. If the result does not meet the expectation, return to the previous step until the result meets the expectation.
- Click Finish.
+
+
Debugging a Function/Procedure
A breakpoint is used to stop a PL/SQL program on the line where the breakpoint is set. You can use breakpoints to control the execution and debug the procedure. When a line with a breakpoint set is reached, the PL/SQL program on this line will be stopped, and you can perform other debugging operations.
+
- Setting or Adding a Breakpoint on a Line
Data Studio allows you to set or add breakpoints on a line.
+Open the function or procedure for which you want to add a breakpoint, double-click the breakpoint ruler on the left of the line number field, and set a breakpoint. If the breakpoint is enabled, the operation is successful. If the function is not interrupted or stopped during debugging, the breakpoint set for the function is not validated.
+ - Using the Breakpoints Pane
You can view and manage all breakpoints in the Breakpoints pane. Click the breakpoint option at the minimized pane to open the Breakpoints pane.
+You can enable, disable or remove a specific breakpoint by selecting the breakpoint check box and clicking the enabling, disabling, and removing icon in the Breakpoints pane. You can also double-click the breakpoint ruler on the left of the line number field to set a breakpoint or double-click the breakpoint icon to delete the breakpoint.
+In the PL/SQL Viewer pane, double-click the required breakpoint in the Breakpoint Info column to locate the breakpoint.
+
+
+ - The Breakpoints pane lists each breakpoint with the row number and the debug object name.
- When a breakpoint is disabled, the program will not be stopped at the breakpoint. The breakpoint will be retained and can be enabled later.
- A removed breakpoint cannot be restored.
- Press Alt+Y to copy the content of the Breakpoints pane.
+
+
+
- Changing Source Code
During debugging, if the source code is changed after it is fetched from the server and the debugging is continued, Data Studio displays an error. You are advised to refresh the object and perform the debug operation again.
+If you change the source code obtained from the server and execute or debug the source code without setting a breakpoint, the result of the source code obtained from the server will be displayed on Data Studio. You are advised to refresh the source code before executing or debugging it.
+ - Using Breakpoints to Debug Functions/Procedures
After adding a breakpoint in the row you want to debug, click the debug icon or right-click the selected function in Object Browser and select Debug. In the Debug Function/Procedure dialog box, enter the parameter information.
+
+
+ - If no parameter is entered, the Debug Function/Procedure dialog box will not be displayed.
- Single quotation marks (') are mandatory for the parameters of varchar and date data types, but not mandatory for the parameters of numeric data type. To set the parameter to NULL, enter NULL or null.
- When a function or procedure is debugged or executed, the same parameter values are used for the next debugging or execution. The Value column is empty upon the first execution. Enter the values as required. Click OK. The parameter values will be cached. The cached parameter values will be displayed in the next execution or debugging. Once a specific connection is removed, all the cached parameter values are cleared.
+
+- The Callstack pane is populated.
+ - The Variables pane shows the current value of variables. If you hover over the variable of a function/procedure, the current value is also displayed. System variables are displayed by default in the Variables pane. You can disable the display of system variables if necessary. The button is toggled on by default.
+
+
+Setting/Displaying Variables
+ |
+Description
+ |
+
|---|
+
+Setting a variable to NULL
+ |
+- Double-click a variable value in the Variables pane.
A dialog box is displayed.
+ - Set the variable to an empty value.
+ |
+
+Setting a string value
+ |
+Some examples are as follows:
+- To set the value to abc, enter abc.
- To set the value to Master's Degree, enter Master's Degree.
- To set the value as text (NULL), set it to NULL in the Variables pane.
+ |
+
+Setting a BOOLEAN value
+ |
+Enclose the BOOLEAN value t or f within single quotation marks ('). For example, to set t to a BOOLEAN variable, enter 't' in the Value column.
+ |
+
+Displaying a variable value
+ |
+If the variable value is NULL, it will be displayed as NULL.
+If the variable value is NULL, it will be displayed as empty.
+If the variable value is set to a string, for example, abc, it will be displayed as abc.
+ |
+
+
+
+
- During function/procedure debugging, right-click the variable to be added in the editor and choose Add Variable To Monitor in the menu displayed. If the variable is monitored, its value in the Monitor pane will always be the same as that in the Variables pane.
- In Data Studio, variable information is displayed if the cursor is hovered over that variable during the debugging of PL/SQL functions.
+ - Terminating Debugging
Click the terminating debugging button on the toolbar or choose Debug > Terminate Debugging. After the debugging is complete, the function execution proceeds and will not be stopped at any breakpoint.
+After the debugging is complete, the result tab page displays the function execution result, and the Callstack and Variables panes are cleared.
+ - Data Studio provides the option to commit/rollback the query execution result after debugging is finished. Right-click the SQL Terminal window where the function is executed. Select Debug With Rollback to enable the rollback function after the debugging is complete.
- If Debug With Rollback option is enabled, the function execution result after debugging is not saved to the database.
- If Debug With Rollback option is disabled, the function execution result after debugging is submitted to the database.
+
+
+
Controlling Execution
- Single Stepping a PL/SQL Function
You can run the command for single stepping in the toolbar to debug a function. This allows you to debug the program line by line. When a breakpoint occurs during the operation of single stepping, the operation will be suspended and the program will be stopped.
+Single stepping means executing one statement at a time. Once a statement is executed, you can see the execution result in other debugging tabs.
+ A maximum of 100 PL/SQL Viewer tabs can be displayed at a time. If more than 100 tabs are opened, the tabs of function calls will be closed. For example, if 100 tabs are opened and a new debugging object is called, Data Studio will close the tabs of function calls and open the tab of the new debugging object.
+
+ - Step into
To step through code one statement at a time, select Step Into from the Debug menu.
+When stepping into a function, Data Studio executes the current statement and then enters the break mode. The debug position will be indicated by an arrow 
on the left ruler pane. If the execution statement calls another function, Data Studio will step into that function. Once you have stepped through all the statements in that function, Data Studio jumps to the next statement of the function it was called from.
+Press F7 to go to the next statement. If you click Continue, PL/SQL code execution will continue.
+
+ - Step Over
Step Over is the same as Step Into. Unless another function is called, it will not step into the function. The function will run, and the next statement in the current function is executed. F8 is the shortcut key for Step Over. However, if there is a breakpoint set inside the called function, Step Over will enter the function, and hit the set breakpoint.
+ - Step Out
Stepping out of a sub-program continues the execution of the function and then suspends the execution after the function returns to its function call. You can step out this function when the rest of the function does not need to debug. However, if a breakpoint is set in the remaining part of the function, then that breakpoint will be hit before returning to the function call.
+A function will be executed when you step over or step out of it. Shift+F7 is the shortcut key for Step Out.
+
+ - Continuing the Debugging
When the debugging process stops at a specific location, you can select Continue (or press F9) from the Debug menu to continue the PL/SQL function execution.
+ - Viewing Callstack
The Callstack pane displays the chain of functions as they are called. The Callstack pane can be opened from the minimized window. The most recent functions are listed at the top, and the least recent at the bottom. At the end of each function name is the current line number in that function.
+You can double-click the function names in the Callstack pane to open panes of different functions.
+
+
+
+
Exporting a Function or Procedure DDL
Follow the steps below to export the function/procedure DDL:
+
- In the Object Browser pane, right-click the selected function or procedure and select Export DDL.
You need to customize the export path. To compress data, select .zip.
+
+
+You must select I agree under Security Disclaimer, then click OK. You can disable the security disclaimer. After the disclaimer is disabled, it will not be displayed when you export the DDL. For details, see Table 1.
+ - Click OK. The operation progress is displayed on the status bar in the lower right corner.
- If the file name contains characters that are not supported by Windows, the file name will be different from the schema name.
- MS Visual C runtime file (msvcrt100.dll) is required to complete this operation. For details, see Troubleshooting.
+
+The Data Exported Successfully dialog box and status bar display the status of the completed operation.
+
+Table 1 Supported DDL encoding formatsDatabase Encoding
+ |
+File Encoding
+ |
+Support for Exporting a DDL
+ |
+
|---|
+
+UTF-8
+ |
+UTF-8
+ |
+Yes
+ |
+
+GBK
+ |
+Yes
+ |
+
+LATIN1
+ |
+Yes
+ |
+
+GBK
+ |
+GBK
+ |
+Yes
+ |
+
+UTF-8
+ |
+Yes
+ |
+
+LATIN1
+ |
+No
+ |
+
+LATIN1
+ |
+LATIN1
+ |
+Yes
+ |
+
+GBK
+ |
+No
+ |
+
+UTF-8
+ |
+Yes
+ |
+
+
+
+
+
+
Deleting a Function/Procedure
You can delete functions or programs one by one or in batches.
+
- In the Object Browser pane, right-click the selected function/procedure object and select Drop Object.
- Select one or more function or procedure objects and choose Delete Object.
- In the dialog box that is displayed, click Yes.
The status bar displays the status of the completed operation.
+
+
+
Table Management
+
+
+
diff --git a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_017.html b/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_017.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ea4c99945
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_017.html
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+
+
+Creating a Regular Table
+
+
+
diff --git a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_018.html b/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_018.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..05fc3f45b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_018.html
@@ -0,0 +1,407 @@
+
+
+Creating a Partitioned Table
+Partitioning refers to splitting what is logically one large table into smaller physical pieces based on specific schemes. The table based on the logic is called a partitioned table, and a physical piece is called a partition. Data is stored on these smaller physical pieces, namely, partitions, instead of the larger logical partitioned table.
+
Follow the steps below to define a table in your database:
+
- In the Object Browser pane, right-click Regular Tables, and choose Create Partition Table.
- Define basic table information, such as the table name and table type. For details, see Providing Basic Information.
- Define column information, such as the column name, data type schema, data type, and column constraint. For details, see Defining a Column.
- Select the data distribution information for the table. For details, see Configuring Data Distribution.
- Define column constraints for different constraint types. Constraint types include PRIMARY KEY, UNIQUE, and CHECK. For details, see Defining Table Constraints.
- Define table index information, such as the index name and access mode. For details, see Defining an Index.
- Define the partition information for the table such as partition name, partition column, partition value and so on. For details, see Defining a Partition.
On the SQL Preview tab, you can check the automatically generated SQL query. For details, see SQL Preview.
+ - To add comments to Column in the Create Partition Table dialog box, add column information in Description of Column (Max 5000 chars) text box and click Add.
+
Providing Basic Information
If you create a table in a schema, the current schema will be used as the schema of the table. Perform the following steps to create a partitioned table:
+
+
- Select a table storage mode from the Table Orientation drop-down list.
If table orientation is selected as ORC, then an HDFS Partitioned table is created. Enter the ORC version number in ORC Version.
+
+ - After providing the general information about the table, click Next to define the columns information for the table.
The following table describes the parameters of partitioned tables.
+
+Table 1 ParametersParameter
+ |
+Row Partition
+ |
+Column Partition
+ |
+ORC Partition
+ |
+
|---|
+
+Table Type
+ |
+x
+ |
+x
+ |
+x
+ |
+
+If Not Exists
+ |
+√
+ |
+√
+ |
+√
+ |
+
+With OIDS
+ |
+x
+ |
+x
+ |
+x
+ |
+
+Fill Factor
+ |
+√
+ |
+x
+ |
+x
+ |
+
+
+
+
+
Defining a Column
The following table describes the parameters of partitioned tables.
+
+
Table 2 ParametersParameter
+ |
+Row Partition
+ |
+Column Partition
+ |
+ORC Partition
+ |
+
|---|
+
+Array Dimensions
+ |
+√
+ |
+x
+ |
+x
+ |
+
+Data Type
+ |
+√
+ |
+x
+ |
+x
+ |
+
+NOT NULL
+ |
+√
+ |
+√
+ |
+√
+ |
+
+Default
+ |
+√
+ |
+√
+ |
+√
+ |
+
+UNIQUE
+ |
+√
+ |
+x
+ |
+x
+ |
+
+CHECK
+ |
+√
+ |
+x
+ |
+x
+ |
+
+
+
+
+
+
You can add, delete, and edit columns, and adjust the sequence of columns.
+
You can change the order of partitions in the table as required. To change the order, select the required partition and click Up or Down.
+
+
+
SQL Preview
Data Studio generates a DDL statement based on the inputs provided in Create New table wizard.
+
You can only view, select, and copy the query. You cannot edit the query.
+
- To select all queries, press Ctrl+A or right-click and select Select All.
- To copy the selected query, press Ctrl+C or right-click and select Copy.
+
Click Finish to create the table. On clicking the Finish button, the generated query will be sent to the server. Any errors are displayed in the dialog box and status bar.
+
+
Defining a Partition
The following table describes the parameters of partitioned tables.
+
+
Table 3 ParametersParameter
+ |
+Row Partition
+ |
+Column Partition
+ |
+ORC Partition
+ |
+
|---|
+
+Partition Type
+ |
+By Range
+ |
+By Range
+ |
+By Value
+ |
+
+Partition Name
+ |
+√
+ |
+√
+ |
+x
+ |
+
+Partition Value
+ |
+√
+ |
+√
+ |
+x
+ |
+
+
+
+
+
- If Row or Column is selected for Table Orientation on the General tab, By Range will be displayed in the Partition Type area. If ORC is selected for Table Orientation on the General tab, By Value will be displayed in the Partition Type area.
- In the Available Column area, select a column and click the Right Arrow button. The column will be moved to the Partition Column area.
- If Table Orientation is set to Row or Column, only one column can be selected for partitioning.
- If Table Orientation is set to ORC, up to four columns can be selected for partitioning.
- A maximum of four columns can be selected to define partitions.
+
+ - Enter a partition name.
- Click the Enter Partition Value button next to Partition Value. Enter the value by which you want to partition the table in Value column. Click OK.
- After you enter all information for partition, click Add.
You can add, delete, edit and move a column.
+Change the partition sequence according to the requirements in the table. To change the order, select the required partition and click Up or Down.
+
+
+
+ - After defining all partitions, click Next.
+
+
Defining an Index
For details about index definitions, see Defining an Index.
+
+
Table 4 ParametersParameter
+ |
+Row-store Table
+ |
+Column-store Table
+ |
+ORC Table
+ |
+
|---|
+
+Unique Indexes
+ |
+√
+ |
+x
+ |
+x
+ |
+
+btree
+ |
+√
+ |
+√
+ |
+x
+ |
+
+gin
+ |
+√
+ |
+√
+ |
+x
+ |
+
+gist
+ |
+√
+ |
+√
+ |
+x
+ |
+
+hash
+ |
+√
+ |
+√
+ |
+x
+ |
+
+psort
+ |
+√
+ |
+√
+ |
+x
+ |
+
+spgist
+ |
+√
+ |
+√
+ |
+x
+ |
+
+Fill Factor
+ |
+√
+ |
+x
+ |
+x
+ |
+
+User Defined Expression
+ |
+√
+ |
+x
+ |
+x
+ |
+
+Partial Index
+ |
+√
+ |
+x
+ |
+x
+ |
+
+
+
+
+
+
Defining Table Constraints
For details about how to define table constraints, see Defining Table Constraints.
+
+
Table 5 ParametersParameter
+ |
+Row Partition
+ |
+Column Partition
+ |
+ORC Table
+ |
+
|---|
+
+Check
+ |
+√
+ |
+x
+ |
+x
+ |
+
+Unique
+ |
+√
+ |
+x
+ |
+x
+ |
+
+Primary Key
+ |
+√
+ |
+x
+ |
+x
+ |
+
+
+
+
+
+
Configuring Data Distribution
For details about how to configure a distribution type, see Selecting Data Distribution.
+
+
Table 6 ParametersParameter
+ |
+Row Partition
+ |
+Column Partition
+ |
+ORC Partition
+ |
+
|---|
+
+DEFAULT DISTRIBUTION
+ |
+√
+ |
+√
+ |
+x
+ |
+
+Hash
+ |
+√
+ |
+√
+ |
+√
+ |
+
+Replication
+ |
+√
+ |
+√
+ |
+x
+ |
+
+
+
+
+
+
Dropping a Partition
- Right-click the selected index and select Drop Partition.
Drop Partition Table dialog box is displayed.
+ - Click OK.
The partition is deleted from the table. Data Studio displays the status of the operation in the status bar.
+
+
+
Renaming a partition
- Right-click the selected partition and select Rename Partition.
Rename Partition Table dialog box is displayed prompting you to provide the new name for the partition.
+ - Enter new name and click OK.
Data Studio displays the status of the operation in the status bar.
+
+
+
Editing Temporary Tables
+Data Studio allows you to edit temporary tables. Temporary tables are deleted automatically when you close the connection that was used to create the table.
+
+
Follow the steps to edit a temporary table:
+
- Execute a query on the temporary table.
The Result tab displays the results of the SQL query along with the query statement executed.
+ - Edit the temporary table on the Result tab. You can click to add, delete, modify, or cancel modifications to edit the temporary table.
+
+
+
Creating a Foreign Table
+ Currently, Data Studio does not support foreign table creation. You can only view foreign tables.
+
+
Foreign tables created using query execution in SQL Terminal or any other tool can be viewed in the Object browser after refresh.
+
Right-click the database, schema, or foreign table group and choose Refresh from the shortcut menu to view the created foreign table.
+
View Management
+Creating a View
Right-click the Views and select Create View. The DDL template for the view is displayed in the SQL Terminal tab.
+
+
+
+
Granting/Revoking a Privilege
- Right-click the views group and select Grant/Revoke. The Grant/Revoke dialog box is displayed.
- Select the objects to grant/revoke a privilege from the Object Selection tab and click Next.
- Select a role from the Role drop-down list in the Privilege Selection tab. Select Grant/Revoke in the Privilege Selection tab.
- On the SQL Preview tab, you can check the automatically generated for the inputs provided.
+
+
Viewing the DDL
Right-click the selected view and select Show DDL.
+
The DDL is displayed in a new SQL Terminal tab. You must refresh the Object Browser to view the latest DDL.
+
+
Exporting the View DDL
Right-click the selected view and select Export DDL.
+
- In the Object Browser pane, right-click the selected schema and select Export DDL.
You need to customize the export path. To compress data, select .zip
+
+
+You must click I agree under Security Disclaimer, then click OK. You can disable the security disclaimer. After the disclaimer is disabled, it will not be displayed when you export the DDL. For details, see Table 1.
+ - Click OK. The operation progress is displayed on the status bar in the lower right corner.
The Export message and status bar display the status of the completed operation.
+ - To cancel the export operation, double-click the status to open the Progress View tab and click
. - If the view name contains characters that are not supported by Windows, the name of the exported file is different from the view name.
+
+
+Database Encoding
+ |
+File Encoding
+ |
+Support for Exporting a DDL
+ |
+
|---|
+
+UTF-8
+ |
+UTF-8
+ |
+Yes
+ |
+
+GBK
+ |
+Yes
+ |
+
+LATIN1
+ |
+Yes
+ |
+
+GBK
+ |
+GBK
+ |
+Yes
+ |
+
+UTF-8
+ |
+Yes
+ |
+
+LATIN1
+ |
+No
+ |
+
+LATIN1
+ |
+LATIN1
+ |
+Yes
+ |
+
+GBK
+ |
+No
+ |
+
+UTF-8
+ |
+Yes
+ |
+
+
+
+
+
+
Setting the Schema for a View
- Right-click the selected view and select Set Schema. The Set Schema dialog box is displayed.
+
+ - Select the required schema from the drop-down list and click OK.
The status bar displays the status of the completed operation.
+If the required schema contains a view with the same name as the current view, then Data Studio does not allow setting the schema for the view.
+
+
+
Viewing the Properties of a View
Right-click the selected View and select Properties.
+
The properties (General and Columns) of the selected view is displayed in different tabs.
+
+
+
+
+
If you modify the properties of a view that is already opened, then refresh and open the properties of the view again to check the updated information on the same opened window.
+
+
+
Renaming a View
- Right-click the selected view and select Rename View. The Rename View dialog box is displayed.
+
+ - Enter the required name for the view and click OK. You can view the renamed view in the Object Browser.
The status bar displays the status of the completed operation.
+
+
+
Dropping a View
Right-click the selected view and select Drop View. The Drop View dialog box is displayed. Click Yes to delete the view.
+
Right-click the selected view and select Drop View Cascade.
+
+
Sequence Management
+Creating a Sequence
- In the Object Browser pane, right-click Sequences under the particular schema where you want to create the sequence and select Create Sequence. The Create New Sequence dialog box is displayed.
+
+ - Provide information to create a sequence:
- Enter a name in the Sequence Name field.
+ Select the Case check box to retain the capitalization of the text entered in Sequence Name field. For example, if the entered sequence name is Employee, then the sequence name is created as "Employee".
+
+- Enter the minimum value in the Minimum Value field.
- Enter the increase step value in the Increment By field.
- Enter maximum value in the Maximum Value field.
The maximum and minimum value should be between -9,223,372,036,854,775,808 and 9,223,372,036,854,775,807.
+
+ - Enter the start value of the sequence in Start Value field.
- Enter the cache information in Cache field. The cache value denotes the number of sequences stored in the memory for quick access.
- Select the Cycle field to recycle sequences after the number of sequences reaches either the maximum or minimum value.
The schema name auto-populates in the Schema field.
+
+ - Select the table from the Table drop-down list.
- Select the column from the Column drop-down list.
+ - Click Finish.
The status bar displays the status of the completed operation.
On the SQL Preview tab, you can view the SQL query automatically generated for the inputs provided.
+
+
+
+
Support for Sequence DDL
Data Studio allows you to display sequence DDL and export sequence DDL, including Show DDL, Export DDL, and Export DDL and Data.
+
In the Object Browser pane, right-click the selected table.
+
To check DDL statement, choose Show DDL.
+
To export DDL statements, choose Export DDL.
+
To export DDL and SELECT statements, choose Export DDL and Data
+
The procedure is shown in the following figure.
+
+
+
Only the sequence owner, system administrator, or a user who has the select permission on the sequence can perform the preceding operations.
+
+
+
Granting/Revoking a Privilege
- Right-click selected sequence and select Grant/Revoke. The Grant/Revoke dialog box is displayed.
- Select the objects to grant/revoke privilege from the Object Selection tab and click Next.
- Select the role from the Role drop-down list in the Privilege Selection tab. Select Grant/Revoke in the Privilege Selection tab.
- On the SQL Preview tab, you can check the automatically generated SQL query.
- Click Finish.
+
+
Dropping a Sequence
Right-click the selected sequence and select Drop Sequence. The Drop Sequence dialog box is displayed. Click Yes to drop the sequence.
+
Right-click the selected sequence and select Drop Sequence Cascade.
+
+
Users/Roles
+Creating a User/Role
A database is used by many users, and the users are grouped for management convenience. A database role represents a database user or a group of database users.
+
Users and roles have similar concepts in databases. In practice, you are advised to use a role to manage permissions rather than to access databases.
+
- Users: They are set of database users. These users are different from operating system users. These users can assign permissions to other users to access database objects.
- Role: This can be considered as a user or group based on the usage. Roles are at cluster level, and hence applicable to all databases in the cluster. A role is a cluster-level definition and applies to all databases in a cluster.
+
+
Dropping a User/Role
Right-click the selected user/role and select Drop User/Role.
+
+
+
+
Viewing/Editing User/Role Properties
Right-click the selected user/role and select Properties.
+
Data Studio displays the properties (General, Privilege, and Membership) of the selected user/role in different tabs. Editing of properties can be performed. OID is a non-editable field.
+
+
+
Viewing the User/Role DDL
Right-click the selected user/role and select Show DDL.
+
The user/role DDL is displayed in a new SQL Terminal tab. You must refresh the Object Browser to view the latest DDL.
+
+
SQL Terminal Management
+
+
+
diff --git a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_026.html b/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_026.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..448d345ea
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_026.html
@@ -0,0 +1,140 @@
+
+
+Opening Multiple SQL Terminal Tabs
+You can open multiple SQL Terminal tabs in Data Studio to execute multiple SQL statements for query in the current SQL Terminal tab. Perform the following steps to open a new SQL Terminal tab.
+
You can also open multiple SQL Terminal tabs on different connection templates.
+
- In the Object Browser pane, right-click the desired database and choose Open Terminal from the shortcut menu. Alternatively, click Open Terminal in the toolbar or press Ctrl+T to open a new SQL Terminal tab.
The SQL Terminal tab is displayed.
+The name format of the new SQL Terminal tab is as follows:
+Database name@Connection information(Tab number), for example, postgres@IDG_1(2). The number of each SQL Terminal tab in the same connection information is unique.
+
+
- In Data Studio, a maximum of 100 SQL Terminal tabs can be opened for each connected database. Based on the number of query times, each SQL Terminal tab contains multiple Result tabs and one Message tab. If the database connection is lost, the corresponding SQL Terminal tab is still available.
- The restoration operation applies to all minimized SQL Terminal tabs. You cannot restore a single tab.
- After all terminals are shut down, Data Studio resets the counter of the SQL terminal.
- After all Result Set tabs are closed, Data Studio resets the counter of the result set.
- Data Studio allows you to reset counters in the following pages: Display DDL Tablespace, Display DDL User/Role, Batch Delete, Result Set, and Execution Plan.
+
+
Data Studio displays an error message indicating that no result is found in the status bar. The Result tab displays the successful execution results.
+
Right-Click Menus in the Result Tab
You can copy or export cell data to an Excel file and generate a SQL query file.
+
+
After the SQL query result is displayed in the Result tab, right-click the result. The following menu is displayed:
+
+
Perform the following steps to add a row number and column header to the result set:
+
- On the menu bar of Data Studio, click Settings.
- Choose Preferences. Expand the Result Management tab and choose Query Results.
- In the Result Advanced Copy area, select Include column header and Include row number.
+
The following table describes the right-click options.
+
+
Table 1 Right-click optionsOption
+ |
+Sub-Item
+ |
+Description
+ |
+
|---|
+
+Copy Data
+
+ |
+Copy
+ |
+Copies data in the selected cell.
+ |
+
+Advanced Copy
+ |
+Copies data in the selected cell, row number, and column header based on the preference settings.
+ |
+
+Copy to Excel
+
+ |
+Copy as xls
+ |
+Exports data of selected cells to an xls file, which contains a maximum of 64,000 rows and 256 columns.
+ |
+
+Copy as xlsx
+ |
+Exports data of selected cells to an xlsx file, which contains a maximum of 1 million rows.
+ |
+
+Export
+
+ |
+Current Page
+ |
+Exports the table data on the current page.
+ |
+
+All Pages
+ |
+Exports all tables.
+ |
+
+Generate SQL
+
+
+ |
+Selected Line
+ |
+Selects data from the target table of the statement for inserting data to generate a SQL file.
+ |
+
+Current Page
+ |
+Selects data of the current page from the target table of the statement for inserting data to generate a SQL file.
+ |
+
+All Pages
+ |
+Selects all table data from the target table of the statement for inserting data to generate a SQL file.
+ |
+
+Set Null
+ |
+-
+ |
+Sets the cell data to null.
+ |
+
+Search
+ |
+-
+ |
+Searches for data in the selected cell and displays all data that meets the search criteria.
+ |
+
+
+
+
+
The preceding SQL files do not take effect for the result sets generated by queries that use JOIN, expressions, views, SET operators, aggregate functions, GROUP BY clauses, or column aliases.
+
+
Result Tab (Text View)
You can view data in text mode in the Result tab.
+
In addition to the grid view, you can also copy and search for data in the text view.
+
Click 
to obtain the result in text mode.
+
Searching for data in multiple cells may cause the system to display incorrect text results, because all information needs to be copied to the Search pane in plain text.
+
+
+
Displaying Execution Progress Bar
When a query is executed in the SQL Terminal pane, a progress bar is displayed to dynamically display the execution duration. After the query is complete, the time bar disappears. The total execution duration is displayed next to the time bar.
+
If you want to cancel the query, click Cancel next to the time bar.
+
The procedure is shown in the following figure.
+
+
- The Cancel button is deleted from the toolbar.
- The progress bar is also displayed when you compile or debug an object in the PL/SQL editor.
- The time format displayed in the progress bar is w hour x minute y second z millisecond.
- When queries are performed in batches in SQL Terminal, the progress bar displays the total time consumed by the queries.
+
+
+
Debugging Duration
During debugging, Data Studio displays the status bar, showing the last operation time and total debugging time of each debugging statement.
+
During the debugging, the last operation time and total debugging time of the terminal are updated continuously. The value of the total debugging time is the sum of the values of the last operation time.
+
This simplifies the search for time-consuming statements in the debugged object.
+
The procedure is shown in the following figure.
+
+
Functions and procedures can be debugged.
+
+
+
Managing the SQL Query Execution History
+Data Studio allows viewing and managing frequently used SQL queries. The history of executed SQL queries is maintained only for the SQL Terminal.
+
- On the SQL Terminal tab page, click SQL History. The SQL History dialog box is displayed.
+
+
+
SQL history scripts are not encrypted.
+
+
The number of queries saved in the SQL History dialog box is based on the value defined in Preferences > Editor > SQL History pane. Refer to the Table 1 section to modify the SQL History count. Data Studio overwrites the older queries into the SQL history after the list is full. The executed query is automatically stored in the list.
+
The SQL History dialog box has the following columns:
+
- Pin Status - Displays the pinned status of the queries. Pinned queries will always show on the top and it will not be deleted from the history even when the list is full.
- SQL Statement - Displays the SQL query. The number of characters for an SQL query displayed in the SQL Statement column is based on the number defined in Preferences > Editor > SQL History pane. Refer to the Table 1 section to modify the number of characters for a query.
- Number of Records - Displays the number of records fetched by the SQL query.
- Start Time - Displays the time the query execution was started.
- Execution Time - Displays the time taken to execute the query.
- Database Name - Displays the name of the database.
- Execution Status - Displays the execution status of the query as Success or Failure.
+
Deleting the connection profile deletes the history. If the SQL History dialog box is closed, the query is not removed from the list.
+
You can perform the following operations in the SQL History dialog box:
+
+
Loading an SQL Query Into the SQL Terminal
Follow the steps to load the SQL query into the SQL terminal:
+
- Select the required query and click
.The query is appended to the cursor position in the SQL Terminal.
+
+
+
Loading Multiple SQL Queries Into the SQL Terminal
The Load in SQL Terminal and close History button loads selected queries into the SQL Terminal and closes the SQL History dialog box.
+
Follow the steps to load selected SQL queries into the SQL terminal:
+
- Select the required queries.
- Click
.The queries are appended to the cursor position in the SQL Terminal.
+
+
If you continue the execution on error, then each statement in the terminal will be running as a scheduled job and runs one after the other. The execution status is updated on the console and job progress is displayed. When the time difference between Job Execution, Progress Bar Update and Console Update is very minimal, you will not be able to open the progress bar and stop the execution. In such scenarios you have to close the SQL terminal to the terminate execution.
+
+
+
Loading More Records
Regarding to load more data of result tab, you have to scroll down to bottom in order to load more data, which is inconvenient in some use cases. Currently, DS supports a loading more record button which makes it easier to trigger the loading more data action.
+
Follow the steps to load more records
+
- Select the required queries and click
.List all the required records.
+
+
+
Deleting an SQL Query
Follow the steps to delete a SQL query from the SQL history list:
+
- Select the required query and click
.A confirmation pop up window is displayed.
+ - Click OK.
+
+
Deleting all SQL Queries
Follow the steps to delete all SQL queries from the SQL History list:
+
- Click
.A confirmation pop up window is displayed.
+ - Click OK.
+
+
Pinning an SQL Query
You can pin queries that you do not want Data Studio to delete automatically from the SQL History. You can pin a maximum of 50 queries. Pinned queries are displayed at the top of the list. The value set in SQL history count does not affect the pinned queries. Refer to Table 1 for additional information on SQL history count.
+
The pinned queries appear on top once the SQL History window is closed and re-opened.
+
+
Follow the steps to pin a SQL query:
+
- Select the required SQL query and click
.The Pin Status column displays the pinned status of the query.
+
+
+
Unpinning an SQL Query
Follow the steps to unpin a SQL query:
+
- Select the required SQL query and click
.The Pin Status column displays the unpinned status of the query.
+
+
+
Opening and Saving SQL Scripts
+Opening an SQL Script
Follow the steps to open an SQL script:
+
- Choose File > Open from the main menu. Alternatively, click Open on the toolbar or right-click the SQL Terminal and select Open.
If the SQL Terminal has existing content, then there will be an option to overwrite the existing content or append content to it.
+ - The Open dialog box is displayed.
- In Open dialog box, select the SQL file to import and click Open.
The selected SQL script is opened as a File Terminal.
+The icons on the file terminal tab are different from those on the SQL terminal tab. When you move the mouse cursor over the source file, corresponding database connection will be displayed on File Terminal.
+
+
- The encoding type of the SQL file must match the encoding type specified in Table 1.
- Label of the file terminal will start with asterisk(*) if any of its content is edited. Dirty flag is removed once the file terminal is saved.
- File Terminals cannot be renamed. One terminal is always mapped to one Source Script File, but one script can be opened in multiple terminals.
- You can open SQL scripts only on SQL Terminals.
+
+
+
Data Studio allows you to save and open SQL scripts in the SQL Terminal. After saving the changes, SQL Terminal will be changed to a File Terminal.
+
Saving an SQL Script
The Save option saves the File Terminal content to the associated file.
+
Follow the steps to save an SQL script:
+
- Perform any of the following operations:
- Choose File > Save from the main menu.
- Press "Ctrl + S" to save the SQL terminal content. (This operation can be performed to save the file terminal content.)
- Click Save on the toolbar or right-click the SQL Terminal and select Save.
+The Data Studio Security Disclaimer dialog box is displayed.
+ - Click OK.
Data Studio displays the status of the operation in the status bar.
- The script is saved as an SQL file. Data Studio sets the read/write permission for the saved SQL file. To ensure security, you must set the read/write permissions for folders.
- When a change is made in a file and if that associated file is unavailable, it will trigger the Save As option.
- In any case, if saving of the source file is failed due to some reasons, then user is prompted with the Save As option to save the content as a new source file. If you choose not to save (that is cancelling Save As), then File Terminal gets converted into an SQL Terminal.
- The changes made to File Terminals are not Auto Saved.
+
+
+
+
+
Saving an SQL Script in New File
The Save As option saves the terminal content to a new file.
+
+
Follow the steps to save an SQL script:
+
- Perform any of the following operations:
- Choose File > Save as.
- Press Ctrl+Alt+S. (This operation supports saving SQL terminal contents and file terminal contents.)
+The Data Studio Security Disclaimer dialog box is displayed.
+ - Click OK.
The Save As dialog box is displayed.
+ - Select the location to save the script and click Save.
+
When there are unsaved changes in File Terminals, user will be given an option to save or cancel on graceful exit of data studio.
+
+
Viewing Table Properties, PL/SQL Functions/Procedures on the SQL Terminal Page
+You can view table properties and functions/procedures in Data Studio.
+
Perform the following steps to view table properties:
+
- Press Ctrl and move the cursor over the table name.
+ - Click the highlighted table name. The attributes of the selected table are displayed in Data Studio.
All table properties are read-only.
+
+
+
To view a function or procedure, perform the following steps:
+
- Press Ctrl and move the cursor over the function or procedure name.
+ - Click the highlighted function or procedure name. Data Studio displays the selected function or procedure on the PL/SQL Viewer page.
+
Perform the following steps to check view properties:
+
- Press Ctrl and move the cursor over the view name.
- Click the highlighted view name. Data Studio displays the properties of the selected view.
+
Saving the File Before Closing Data Studio
Before you exit, Data Studio prompts you to save the editing on the terminal.
+
Perform the following steps:
+
- Click Close and the Exit Application dialog box is displayed.
- Click Graceful Exit.
In the Saving File Terminal dialog box, select the file terminal to be saved.
+ - Select the file terminal to be saved.
- Click OK.
+
+
If you select Force Exit, the Saving File Terminal dialog box will not be displayed.
+
+
Terminating an Ongoing SQL Query
+You can terminate an ongoing SQL query on the SQL Terminal tab page of Data Studio.
+
To terminate an ongoing SQL query, perform the following steps:
+
- Execute a SQL query on the SQL Terminal tab page.
- Click
or press Shift+Esc.You can also choose Run > Cancel, or right-click in the code area and choose Cancel, or click Cancel on the Progress View tab page.
+
+
After you terminate an ongoing query, the SQL statement being executed is stopped.
+
Database changes made by the canceled query are rolled back and the following queries will not be executed.
+
A query cannot be canceled and the Result tab displays the result when:
+
- The query has been executed and the result is being generated.
- The result of the executed query is being transferred from the server to the Data Studio client.
+
A query cannot be canceled when you are viewing the execution plan of a query. For details, see Viewing the Execution Plan and Costs.
+
The Messages tab displays a message indicating that the query has been cancelled.
+
The Cancel option is enabled only when a query is being executed.
+
+
Formatting of SQL Queries
+Data Studio supports formatting and highlighting of SQL queries and PL/SQL statements.
+
PL/SQL Formatting
Follow the steps to format PL/SQL statements:
+
- Select the PL/SQL statements to be formatted.
- Click
on the toolbar to format the query.Alternatively, use the key combination Ctrl+Shift+F or choose Edit > Format from the main menu.
+The PL/SQL statements are formatted.
+
+
+
SQL Formatting
Data Studio supports formatting of simple SQL SELECT, INSERT, UPDATE, DELETE statements which are syntactically correct. The following are some of the statements for which formatting is supported:
+
- The SELECT statement must be made of the following clauses:
- Target list
- FROM clause (including JOIN)
- WHERE clause
- GROUP BY clause
- HAVING clause
- ORDER BY clause
- Common table expression
+SELECT statement without SET operations like UNION, UNION ALL, MINUS, INTERSECT and so on
+SELECT statements without sub-queries
+ - The INSERT statement is made of the following clauses only:
- Insert Into Table name
- Values
- Values Column List
- RETURNING
+ - The UPDATE statement is made of the following clauses only:
- Update Table name
- SET
- FROM clause (including JOIN)
- WHERE clause
- RETURNING
+ - The DELETE statement is made of the following clauses only:
- Delete From Table name
- USING clause (including JOIN)
- WHERE clause
- RETURNING
+
+
Follow the steps below to format SQL queries:
+
- Select the SQL query statements to be formatted.
- Click
on the toolbar to format the query.Alternatively, use the key combination Ctrl+Shift+F or choose Edit > Format from the main menu.
+The query is formatted.
+The following table describes the query formatting rules.
+
+Table 1 Query formatting rulesStatement
+ |
+Clause
+ |
+Formatting Rule
+ |
+
|---|
+
+SELECT
+ |
+SELECT list
+
+ |
+Line break before first column
+ |
+
+Indent column list
+ |
+
+FROM
+ |
+Line break before FROM
+ |
+
+Line break after FROM
+ |
+
+Indent FROM list
+ |
+
+Stack FROM list
+ |
+
+Line break before JOIN
+ |
+Line break after JOIN
+ |
+
+Line break after JOIN
+ |
+
+Line break before ON
+ |
+
+Line break after ON
+ |
+
+Indent table after JOIN
+ |
+
+Indent ON condition
+ |
+
+WHERE
+ |
+Line break before WHERE
+ |
+
+Line break after WHERE
+ |
+
+Indent WHERE condition
+ |
+
+Place WHERE condition on single line
+ |
+
+GROUP BY
+
+
+ |
+Line break before GROUP
+ |
+
+Line break before GROUP BY expression
+ |
+
+Indent column list
+ |
+
+Stack column list
+ |
+
+HAVING
+ |
+Line break before HAVING
+ |
+
+Line break after HAVING
+ |
+
+Indent HAVING condition
+ |
+
+ORDER BY
+ |
+Line break before ORDER
+ |
+
+Line break after BY
+ |
+
+Indent column list
+ |
+
+Stack column list
+ |
+
+CTE
+ |
+Indent subquery braces
+ |
+
+Each CTE in a new line
+ |
+
+INSERT
+ |
+INSERT INFO
+ |
+Line break before opening brace
+ |
+
+Line break after opening brace
+ |
+
+Line break before closing brace
+ |
+
+Indent column list braces
+ |
+
+Indent column list
+ |
+
+Line break before VALUES
+ |
+
+Stack column list
+ |
+
+Line break before VALUES
+ |
+
+Line break before opening brace
+ |
+
+Line break after opening brace
+ |
+
+Line break before closing brace
+ |
+
+Indent VALUES expressions list braces
+ |
+
+Indent VALUES expressions list
+ |
+
+Stack VALUES expressions list
+ |
+
+DEFAULT
+ |
+Line break before DEFAULT
+ |
+
+Indent DEFAULT keyword
+ |
+
+CTE
+ |
+Each CTE in a new line
+ |
+
+RETURNING
+ |
+Line break before RETURNING
+ |
+
+Line break after RETURNING
+ |
+
+Indent RETURNING column list
+ |
+
+Place RETURNING column List on single line
+ |
+
+UPDATE
+
+ |
+UPDATE Table
+ |
+Line break before table
+ |
+
+Indent table
+ |
+
+SET Clause
+ |
+Line break before SET
+ |
+
+Indent column assignments list
+ |
+
+Indent column assignments list
+ |
+
+FROM CLAUSE
+ |
+Line break before FROM
+ |
+
+Line break after FROM
+ |
+
+Indent FROM list
+ |
+
+Stack FROM list
+ |
+
+JOIN CLAUSE(FROM CLAUSE)
+ |
+Line break before JOIN
+ |
+
+Line break after JOIN
+ |
+
+Line break before ON
+ |
+
+Line break after ON
+ |
+
+Indent table after JOIN
+ |
+
+Indent ON condition
+ |
+
+WHERE CLAUSE
+ |
+Line break before WHERE
+ |
+
+Line break after WHERE
+ |
+
+Indent WHERE condition
+ |
+
+Place WHERE condition on single line
+ |
+
+CTE
+ |
+Each CTE in a new line
+ |
+
+RETURNING
+ |
+Line break before RETURNING
+ |
+
+Line break after RETURNING
+ |
+
+DELETE
+ |
+USING CLAUSE
+ |
+Indent RETURNING column list
+ |
+
+Line break before FROM
+ |
+
+Line break after FROM
+ |
+
+Indent USING list
+ |
+
+Stack FROM list
+ |
+
+JOIN CLAUSE
+ |
+Line break before JOIN
+ |
+
+Line break after JOIN
+ |
+
+Line break before ON
+ |
+
+Line break after ON
+ |
+
+Indent table after JOIN
+ |
+
+Indent ON condition List
+ |
+
+WHERE CLAUSE
+ |
+Line break before WHERE
+ |
+
+Line break after WHERE
+ |
+
+Indent WHERE condition
+ |
+
+Stack WHERE condition list
+ |
+
+CTE
+ |
+Each CTE in a new line
+ |
+
+RETURNING
+ |
+Line break before RETURNING
+ |
+
+Line break after RETURNING
+ |
+
+Indent RETURNING column list
+ |
+
+
+
+
+
Data Studio supports automatic highlighting of the following punctuation mark's pair when cursor is placed before or after the punctuation mark or the punctuation mark is selected.
+
- Brackets - ( )
- Square brackets - [ ]
- Braces - { }
- Single-quoted string literals - ' '
- Double-quoted string literals - " "
+
Follow the steps below to change case for SQL queries and PL/SQL statements:
+
Method 1
+
- Select the text, and choose Edit > Upper Case/Lower Case.
The text changes to the case selected.
+
+
Method 2:
+
- Select the text, and choose
or 
from the toolbar.The text changes to the case selected.
+
+
Method 3:
+
- Select the text, and press Ctrl+Shift+U to change to the upper case or Ctrl+Shift+L to change to the lower case.
The text changes to the case selected.
+
+
+
SQL Highlighting
Keywords are highlighted automatically when you enter them (according to the default color scheme) as shown below:
+
+
The following figure shows the default color scheme for the specified type of syntax:
+
+
You can also customize SQL highlighting schemes for specific types of syntax. For details, see Table 1.
+
+
Selecting a DB Object in the SQL Terminal
+Data Studio suggests a list of possible schema names, table names and column names, and views in the SQL Terminal.
+
Follow the steps below to select a DB object:
+
- Press Ctrl and Space and enter the required parent DB object name. The DB objects list is refined as you continue typing the DB object name. The DB objects list displays all DB objects of the database connected to the SQL Terminal.
+ - To select the parent DB object, use the Up or Down arrow keys and press Enter on the keyboard, or double-click the parent DB object.
- Press . to list all child DB objects.
+ - To select the child DB object, use the Up or Down arrow keys and press Enter on the keyboard, or double-click the child DB object.
On selection, the child DB object will be appended to the parent DB object (with a period '.').
+ - Auto-suggest also works on keywords, data types, schema names, table names, views, and table name aliases in the same way as shown above for all schema objects that you have access.
Following is a sample query with alias objects:
+ | SELECT
+ table_alias.<auto-suggest>
+FROM test.t1 AS table_alias
+ WHERE
+ table_alias.<auto-suggest> = 5
+GROUP BY table_alias.<auto-suggest>
+HAVING table_alias.<auto-suggest> = 5
+ORDER BY table alias.<auto-suggest>
+ |
+
- A loading message may be displayed on the SQL Terminal in the following scenarios:
- The object is not loaded due to the value mentioned in the Load Limit field. For details, see Table 1.
- The objects that are already added to Exclude will not be loaded. For details, see Table 1.
- There is a delay in fetching the object from the server.
+ - If there are objects with the same name in different case, then auto-suggest will display child objects of both parent objects.
Example: If there are two schemas with the name public and PUBLIC, then all child objects for both these schemas will be displayed.
+
+
+
+
Viewing the Execution Plan and Costs
+The execution plan shows how the table referenced by the SQL statement will be scanned (sequential scan or index scan).
+
The SQL statement execution cost indicates the duration for executing a statement (measured in cost units that are arbitrary, but conventionally mean disk page fetches).
+
Follow the steps below to view the plan and cost for a required SQL query:
+
- Enter the query or use an existing query in the SQL Terminal and click
on the SQL Terminal toolbar to view explain plan.To view explain plan with analyze, click the drop-down from 
, select Include Analyze, and click .
+The Execution Plan opens in tree view format as a new tab at the bottom by default. The display mode has a tree shape and text style.
+ The data shown in tree explain plan and visual explain may vary, since the execution parameters considered by both are not the same.
+
+Following are the parameters selected for explain plan with/without analyze and the columns displayed:
+
+Table 1 Explain plan optionsExplain Plan Type
+ |
+Parameter
+ |
+Column
+ |
+
|---|
+
+Include Analyze deselected (default setting)
+ |
+Verbose, Costs
+ |
+Node type, startup cost, total cost, rows, width, additional Info
+ |
+
+Include Analyze selected
+ |
+Analyze, Verbose, Costs, Buffers, Timing
+ |
+Node type, startup cost, total cost, rows, width, Actual startup time, Actual total time, Actual Rows, Actual loops, Additional Info
+ |
+
+
+
+
The Additional Info column contains predicate information (filter predicate and hash condition), distribution key, output information, and node type.
+In Tree Format, nodes are categorized into 16 types. Each node is indicated with an icon of the corresponding type. The following table lists the node types and icons.
+
+Table 2 Node types and iconsNode Category
+ |
+Icon
+ |
+
|---|
+
+Aggregate
+ |
+
+ |
+
+Group Aggregate
+ |
+
+ |
+
+Function
+ |
+
+ |
+
+Hash
+ |
+
+ |
+
+Hash Join
+ |
+
+ |
+
+Nested Loop
+ |
+
+ |
+
+Nested Loop Join
+ |
+
+ |
+
+Modify Table
+ |
+
+ |
+
+Partition Iterator
+ |
+
+ |
+
+Row Adapter
+ |
+
+ |
+
+Seq Scan on
+ |
+
+ |
+
+Set Operator
+ |
+
+ |
+
+Sort
+ |
+
+ |
+
+Stream
+ |
+
+ |
+
+Union
+ |
+
+ |
+
+Unknown
+ |
+
+ |
+
+
+
+
You can hover over highlighted cells to identify the heaviest, costliest, and slowest nodes. Cells can only be highlighted in Tree Format.
+If multiple queries are selected, the explain plan with/without Include Analyze selected is displayed only for the last query.
+Each execution plan generated from executing a query is opened on a new tab page.
+If the connection is lost during execution but the database remains connected in Object Browser, the Connection Error dialog box is displayed with the following options:
+- OK: Connects to the database again to obtain the execution plan and cost.
- Cancel: Disconnects the database from Object Browser.
+Toolbar menu in the Execution Plan window:
+
+Toolbar Name
+ |
+Icon
+ |
+Description
+ |
+
|---|
+
+Tree Format
+ |
+
+ |
+This icon is used view explain plan in tree format.
+ |
+
+Text Format
+ |
+
+ |
+This icon is used to display explain plan in text format.
+ |
+
+Copy
+ |
+
+ |
+This icon is used to copy selected data from the Result tab to clipboard. The shortcut key is Ctrl+C.
+ |
+
+Commit
+ |
+
+ |
+This icon is used to save the explain plan in text format.
+ |
+
+
+
+
For information about refresh, SQL preview, and search bar, see Execute SQL Queries.
+After you click Refresh, the EXPLAIN ANALYZE query is executed again, and the execution plan is updated.
+The result is displayed on the Messages tab.
+
+
Viewing the Query Execution Plan and Cost Graphically
+Visual Explain plan displays a graphical representation of the SQL query using information from the extended JSON format. This function improves the query and server performance by refining the query. It also analyzes the query path of the database and finds the heaviest, costliest and slowest node.
+
The graphical execution plan shows how the table(s) referenced by the SQL statement will be scanned (plain sequential scan and index scan).
+
The SQL statement execution cost is the estimate at how long it will take to run the statement (measured in cost units that are arbitrary, but conventionally mean disk page fetches).
+
Costliest: Highest Self Cost plan node.
+
Heaviest: Maximum number of rows output by a plan node is considered heaviest node.
+
Slowest: Highest execution time by a plan node.
+
Follow the steps to view the graphical representation of plan and cost for a required SQL query:
+
- Enter the query or use an existing query in the SQL Terminal and click
on the SQL Terminal toolbar.Visual Plan Analysis window is displayed.
+Refer to Viewing the Execution Plan and Costs for information on reconnect option in case connection is lost while retrieving the execution plan and cost.
+
+
+
+
+
Working with SQL Terminals
+In SQL Terminal, you can
+
+
Auto Commit
The Auto Commit option can be switched on or off based on the Preferences settings. Refer to Table 1 for more details.
+
- If Auto Commit option is enabled, Commit and Rollback buttons are disabled. Transactions are committed automatically.
- If Auto Commit option is disabled, Commit and Rollback buttons are enabled. You can use the buttons manually to commit or revert the changes.
- For OLAP, the server will open a transaction for all SQL statements, such as select, explain select, and set parameter.
- For OLTP, the server will open a transaction for only DML statements, such as INSERT, UPDATE, and DELETE.
+
+
+
+
Reuse Connection
+
It enables the user to choose the same SQL terminal connection or new connection for the result set. The selection affects the record visibility due to the isolation levels defined in the database server.
+
- When Reuse Connection is ON, terminal connection will be used for data manipulation and refresh of the result window.
+
For some data base temp tables that are created or used by the terminal can be edited in the result window.
+
- When Reuse Connection is OFF, new connection will be used for data manipulation and refresh of the result window.
+
For some databases, the temporary tables can be edited in the Result tab.
+
: displayed when Reuse Connection is set to ON
+
: displayed when Reuse Connection is set to OFF
+
: displayed when Reuse Connection is disabled
+
Perform the following steps to set Reuse Connection to OFF:
+
- Click
on the SQL Terminal toolbar.Reuse Connection is disabled for the terminal. 
+ - The Reuse Connection function is enabled by default. You can disable it as required. If you enable Auto Commit, the system automatically enables the Reuse Connection function.
- If you disable Auto Commit, the system automatically disables the Reuse Connection function. However, this function is still displayed as Enabled on the GUI, and the status cannot be modified.
+
+
+
Refer to Table 1 for more details about Auto Commit and Reuse Connection.
+
Execute SQL Queries
Perform the following steps to execute a function/procedure or SQL query.
+
+
Enter a function/procedure(s) or SQL query(s) in the SQL Terminal tab and click 
in the SQL Terminal tab, or press Ctrl+Enter, or choose Run > Compile/Execute Statement from the main menu.
+
Alternatively, you can right-click in the SQL Terminal tab and select Execute Statement.
+
You can check the status bar to view the status of a query being executed.
+
+
The Result tab displays the results after executing the function/procedure(s) or SQL queries along with the query statement executed.
+
If the connection is lost during execution and the database is still connected in Object Browser, then Connection Error dialog box is displayed:
+
- Reconnect - The connection is reestablished.
- Reconnect and Execute - With Auto commit on, execution will continue from failure statement. With Auto commit off, execution will continue from position of cursor.
- Cancel - Disconnects database in Object Browser.
+
Failure to reconnect after three attempts will disconnect the database in Object Browser. Connect to the database in Object Browser and retry execution.
+
- For long running queries, result set can be edited only after the complete results are fetched.
- Editing of query results are only allowed in following scenarios:
- Selected targets are from a single table
- Either select all columns or subset of columns [No aliases, aggregate functions, expressions on columns]
- All WHERE condition
- All ORDER BY clause
- On regular, partition, and temporary tables.
+ - Committing an empty row assigns Null to all columns.
- Only result set of queries executed on tables available in Object Browser is editable.
- Editing of query results is allowed only for queries executed in SQL Terminal.
+
+
The column width definition can be set using Settings > Preferences option. Refer to Table 1 to set this parameter.
+
Column Reorder
+
Column reordering can be performed by clicking and dragging the selected column header to the desired position.
+
Multi-Column Sort
This feature allows the user to sort table data of some pages by multiple columns. In addition, you can set the priority of columns for sorting.
+
+
The feature is available for the following pages:
+
- Result Set Tab
- Edit Table Data Window
- View Table Data Window
- Batch Drop Result Window
+
Follow the steps below to access Multi-column sort:
+
- Click
in the toolbar.Multi-Column Sort pop-up is displayed.
+
+ - Click Add Column. Choose the column to be sorted from the drop-down list.
+ - Select the required sort order.
- Click Apply.
+
Multi-sort pop up has following elements:
+
+
Table 1 Elements of multi-column pop-up:Attribute Name
+ |
+UI Element Type
+ |
+Description/Action
+ |
+
|---|
+
+Priority
+ |
+Read only text field
+ |
+Shows column priority in multi sort.
+ |
+
+Column Name
+ |
+Combo field having all column names of the table as its value set
+ |
+Column name of the column added for sorting.
+ |
+
+Data Type
+ |
+Read only text field
+ |
+Shows data type of the column selected.
+ |
+
+Sort Order
+ |
+Combo field having values {sort_ascending, sort_descending}
+ |
+Sort order of the column.
+ |
+
+Add Column
+ |
+Button
+ |
+Adds new row to multi-sort table.
+ |
+
+Delete Column
+ |
+Button
+ |
+Deletes selected column from multi-sort table.
+ |
+
+Up
+ |
+Button
+ |
+Moves selected column up by 1 step, thus changing sort priority.
+ |
+
+Down
+ |
+Button
+ |
+Moves selected column down by 1 step, this changing sort priority.
+ |
+
+Apply
+ |
+Button
+ |
+Apply prepared sort configuration.
+ |
+
+
+
+
+
Except following data types, all the other data types will be sorted by their string value (Alphabetical order):
+
TINYINT, SMALLINT, INTEGER, BIGINT, FLOAT, REAL, DOUBLE, NUMERIC, BIT, BOOLEAN, DATE, TIME, TIME_WITH_TIMEZONE, TIMESTAMP, TIMESTAMP_WITH_TIMEZONE.
+
+
Elements of Multi-Column Pop-up:
+
+
Table 2 Icons of multi-column Pop-upIcon
+ |
+Description
+ |
+Action
+ |
+
|---|
+
+
+ |
+Not Sorted
+ |
+This icon in column header indicates that the column is not sorted. You can click this icon to sort the column in ascending order.
+Alternatively, use Alt+Click to select the column header.
+ |
+
+
+ |
+Ascending Sort
+ |
+This icon in column header indicates that the column is sorted in ascending order. If you click this icon, the column will be sorted in descending order.
+Alternatively, use Alt+Click to select the column header.
+ |
+
+
+ |
+Descending Sort
+ |
+This icon in column header indicates that the column is sorted in descending order. You can click this icon to cancel the column sorting.
+Alternatively, use Alt+Click to select the column header.
+ |
+
+
+
+
+
Icons for the sort priority are as follows:
+
: Icon with three dots indicates the highest priority.
+
: Icon with two dots indicates the second highest priority.
+
: Icon with one dot indicates the lowest priority.
+
+
Table 3 Toolbar MenusToolbar Name
+ |
+Description
+ |
+
|---|
+
+Copy
+ |
+This button is used to copy selected content from result window to clipboard. Shortcut key - Ctrl+C.
+ |
+
+Advanced Copy
+ |
+This button is used to copy content from result window to clipboard. Results can be copied to include column header. Refer to Table 1 to set this preference. The shortcut key is Ctrl+Shift+C.
+ |
+
+Export all data
+ |
+This button is used to export all data in Excel (xlsx/xls), CSV, text, or binary format. For details, see Exporting Table Data.
+ NOTE: - The columns involved in the query are automatically populated in the Selected Columns area. The Available Columns area is empty.
- To export the query results, the query is re-executed using a new connection. The exported results may differ from the data in the results tab.
- Disabled for explain/analyze queries. To export explain/analyze queries use the Export current page data option.
+
+ |
+
+Export current page data
+ |
+This button is used to export current page data in Excel (xlsx/xls) or CSV format.
+ |
+
+Paste
+ |
+This button is used to paste copied information.
+ |
+
+Add
+ |
+This button is used to add a row to the result set.
+ |
+
+Delete
+ |
+This button is used to delete a row from the result set.
+ |
+
+Save
+ |
+This button is used to save the changes made in the result set.
+ |
+
+Rollback
+ |
+This button is used to roll back the changes made to the result set.
+ |
+
+Refresh
+ |
+This button is used to refresh information in the result set. If multiple result sets are open for the same table, then changes made to one result set will reflect on the other post refresh. Similarly if the same table is edited, then the result set will be updated post refresh.
+ |
+
+Clear Unique Key selection
+ |
+This button is used to clear the previous unique key selection.
+ |
+
+Show/Hide Query bar
+ |
+This button is used to display/hide the query executed for that particular result set. This is a toggle button.
+ |
+
+Show/Hide Search bar
+ |
+This button is used to display/hide the search text field. This is a toggle button.
+ |
+
+Encoding
+ |
+Whether you can configure this field depends on the settings in . In this drop-down list, you can select the appropriate code to view the data accurately. By default, the text is encoded using UTF-8. Refer to Table 1 to set the encoding preference.
+ NOTE: Data editing except for data insertion is restricted once the default encoding is modified.
+
+ |
+
+Multi Sort
+ |
+This button brings up multi-sort pop up.
+ |
+
+Clear Sort
+ |
+This button is used to reset all the sorted column.
+ |
+
+
+
+
+
Icons in Search field:
+
+
Icon Name
+ |
+Icon
+ |
+Description
+ |
+
|---|
+
+Search
+ |
+
+ |
+This icon is used to search the result set based on the criteria defined. The text is case-insensitive.
+ |
+
+Clear Search Text
+ |
+
+ |
+This icon is used to clear the search text entered in the search field.
+ |
+
+
+
+
+
Right-click options in the Result window:
+
+
Option
+ |
+Description
+ |
+
|---|
+
+Close
+ |
+Closes only the active result window.
+ |
+
+Close Others
+ |
+Closes all other result windows except for the active result window.
+ |
+
+Close Tabs to the Right
+ |
+Closes only the right active result window.
+ |
+
+Close All
+ |
+Closes all result windows including the active result window.
+ |
+
+Detach
+ |
+Detach from current active result window.
+ |
+
+
+
+
+
Status information displayed in the Result window:
+
- Query Submit Time - Provides the query submitted time.
- Number of rows fetched with execution time is displayed. The default number of rows is displayed. If there are additional rows to be fetched, then it will be denoted with the word "more". You can scroll to the bottom of the table to fetch and display all rows.
When viewing table data, Data Studio automatically adjusts the column widths for a good table view. Users can resize the columns as needed. If the text length exceeds the column width and you adjust the column width, Data Studio may fail to respond.
+
+
+
- Each time a query is run in SQL Terminal tab, a new result window opens. To view the results in the new window, you must select the newly opened window.
- Set the focusOnFirstResult configuration parameter to false to automatically set focus to the newly opened Result window. For details, see Configuring Data Studio.
- Each row, column and selected cells can be copied from the result set.
- Export all data operation will be successful even after the connection is removed.
- If the text of a column contains spaces, word wrapping is applied to fit the column width. Word wrapping is not applied to columns without spaces.
- Select part of cell content and press Ctrl+C or click
to copy selected text from a cell. - The size of the column is determined by the maximum content length column.
- You can save preference to define:
+
- If any column of resultset tab has Lock Image icon in it, then values are not editable.
+
+
Backuping Unsaved Queries/Functions/Procedures
Data Studio creates back up of unsaved data in SQL Terminal and PL/SQL Viewer periodically based on the time interval defined in the Preferences tab. The data can be encrypted and saved based on Preference settings. Refer to Table 1 to turn on/off backup, define time interval to save the data, and encrypt the saved data.
+
Unsaved changes of each SQL Terminal/PL/SQL Viewer are taken as backup and stored in DataStudio\UserData\<user name>\Autosave folder. Backup files saved before unexpected shutdown of Data Studio will be available at next login.
+
In case there is unsaved data in SQL Terminal/PL/SQL Viewer, during graceful exit, Data Studio will wait for backup to complete before closing.
+
+
Error Locator
During execution of query/function/procedure in case of an error the error locator message is displayed.
+
+
Yes - Click Yes to continue with the execution.
+
No - Click No to stop the execution.
+
You can select Do not display other errors that occur during the execution to hide the error messages and proceed with the current SQL query.
+
Line number and position of error displays in Messages tab. The corresponding line number is marked with 
icon along with red underline at the position of the error in the Terminal/PL/SQL Viewer. Hovering over 
displays the error message. For details about why the line number does not match the error detail, see FAQs.
+
If the query/function/procedure is modified while execution is in progress, then error locator may not display the correct line and position number.
+
+
Search in PL/SQL Viewer or SQL Terminal
Follow the steps below to search in PL/SQL Viewer or SQL Terminal:
+
+
F3 key is used to search next word and Shift+F3 key is used to search previous word. These shortcut keys will be enabled only after Ctrl+F is used to search a text. These keys will be active with the current search word until a new word is searched. The value searched using Ctrl+F and F3/Shift+F3 will be applicable only for the current instance.
+
- Choose Edit > Find and Replace from the main menu.
Alternatively press Ctrl+F.
+Find and Replace dialog box is displayed.
+ - Enter the text to be searched for in the Find what field, and click the Find Next button.
The desired text is highlighted.
+F3 and Shift+F3 key will now be enabled for forward and backward search.
+ Select Wrap around option to continue the search after reaching the last line in the SQL queries or PL/SQL statements.
+
+
+
Go to Line in PL/SQL Viewer or SQL Terminal
Go to line option is used to skip to a specific line in the terminal.
+
+
Follow the steps below to go to a line in PL/SQL Viewer or SQL Terminal:
+
- Choose Edit > Go To Line from the main menu or press Ctrl+G.
The Go To Line dialog box is displayed.
+ - Enter the desired number in the Enter the line number field, and then click the OK button.
The cursor moves to the beginning of the line entered in the
Go to Line dialog box.
The following inputs are invalid for the Enter line number field:
+
- Non-numeric value
- Special characters
- Line number entered does not exist in the editor.
- More than 10 digits is entered.
+
+
+
Comment/Uncomment
Comment/uncomment option is used to comment/uncomment lines or block of lines.
+
Follow the steps below to comment/uncomment lines in PL/SQL Viewer or SQL Terminal:
+
- Select the lines to comment/uncomment.
- Choose Edit option. Choose Comment/Uncomment Lines from the main menu.
Alternatively, press Ctrl+/ or right-click a line and select Comment/Uncomment Lines.
+
+
Follow the steps below to comment/uncomment block of lines/content in PL/SQL Viewer or SQL Terminal:
+
- Select the lines/content to comment/uncomment.
- Choose Edit option. Choose Comment/Uncomment Block from the main menu.
Alternatively, press Ctrl+Shift+/ or right-click a line or the entire block and select Comment/Uncomment Block.
+
+
+
Indent/Un-indent Lines
The indent/un-indent option is used to shift lines as per the indent size defined in the Preferences tab.
+
Follow the steps to indent lines in PL/SQL Viewer or SQL Terminal:
+
- Select the lines to indent.
- Press Tab or click
.Shift the selected line as per the indent size defined in the Preferences tab. For details about modifying the indent size, see Table 1.
+
+
Follow the steps to un-indent lines in PL/SQL Viewer or SQL Terminal:
+
- Select the lines to un-indent.
- Press Shift+Tab or click
.Move the selected lines according to the indent size defined in Preferences. For details about modifying the indent size, see Table 1.
+ Only selected lines that have available tab space will be un-indented. For example, if multiple lines are selected, and one of the selected lines starts at position 1, then pressing Shift+Tab will un-indent all the lines except for the one starting at position 1.
+
+
+
+
Insert Space
The Insert Space option is used to replace a tab with spaces based on the indent size defined in the Preferences tab.
+
Follow the steps below to replace a tab with spaces in PL/SQL Viewer or SQL Terminal:
+
- Select the lines to replace tab with spaces.
- Press Tab or Shift+Tab.
Replaces the tab with spaces as per the indent size defined in the Preferences tab. For details about modifying the indent size, see Table 1.
+
+
+
Execute Multiple Functions/Procedures or Queries
Follow the steps below to execute multiple functions/procedures:
+
+
Insert a forward slash (/) in a new line after the function/procedure in the SQL Terminal.
+
Add the new function/procedure in the next line.
+
+
Follow the steps below to execute multiple SQL queries:
+
- Enter multiple SQL queries in the SQL Terminal tab as follows:
+ - Click
in the SQL Terminal tab, or press Ctrl+Enter, or choose Run > Compile/Execute Statement from the main menu. - If the queries are not selected for execution, then only the query in the line where cursor is placed will be executed.
- If the cursor is placed next to an empty line, then the next available query statement will be executed.
- If the cursor is placed at the last line which is blank, then no query will be executed.
- If a single query is written in multiples lines and the cursor is placed at any line of the query, then that query is executed. Queries are separated using semicolon (;).
+
+
+
Do as follow to execute an SQL query after a function/procedure:
+
Insert a forward slash (/) in a new line under the function/procedure in SQL Terminal. Then add new query or function/procedure statements.
+
Do as follow to execute PL/SQL statements and SQL queries on different connections:
+
In the toolbar, select the required connection from the connection profiles drop-down list and click 
in the SQL Terminal tab.
+
Rename SQL Terminal
Follow the steps below to rename SQL Terminal:
+
- In the SQL Terminal tab right-click and select Rename Terminal.
A Rename Terminal dialog box is displayed prompting you to provide the new name for the Terminal.
+ - Enter the new name and select OK to rename the Terminal.
- Terminal name follows Windows file naming convention.
- Rename Terminal allows a maximum of 150 characters.
- Restore option is not available to revert to the default name. You must manually rename the Terminal to default name.
- Tool tip of the renamed Terminal will display the old name.
+
+
+
+
SQL Assistant
The SQL Assistant tool provides suggestion or reference for the information entered in SQL Terminal and PL/SQL Viewer. Follow the steps to open SQL Assistant:
+
When Data Studio is launched SQL Assistant panel displays with related syntax topics. As you type a query in the SQL Terminal topics related to the query is displayed. It also provides precautions, examples, syntax, function, and parameter description. Select the text and use the right-click option to copy selected information or copy and paste to SQL Terminal.
+
- Choose Settings > Preferences > Environment > Session Setting. In the SQL Assistant area, enable or disable the SQL Assistant function permanently. By default, the SQL Assistant function is enabled permanently.
- After the SQL Assistant function is enabled, you can click the SQL Assistant icon (
) on the toolbar to open the SQL Assistant window. If the SQL Assistant icon is gray after the SQL Assistant is enabled, the SQL Assistant is invalid.
+
+
+
Using Templates
Data Studio provides an option to insert frequently used SQL statements in SQL Terminal or PL/SQL Viewer using the Templates option. Some of the commonly used SQL statements are saved for ease of use. You can create, modify existing templates or remove templates. For details about how to add, delete, and create a template, see Table 1.
+
The following table lists the default templates:
+
+
Name
+ |
+Description
+ |
+
|---|
+
+df
+ |
+delete from
+ |
+
+is
+ |
+insert into
+ |
+
+o
+ |
+order by
+ |
+
+s*
+ |
+select from
+ |
+
+sc
+ |
+select row count
+ |
+
+sf
+ |
+select from
+ |
+
+sl
+ |
+select
+ |
+
+
+
+
+
Follow the steps to use the Templates option:
+
- Enter the name of the template in SQL Terminal/PL/SQL Viewer.
- Press Alt+Ctrl+Space.
A list of saved template information is displayed. The list displayed is based on the following criteria:
+
+Exact Match
+ |
+Display List
+ |
+
|---|
+
+On
+ |
+Displays all entries that match the input text case.
+Example: Entering "SF" in SQL Terminal/PL/SQL Viewer displays all entries that start with "SF".
+ |
+
+Off
+ |
+Displays all entries that match the input irrespective of the text case.
+Example: Entering "SF" in SQL Terminal/PL/SQL Viewer displays all entries that start with "SF", "Sf", "sF", or "sf".
+ |
+
+
+
+
Text Selection/Cursor Location
+ |
+Display List
+ |
+
|---|
+
+A text is selected and the shortcut key is used
+ |
+Displays entries that match the text before the selection to the nearest space or new line character.
+ |
+
+No text selected and the shortcut key is used
+ |
+Displays entries that match the text before the cursor to the nearest space or new line character.
+ |
+
+
+
+
- Using the shortcut key without entering text in SQL Terminal/PL/SQL Viewer displays all entries in the Templates.
- If the text entered in SQL Terminal/PL/SQL Viewer has only a single match, then it will be replaced directly in the SQL Terminal/PL/SQL Viewer without listing them out.
+
+
+
+
Exporting Query Results
+You can export the results of an SQL query into a CSV, Text or Binary file.
+
This section contains the following topics:
+
+
Exporting all data
The following functions are disabled while the export operation is in progress:
+
- Executing SQL queries in the SQL Terminal
+
- Executing PL/SQL statements
- Debugging PL/SQL statements
+
Follow the steps below to export all results:
+
- Select the Result tab.
- Click
. The Export ResultSet Data window appears.Refer to
Exporting Table Data to complete the export operation.
You can check the status bar to view the status of the result being exported.
+
+
The Data Exported Successfully dialog box is displayed.
+ - Click OK. Data Studio displays the status of the operation in the Messages tab.
If the disk is full while exporting the results, then Data Studio displays an error in the Messages tab. In this case, clear the disk, re-establish the connection and export the result data.
+
+The Messages tab shows the Execution Time, Total Result Records Fetched, and the path where the file is saved.
+
+
+
Exporting Data On the Current Page
It is recommended to export all results instead of exporting the current page. The Export Current Page to CSV function has been deleted.
+
Follow the steps below to export the current page:
+
- Select the Result tab.
- Click the
icon to export the current page.The Data Studio Security Disclaimer dialog box is displayed.
+ - Click OK.
- Select the location to save the current page.
You can check the status bar to view the status of the page being exported.
+
+ - Click Save. The Data Exported Successfully dialog box is displayed.
- Click OK. Data Studio displays the status of the operation in the Messages tab.
If the disk is full while exporting the results, then Data Studio displays an error in the Messages tab. In this case, clear the disk, re-establish the connection and export the result data.
+
+
+
+
Managing Connections in the SQL Terminal
+
+ In Data Studio, you can either use an existing connection or set up a new one in the SQL terminal to view the execution plan and cost, visualize the plan explanation, and work with the result set. By default, the SQL terminal reuses existing connections. When multiple queries are queued for execution in an existing connection, consider using a new connection to avoid delays caused by sequential execution. However, it is best to reuse existing connections when working with temporary tables. For how to edit temporary tables, see Editing Temporary Tables.
+
Perform the following steps to change the connection reuse setting:
+
- Click
to enable or disable the connection reuse function in the SQL terminal.For details about query execution behavior during connection reuse and creation, see
FAQs.
You can only edit temporary tables in existing connections.
+
+
+
Security Management
+ Ensure that the operating system and the required software (refer to System Requirements for more details) are updated with the latest patches to prevent vulnerabilities and other security issues.
+
+
Login History
- When you log in to the database, Data Studio displays a window, describing the latest successful login and the failed login attempts during the last two successful logins.
+
+
+
If the pop-up displays the message "Last login details not available", then it implies that the connected database does not support the last login display feature.
+
+
+
Password Expiry Notification
- Your password will expire within 7 days from the date of notification. If the password expires, contact the database administrator to reset the password.
- The password must be changed every 90 days.
+
+
Securing the Application In-Memory Data
While running Data Studio in a trusted environment, user must ensure to prevent malicious software scanning or accessing the memory which is used to store application data including sensitive information.
+
+
Data Encryption for Saved Data
You can ensure encryption of auto saved data by enabling encryption option from Preferences page. Refer to Table 1 for steps to encrypt the saved data.
+
+
SQL History
- SQL History scripts are not encrypted.
- The SQL History list does not display sensitive queries that contain the following keywords:
- Alter Role
- Alter User
- Create Role
- Create User
- Identified by
- Password
+ - Some query syntax examples are listed below:
- ALTER USER name [ WITH ] option [ ... ]]
- CREATE USER name [ [ WITH ] option [ ... ] ]
- CREATE ROLE name [ [ WITH ] option [ ... ] ]
- ALTER ROLE name [ [ WITH ] option [ ... ] ]
+
+
+
Troubleshooting
+- Data Studio does not open.
Solution: Check whether JRE is missing. Verify the Java path in the environment. For details about the supported Java JDK versions, see System Requirements.
+ - Data Studio does not open and displays a 'Java Runtime' error when I double-click the Data Studio.exe file.
Solution
+- Without JRE:
+Check whether the Java Runtime Environment (JRE) or Java Development Kit (JDK) version 1.8.0_141 or above with appropriate bit number is installed on the system and Java Home path is set. If there is more than one version of Java installed, set the -vm parameter in the configuration file by referring to Configuring Data Studio. This is a prerequisite for running Data Studio.
+ - Old JRE version:
+Check the version of Java Runtime Environment (JRE) or Java Development Kit (JDK) that is installed on the system. An older version installed on the system causes this error. Update the JRE to version 1.8.0_141 or above with appropriate bit number.
+ - Java Incompatibility:
+
+Check the version of the JRE or JDK installed in the system. If the installed Java version is incompatible with the system, this error occurs. Update the JRE to version 1.8.0_141 or above with appropriate bit number.
+You are advised to run the batch file to check compatibility and launch Data Studio. For details, see 6.
+
+ - The following information is displayed when you run the StartDataStudio.bat file:
Solution
+
+Message
+ |
+Solution
+ |
+
|---|
+
+You are attempting to run 32-bit Data Studio on:
+- 64-bit OS
- Windows 7 Professional
- 64-bit Java 1.8 JDK (incompatible)
Install 32-bit Java 1.8.
+
+ |
+Install 32-bit Java 1.8.
+ |
+
+The Java version supported by Data Studio must be 1.8 or later. Before using Data Studio, you need to install Java 1.8.
+ |
+Install Java 1.8 that matches the number of bits of the operating system.
+ |
+
+You are attempting to run 64-bit Data Studio on:
+- 64-bit OS
- Windows 7 Professional
- 32-bit Java 1.8 JDK (incompatible): Install 64-bit Java 1.8.
+
+ |
+Install 64-bit Java 1.8.
+ |
+
+You are attempting to run 64-bit Data Studio on:
+
+ |
+Install 32-bit Data Studio.
+ |
+
+
+
+
- Why does Data Studio not connect to the server even with all valid inputs?
Solution: Check whether the server is running on the specified IP address and port. Use gsql to connect to a specified user and check the user availability.
+ - What should I do for connection issues while using Data Studio?
Solution: A connection issue that may occur while using Data Studio is explained with an example:
+Establish a database connection.
+Run the query.
+When a connection exception occurs in any one of the databases (PostgreSQL), the connection is closed. When the database connection is closed, all the function and procedure tabs, if open, will be closed too.
+The system displays an error message. The Object Browser navigation tree displays the database status.
+ Only the current database will be disconnected. Other databases remain connected or are reconnected.
+
+Re-connect to the database to proceed with execution.
+ - When a Java application is used to obtain a process that contains Chinese comments, the Chinese characters are invisible. What should I do?
Solution: Set Preferences > Session Settings > Data Studio Encoding and File Encoding to GBK, so that Chinese characters can be displayed properly.
+ - When I connect to the database and load a large number of SQL queries into SQL Terminal, the "Out Of Memory" or "Java Heap Error" error may occur in Data Studio. How do I solve this problem?
Solution: When the Data Studio has used up the allocated maximum Java memory, the message "Out of Memory" or "Java Heap Error" is displayed. By default, the Data Studio.ini configuration file (in the Data Studio installation path) contains the entry -Xmx1200m. 1200m indicates 1,200 MB, which is the maximum Java memory that can be used by Data Studio. The memory usage of Data Studio depends on the size of data obtained by users during the use of Data Studio.
+To solve this problem, you can expand the Java memory size to an ideal value. For example, change -Xmx1200m to -Xmx2000m and restart Data Studio. If the updated memory is used up, the same problem may occur again.
+ - For the 32-bit Data Studio with 8 GB RAM, the value of Xmx cannot exceed 2044. For the 64-bit Data Studio with 8 GB RAM, the value of Xmx cannot exceed 6000. The upper limit may vary with your current memory usage.
For example:
+-Xms1024m
+-Xmx1800m
+ - The maximum file size supported by Data Studio in the SQL Terminal depends on the value of Xmx in the Data Studio.ini file and the available memory.
+
+ - If a large amount of data is returned after the SQL query is executed, the Data Studio displays the "Insufficient Memory" error. What should I do?
Solution: Data Studio disconnects from the database specified in the file. Re-establish the connection and continue the operation.
+ - Why do I receive an export failure message when exporting DDL or data?
Solution: The possible causes are as follows:
+- An invalid client SSL certificate and/or client SSL key file was selected. Select a correct file and try again. For details, see Adding a Connection.
- The identity of the object in the database may have changed. Check whether the identity of the object has changed and try again.
- You may not have sufficient permissions. Contact the database administrator to obtain required permissions.
+ - Why does the system receive a message indicating that the DDL operation fails when the DDL operation is performed?
Solution: The possible causes are as follows:
+- An invalid client SSL certificate or client SSL key file was selected. Select a correct file and try again. For details, see Adding a Connection.
- The identity of the object in the database may have changed. Check whether the identity of the object has changed and try again.
- You may not have sufficient permissions. Contact the database administrator to obtain required permissions.
+ - Why do I receive the following error message when performing a Show DDL or Export DDL operation?
"Failed to start this program because MSVCRT100.dll is missing. Try reinstalling the program to resolve the problem."
+Solution: gs_dump.exe needs to be executed to display or export DDL, which requires the MS VC runtime library msvcrt100.dll.
+To resolve this issue, copy the msvcrt100.dll file from the \Windows\System32 folder to the \Windows\SysWOW64 folder.
+ - Why is the saved connection details not displayed when I try to establish a connection?
Solution: If the Profile folder in the User Data folder is unavailable or has been manually modified, this problem may occur. Ensure that the Profile folder exists and its name meets the requirements.
+ - Why are historical sql query records lost when I close and restart data studio?
Solution: If the Profile folder in the User Data folder is lost or manually modified, this problem may occur. Ensure that the Profile folder exists and its name meets the requirements.
+ - Why does the system display a message indicating that the modification fails to be saved when I attempt to modify the syntax highlighting setting?
Solution: This problem may occur if the Preferences file does not exist or its name has been changed. Restart Data Studio to resolve this issue.
+ - What should I do if the Data Studio is in the idle state but the Data Studio.log file is in the No more handles state?
Solution: Restart Data Studio.
+ - What happens if I send a 303 error after editing a table and I cannot continue to modify the table?
Solution: All edited data will be lost. Close the Edit Table Data dialog box and modify the data again.
+ - Why is the message "The number of pasted cells does not match the number of selected cells" displayed when the operation is correct?
Solution: This problem occurs if you choose Preferences > Query Results and set the column headers to be included. The selected cells include the column header cells as well. Modify the settings to disable the Include column headers option and try again.
+ - Why can't I edit temporary tables when the Reuse Connections option is disabled?
Answer: After the Reuse Connection option is disabled, the tool creates a new session, but the temporary table can be edited only in the existing connection. To edit temporary tables, enable the Reuse Connection option. For details, see Managing Connections in the SQL Terminal.
+ - What happens when I add the same column multiple times in a multi-column sort dialog box?
Answer: If you add the same column multiple times in the multi-column sorting dialog box and click Apply, the following message is displayed. You need to click OK and select non-duplicate columns for sorting.
+
+ - What happens when no column name is specified and Apply is clicked?
Answer: The following message is displayed. You need to set a valid column name and click Apply again. Then, the message is not displayed.
+
+ - What happens when I click Cancel while multiple table queries are running in the SQL terminal window?
Answer: Canceling a table query that is being executed may cause the console to display the names of tables that are not created. In this case, you are advised to delete the table so that you can perform operations on tables with the same name.
+ - What should I do if I cannot log in to Data Studio because the security key is cracked?
Solution: Perform the following steps to generate a new security key:
+- Choose Datastudio > Userdata and delete the security folder.
- Restart Data Studio.
- Create a security folder and generate a new key.
- Enter the password again to log in to Data Studio.
+
+
FAQs
+- What do I need to check if my connection fails?
Answer: Check the following items:
+- Check whether Connection Properties are properly configured.
- Check whether the server version is compatible with the client version.
- Check whether the database\pg_hba.conf file is correctly configured.
- Check whether the Data Studio.ini file is correctly configured.
+ - Why does the connection succeed when I try connecting to another server using an SSL certificate?
Answer: If the same SSL certificates are used by different servers, then the second connection will succeed because the certificates are cached.
+When you establish a connection with a different server using different SSL certificates, the connection will fail due to certificate mismatch.
+ - When I right-click on a function/procedure and refresh it in Object Browser, why does the function/procedure disappear?
Answer: This problem may occur if you drop a function/procedure and recreate it. In this case, refresh the parent folder to view the function/procedure in Object Browser.
+ - What do I do if a critical error occurs in a database session and operations cannot proceed?
Answer: Critical error may occur in some of the following cases. Check whether:
+- The connection is left idle for a long time and has timed out.
- The server is running.
- The server has sufficient memory and whether the Out Of Memory (OOM) error is reported to the server.
+ - What is a constraint?
Answer: Constraints are used to deny the insertion of unwanted data in columns. You can create restrictions on one or more columns in any table. It maintains the data integrity of the table.
+The following constraints are supported:
+- Primary Key constraint
- Unique Key constraint
- Check constraint
+ - What is an index?
Answer: An index is a copy of selected columns of data, from a table, that is designed to enable very efficient search. It also includes a low level disk block address or a direct link to the complete row of data it was copied from.
+ - What is the default encoding for Data Studio's files?
Answer: Exported, imported, and system files are encoded with the system's default encoding as configured in Settings > Preferences. The default encoding is UTF-8.
+ - When I try to open Data Studio, the system displays a message indicating that Data Studio does not support opening multiple instances. Why do I get this error message?
Answer: A user cannot open multiple instances in Data Studio.
+ - What do I do if a DDL statement running indefinitely and cannot be canceled?
Answer: This problem may occur if other DML/DDL operations are being performed on the same object. In this case, stop all the DML/DDL operations on the object and try again. If the problem persists, there may be another user performing DML/DDL operations on the object. Try again later. You can customize table data and check the operations in a transaction by following the instructions provided in Data Studio GUI.
+ - Why is the exported query result different from the data available on the Results tab?
Answer: When a result set data is exported, a new connection is used to execute the query again. The exported results may be different from the data on the Result tab.
+ - Why does last login information show "Last login details not available"?
Answer: This message is displayed when you connect to the database server of an earlier version or log in to the database for the first time after it is created.
+ - Why is the error marked incorrectly in SQL Terminal?
Answer: This problem occurs when the server returns an incorrect line number. You can view the error message on the Message tab and locate the correct row to rectify the fault.
+ - Will deleted columns be displayed after "Show DDL" or "Export DDL" operations?
Answer: Yes.
+ - Why cannot Data Studio be started after the -Xmx parameter is modified?
Answer: The value of -Xmx may be invalid. For details, see Configuring Data Studio.
+ - How do I quickly switch to the desired tab if there are multiple tabs open?
Answer: If the number of opened tabs reaches a certain limit (depending on your screen resolution), the 
icon will be displayed at the end of the tab list. Click this icon and select the required tab from the drop-down list. If this icon is not available, use the tooltip to identify the tabs. You also search for a SQL Terminal tab by its name. For example:
+- *s, this displays all Terminal names that start with s.
- test, this displays all Terminal names that start with test.
- *2, this displays all Terminal names that contain 2 in them.
+ - Why does the language not change after I change the language setting and restart Data Studio?
Answer: If the language you selected does not change after restarting, you can restart Data Studio manually to make the change take effect.
+ - Why does the last login details information not display?
Answer: At times the server returns an error while trying to fetch last login details. In such scenarios the last login pop-up message does not display.
+ - When viewing/exporting DDL, why does the Chinese text not show properly?
Answer: This happens if the SQL, DDL, object names or data contains Chinese text and the Data Studio file encoding is not set to GBK. To solve this, go to Settings > Preferences > Environment > File Encoding and set the encoding to GBK. The supported combinations of Database and Data Studio encoding for export operation are shown in Table1 Supported combinations of file encoding.
+To open/view the exported files in Windows Explorer: Files exported with UTF-8 encoding can be opened/viewed by double-clicking it or by right-clicking on the file and selecting Open. Files exported with GBK encoding must be opened in Excel using the import external data feature (Data > Get External Data > From Text).
+
+Table 1 Supported combinations of file encodingDatabase Encoding
+ |
+Data Studio File Encoding
+ |
+Support for Chinese Text in Table Names
+ |
+Support for English Text in Table Names
+ |
+
|---|
+
+GBK
+ |
+GBK
+ |
+Yes
+ |
+Yes
+ |
+
+GBK
+ |
+UTF-8
+ |
+No - Incorrect details
+ |
+No - Incorrect details
+ |
+
+UTF-8
+ |
+GBK
+ |
+No - Export Fails
+ |
+No - Incorrect details
+ |
+
+UTF-8
+ |
+UTF-8
+ |
+Yes
+ |
+Yes
+ |
+
+UTF-8
+ |
+LATIN1
+ |
+No - Export Fails
+ |
+Yes
+ |
+
+SQL_ASCII
+ |
+GBK
+ |
+Yes
+ |
+Yes
+ |
+
+SQL_ASCII
+ |
+UTF-8
+ |
+No - Incorrect details
+ |
+No - Incorrect details
+ |
+
+
+
+
- Why do I get the error message "Conversion between GBK and LATIN1 is not supported"?
Answer: This message occurs if the Data Studio and Database encoding selected are incompatible. To solve this, select the compatible encoding. Compatible encoding is shown in Table 2.
+
+Table 2 Compatible encoding formatsData Studio File Encoding
+ |
+Database Encoding
+ |
+Compatible or Not
+ |
+
|---|
+
+UTF-8
+ |
+GBK
+ |
+Yes
+ |
+
+LATIN1
+ |
+Yes
+ |
+
+SQL_ASCII
+ |
+Yes
+ |
+
+GBK
+ |
+UTF-8
+ |
+Yes
+ |
+
+LATIN1
+ |
+No
+ |
+
+SQL_ASCII
+ |
+Yes
+ |
+
+SQL_ASCII
+ |
+UTF-8
+ |
+Yes
+ |
+
+LATIN1
+ |
+Yes
+ |
+
+GBK
+ |
+Yes
+ |
+
+
+
+
- Why is the PL/SQL procedure I compiled and executed is saved as PL/SQL function?
Answer: The database does not differentiate between PL/SQL function and procedure. All procedures in databases are functions. Hence PL/SQL procedure is saved as PL/SQL function.
+ - Why is that I am not able to edit the distribution key?
Answer: The database allows you to edit the distribution key only for the first insert operation.
+ - While editing table data if I do not enter a value for default value column, will the value be added by the database server?
Answer: Yes, the database server will add the value but the value will not be visible after save in the Edit Table Data tab. Use the refresh option from the Edit Table Data tab or re-open the table again to view the added default value(s).
+ - While modifying/deleting table data why do I get a pop-up stating that more than one matching row found?
Answer: This happens because there are additional rows detected for modification/deletion based on Custom Unique Key or All Columns selection. If Custom Unique Key is selected, then it will delete/modify the rows that have exact match of the data in the column selected for deletion/modification. If All Columns is selected, then it will delete/modify the rows that match data in all columns. Hence the duplicate records matching the Custom Unique Key or All Columns will be deleted/modified if Yes is selected. If No is selected, the row that is not saved will be marked for correction.
+ - When I right-click on a text box I see additional context menu options. Why does this happen?
Answer: The additional context menu options like Right to left Reading order, Show Unicode control characters and so on are provided by Windows 7 in case the keyboard you are using supports right to left and left to right input.
+ - What are the objects that are not supported for batch export DDL & DDL and Data operations?
Answer: Following objects are not supported for DDL & DDL and Data operations.
+Export DDL:
+Connection, database, foreign table, sequence, column, index, constraint, partition, function/procedure group, regular tables group, views group, schemas group, and system catalog group.
+Export DDL and Data
+Connection, database, namespace, foreign table, sequence, column, index, constraint, partition, function/procedure, view, regular tables group, schemas group, and system catalog group.
+ - Will the queries in SQL Terminal be committed if the resultset is modified and saved with Reuse Connection on and Auto Commit off?
Answer: No. Queries will only be committed when COMMIT command is executed in the Terminal.
+
+Auto Commit
+ |
+Reuse Connection
+ |
+Resultset Save
+ |
+
|---|
+
+On
+ |
+On
+ |
+Commit
+ |
+
+On
+ |
+Off
+ |
+Commit
+ |
+
+Off
+ |
+On
+ |
+Does not commit
+ |
+
+Off
+ |
+Off
+ |
+Not supported
+ |
+
+
+
+
- When I query a temp table from a new SQL Terminal the resultset displays incorrect table details. Why does this happen?
Answer: When you query a temp table from a new SQL Terminal or with the Reuse Connection off, the resultset displays information of a regular/partition/foreign table, if a table with the same name as the temp table exists.
+ If the Reuse Connection is On, the resultset displays information of the temp table even if another table with the same name exists.
+
+ - Which are the operations that are performed on a locked object does not run in the background but needs to be manually closed?
Answer: Following are the operations that do not run in background while the object is locked in another operation:
+
+Operations
+ |
+
|---|
+
+Renaming a table
+ |
+Creating a constraint
+ |
+
+Setting schema on table
+ |
+Creating an index
+ |
+
+Setting description in table
+ |
+Adding column
+ |
+
+Renaming a partition
+ |
+-
+ |
+
+
+
+
- Do we have a limit on the column and row size while exporting table data to excel?
Answer: Yes, xlsx format supports maximum of 1 million rows and 16384 columns and xls format supports maximum of 64,000 rows and 256 columns.
+ - How Do I Delete Objects in Batches?
The batch drop operation allows you to drop multiple objects. This operation also applies to searched objects.
+ - Batch drop is allowed only for databases.
- An error is reported on batch dropping system objects, which cannot be dropped.
+
+Perform the following steps to batch drop objects:
+Press Ctrl and select objects one by one or press Shift and select objects in a bunch to select the objects to be dropped.
+Right-click and select Drop Objects.
+The Drop Objects tab displays the list of objects to be dropped.
+
+Column Name
+ |
+Description
+ |
+
|---|
+
+Type
+ |
+Displays information about the object type.
+ |
+
+Name
+ |
+Displays the name of the object.
+ |
+
+Query
+ |
+Displays the query that will be executed to drop objects.
+ |
+
+Type
+ |
+Displays the status of the drop operation.
+- To start: The drop operation has not been started.
- In progress: The object is being dropped.
- Completed: The drop operation has been completed.
- Error: The object has not been dropped due to an error.
+ |
+
+Error Message
+ |
+Displays the failure cause of a drop operation.
+ |
+
+
+
+
Select the required parameters.
+
Option
+ |
+Description
+ |
+
|---|
+
+Cascade
+ |
+The cascade drop operation is performed to drop dependent objects and attributes. The dropped dependent objects will be removed from Object Browser only after the refresh operation is performed.
+ |
+
+Atomic
+ |
+The atomic drop operation is performed to drop all objects. If the operation fails, no objects will be dropped.
+ |
+
+No selection
+ |
+If neither Cascade nor Atomic is selected, no dependent objects are dropped.
+ |
+
+
+
+
+
Click Start.
+Runs: displays the number of objects that are dropped from the object list
+Errors: displays the number of objects that are not dropped due to errors
+Click Stop or close the Drop Objects dialog box to stop the drop operation.
+For details about copy, advanced copy, show/hide search bar, sort, and column reorder options, see
Execute SQL Queries.
- Select part of a cell and press Ctrl+C or click Copy to copy the selected text in the cell.
- When you select multiple objects in Object Browser to drop, a batch drop window is displayed and the object icons are enabled in the menu bar. If you disconnect the database, the icons will remain disabled even after reconnection. In this case, you need to reselect the objects to drop and the selected objects will be displayed in the new batch drop window.
+
+
- How Do I Grant or Revoke Permissions in Batches for a Specified Object?
You can select multiple objects at a time or search for the target objects.
+Press Ctrl and select objects one by one, or press Shift and select objects in batches, and choose Grant/Revoke from the shortcut menu.
+ - Only objects with the same schema and type can be granted or revoked in batches.
- This feature is only supported in OLAP, not in OLTP.
+
+
+
About Data Studio
-
-
-
diff --git a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_100.html b/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_100.html
deleted file mode 100644
index e55138872..000000000
--- a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_100.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,24 +0,0 @@
-
-
-Importing Table Data
-Prerequisites:
-
- If the definition of the source file does not match that of the destination table, modify the properties of the destination table in the Import Table Data dialog box. Additional columns of the destination table will be inserted with default values.
- You should know the export properties of the file to be imported, such as Delimiter, Quotes, and Escape. Export properties saved during data export cannot be changed when a file is being imported.
-
Perform the following steps to import table data:
-
- Right-click the selected table and select Import Table Data.
The
Import Table Data dialog box is displayed with the following options:
- Import Data File: This option displays the path of the imported file. Click Browse to select other files.
- Format: Table data can be imported in CSV, TXT, or binary format. CSV is the default format.
- Include Header: Select this option if the imported file contains a column header. By default, this option is selected when a CSV or TXT file is exported, but it is not mandatory. This option will be disabled for the binary format.
- Quotes: You can enter only a single-byte character for this option, and the value of Quotes should be different from the null value of Delimiter. By default, this option is selected when a CSV or TXT file is exported, but it is not mandatory. This option will be disabled for the binary format.
- Escape: You can enter only a single-byte character for this option. If the value of Escape is the same as that of Quotes, the value of Escape will be replaced with \0. This option defaults to double quotation marks (") when a CSV or TXT file is exported, but it is not mandatory. This option will be disabled for the binary format.
- Replace with Null: You can configure this option to replace the null value in the table with a string. The null string used for exporting data should be used for importing data, and the null string needs to be specified. By default, this option is selected when a CSV or TXT file is exported, but it is not mandatory. This option will be disabled for the binary format.
- Encoding (optional): This option will be pre-populated with the encoding options made in the Preferences > Session Setting tab.
- Delimiter: You can select the provided delimiters or customize delimiters in Delimiter > Other. The default delimiter for CSV and TXT formats is commas (,). The value of this option should be different from those of Quotes and Replace with Null. By default, this option is selected when a CSV or TXT file is exported, but it is not mandatory. This option will be disabled for the binary format. It is mandatory when the Other field is selected.
- All Columns: Use this option to quickly select all columns. This option is selected by default. To manually select columns, deselect this option and select the columns to export from the Available Columns list.
- Available Columns: Use this option to select the columns to export.
- Selected Columns: This option displays the selected columns to export. The column sequence can be adjusted. By default, all columns are displayed in this option.
-
-
- Click Browse next to the Import Data File field.
The Open dialog box is displayed.
- - In the Open dialog box, select the file to import and click Open.
- Complete the required fields and click OK.
The status bar displays the operation progress. The imported data will be added to the existing table data.
-The Data Imported Successfully dialog box and status bar display the status of the completed operation.
-
-
Canceling the Table Data Import Operation
Perform the following steps to cancel the table data import operation:
-
-
- Double-click the status bar to open the Progress View tab.
- In the Progress View tab, click
. - In the Cancel Operation dialog box, click Yes.
The Messages tab and status bar display the status of the canceled operation.
-
-
Viewing Table Data
-
- Follow the steps to view table data:
-
- Right-click the selected table and select View Table Data.
The View Table Data tab is displayed where you can view the table data information.
-Toolbar menu in the View Table Data window:
-
-Toolbar Name
- |
-Toolbar Icon
- |
-Description
- |
-
|---|
-
-Copy
- |
-
- |
-Click the icon to copy selected content from View Table Data window to clipboard. Shortcut key - Ctrl+C.
- |
-
-Advanced Copy
- |
-
- |
-Click the icon to copy content from result window to the clipboard. Results can be copied to include the row number and/or column header. Refer to Query Results to set this preference. The shortcut key is Ctrl+Shift+C.
- |
-
-Show/Hide Search Bar
- |
-
- |
-Click the icon to display/hide the search text field. This is a toggle button.
- |
-
-Encoding
- |
--
- |
-Refer to Execute SQL Queries for information on encoding selection.
- |
-
-
-
-
Icons in Search field:
-
-Icon Name
- |
-Icon
- |
-Description
- |
-
|---|
-
-Search
- |
-
- |
-Click the icon to search the table data displayed based on the criteria defined. The text is case-insensitive.
- |
-
-Clear Search Text
- |
-
- |
-Click the icon to clear the search texts entered in the search field.
- |
-
-
-
-
Refer to
Execute SQL Queries for column reordering and sorting options.
- Query Submit Time: Provides the query submitted time.
- Number of rows fetched with execution time is displayed. The default number of rows is displayed. If there are additional rows to be fetched, then it will be denoted with the word "more". You can scroll to the bottom of the table to fetch and display all rows.
- When you view table data, Data Studio automatically adjusts the column widths for an optimal table view. Users can resize the columns as needed. If the text content of a cell exceeds the total available display area, then resizing the cell column may cause DS to become unresponsive.
-
- When the data in a table cell is more than 1000 characters, it will be trimmed to 1000 characters with "..." at the end.
- If the user copies the data from a cell in a table or the Result tab and pastes it on any editor (such as SQL terminal/PLSQL source editor, notepad or any other external editor application), the entire data is pasted.
- If the user copies the data from a cell in a table or the Result tab and pastes it on an editable cell (same or different), the cell shows only the first 1000 characters with "..." in the end.
- When the table/Result tab data is exported, the exported file contains the whole data.
-
-
-
-
- Individual table data window is displayed for each table.
- If the data of the table that is already opened is modified, then refresh and open the table data again to view the updated information on the same opened window.
- While the data is loading a message displays at the bottom stating "fetching".
- If the text of a column contains spaces, word wrapping is applied to fit the column width. Word wrapping is not applied to columns without spaces.
- Select part of cell content and press Ctrl+C or click
to copy selected text from a cell. - The size of the column is determined by the maximum content length column.
- You can save preference to define:
-
-
-
-
Editing Table Data
-
- Follow the steps below to edit table data:
-
- Right-click the selected table and select Edit Table Data.
The Edit Table data tab is displayed.
-Refer to Viewing Table Data for description on copy and search toolbar options.
-
-
Data Studio validates only the following data types entered into cells:
-
Bigint, bit, boolean, char, date, decimal, double, float, integer, numeric, real, smallint, time, time with time zone, time stamp, time stamp with time zone, tinyint, and varchar. Editing of array type data type is not supported.
-
Any related errors during this operation reported by database will be displayed in Data Studio. Time with time zone and timestamp with time zone columns are non-editable columns.
-
You can perform the following operations in the Edit Table Data tab:
-
-
Insert
Follow the steps to insert a row:
-
- Click
to insert a row. - Double-click the cell to modify and enter the required details in the row.
- Click
to save changes.The Edit Table Data tab status bar shows the Query Submit Time, Number of Rows Fetched, Execution Time and Status of the operation.
- Data Studio updates rows identified by the unique key. If a unique key is not identified for a table and there are identical rows, then an update operation made on one of the rows will affect all identical rows. Refresh the Edit Table Data tab to view the updated rows.
-
- - Changes to cells in a row that are not saved are highlighted in green. Once saved the color resets to default color.
- Unsaved records are highlighted in red. The number of successful and failed records are displayed in the status bar of the Edit Table Data tab.
- Clicking Save either saves all the valid changes or does not save anything if there are invalid changes. Refer to Editing Table Data to set the behavior of save operation.
-
- - Click
to roll back the changes that are not saved. - Set the preference to define:
-
-
Data Studio allows you to edit the distribution key column only for a new row.
-
-
Delete
Follow the steps to delete a row:
-
- Click the row header of the row to be deleted.
- Click
to delete a row. - Click
to save changes. The Define Unique Key dialog box is displayed. - Click the required option:
- Use All Columns
Click Use All Columns to define all columns as unique key.
- - Custom Unique Key
- Click Custom Unique Key to define selected columns as unique key.
- The Define Unique Key dialogue box is displayed.
- Select the required columns and click OK.
- - Cancel
Click Cancel to modify the information in Edit Table Data tab.
-The Edit Table Data tab status bar shows the Query Submit Time, Number of Rows Fetched, Execution Time and Status of the operation.
-Select Remember the selection for this window option to hide the unique definition window from displaying while continuing with the edit table data operation. Click 
from Edit Table Data toolbar to clear previously selected unique key definition and display unique definition wind
-
- - Changes to cells in a row that are not saved are highlighted in green. Once saved the color resets to default color.
- Unsaved records are highlighted in red. The number of successful and failed records are displayed in the status bar of the Edit Table Data tab.
- Clicking Save either saves all the valid changes or does not save anything if there are invalid changes. For details, see Editing Table Data.
-
- - Click
to roll back the changes that are not saved. - Refresh the table data to view deleted duplicate rows.
-
-
Update
Follow the steps to update cell data:
-
- Double-click the cell to update the contents of the cell.
- Click
to save changes.The Define Unique Key dialog box is displayed.
- - Click the required option:
- Use All Columns
Click Use All Columns to define all columns as unique key.
- - Custom Unique Key
- Click Custom Unique Key to define selected columns as unique key.
- The Define Unique Key dialogue box is displayed.
- Select the required columns and click OK.
- - Cancel
Click Cancel to modify the information in Edit Table Data tab.
-The status bar shows the Execution Time and Status of the operation.
-Select
Remember the selection for this window option to hide the unique definition window from displaying while continuing with the edit table data operation. Click
from Edit Table Data toolbar to clear previously selected unique key definition and display unique definition wind
- Changes to cells in a row that are not saved are highlighted in green. Once saved the color resets to default color.
- Unsaved records are highlighted in red. The number of successful and failed records are displayed in the status bar of the Edit Table Data tab.
- Clicking Save either saves all the valid changes or does not save anything if there are invalid changes. For details, see Editing Table Data.
-
-
- - Click
to roll back the changes that are not saved. - Refresh the table data to view deleted duplicate rows.
-
During the edit operation, Data Studio does not allow you to edit the distribution key column as it is used by the DB to locate data in the database cluster.
-
-
Copy
You can copy data from the Edit Table Data tab.
-
-
Follow the steps to copy data:
-
- Select the cell(s) and click
(Copy) or 
(Advanced Copy).For more information about the differences between Copy and Advanced Copy, see Execute SQL Queries.
- - Data can be copied to include the row number and/or column header. Refer to Query Results to set this preference.
- Select part of cell content and press Ctrl+C or click
to copy selected text from a cell.
-
-
-
Paste
You can copy data from a CSV file and paste it into cells in the Edit Table Data tab to insert and update records. If you paste onto existing cell data, the data is overwritten with the new data from the CSV file. Follow the steps to paste data into a cell:
-
- Copy data from the CSV file.
- Select the cell(s) and click
. - Click
to save changes. The Define Unique Key dialog box is displayed. - Click the required option:
- Use All Columns
Click Use All Columns to define all columns as unique key.
- - Custom Unique Key
- Click Custom Unique Key to define selected columns as unique key.
- The Define Unique Key dialogue box is displayed.
- Select the required columns and click OK.
- - Cancel
Click Cancel to modify the information in Edit Table Data tab.
-The status bar shows the Execution Time and Status of the operation.
-Select Remember the selection for this window option to hide the unique definition window from displaying while continuing with the edit table data operation. Click 
from Edit Table Data toolbar to clear previously selected unique key definition and display unique definition wind
- - The number of copied cells from CSV must match the number of cells selected in the Edit Table Data tab to paste the data.
-
- Click
to roll back the changes that are not saved. - Changes to cells in a row that are not saved are highlighted in green. Once saved the color resets to default color.
- Unsaved records are highlighted in red. The number of successful and failed records are displayed in the status bar of the Edit Table Data tab.
- Clicking Save either saves all the valid changes or does not save anything if there are invalid changes. For details, see Editing Table Data.
-
-
-
-
During the pasting operation, Data Studio does not allow you to edit the distribution key column as it is used by the DB to locate data in the database cluster.
-
Empty cells are shown as [NULL]. Empty cell in Edit Table Data tab can be searched using the Null Values search drop-down.
-
-
Refer to Execute SQL Queries for information on show/hide search bar, sort, column reorder, and encoding options..
-
-
Editing Temporary Tables
-
- Data Studio allows you to edit temporary tables. Temporary tables are deleted automatically when you close the connection that was used to create the table.
-
Ensure that connection reuse is enabled when you use the SQL Terminal to edit temporary tables. Refer to Managing SQL Terminal Connections for information about enabling SQL Terminal Connection reuse.
-
-
Follow the steps to edit a temporary table:
-
- Execute a query on the temporary table.
The Result tab displays the results of the SQL query along with the query statement executed.
- - Edit the temporary table from the Result tab. Refer to the Execute SQL Queries for information on editing the resultset.
-
Sequences
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_105.html b/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_105.html
deleted file mode 100644
index bf8d70fd5..000000000
--- a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_105.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,26 +0,0 @@
-
-
-
- Creating Sequence
-
- Follow the steps below to create a sequence:
-
- In the Object Browser pane, right-click Sequences under the particular schema where you want to create the sequence and select Create Sequence.
The Create New Sequence dialog box is displayed.
- - Provide information to create a sequence:
- Enter a name in the Sequence Name field.
Select the Case check box to retain the capitalization of the text entered in Sequence Name field. For example, if the sequence name entered is "Employee", then the sequence name is created as "Employee".
-
- - Enter the minimum value in the Minimum Value field.
- Enter the increase step value in the Increment By field.
- Enter maximum value in the Maximum Value field.
The minimum and maximum value should be between -9223372036854775808 and 9223372036854775807.
-
- - Enter the start value of the sequence in Start Value field.
- Enter the cache information in Cache field. The cache value denotes the number of sequences stored in the memory for quick access.
- Select the Cycle field to recycle sequences after the number of sequences reaches either the maximum or minimum value.
The schema name auto-populates in the Schema field.
-
- - Select the table from the Table drop-down list.
- Select the column from the Column drop-down list.
- - Click Finish.
The status bar displays the status of the completed operation.
In the SQL Preview tab, you can view the SQL query automatically generated for the inputs provided.
-
-
-
Grant/Revoke Privilege
-
- Follow the steps below to grant/revoke a privilege:
-
- Right-click the sequences group and select Grant/Revoke.
The Grant/Revoke dialog is displayed.
- - Select the objects to grant/revoke privilege from the Object Selection tab and click Next.
- Select the role from Role drop-down list in the Privilege Selection tab.
- Select Grant/Revoke in the Privilege Selection tab.
- Select/unselect the required privileges in the Privilege Selection tab.
In the SQL Preview tab, you can view the SQL query automatically generated for the inputs provided.
- - Click Finish.
-
Working with Sequences
-
- You can perform the following operations on an existing sequence:
-
-
Dropping a Sequence
Individual or batch dropping can be performed on sequences. Refer to Dropping a Batch of Objects section for batch drop.
-
Follow the steps to dropping a sequence:
-
- Right-click the selected sequence and select Drop Sequence.
The Drop Sequence dialog box is displayed.
- - Click Yes to drop the sequence.
The status bar displays the status of the completed operation.
-
-
-
Dropping a Sequence Cascade
Follow the steps to drop a sequence cascade:
-
- Right-click the selected sequence and select Drop Sequence Cascade.
The Drop Sequence Cascade dialog box is displayed.
- - Click Yes to drop the sequence cascade.
The status bar displays the status of the completed operation.
-
-
This is only available for OLAP, not for OLTP.
-
-
-
Granting/Revoking a Privilege
Follow the steps to grant/revoke a privilege:
-
- Right-click selected sequence and select Grant/Revoke.
The Grant/Revoke dialog is displayed.
- - Refer to Grant/Revoke Privilege to grant/revoke a privilege.
-
-
Views
-
-
-
diff --git a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_109.html b/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_109.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 2f7801811..000000000
--- a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_109.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,16 +0,0 @@
-
-
-Creating a View
-Follow the steps below to create a new view:
-
- Right-click the Views and select Create View.
The DDL template for the view is displayed in the SQL Terminal tab.
- - Edit the DDL as required.
- Click
to execute the DDL. - Press F5 to refresh the Object Browser.
You can view the new view in the Object Browser.
- The status bar will not display message on completion of this operation.
-
-
-
Granting/Revoking a Privilege
-Follow the steps below to grant/revoke a privilege:
-
- Right-click the views group and select Grant/Revoke.
The Grant/Revoke dialog box is displayed.
- - Select the objects to grant/revoke a privilege from the Object Selection tab and click Next.
- Select the role from the Role drop-down list in the Privilege Selection tab.
- Select Grant/Revoke in the Privilege Selection tab.
- Select/unselect the required privileges in the Privilege Selection tab.
In the SQL Preview tab, you can view the SQL query automatically generated for the inputs provided.
- - Click Finish.
-
Working with Views
-Views can be created to restrict access to specific rows or columns of a table. A view can be created from one or more tables and is determined by the query used to create the view.
-
You can perform the following operations on an existing view:
-
-
Exporting the View DDL
Follow the steps below to export view the DDL:
-
- Right-click the selected view and select Export DDL.
The Data Studio Security Disclaimer dialog box is displayed.
- - Click OK.
The Save As dialog box is displayed.
- - In the Save As dialog box, select the location to save the DDL and click Save. The status bar displays the progress of the operation.
- To cancel the export operation, double-click the status to open the Progress View tab and click
. - The exported file name will not be the same as the view name, if the view name contains characters which are not supported by Windows.
- Multiple objects can be selected to export the view DDL. Refer to Batch Export for the list of the objects that are not supported for exporting view DDL.
-
-The Export message and status bar display the status of the completed operation.
-
-Database Encoding
- |
-File Encoding
- |
-Supports Exporting DDL
- |
-
|---|
-
-UTF-8
- |
-UTF-8
- |
-Yes
- |
-
-GBK
- |
-Yes
- |
-
-LATIN1
- |
-Yes
- |
-
-GBK
- |
-GBK
- |
-Yes
- |
-
-UTF-8
- |
-Yes
- |
-
-LATIN1
- |
-No
- |
-
-LATIN1
- |
-LATIN1
- |
-Yes
- |
-
-GBK
- |
-No
- |
-
-UTF-8
- |
-Yes
- |
-
-
-
-
-
-
Dropping a View
Individual or batch dropping can be performed on views. Refer to Dropping a Batch of Objects for batch dropping.
-
Follow the steps below to drop the view:
-
- Right-click the selected view and select Drop View.
The Drop View dialog box is displayed.
- - Click Yes to drop the view.
The status bar displays the status of the completed operation.
-
-
-
Dropping a View Cascade
Follow the steps below to drop a view and its dependent database objects:
-
- Right-click the selected view and select Drop View Cascade.
The Drop View dialog box is displayed.
- - Click Yes to drop the view and its dependent database objects.
The status bar displays the status of the completed operation.
-
-
-
Renaming a View
Follow the steps below to rename a view:
-
- Right-click the selected view and select Rename View.
The Rename View dialog box is displayed.
- - Enter the required name for the view and click OK. You can view the renamed view in the Object Browser.
The status bar displays the status of the completed operation.
-
-
-
Setting the Schema for a View
Follow the steps below to set the schema for a view:
-
- Right-click the selected view and select Set Schema.
The Set Schema dialog box is displayed.
- - Select the required schema from the drop-down list and click OK.
The status bar displays the status of the completed operation.
-If the required schema contains a view with the same name as the current view, then Data Studio does not allow setting the schema for the view.
-
-
-
Viewing the DDL
Follow the steps below to view the DDL of the view:
-
- Right-click the selected view and select Show DDL.
The DDL is displayed in a new SQL Terminal tab. You must refresh the Object Browser to view the latest DDL.
-
-
-
Setting the Default Value for the View Column
Follow the steps below to set the default value for a column in the view:
-
- Right-click the selected column name under the view and select Set View Column Default Value.
A dialog box with the current default value (if it is set) is displayed which prompts you to provide the default value.
- - Enter the value and click OK.
Data Studio displays the status of the operation in the status bar.
-
-
-
Viewing the Properties of a View
Follow the steps below to view the properties of the View:
-
- Right-click the selected View and select Properties.
The properties (General and Columns) of the selected View is displayed in different tabs.
- If the property of a View is modified that is already opened, then refresh and open the properties of the View again to view the updated information on the same opened window.
-
-
-
-
Granting/Revoking a Privilege
Follow the steps below to grant/revoke a privilege:
-
- Right-click the selected view and select Grant/Revoke.
The Grant/Revoke dialog box is displayed.
- - Refer to Granting/Revoking a Privilege to grant/revoke privilege.
-
-
Users/Roles
-
-
-
diff --git a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_116.html b/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_116.html
deleted file mode 100644
index c702650fe..000000000
--- a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_116.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,14 +0,0 @@
-
-
-Creating a User/Role
-A database is used by many users, and the users are grouped for management convenience. A database role can be one or a group of database users.
-
Users and roles have similar concepts in databases. In practice, you are advised to use a role to manage permissions rather than to access databases.
-
Users - They are set of database users. These users are different from operating system users. These users can assign privileges to other users to access database objects.
-
Role - This can be considered as a user or group based on the usage. Roles are at cluster level, and hence applicable to all databases in the cluster.
-
Working with Users/Roles
-You can perform the following operations on an existing user/role:
-
-
Dropping a User/Role
Follow the steps below to drop a user/role:
-
- Right-click the selected user/role and select Drop User/Role.
The Drop User/Role dialog box is displayed.
- - Click Yes to drop the user/role.
The status bar displays the status of the completed operation.
-
-
-
Viewing/Editing User/Role Properties
Follow the steps below to view the properties of a user/role:
-
- Right-click the selected user/role and select Properties.
Data Studio displays the properties (General, Privilege, and Membership) of the selected user/role in different tabs.
-Editing of properties can be performed. OID is a non-editable field.
-Refer to Editing Table Data for information on edit, save, cancel, copy, and refresh operations.
-
-
-
Viewing the User/Role DDL
Follow the steps below to view the DDL of a user/role:
-
- Right-click the selected user/role and select Show DDL.
The user/role DDL is displayed in a new SQL Terminal tab. You must refresh the Object Browser to view the latest DDL.
-
-
-
SQL Terminal
-
-
-
diff --git a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_119.html b/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_119.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 8beeb8f99..000000000
--- a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_119.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,135 +0,0 @@
-
-
-Opening Multiple SQL Terminal Tabs
-You can open multiple SQL Terminal tabs in Data Studio to execute multiple SQL statements for query in the current SQL Terminal tab. Perform the following steps to open a new SQL Terminal tab.
-
You can also open multiple SQL Terminal tabs on different connection templates.
-
- In the Object Browser pane, right-click the desired database and choose Open Terminal from the shortcut menu. Alternatively, click
in the toolbar or press Ctrl+T to open a new SQL Terminal tab.The SQL Terminal tab is displayed.
-
-
- In Data Studio, a maximum of 100 SQL Terminal tabs can be opened for each connected database. Based on the number of query times, each SQL Terminal tab contains multiple Result tabs and one Message tab. If the database connection is lost, the corresponding SQL Terminal tab is still available.
- The restoration operation applies to all minimized SQL Terminal tabs. You cannot restore a single tab.
- After all terminals are shut down, Data Studio resets the counter of the SQL terminal.
- After all Result Set tabs are closed, Data Studio resets the counter of the result set.
- Data Studio allows you to reset counters in the following pages: Display DDL Tablespace, Display DDL User/Role, Batch Delete, Result Set, and Execution Plan.
-
-
Data Studio displays an error message indicating that no result is found in the status bar. The Result tab displays the successful execution results.
-
Perform the following steps to open a new SQL Terminal tab in another connection:
-
- Select the required connection from the connection list in the toolbar.
- In the Object Browser pane, right-click the desired connected database and choose Open Terminal, or click in the toolbar. The SQL Terminal tab is displayed.
The name format of the new SQL Terminal tab is as follows:
-Database name@Connection information(Tab number), for example, postgres@IDG_1(2). The number of each SQL Terminal tab in the same connection information is unique.
-
-
Right-Click Menus in the Result Tab
You can copy or export cell data to an Excel file and generate a SQL query file.
-
-
After the SQL query result is displayed in the Result tab, right-click the result. The following menu is displayed:
-
-
Perform the following steps to add a row number and column header to the result set:
-
- On the menu bar of Data Studio, click Settings.
- Choose Preferences.
- Expand the Result Management tab and choose Query Results.
- In the Result Advanced Copy area, select Include column header and Include row number.
-
The following table describes the right-click options.
-
-
Table 1 Right-click optionsOption
- |
-Sub-Item
- |
-Description
- |
-
|---|
-
-Copy Data
-
- |
-Copy
- |
-Copies data in the selected cell.
- |
-
-Advanced Copy
- |
-Copies data in the selected cell, row number, and column header based on the preference settings.
- |
-
-Copy to Excel
-
- |
-Copy as xls
- |
-Exports data of selected cells to an xls file, which contains a maximum of 64,000 rows and 256 columns.
- |
-
-Copy as xlsx
- |
-Exports data of selected cells to an xlsx file, which contains a maximum of 1 million rows.
- |
-
-Export
-
- |
-Current Page
- |
-Exports the table data on the current page.
- |
-
-All Pages
- |
-Exports all tables.
- |
-
-Generate SQL
-
-
- |
-Selected Line
- |
-Selects data from the target table of the statement for inserting data to generate a SQL file.
- |
-
-Current Page
- |
-Selects data of the current page from the target table of the statement for inserting data to generate a SQL file.
- |
-
-All Pages
- |
-Selects all table data from the target table of the statement for inserting data to generate a SQL file.
- |
-
-Set Null
- |
--
- |
-Sets the cell data to null.
- |
-
-Search
- |
--
- |
-Searches for data in the selected cell and displays all data that meets the search criteria.
- |
-
-
-
-
-
The preceding SQL files do not take effect for the result sets generated by queries that use JOIN, expressions, views, SET operators, aggregate functions, GROUP BY clauses, or column aliases.
-
-
Result Tab (Text View)
You can view data in text mode in the Result tab.
-
In addition to the grid view, you can also copy and search for data in the text view.
-
Click 
to obtain the result in text mode.
-
Searching for data in multiple cells may cause the system to display incorrect text results, because all information needs to be copied to the Search pane in plain text.
-
-
-
Displaying Execution Progress Bar
When a query is executed in the SQL Terminal pane, a progress bar is displayed to dynamically display the execution duration. After the query is complete, the time bar disappears. The total execution duration is displayed next to the time bar.
-
If you want to cancel the query, click Cancel next to the time bar.
-
The procedure is shown in the following figure.
-
-
- The Cancel button is deleted from the toolbar.
- The progress bar is also displayed when you compile or debug an object in the PL/SQL editor.
- The time format displayed in the progress bar is w hour x minute y second z millisecond.
- When queries are performed in batches in SQL Terminal, the progress bar displays the total time consumed by the queries.
-
-
-
Debugging Duration
During debugging, Data Studio displays the status bar, showing the last operation time and total debugging time of each debugging statement.
-
During the debugging, the last operation time and total debugging time of the terminal are updated continuously. The value of the total debugging time is the sum of the values of the last operation time.
-
This simplifies the search for time-consuming statements in the debugged object.
-
The procedure is shown in the following figure.
-
-
- Functions and procedures can be debugged.
- Debugging applies only to OLAP.
-
-
-
Constraints and Limitations
-This section describes the constraints and limitations for using Data Studio.
-
Object Browser Filter Tree
The filter count and filtering status of the tree are not supported.
-
-
Character Encoding
If the SQL statement, DDL, object name, or data to be viewed contains Chinese characters, set the character encoding to GBK if it is supported by the OS. For details, see Session Setting.
-
-
Connection Management
On the Advanced tab of the New Connection and Edit Connection pages, commas (,) are used as separators in the include and exclude columns. Therefore, a schema name that contains a comma (,) is not supported.
-
-
Database Tables
- On the "Index" tab of the table creation wizard, the sequence of the selected columns in the list view cannot be retained after columns are deleted.
- When an operation has completed, and if the Data Studio window is not the active window of the operating system, then the message dialog is shown only when the Data Studio window becomes active.
- The following limitations are applicable to Edit Table Data operations:
- Entering expression values in the Edit Table Data tab is not supported.
- Data Studio allows editing of fetched records only.
- The Editing table filter feature will not highlight search words within HTML tags such as <, &, >.
- A cell containing single '&' in it will not be displayed in the tooltip. A cell containing two consecutive '&' will display as a single '&' in the tooltip.
- Row focus is not retained on a newly added row. You need to click the desired cell.
-
-
-
Function/Procedure
Functions/Procedures created in the SQL Terminal or the Create Function/Procedure wizard must end with "/" to indicate the end of functions/procedures. Statements entered after a function/procedure without "/" at the end will be treated as a single query and may trigger errors during execution.
-
-
General
- A maximum of 100 tabs can be opened in the editor area. Tabs are based on available resources of the host machine.
- A maximum of 64 characters (text only) are allowed for database object names (database, schema, function, procedure, table, sequence, constraint, index, view, and tablespace). There is no limit to the number of characters that can be used in expressions and descriptions in Data Studio.
- A maximum of 300 result tabs can be opened on a logged instance of Data Studio.
- If there are large objects loaded in Object Browser and Search Object window, expanding of objects in Object Browser may be slow and Data Studio may become unresponsive.
- Adjusting the cell width may cause Data Studio to fail to respond.
- When the data in a table cell is more than 1000 characters, it will be trimmed to 1000 characters with "..." at the end.
- If the user copies the data from a cell in a table or the Result tab and pastes it on any editor (such as SQL terminal/PLSQL source editor, notepad or any other external editor application), the entire data is pasted.
- If the user copies the data from a cell in a table or the Result tab and pastes it on an editable cell (same or different), the cell shows only the first 1000 characters with "..." in the end.
- When the table/Result tab data is exported, the exported file contains the whole data.
-
-
-
Security
Data Studio validates SSL connection parameters only for the first time of connection. If Enable SSL is selected, the same SSL connection parameters are used when a new connection is opened.
-
- If Enable SSL is not selected during connecting to Data Studio, data is not encrypted by default.
- If the security file is damaged during the SSL connection, Data Studio cannot perform any database operations. To resolve this problem, delete the security folder in the corresponding configuration folder and restart Data Studio.
-
-
-
SQL Terminal
- Opening an SQL file containing a large number of queries may result in an 'Insufficient Memory' error. For details, see Troubleshooting.
- Data Studio does not disable the auto-suggest and hyperlink features in the commented text in the SQL Terminal.
- The Hyperlink feature is not supported if the schema or table name have either spaces or dots (.) in them.
- Auto-suggest is not supported if the object name contains single or double quotes in it.
- DS supports basic formatting of simple SELECT statements only and may not work as expected for complex queries.
-
-
Managing the SQL Query Execution History
-Data Studio allows viewing and managing frequently used SQL queries. The history of executed SQL queries is maintained only for the SQL Terminal.
-
Follow the steps to view the SQL history:
-
- Click
in the SQL Terminal tab.The SQL History dialog box is displayed.
-
-
SQL history scripts are not encrypted.
-
-
The number of queries saved in the SQL History dialog box is based on the value defined in Preferences > Editor > SQL History pane. Refer to the SQL History section to modify the SQL History count. Data Studio overwrites the older queries into the SQL history after the list is full. The executed query is automatically stored in the list.
-
The SQL History dialog box has the following columns:
-
- Pin Status - Displays the pinned status of the queries. Pinned queries will always show on the top and it will not be deleted from the history even when the list is full.
- SQL Statement - Displays the SQL query. The number of characters for an SQL query displayed in the SQL Statement column is based on the number defined in Preferences > Editor > SQL History pane. Refer to the SQL History section to modify the number of characters for a query.
- Number of Records - Displays the number of records fetched by the SQL query.
- Start Time - Displays the time the query execution was started.
- Execution Time - Displays the time taken to execute the query.
- Database Name - Displays the name of the database.
- Execution Status - Displays the execution status of the query as Success or Failure.
-
Deleting the connection profile deletes the history. If the SQL History dialog box is closed, the query is not removed from the list.
-
You can perform the following operations in the SQL History dialog box:
-
-
Loading an SQL Query Into the SQL Terminal
Follow the steps to load the SQL query into the SQL terminal:
-
- Select the required query and click
.The query is appended to the cursor position in the SQL Terminal.
-
-
-
Loading Multiple SQL Queries Into the SQL Terminal
The Load in SQL Terminal and close History button loads selected queries into the SQL Terminal and closes the SQL History dialog box.
-
Follow the steps to load selected SQL queries into the SQL terminal:
-
- Select the required queries.
- Click
.The queries are appended to the cursor position in the SQL Terminal.
-
-
If you continue the execution on error, then each statement in the terminal will be running as a scheduled job and runs one after the other. The execution status is updated on the console and job is listed in the progress bar. When the time difference between Job Execution, Progress Bar Update and Console Update is very minimal, you will not be able to open the progress bar and stop the execution. In such scenarios you have to close the SQL terminal to the terminate execution.
-
-
-
Loading More Records
Regarding to load more data of result tab, you have to scroll down to bottom in order to load more data, which is inconvenient in some use cases. Currently, DS supports a loading more record button which makes it easier to trigger the loading more data action.
-
Follow the steps to load more records
-
- Select the required queries and click
.List all the required records.
-
-
-
Deleting an SQL Query
Follow the steps to delete a SQL query from the SQL history list:
-
- Select the required query and click
.A confirmation pop up window is displayed.
- - Click OK.
-
-
Deleting all SQL Queries
Follow the steps to delete all SQL queries from the SQL History list:
-
- Click
.A confirmation pop up window is displayed.
- - Click OK.
-
-
Pinning an SQL Query
You can pin queries that you do not want Data Studio to delete automatically from the SQL History. You can pin a maximum of 50 queries. Pinned queries are displayed at the top of the list. The value set in SQL history count does not affect the pinned queries. Refer to SQL History for additional information on SQL history count.
-
The pinned queries appear on top once the SQL History window is closed and re-opened.
-
-
Follow the steps to pin a SQL query:
-
- Select the required SQL query and click
.The Pin Status column displays the pinned status of the query.
-
-
-
Unpinning an SQL Query
Follow the steps to unpin a SQL query:
-
- Select the required SQL query and click
.The Pin Status column displays the unpinned status of the query.
-
-
-
Opening and Saving SQL Scripts
-Opening an SQL Script
Follow the steps to open an SQL script:
-
-
- Choose File > Open from the main menu. Alternatively, click Open on the toolbar or right-click the SQL Terminal and select Open.
If the SQL Terminal has existing content, then there will be an option to overwrite the existing content or append content to it.
- - The Open dialog box is displayed.
- In Open dialog box, select the SQL file to import and click Open.
The selected SQL script is opened as a File Terminal.
-The icons on the file terminal tab is different from those in the SQL terminal. When you move the mouse cursor over the source file, corresponding database connection will be displayed on File Terminal.
-
-
- The encoding type of the SQL file must match the encoding type specified in preferences.
- Label of the file terminal will start with asterisk(*) if any of its content is edited. Dirty flag is removed once the file terminal is saved.
- File Terminals cannot be renamed. One terminal is always mapped to one Source Script File, but one script can be opened in multiple terminals.
- You can open SQL scripts only on SQL Terminals.
-
-
Data Studio allows you to save and open SQL scripts in the SQL Terminal. After saving the changes, SQL Terminal will be changed to a File Terminal.
-
Saving an SQL Script
The Save option saves the File Terminal content to the associated file. ,
-
Follow the steps to save an SQL script:
-
- Perform any of the following operations:
- Choose File > Save from the main menu.
- Press "Ctrl + S" to save the SQL terminal content.
- Click Save on the toolbar or right-click the SQL Terminal and select Save.
-The Data Studio Security Disclaimer dialog box is displayed.
- - Click OK.
Data Studio displays the status of the operation in the status bar
.
- The script is saved as an SQL file. Data Studio sets the read/write permission for the saved SQL file. To ensure security, you must set the read/write permissions for folders.
- When a change is made in a file and if that associated file is unavailable, it will trigger the Save As option.
- In any case, if saving of the source file is failed due to some reasons, then user is prompted with the Save As option to save the content as a new source file. If you choose not to save (that is cancelling Save As), then File Terminal gets converted into an SQL Terminal.
- The changes made to File Terminals are not Auto Saved.
-
-
-
-
-
Saving an SQL Script in New File
The Save As option saves the terminal content to a new file.
-
Follow the steps to save an SQL script:
-
- Perform any of the following operations:
- Choose File > Save As from the main menu.
- Alternatively click "Ctrl + Alt + S key to save SQL terminal or File terminal content in new file.
-The Data Studio Security Disclaimer dialog box is displayed.
- - Click OK.
The Save As dialog box is displayed.
- - Select the location to save the script and click Save.
-
When there are unsaved changes in File Terminals, user will be given an option to save or cancel on graceful exit of data studio.
-
-
-
Viewing Object Properties in the SQL Terminal
-Data Studio allows you to view table properties and functions/procedures.
-
Follow the steps to view table properties:
-
- Press Ctrl and point to the table name.
- - Click the highlighted table name. The properties of the selected table are displayed.
The table properties are read-only.
-
-
-
Follow the steps to view functions/procedures:
-
- Press Ctrl and point to the function/procedure name.
- - Click the highlighted function/procedure name. The function/procedure is displayed in a new PL/SQL Viewer tab.
-
Follow the steps to view the properties of a view:
-
- Press Ctrl and point to the view name.
- Click the highlighted view name. The properties of the selected view are displayed.
-
Saving a Terminal Content Before Exiting Data Studio
Data Studio allows you to save the unsaved content of the terminal before exiting the application.
-
Follow the steps to save the content of the terminal:
-
- Click on the close button of the application. Exit Application dialog box will appear.
- Click Graceful Exit.
- The Saving File Terminal dialog box appears. Unsaved dirty file terminal is displayed.
- - Select the terminal to save.
- Click OK.
-
-
The Saving File Terminal dialog box will not appear in case of force exit.
-
-
Canceling the Execution of SQL Queries
-Data Studio allows you to cancel the execution of an SQL query being executed in the SQL Terminal.
-
Follow the steps to cancel execution of an SQL query:
-
- Execute the SQL query in the SQL Terminal.
- Click
in the SQL Terminal or press Shift+Esc.Alternatively, you can choose Run > Cancel from the main menu or right-click SQL Terminal and select Cancel, or select Cancel from Progress View tab.
-
-
When you cancel the query, the execution stops at the currently executing SQL statement.
-
Database changes made by the canceled query are rolled back and the queries following the canceled query are not executed.
-
A query cannot be canceled and the Result tab shows the result when:
-
- The server has finished execution of the query and is preparing the result.
- The result of the executed query is being transferred from the server to the Data Studio client.
-
A query cannot be canceled while viewing the query Execution Plan. For more details, refer to Viewing the Query Execution Plan and Cost.
-
The Messages tab shows the query cancelation message.
-
The Cancel button is enabled only during query execution.
-
-
Formatting of SQL Queries
-
- Data Studio supports formatting and highlighting of SQL queries and PL/SQL statements.
-
PL/SQL Formatting
Follow the steps to format PL/SQL statements:
-
- Select the PL/SQL statements to be formatted.
- Click
on the toolbar to format the query.Alternatively, use the key combination Ctrl+Shift+F or choose Edit > Format from the main menu.
-The PL/SQL statements are formatted.
-
-
-
SQL Formatting
Data Studio supports formatting of simple SQL SELECT, INSERT, UPDATE, DELETE statements which are syntactically correct. The following are some of the statements for which formatting is supported:
-
- The SELECT statement must be made of the following clauses:
- Target list
- FROM clause (including JOIN)
- Where
- Group by
- Having
- Order by
- Common table expression
-SELECT statement without SET operations like UNION, UNION ALL, MINUS, INTERSECT and so on
-SELECT statements without sub-queries
- - The INSERT statement is made of the following clauses only:
- Insert Into Table name
- Values
- Values Column List
- RETURNING
- - The UPDATE statement is made of the following clauses only:
- Update Table name
- SET
- FROM clause (including JOIN)
- Where
- RETURNING
- - The DELETE statement is made of the following clauses only:
- Delete From Table name
- USING clause (including JOIN)
- Where
- RETURNING
-
-
Follow the steps below to format SQL queries:
-
- Select the SQL query statements to be formatted.
- Click
on the toolbar to format the query.Alternatively, use the key combination Ctrl+Shift+F or choose Edit > Format from the main menu.
-The query is formatted.
-The following table describes the query formatting rules.
-
-Table 1 Query formatting rulesStatement
- |
-Clause
- |
-Formatting Rule
- |
-
|---|
-
-SELECT
- |
-SELECT list
-
- |
-Line break before first column
- |
-
-Indent column list
- |
-
-FROM
- |
-Line break before FROM
- |
-
-Line break after FROM
- |
-
-Indent FROM list
- |
-
-Stack FROM list
- |
-
-Line break before JOIN
- |
-Line break after JOIN
- |
-
-Line break after JOIN
- |
-
-Line break before ON
- |
-
-Line break after ON
- |
-
-Indent table after JOIN
- |
-
-Indent ON condition
- |
-
-WHERE
- |
-Line break before WHERE
- |
-
-Line break after WHERE
- |
-
-Place WHERE condition on single line
- |
-
-Place WHERE condition on single line
- |
-
-GROUP BY
-
-
- |
-Line break before GROUP
- |
-
-Line break before GROUP BY expression
- |
-
-Indent column list
- |
-
-Stack column list
- |
-
-HAVING
- |
-Line break before HAVING
- |
-
-Line break after HAVING
- |
-
-Indent HAVING condition
- |
-
-ORDER BY
- |
-Line break before ORDER
- |
-
-Line break after BY
- |
-
-Indent column list
- |
-
-Stack column list
- |
-
-CTE
- |
-Indent subquery braces
- |
-
-Each CTE in a new line
- |
-
-INSERT
- |
-INSERT INFO
- |
-Line break before opening brace
- |
-
-Line break after opening brace
- |
-
-Line break before closing brace
- |
-
-Indent column list brace
- |
-
-Indent column list
- |
-
-Line break before VALUES
- |
-
-Stack column list
- |
-
-Line break before VALUES
- |
-
-Line break before opening brace
- |
-
-Line break after opening brace
- |
-
-Line break before closing brace
- |
-
-Indent VALUES expressions list braces
- |
-
-Indent VALUES expressions list
- |
-
-Stack VALUES expressions list
- |
-
-DEFAULT
- |
-Line break before DEFAULT
- |
-
-Indent DEFAULT keyword
- |
-
-CTE
- |
-Each CTE in a new line
- |
-
-RETURNING
- |
-Line break before RETURNING
- |
-
-Line break after RETURNING
- |
-
-Indent RETURNING column list
- |
-
-Place RETURNING column List on single line
- |
-
-UPDATE
-
- |
-UPDATE Table
- |
-Line break before table
- |
-
-Indent table
- |
-
-SET Clause
- |
-Line break before SET
- |
-
-Indent column assignments list
- |
-
-Indent column assignments list
- |
-
-FROM CLAUSE
- |
-Line break before FROM
- |
-
-Line break after FROM
- |
-
-Indent FROM list
- |
-
-Stack FROM list
- |
-
-JOIN CLAUSE(FROM CLAUSE)
- |
-Line break before JOIN
- |
-
-Line break after JOIN
- |
-
-Line break before ON
- |
-
-Line break after ON
- |
-
-Indent table after JOIN
- |
-
-Indent ON condition
- |
-
-WHERE CLAUSE
- |
-Line break before WHERE
- |
-
-Line break after WHERE
- |
-
-Place WHERE condition on single line
- |
-
-Place WHERE condition on single line
- |
-
-CTE
- |
-Each CTE in a new line
- |
-
-RETURNING
- |
-Line break before RETURNING
- |
-
-Line break after RETURNING
- |
-
-DELETE
- |
-USING CLAUSE
- |
-Indent RETURNING column list
- |
-
-Line break before FROM
- |
-
-Line break after FROM
- |
-
-Indent USING list
- |
-
-Stack FROM list
- |
-
-JOIN CLAUSE
- |
-Line break before JOIN
- |
-
-Line break after JOIN
- |
-
-Line break before ON
- |
-
-Line break after ON
- |
-
-Indent table after JOIN
- |
-
-Indent ON condition List
- |
-
-WHERE CLAUSE
- |
-Line break before WHERE
- |
-
-Line break after WHERE
- |
-
-Place WHERE condition on single line
- |
-
-Stack WHERE condition list
- |
-
-CTE
- |
-Each CTE in a new line
- |
-
-RETURNING
- |
-Line break before RETURNING
- |
-
-Line break after RETURNING
- |
-
-Indent RETURNING column list
- |
-
-
-
-
-
Data Studio supports automatic highlighting of the following punctuation mark's pair when cursor is placed before or after the punctuation mark or the punctuation mark is selected.
-
- Brackets - ( )
- Square brackets - [ ]
- Braces - { }
- Single-quoted string literals - ' '
- Double-quoted string literals - " "
-
Follow the steps below to change case for SQL queries and PL/SQL statements:
-
Method 1
-
- Select the text, and choose Edit > Upper Case/Lower Case.
The text changes to the case selected.
-
-
Method 2:
-
- Select the text, and choose
or 
from the toolbar.The text changes to the case selected.
-
-
Method 3:
-
- Select the text, and press Ctrl+Shift+U to change to the upper case or Ctrl+Shift+L to change to the lower case.
The text changes to the case selected.
-
-
-
SQL Highlighting
Keywords are highlighted automatically when you enter them (according to the default color scheme) as shown below:
-
-
The following figure shows the default color scheme for the specified type of syntax:
-
-
You can also customize SQL highlighting schemes for specific types of syntax. For details, see Syntax Coloring.
-
-
Selecting a DB Object in the SQL Terminal
-Data Studio suggests a list of possible schema names, table names and column names, and views in the SQL Terminal.
-
Follow the steps below to select a DB object:
-
- Press Ctrl+Space and enter the required parent DB object name. The DB objects list is refined as you continue typing the DB object name. The DB objects list displays all DB objects of the database connected to the SQL Terminal.
- - To select the parent DB object, use the Up or Down arrow keys and press Enter on the keyboard, or double-click the parent DB object.
- Enter . (period) to list all child DB objects.
- - To select the child DB object, use the Up or Down arrow keys and press Enter on the keyboard, or double-click the child DB object.
On selection, the child DB object will be appended to the parent DB object (with a period '.').
-
-
-
Viewing the Query Execution Plan and Cost
-The execution plan shows how the table(s) referenced by the SQL statement will be scanned (plain sequential scan and index scan).
-
The SQL statement execution cost is the estimate at how long it will take to run the statement (measured in cost units that are arbitrary, but conventionally mean disk page fetches).
-
Follow the steps below to view the plan and cost for a required SQL query:
-
- Enter the query or use an existing query in the SQL Terminal and click
on the SQL Terminal toolbar to view explain plan.To view explain plan with analyze, click the drop-down from 
, select Include Analyze, and click 
.
-The Execution Plan opens in tree view format as a new tab at the bottom by default. The display mode has a tree shape and text style.
- The data shown in tree explain plan and visual explain may vary, since the execution parameters considered by both are not the same.
-
-Following are the parameters selected for explain plan with/without analyze and the columns displayed:
-
-Table 1 Explain plan optionsExplain Plan Type
- |
-Parameters Selected
- |
-Columns
- |
-
|---|
-
-Include Analyze unchecked (default setting)
- |
-Verbose, Costs
- |
-Node type, startup cost, total cost, rows, width, and additional Info
- |
-
-Include Analyze checked
- |
-Analyze, Verbose, Costs, Buffers, Timing
- |
-Node type, startup cost, total cost, rows, width, Actual startup time, Actual total time, Actual Rows, Actual loops, and Additional Info
- |
-
-
-
-
Additional Info column includes, predicate information (filter predicate, hash condition), distribution key and output information along with the node type information.
-The tree view of plan categorizes nodes into 16 types. In tree view, each node will be preceded with corresponding type of icon. Following is the list of node categories with icons:
-
-Table 2 Node categories with IconNode Category
- |
-Icon
- |
-
|---|
-
-Aggregate
- |
-
- |
-
-Group Aggregate
- |
-
- |
-
-Function
- |
-
- |
-
-Hash
- |
-
- |
-
-Hash Join
- |
-
- |
-
-Nested Loop
- |
-
- |
-
-Nested Loop Join
- |
-
- |
-
-Modify Table
- |
-
- |
-
-Partition Iterator
- |
-
- |
-
-Row Adapter
- |
-
- |
-
-Seq Scan on
- |
-
- |
-
-Set Operator
- |
-
- |
-
-Sort
- |
-
- |
-
-Stream
- |
-
- |
-
-Union
- |
-
- |
-
-Unknown
- |
-
- |
-
-
-
-
Hover over the highlighted cells to identify the heaviest, costliest, and slowest node. Cells will be highlighted only for tree view.
-If multiple queries are selected, explain plan with/without analyze will be displayed only for last query selected.
-Each time execution plan is executed, the plan opens in a new tab.
-If the connection is lost and the database is still connected in Object Browser, then Connection Error dialog box is displayed:
-- Yes - The connection is reestablished and retrieves explain plan and cost.
- No - Disconnects database in Object Browser.
-Toolbar menu in the Execution Plan window:
-
-Toolbar Name
- |
-Toolbar Icon
- |
-Description
- |
-
|---|
-
-Tree Format
- |
-
- |
-This icon is used view explain plan in tree format.
- |
-
-Text Format
- |
-
- |
-This icon is used view explain plan in text format.
- |
-
-Copy
- |
-
- |
-This icon is used to copy selected content from result window to clipboard. Shortcut key - Ctrl+C.
- |
-
-Save
- |
-
- |
-This icon is used to save the explain plan in text format.
- |
-
-
-
-
Refer to Execute SQL Queries for information refresh, SQL preview, and search bar.
-Refresh operation re-executes the explain/analyze query and refreshes the plan in the existing tab.
-The result is displayed in the Messages tab.
-
-
-
Viewing the Query Execution Plan and Cost Graphically
-Visual Explain plan displays a graphical representation of the SQL query using information from the extended JSON format. This helps to refine query to enhance query and server performance. It helps to analyze the query path taken by the database and identifies heaviest, costliest and slowest node.
-
The graphical execution plan shows how the table(s) referenced by the SQL statement will be scanned (plain sequential scan and index scan).
-
The SQL statement execution cost is the estimate at how long it will take to run the statement (measured in cost units that are arbitrary, but conventionally mean disk page fetches).
-
Costliest: Highest Self Cost plan node.
-
Heaviest: Maximum number of rows output by a plan node is considered heaviest node.
-
Slowest: Highest execution time by a plan node.
-
Follow the steps to view the graphical representation of plan and cost for a required SQL query:
-
- Enter the query or use an existing query in the SQL Terminal and click
on the SQL Terminal toolbar. Alternatively, press ALT+CTRL+X together.Visual Plan Analysis window is displayed.
-Refer to Viewing the Query Execution Plan and Cost for information on reconnect option in case connection is lost while retrieving the execution plan and cost.
-
-
-
-
Working with SQL Terminals
-In SQL Terminal, you can
-
-
Auto Commit
The Auto Commit option can be switched on or off based on the Preferences settings. Refer to Transaction for more details.
-
- If Auto Commit option is enabled, Commit and Rollback buttons are disabled. Transactions are committed automatically.
- If Auto Commit option is disabled, Commit and Rollback buttons are enabled. You can use the buttons manually to commit or revert the changes.
- For OLAP, the server will open a transaction for all SQL statements, such as select, explain select, and set parameter.
- For OLTP, the server will open a transaction for only DML statements, such as INSERT, UPDATE, and DELETE.
-
-
-
-
Reuse Connection
-
It enables the user to choose the same SQL terminal connection or new connection for the result set. The selection affects the record visibility due to the isolation levels defined in the database server.
-
- When Reuse Connection is ON, terminal connection will be used for data manipulation and refresh of the result window.
-
For some data base temp tables that are created or used by the terminal can be edited in the result window.
-
- When Reuse Connection is OFF, new connection will be used for data manipulation and refresh of the result window.
-
For some databases, the temporary tables can be edited in the Result tab.
-
: displayed when Reuse Connection is set to ON
-
: displayed when Reuse Connection is set to OFF
-
: displayed when Reuse Connection is disabled
-
Perform the following steps to set Reuse Connection to OFF:
-
- Click
on the SQL Terminal toolbar.Reuse Connection is disabled for the terminal. 
- - The Reuse Connection function is enabled by default. You can disable it as required. If you enable Auto Commit, the system automatically enables the Reuse Connection function.
- If you disable Auto Commit, the system automatically disables the Reuse Connection function. However, this function is still displayed as Enabled on the GUI, and the status cannot be modified.
-
-
-
Refer to Table 1 for more details about Auto Commit and Reuse Connection.
-
Execute SQL Queries
Perform the following steps to execute a function/procedure or SQL query.
-
-
Enter a function/procedure(s) or SQL query(s) in the SQL Terminal tab and click 
in the SQL Terminal tab, or press Ctrl+Enter, or choose Run > Compile/Execute Statement from the main menu.
-
Alternatively, you can right-click in the SQL Terminal tab and select Execute Statement.
-
You can check the status bar to view the status of a query being executed.
-
-
The Result tab displays the results after executing the function/procedure(s) or SQL queries along with the query statement executed.
-
If the connection is lost during execution and the database is still connected in Object Browser, then Connection Error dialog box is displayed:
-
- Reconnect - The connection is reestablished.
- Reconnect and Execute - With Auto commit on, execution will continue from failure statement. With Auto commit off, execution will continue from position of cursor.
- Cancel - Disconnects database in Object Browser.
-
Failure to reconnect after three attempts will disconnect the database in Object Browser. Connect to the database in Object Browser and retry execution.
-
- For long running queries, result set can be edited only after the complete results are fetched.
- Editing of query results are only allowed in following scenarios:
- Selected targets are from a single table
- Either select all columns or subset of columns [No aliases, aggregate functions, expressions on columns]
- All WHERE condition
- All ORDER BY clause
- On regular, partition, and temporary tables.
- - Committing an empty row assigns Null to all columns.
- Only result set of queries executed on tables available in Object Browser is editable.
- Editing of query results is allowed only for queries executed in SQL Terminal.
-
-
The column width definition can be set using Settings > Preferences option. Refer to Query Results to set this parameter.
-
Column Reorder
-
Column reordering can be performed by clicking and dragging the selected column header to the desired position.
-
Multi-Column Sort
This feature allows the user to sort table data of some pages by multiple columns. In addition, you can set the priority of columns for sorting.
-
-
The feature is available for the following pages:
-
- Result Set Tab
- Edit Table Data Window
- View Table Data Window
- Batch Drop Result Window
-
Follow the steps below to access Multi-column sort:
-
- Click
in the toolbar.Multi-Column Sort pop-up is displayed.
-
- - Click Add Column. Choose the column to be sorted from the drop-down list.
- - Select the required sort order.
- Click Apply.
-
Multi-sort pop up has following elements:
-
-
Table 1 Elements of multi-column pop-up:Attribute Name
- |
-UI Element Type
- |
-Description/Action
- |
-
|---|
-
-Priority
- |
-Read only text field
- |
-Shows column priority in multi sort.
- |
-
-Column Name
- |
-Combo field having all column names of the table as its value set
- |
-Column name of the column added for sorting.
- |
-
-Data Type
- |
-Read only text field
- |
-Shows data type of the column selected.
- |
-
-Sort Order
- |
-Combo field having values {sort_ascending, sort_descending}
- |
-Sort order of the column.
- |
-
-Add Column
- |
-Button
- |
-Adds new row to multi-sort table.
- |
-
-Delete Column
- |
-Button
- |
-Deletes selected column from multi-sort table.
- |
-
-Up
- |
-Button
- |
-Moves selected column up by 1 step, thus changing sort priority.
- |
-
-Down
- |
-Button
- |
-Moves selected column down by 1 step, this changing sort priority.
- |
-
-Apply
- |
-Button
- |
-Apply prepared sort configuration.
- |
-
-
-
-
-
Except following data types, all the other data types will be sorted by their string value (Alphabetical order):
-
TINYINT, SMALLINT, INTEGER, BIGINT, FLOAT, REAL, DOUBLE, NUMERIC, BIT, BOOLEAN, DATE, TIME, TIME_WITH_TIMEZONE, TIMESTAMP, TIMESTAMP_WITH_TIMEZONE.
-
-
Elements of Multi-Column Pop-up:
-
-
Table 2 Icons of multi-column Pop-upIcon
- |
-Description
- |
-Action
- |
-
|---|
-
-
- |
-Not Sorted
- |
-This icon in column header indicates that the column is not sorted. You can click this icon to sort the column in ascending order.
-Alternatively, use Alt+Click to select the column header.
- |
-
-
- |
-Ascending Sort
- |
-This icon in column header indicates that the column is sorted in ascending order. If you click on this icon, the column will be sorted in descending order.
-Alternatively, use Alt+Click to select the column header.
- |
-
-
- |
-Descending Sort
- |
-This icon in column header indicates that the column is sorted in descending order. You can click this icon to cancel the column sorting.
-Alternatively, use Alt+Click to select the column header.
- |
-
-
-
-
-
Icons for the sort priority are as follows:
-
: Icon with three dots indicates the highest priority.
-
: Icon with two dots indicates the second highest priority.
-
: Icon with one dot indicates the lowest priority.
-
-
Table 3 Toolbar MenusToolbar Name
- |
-Toolbar Icon
- |
-Description
- |
-
|---|
-
-Copy
- |
-
- |
-This button is used to copy selected content from result window to clipboard. Shortcut key - Ctrl+C.
- |
-
-Advanced Copy
- |
-
- |
-This button is used to copy content from result window to clipboard. Results can be copied to include column header. Refer to Query Results to set this preference. The shortcut key is Ctrl+Shift+C.
- |
-
-Export all data
- |
-
- |
-This button is used to export all data in Excel (xlsx/xls), CSV, text, or binary format. For details, see Exporting Table Data.
- NOTE: - The columns involved in the query are automatically populated in the Selected Columns area. The Available Columns area is empty.
- To export the query results, the query is re-executed using a new connection. The exported results may differ from the data in the results tab.
- Disabled for explain/analyze queries. To export explain/analyze queries use the Export current page data option.
-
- |
-
-Export current page data
- |
-
- |
-This button is used to export current page data in Excel (xlsx/xls) or CSV format.
- |
-
-Paste
- |
-
- |
-This button is used to paste copied information. For details, see Paste.
- |
-
-Add
- |
-
- |
-This button is used to add a row to the result set. For details, see Insert.
- |
-
-Delete
- |
-
- |
-This button is used to delete a row from the result set. For details, see Delete.
- |
-
-Save
- |
-
- |
-This button is used to save the changes made in the result set. For details, see Editing Table Data.
- |
-
-Rollback
- |
-
- |
-This button is used to roll back the changes made to the result set. For details, see Editing Table Data.
- |
-
-Refresh
- |
-
- |
-This button is used to refresh information in the result set. If multiple result sets are open for the same table, then changes made to one result set will reflect on the other post refresh. Similarly if the same table is edited, then the result set will be updated post refresh.
- |
-
-Clear Unique Key selection
- |
-
- |
-This button is used to clear the previous unique key selection. For details, see Editing Table Data.
- |
-
-Show/Hide Query bar
- |
-
- |
-This button is used to display/hide the query executed for that particular result set. This is a toggle button.
- |
-
-Show/Hide Search bar
- |
-
- |
-This button is used to display/hide the search text field. This is a toggle button.
- |
-
-Encoding
- |
-
- |
-Whether you can configure this field depends on the settings in . In this drop-down list, you can select the appropriate code to view the data accurately. By default, the text is encoded using UTF-8. Refer to Result Data Encoding to set the encoding preference.
- NOTE: Data editing except for data insertion is restricted once the default encoding is modified.
-
- |
-
-Multi Sort
- |
-
- |
-This button brings up multi-sort pop up.
- |
-
-Clear Sort
- |
-
- |
-This button is used to reset all the sorted column.
- |
-
-
-
-
-
Icons in Search field:
-
-
Icon Name
- |
-Icon
- |
-Description
- |
-
|---|
-
-Search
- |
-
- |
-This icon is used to search the result set based on the criteria defined. The text is case-insensitive.
- |
-
-Clear Search Text
- |
-
- |
-This icon is used to clear the search text entered in the search field.
- |
-
-
-
-
-
Right-click options in the Result window:
-
-
Option
- |
-Description
- |
-
|---|
-
-Close
- |
-Closes only the active result window.
- |
-
-Close Others
- |
-Closes all other result windows except for the active result window.
- |
-
-Close Tabs to the Right
- |
-Closes only the right active result window.
- |
-
-Close All
- |
-Closes all result windows including the active result window.
- |
-
-Detach
- |
-Detach from current active result window.
- |
-
-
-
-
-
Status information displayed in the Result window:
-
- Query Submit Time - Provides the query submitted time.
- Number of rows fetched with execution time is displayed. The default number of rows is displayed. If there are additional rows to be fetched, then it will be denoted with the word "more". You can scroll to the bottom of the table to fetch and display all rows.
When viewing table data, Data Studio automatically adjusts the column widths for a good table view. Users can resize the columns as needed. If the text length exceeds the column width and you adjust the column width, Data Studio may fail to respond.
-
-
-
- Each time a query is run in SQL Terminal tab, a new result window opens. To view the results in the new window, you must select the newly opened window.
- Set the focusOnFirstResult configuration parameter to false to automatically set focus to the newly opened Result window. For details, see Installing and Configuring Data Studio.
- Each row, column and selected cells can be copied from the result set.
- Export all data operation will be successful even after the connection is removed.
- If the text of a column contains spaces, word wrapping is applied to fit the column width. Word wrapping is not applied to columns without spaces.
- Select part of cell content and press Ctrl+C or click
to copy selected text from a cell. - The size of the column is determined by the maximum content length column.
- You can save preference to define:
-
- If any column of resultset tab has Lock Image icon in it, then values are not editable.
-
-
Backuping Unsaved Queries/Functions/Procedures
Data Studio creates back up of unsaved data in SQL Terminal and PL/SQL Viewer periodically based on the time interval defined in the Preferences tab. The data can be encrypted and saved based on Preference settings. Refer to Query/Function/Procedure Backup to turn on/off backup, define time interval to save the data, and encrypt the saved data.
-
Unsaved changes of each SQL Terminal/PL/SQL Viewer are taken as backup and stored in DataStudio\UserData\<user name>\Autosave folder. Backup files saved before unexpected shutdown of Data Studio will be available at next login.
-
In case there are unsaved data in SQL Terminal/PL/SQL Viewer, during graceful exit, Data Studio will wait for backup to complete before closing.
-
-
Error Locator
During execution of query/function/procedure in case of an error the error locator message is displayed.
-
-
Yes - Click Yes to continue with the execution.
-
No - Click No to stop the execution.
-
You can select Do not display other errors that occur during the execution to hide the error messages and proceed with the current SQL query.
-
Line number and position of error displays in Messages tab. The corresponding line number is marked with 
icon along with red underline at the position of the error in the Terminal/PL/SQL Viewer. Hovering over 
displays the error message. For details about why the line number does not match the error detail, see FAQs.
-
If the query/function/procedure is modified while execution is in progress, then error locator may not display the correct line and position number.
-
-
Search in PL/SQL Viewer or SQL Terminal
Follow the steps below to search in PL/SQL Viewer or SQL Terminal:
-
-
F3 key is used to search next word and Shift+F3 key is used to search previous word. These shortcut keys will be enabled only after Ctrl+F is used to search a text. These keys will be active with the current search word until a new word is searched. The value searched using Ctrl+F and F3/Shift+F3 will be applicable only for the current instance.
-
- Choose Edit > Find and Replace from the main menu.
Alternatively press Ctrl+F.
-Find and Replace dialog box is displayed.
- - Enter the text to be searched for in the Find what field, and click the Find Next button.
The desired text is highlighted.
-F3 and Shift+F3 key will now be enabled for forward and backward search.
- Select Wrap around option to continue the search after reaching the last line in the SQL queries or PL/SQL statements.
-
-
-
Go to Line in PL/SQL Viewer or SQL Terminal
Go to line option is used to skip to a specific line in the terminal.
-
-
Follow the steps below to go to a line in PL/SQL Viewer or SQL Terminal:
-
- Choose Edit > Go To Line from the main menu or press Ctrl+G.
The Go To Line dialog box is displayed.
- - Enter the desired number in the Enter the line number field, and then click the OK button.
The cursor moves to the beginning of the line entered in the
Go to Line dialog box.
Below are invalid inputs to this field.
-
- Non-numeric value
- Special characters
- Line number entered does not exist in the editor.
- More than 10 digits is entered.
-
-
-
Comment/Uncomment
Comment/uncomment option is used to comment/uncomment lines or block of lines.
-
Follow the steps below to comment/uncomment lines in PL/SQL Viewer or SQL Terminal:
-
- Select the lines to comment/uncomment.
- Choose Edit option. Choose Comment/Uncomment Lines from the main menu.
Alternatively, press Ctrl+/ or right-click a line and select Comment/Uncomment Lines.
-
-
Follow the steps below to comment/uncomment block of lines/content in PL/SQL Viewer or SQL Terminal:
-
- Select the lines/content to comment/uncomment.
- Choose Edit option. Choose Comment/Uncomment Block from the main menu.
Alternatively, press Ctrl+Shift+/ or right-click a line or the entire block and select Comment/Uncomment Block.
-
-
-
Indent/Un-indent Lines
The indent/un-indent option is used to shift lines as per the indent size defined in the Preferences tab.
-
Follow the steps to indent lines in PL/SQL Viewer or SQL Terminal:
-
- Select the lines to indent.
- Press Tab or click
.Shift the selected line as per the indent size defined in the Preferences tab. For details about modifying the indent size, see Formatter.
-
-
Follow the steps to un-indent lines in PL/SQL Viewer or SQL Terminal:
-
- Select the lines to un-indent.
- Press Shift+Tab or click
.Move the selected lines according to the indent size defined in Preferences. For details about modifying the indent size, see Formatter.
- Only selected lines that have available tab space will be un-indented. For example, if multiple lines are selected, and one of the selected lines starts at position 1, then pressing Shift+Tab will un-indent all the lines except for the one starting at position 1.
-
-
-
-
Insert Space
The Insert Space option is used to replace a tab with spaces based on the indent size defined in the Preferences tab.
-
Follow the steps below to replace a tab with spaces in PL/SQL Viewer or SQL Terminal:
-
- Select the lines to replace tab with spaces.
- Press Tab or Shift+Tab.
Replaces the tab with spaces as per the indent size defined in the Preferences tab. For details about modifying the indent size, see Formatter.
-
-
-
Execute Multiple Functions/Procedures or Queries
Follow the steps below to execute multiple functions/procedures:
-
-
Insert a forward slash (/) in a new line after the function/procedure in the SQL Terminal.
-
Add the new function/procedure in the next line.
-
-
Follow the steps below to execute multiple SQL queries:
-
- Enter multiple SQL queries in the SQL Terminal tab as follows:
- - Click
in the SQL Terminal tab, or press Ctrl+Enter, or choose Run > Compile/Execute Statement from the main menu. - If the queries are not selected for execution, then only the query in the line where cursor is placed will be executed.
- If the cursor is placed next to an empty line, then the next available query statement will be executed.
- If the cursor is placed at the last line which is blank, then no query will be executed.
- If a single query is written in multiples lines and the cursor is placed at any line of the query, then that query is executed. Queries are separated using semicolon (;).
-
-
-
Do as follow to execute an SQL query after a function/procedure:
-
Insert a forward slash (/) in a new line after the function/procedure and click 
in the SQL Terminal tab.
-
Do as follow to execute PL/SQL statements and SQL queries on different connections:
-
In the toolbar, select the required connection from the connection profiles drop-down list and click 
in the SQL Terminal tab.
-
Rename SQL Terminal
Follow the steps below to rename SQL Terminal:
-
- In the SQL Terminal tab right-click and select Rename Terminal.
A Rename Terminal dialog box is displayed prompting you to provide the new name for the Terminal.
- - Enter the new name and select OK to rename the Terminal.
- Terminal name follows Windows file naming convention.
- Rename Terminal allows a maximum of 150 characters.
- Restore option is not available to revert to the default name. You must manually rename the Terminal to default name.
- Tool tip of the renamed Terminal will display the old name.
-
-
-
-
SQL Assistant
The SQL Assistant tool provides suggestion or reference for the information entered in SQL Terminal and PL/SQL Viewer. Follow the steps to open SQL Assistant:
-
When Data Studio is launched SQL Assistant panel displays with related syntax topics. As you type a query in the SQL Terminal topics related to the query is displayed. It also provides precautions, examples, syntax, function, and parameter description. Select the text and use the right-click option to copy selected information or copy and paste to SQL Terminal.
-
- Choose Settings > Preferences > Environment > Session Setting. In the SQL Assistant area, enable or disable the SQL Assistant function permanently. By default, the SQL Assistant function is enabled permanently.
- After the SQL Assistant function is enabled, you can click the SQL Assistant icon (
) on the toolbar to open the SQL Assistant window. If the SQL Assistant icon is gray after the SQL Assistant is enabled, the SQL Assistant is invalid.
-
-
-
Using Templates
Data Studio provides an option to insert frequently used SQL statements in SQL Terminal or PL/SQL Viewer using the Templates option. Some of the commonly used SQL statements are saved for ease of use. You can create, modify existing templates or remove templates. Refer to Adding/Modifying Templates section for information on adding, removing, and creating new templates.
-
The following table lists the default templates:
-
-
Name
- |
-Description
- |
-
|---|
-
-df
- |
-delete from
- |
-
-is
- |
-insert into
- |
-
-o
- |
-order by
- |
-
-s*
- |
-select from
- |
-
-sc
- |
-select row count
- |
-
-sf
- |
-select from
- |
-
-sl
- |
-select
- |
-
-
-
-
-
Follow the steps to use the Templates option:
-
- Enter the name of the template in SQL Terminal/PL/SQL Viewer.
- Press Alt+Ctrl+Space.
A list of saved template information is displayed. The list displayed is based on the following criteria:
-
-Exact Match
- |
-Display List
- |
-
|---|
-
-On
- |
-Displays all entries that match the input text case.
-Example: Entering "SF" in SQL Terminal/PL/SQL Viewer displays all entries that start with "SF".
- |
-
-Off
- |
-Displays all entries that match the input irrespective of the text case.
-Example: Entering "SF" in SQL Terminal/PL/SQL Viewer displays all entries that start with "SF", "Sf", "sF", or "sf".
- |
-
-
-
-
Text Selection/Cursor Location
- |
-Display List
- |
-
|---|
-
-A text is selected and the shortcut key is used
- |
-Displays entries that match the text before the selection to the nearest space or new line character.
- |
-
-No text selected and the shortcut key is used
- |
-Displays entries that match the text before the cursor to the nearest space or new line character.
- |
-
-
-
-
- Using the shortcut key without entering text in SQL Terminal/PL/SQL Viewer displays all entries in the Templates.
- If the text entered in SQL Terminal/PL/SQL Viewer has only a single match, then it will be replaced directly in the SQL Terminal/PL/SQL Viewer without listing them out.
-
-
-
-
Exporting Query Results
-
- You can export the results of an SQL query into a CSV, Text or Binary file.
-
This section contains the following topics:
-
-
Exporting all data
The following functions are disabled while the export operation is in progress:
-
- Executing SQL queries in the SQL Terminal
-
- Executing PL/SQL statements
- Debugging PL/SQL statements
-
Follow the steps below to export all results:
-
- Select the Result tab.
- Click
.The Export ResultSet Data window is displayed.
-Refer to
Exporting Table Data to complete the export operation.
You can check the status bar to view the status of the result being exported.
-
-
The Data Exported Successfully dialog box is displayed.
- - Click OK. Data Studio displays the status of the operation in the Messages tab.
If the disk is full while exporting the results, then Data Studio displays an error in the Messages tab. In this case, clear the disk, re-establish the connection and export the result data.
-
-
-
The Messages tab shows the Execution Time, Total Result Records Fetched, and the path where the file is saved.
-
-
Exporting Data On the Current Page
It is recommended to export all results instead of exporting the current page. The Export Current Page to CSV function has been deleted.
-
Follow the steps below to export the current page:
-
- Select the Result tab.
- Click the
icon to export the current page.The Data Studio Security Disclaimer dialog box is displayed.
- - Click OK.
- Select the location to save the current page.
You can check the status bar to view the status of the page being exported.
-
- - Click Save. The Data Exported Successfully dialog box is displayed.
- Click OK. Data Studio displays the status of the operation in the Messages tab.
If the disk is full while exporting the results, then Data Studio displays an error in the Messages tab. In this case, clear the disk, re-establish the connection and export the result data.
-
-
-
-
Structure of a Release Package
-The release package structure of Data Studio is as follows:
-
-
-
Folders/Files
- |
-Description
- |
-
|---|
-
-configuration
- |
-Contains information about the application launcher and the required Eclipse plug-in path.
- |
-
-db_assistant
- |
-Contains SQL assistant related files.
- |
-
-docs
- |
-- Contains Data Studio User Manual.pdf which provides you with details on using Data Studio.
-- Contains copyright notices, licenses, and the written offer for the open source libraries used in Data Studio.
- |
-
-features
- |
-Contains Eclipse (rich client protocol-GUI) and Data Studio features.
- |
-
-p2
- |
-Contains files required for provisioning and managing Eclipse and Equinox-based applications.
- |
-
-plugins
- |
-Contains the required Eclipse and Data Studio plugins.
- |
-
-tools
- |
-Contains Data Studio dependent tools.
- |
-
-UserData/
-- Autosave
- Logs/
- Preferences/
- Profile/
-
- Security/
- |
-Contains separate folders for each OS user of Data Studio.
-Autosave - Contains the auto saved information of unsaved queries and functions/procedures.
-Logs - Contains Data Studio.log which stores log information of all the operations performed in Data Studio.
-Preferences - Contains the Preferences.prefs file which stores the custom preferences.
-Profile - Contains the connection.properties, SQL History and Profiles.txt files required to manage connection profiles in Data Studio.
-Security - Contains files required to manage security in Data Studio.
-
- |
-
-artifacts.xml
- |
-Contains the product build information.
- |
-
-changelog.txt
- |
-Contains the detailed change log information of release version.
- |
-
-Data Studio.exe/DataStudio.sh
- |
-Allows you to connect to the database and perform various operations (like managing database objects, editing or executing PL/SQL programs and so on).
- |
-
-Data Studio.ini
- |
-Contains run-time configuration information of Data Studio.
- |
-
-readme.txt
- |
-Contains the features or fixed issues of current release version.
- |
-
-
-
-
-
Managing SQL Terminal Connections
-Data Studio allows you to reuse an existing SQL Terminal connection or create a new SQL Terminal connection for execution plan and cost, visual explain plan, and operations in the resultset. By default, the SQL Terminal reuses the existing connection to perform these operations.
-
Use new connection when there are multiple queries queued for execution in existing connection as the queries are executed sequentially and there may be a delay. Always reuse existing connection while working on temp tables. Refer to the Editing Temporary Tables section to edit temp tables.
-
Complete the steps to enable or disable SQL Terminal connection reuse:
-
- Click
to enable or disable SQL Terminal connection reuse.Refer to the
FAQs section for the behavior of query execution with reuse and new connection.
Use the existing SQL Terminal connection to edit temporary tables.
-
-
-
Batch Operation
-
-
-
diff --git a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_132.html b/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_132.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 1ef49a2de..000000000
--- a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_132.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,60 +0,0 @@
-
-
-Overview
-You can view accessible database objects in the navigation tree in Object Browser. Schema are displayed under databases, and tables are displayed under schemas.
-
Object Browser displays only the objects that meet the following minimum permission requirements of the current user.
-
-
Object Type
- |
-Permissions displayed in Object Browser
- |
-
|---|
-
-Database
- |
-Connect
- |
-
-Schema
- |
-Usage
- |
-
-Table
- |
-Select
- |
-
-Column
- |
-Select
- |
-
-Sequences
- |
-Usage
- |
-
-Function/Procedure
- |
-Execute
- |
-
-
-
-
-
The child objects of the objects accessible to you do not need to be displayed in Object Browser. For example, if you have the permission to access a table but does not have the permission to access a column in the table, Object Browser only displays the columns you can access. If access to an object is revoked during an operation on the object, an error message will be displayed, indicating that you do not have permissions to perform the operation. After you refresh Object Browser, the object will not be displayed.
-
The following objects can be displayed in the navigation tree:
-
- Schemas
- Functions/Procedures
- Tables
- Sequences
- Views
- Columns, constraints, and indexes
-
All default created schemas, except for the public schema, are grouped under Catalogs. User schemas are displayed under their databases in Schemas.
-
The filter option in Object Browser opens a new tab, where you can specify the search scope. Press Enter to start the search. Object Browser also provides a search bar. You can search for an object by name. In an expanded navigation tree, only the objects that match the filter criteria are displayed.
-
In a collapsed navigation tree, the filtering rule takes effect when a node is expanded.
-
-
-
Dropping a Batch of Objects
-The batch drop operation allows you select multiple objects to drop. You can also perform batch drop operation on searched objects.
-
- Batch drop is allowed only within a database.
- Batch drop of system objects will result in error, since system objects cannot be dropped.
-
-
Follow the steps below to drop objects in a batch:
-
- Press Ctrl+left-click (select objects one by one) or Shift+left-click (select objects in a bunch) to select the objects to be dropped.
- Right-click and select Drop Objects.
Drop Objects tab displays with the list of objects to be dropped.
-
-Column Name
- |
-Description
- |
-Example
- |
-
|---|
-
-Type
- |
-Displays information on the object type.
- |
-table, views
- |
-
-Name
- |
-Displays the name of the object.
- |
-public.bs_operation_201804
- |
-
-Query
- |
-Displays the query that will be executed to drop the object.
- |
-DROP TABLE IF EXISTS public.a123
- |
-
-Status
- |
-Displays the status of the drop operation.
- - To start: The drop operation yet to be initiated. - In progress: The object is currently being dropped. - Completed: The drop operation has been completed. - Error: The object has not been dropped due to an error.
- |
-- To start
- In progress
- Completed
- Error
- |
-
-Error Message
- |
-Displays the failure reason of the drop operation.
- |
-Table "abc" does not exist. Skip it.
- |
-
-
-
-
- Select the required drop option:
-
Option
- |
-Description
- |
-
|---|
-
-Cascade
- |
-Cascade drop operation drops their dependent objects and attributes. The dependent objects that are dropped will be removed from the Object Browser only after refresh operation is performed.
- |
-
-Atomic
- |
-Atomic drop operation drops all objects in case of success or drops none in case of a failure.
- |
-
-No selection
- |
-Un-selection of Atomic or Cascade does not drop dependent objects.
- |
-
-
-
-
- Click Start.
Runs - Displays the number of objects that are dropped from the total list of objects.
-Errors - Displays the number of object that was not dropped due to errors.
- - Click Stop or close the Drop Objects dialog to stop the drop operation.
Refer to
Execute SQL Queries section for information on copy, advanced copy, show/hide search bar, sort, and column reorder options.
- Select part of cell content and press Ctrl+C or click
to copy selected text from a cell. - When you select multiple objects in object browser to drop, a batch drop window is opened and its menu icons are enabled in the menu bar. If you disconnect the database, the icons will remain disabled and will not be enabled even after reconnecting. You need to reselect the objects to drop and the selected objects will be available in the new terminal window.
-
-
-
Granting/Revoking Privileges
-The batch grant/revoke operation allows you select multiple objects to grant/revoke privileges. You can also perform batch grant/revoke operation on searched objects.
-
This feature is only available for OLAP, not for OLTP.
-
Batch grant/revoke is allowed only with the same object type within that schema.
-
-
Follow the steps to grant/revoke privileges in a batch:
-
- Press Ctrl+left-click (select objects one by one) or Shift+left-click (select objects in a bunch) to select the objects to grant/revoke privileges.
- Right-click and select Grant/Revoke.
Grant/Revoke dialog box is displayed.
- - Refer to Granting/Revoking a Privilege section to grant/revoke privilege.
-
Personalizing Data Studio
-
-
-
diff --git a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_137.html b/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_137.html
deleted file mode 100644
index bf79b6f94..000000000
--- a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_137.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,333 +0,0 @@
-
-
-General
-This section provides details on how to customize shortcut keys.
-
Setting the Shortcut Keys
You can customize the Data Studio shortcut keys as required.
-
-
Follow the steps below to set or modify the shortcut keys:
-
- Choose Settings > Preferences from the main menu.
The Preferences dialog box is displayed.
- - Choose General > Shortcut Mapper.
The Shortcut Mapper pane is displayed.
- - Select the required shortcut key and click Modify.
- Enter the required shortcut key in the Binding text box.
For example, to change the shortcut key for Step Into from F7 to F6, enter F6 in the Binding text box.
- - Click OK. The Restart Data Studio dialog box is displayed.
Multiple shortcut keys can be modified before restarting Data Studio.
-
- - Click Yes to restart Data Studio. If any export, import or execution operations are in progress, then the Restart Confirmation dialog box is displayed.
- Click OK to close running jobs and restart or click Cancel to abort restart operation.
-
Follow the steps below to remove the shortcut keys:
-
- Choose Settings > Preferences from the main menu.
The Preferences dialog box is displayed.
- - Choose General > Shortcut Mapper.
The Shortcut Mapper pane is displayed.
- - Select the required shortcut key and click Unbind Key.
- Click Ok. The Restart Data Studio window is displayed.
Multiple shortcut keys can be removed before restarting Data Studio.
-
- - Click Yes to restart Data Studio. If any export, import or execution operations are in progress, then the Process is running dialog box is displayed.
- Click OK to wait for operations to complete or click Force Restart to discard operations.
-
Follow the steps below to restore the default shortcut keys:
-
- Choose Settings > Preferences from the main menu.
The Preferences dialog box is displayed.
- - Choose General > Shortcut Mapper.
The Shortcut Mapper pane is displayed.
- - Click Restore Defaults. For more information on default shortcut keys, refer to Data Studio Right-Click Menus.
- Click Ok.
The Restart Data Studio window is displayed.
- - Click Yes to restart Data Studio. If any export, import or execution operations are in progress, the Process is running dialog box displays.
- Click OK to wait for operations to complete or click Force Restart to discard operations.
-
Shortcut Keys
Data Studio supports keyboard short cut keys similar to other windows based application. The following table lists some of the shortcut keys for effective usage of the functionalities provided by Data Studio. For details about how to customize shortcut keys, see
Setting the Shortcut Keys.
-
Table 1 Default shortcut keys of Data StudioFunction
- |
-Shortcut Key
- |
-
|---|
-
-Sorts the result sets of visual charts, edit tables, and queries in ascending, descending, or server receiving order
- |
-Alt+Click
- |
-
-Open the Help menu
- |
-Alt+H
- |
-
-Save the SQL script
- |
-Ctrl+S
- |
-
-Edit menu
- |
-Alt+E
- |
-
-Compile/Execute SQL terminal statements
- |
-Ctrl+Enter
- |
-
-Search and Replace
- |
-Ctrl+F
- |
-
-Search for the previous one
- |
-Shift+F3
- |
-
-Search for the next one
- |
-F3
- |
-
-Redoing
- |
-Ctrl+Y
- |
-
-On the Edit Table Data tab page, copy Execution Time and Status
- |
-Ctrl+Shift+K
- |
-
-Copy the database object from the automatic recommendation list
- |
-Alt+U
- |
-
-Open the Call Stack, the Breakpoints pane, and the Variables pane
- |
-Alt+V
- |
-
-Open the SQL script
- |
-Ctrl+O
- |
-
-Step Skip
- |
-F8
- |
-
-Step into
- |
-F7
- |
-
-Single step exit
- |
-Shift+F7
- |
-
-Comment out or cancel the comment line
- |
-Ctrl+/
- |
-
-Locate the first element in the Object Browser
- |
-Alt+Page Up or Alt+Home
- |
-
-Locate the last element in the Object Browser
- |
-Alt+Page Down or Alt+End
- |
-
-Locate to row
- |
-Ctrl+G
- |
-
-Disconnect the connection
- |
-Ctrl+Shift+D
- |
-
-Formatting (SQL and PL/SQL)
- |
-Ctrl+Shift+F
- |
-
-Change the value to uppercase
- |
-Ctrl+Shift+U
- |
-
-Change the value to lowercase
- |
-Ctrl+Shift+L
- |
-
-Updates the cells or columns in the Edit Table Data, Properties, and Results windows. Click the cell or column header to enable this option
- |
-F2
- |
-
-Close the PL/SQL Viewer tab page, Table Data View tab page, Execute Query tab page, or Properties tab page
- |
-Shift+F4
- |
-
-Continue the PL/SQL debugging
- |
-F9
- |
-
-Shearing
- |
-Ctrl+X
- |
-
-Copy Object Browser or the name of the object modified in the terminal. Copy the selected data from the Terminal, Result, Table Data, or Edit Table Data tab page.
- |
-Ctrl+C
- |
-
-Copy the data on the Result, Table Data, or Edit Table Data tab page. The data contains/does not contain the column title and row number
- |
-Ctrl+Shift+C
- |
-
-Copy the query result on the Edit Table Data tab page
- |
-Ctrl+Alt+C
- |
-
-Copy the content on the Variable tab page
- |
-Alt+K
- |
-
-Copy the content on the Call Stack tab page
- |
-Alt+J
- |
-
-Copy the content on the Breakpoint tab page
- |
-Alt+Y
- |
-
-Visualized interpretation plan
- |
-Alt+Ctrl+X
- |
-
-Online help (displaying the user manual)
- |
-F1
- |
-
-Template
- |
-Alt+Ctrl+Space
- |
-
-Switch to the first SQL Terminal tab page
- |
-Alt+S
- |
-
-Select All
- |
-Ctrl+A
- |
-
-Setting menu
- |
-Alt+G
- |
-
-Refresh (in the Object Browser area)
- |
-F5
- |
-
-Search Object
- |
-Ctrl+Shift+S
- |
-
-Debugging menu
- |
-Alt+D
- |
-
-Debugging template
- |
-F10
- |
-
-Debugging the Database Object
- |
-Ctrl+D
- |
-
-Highlight Object Browser
- |
-Alt+X
- |
-
-File menu
- |
-Alt+F
- |
-
-Creating a connection
- |
-Ctrl+N
- |
-
-Running menu
- |
-Alt+R
- |
-
-Switch between the SQL Terminal tab page
- |
-Ctrl+Page Up or Ctrl+Page Down
- |
-
-Expand/Collapse All Objects
- |
-Ctrl+M
- |
-
-Pastes
- |
-Ctrl+V
- |
-
-Collapsible object browsing navigation tree
- |
-Alt+Q
- |
-
-Execute
- |
-Ctrl+E
- |
-
-Execution plan and expense
- |
-Ctrl+Shift+X
- |
-
-Stop the query in the running state
- |
-Shift+Esc
- |
-
-Comment/Cancel the comment line or the entire segment
- |
-Ctrl+Shift+/
- |
-
-List of automatically recommended database objects
- |
-Ctrl+Space
- |
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Editor
-This section provides details on how to personalize syntax coloring, SQL history information, templates, and formatter.
-
Syntax Coloring
Follow the steps to customize the SQL highlight color:
-
-
- Choose Settings > Preferences from the main menu.
The Preferences dialog box is displayed.
- - Choose Editor > Syntax Coloring.
The Syntax Coloring pane is displayed.
- - Click the color button to customize the color for the type of syntax.
For example, click 
to customize the color for Strings. The color picker dialog box is displayed.
-Use the color picker to set the required color for a specific syntax category. You can choose basic colors or define custom colors in the color picker.
- Click Restore Defaults from Syntax Coloring pane to reset to default color scheme.
-
- - Click OK. The Restart Data Studio dialog box is displayed.
- Click Yes to restart Data Studio. If any export, import or execution operations are in progress, then Data Studio displays the Process is running dialog box.
- Click Force Restart to discard operations and restart Data Studio. Click OK to continue performing operations.
The Preferences.prefs file contains the custom color settings. If the file is corrupted, Data Studio will display the default values.
-
-The custom color(s) will be set after you restart Data Studio.
-
-
SQL History
You can customize Data Studio to set the number of SQL history count that can be made available and also the number of characters for the query for each of the query saved in SQL history.
-
Follow the steps to customize the number of executed queries and number of characters in the query to be saved in SQL History:
-
- Choose Settings > Preferences from the main menu.
The Preferences dialog box is displayed.
- - Choose Editor > SQL History.
The SQL History pane is displayed.
- - Set the number of queries to be saved in SQL History Count field.
Minimum value is 1 and maximum is 1000. The current value set for this preference will be displayed.
-
- - Set the number of characters to be allowed in each query that is saved in the SQL History in the SQL Query Characters field.
Minimum value is 1 and maximum is 1000. Enter "0" in this field to set no character limit. The current value set for this preference will be displayed.
-
- - Click Apply.
- Click OK.
- Click Restore Defaults from SQL History pane to reset to default value.
- The default value for SQL History Count is 50 and SQL Query Characters it is 1000.
- If the input value is less than the original one, data may be lost. In this case, a message is displayed to notify you of the data loss risk and ask you whether to proceed with the operation.
- If there are unsaved changes and you navigate away from this pane, then a message displays to state that there are unsaved changes.
- Pinned queries are not affected by the changes made to the SQL History Count field. Example: If the number of pinned queries is 50 and the SQL History Count is set to 25, then SQL History will show 50 pinned queries.
- The SQL Query Characters changes affects only queries added post the configuration change.
-
-
-
-
Adding Templates
You can customize Data Studio to create new, edit existing, and remove templates. Refer to the Using Templates section for detailed information on templates.
-
Restoring the settings to default removes all user defined templates from the list.
-
-
Follow the steps below to create templates:
-
- Choose Settings > Preferences from the main menu.
The Preferences dialog box is displayed.
- - Choose Editor > Templates.
The Templates pane is displayed.
- - Click New.
- Enter a name for the template in the Name field.
- Enter description in the Description field.
- Enter the SQL statement pattern in the Pattern field.
The text entered in Pattern field will be syntax highlighted.
-
- - Click OK.
-
-
Modifying Templates
Follow the steps below to edit templates:
-
-
- Choose Settings > Preferences from the main menu.
The Preferences dialog box is displayed.
- - Choose Editor > Templates.
The Templates pane is displayed.
- - Click Edit.
- Edit the name in the Name field, if required.
- Edit the description in the Description field, if required.
- Edit the SQL statement pattern in the Pattern field, if required.
The text entered in Pattern field will be syntax highlighted.
-
- - Click OK.
-
Removing Templates
Follow the steps below to remove templates:
-
-
- Choose Settings > Preferences from the main menu.
The Preferences dialog box is displayed.
- - Choose Editor > Templates.
The Templates pane is displayed.
- - Select the template to be removed, and click Remove.
The template is removed from the Templates list.
- Default templates that are removed can be added back using Restore Removed option. It will restore the template to the last updated change. Restore Removed option is not applicable to user defined templates.
-
-
-
Reverting to Default Templates
Follow the steps below to revert to default templates:
-
- Choose Settings > Preferences from the main menu.
The Preferences dialog box is displayed.
- - Choose Editor > Templates.
The Templates pane is displayed.
- - Select at least one default template that is modified to revert to default template settings.
- Click Revert to Default.
-
-
Formatter
You can customize Data Studio to set the tab width and convert tab to spaces while performing indent and unindent operation. Refer to Indent/Un-indent Lines section to perform indent/unindent operation and replace tab with spaces.
-
Follow the steps to customize the indent size and convert tab to spaces:
-
- Choose Settings > Preferences from the main menu.
The Preferences dialog box is displayed.
- - Choose Editor > Formatter.
The Formatter pane is displayed.
- - Select the Insert Space option to replace tab with spaces or Insert Tab to add/remove tabs while indenting/unindenting lines.
- Enter the indent size in Indent Size. Based on the number specified in this field, the indent/unindent/space length is defined.
-
-
Transaction
Follow the steps to edit Transaction settings:
-
- Choose Settings > Preferences from the main menu.
The Preferences dialog box is displayed.
- - Choose Editor > Transaction
The Transaction pane is displayed.
- - In the Auto Commit window, you can perform the following operations:
- Select Enable to switch on the auto commit feature. In this case commit and rollback button will be disabled. Transaction will be committed automatically.
-
-- Select Disable to switch off the auto commit feature. Commit and Rollback button can be used manually for commiting or reverting changes.
-
- Default behavior for Auto-Commit is ON.
-
-
-
-
Folding
Follow the steps for Folding:
-
- Choose Settings > Preferences from the main menu.
The Preferences dialog box is displayed.
- - Choose Editor > Folding.
The Folding pane is displayed.
- - Select Enable or Disable. By default, Enable is selected.
- Enable: This indicates enable SQL folding feature. Supported SQL statements can be folded or unfolded.
- Disable: This indicates disable SQL folding feature.
Modification in settings reflects in newly opened editor. The editor which is already opened will remain with previous settings until restart.
-
-
-
-
-
Font
Follow the steps to set Font:
-
- Choose Settings > Preferences from the main menu.
The Preferences dialog box is displayed.
- - Choose Editor > Font.
The Font pane is displayed.
- - Provide required font size within range from 1 to 50. By default, font size is 10.
-
-
Auto Suggest
Follow the steps for Auto Suggest:
-
- Choose Settings > Preferences from the main menu.
The Preferences dialog box is displayed.
- - Choose Editor > Auto Suggest.
The Auto Suggest pane is displayed.
- - In Auto Suggest pane, provide required number of character in Auto Suggest Min Character. Default value is 2. Range of number of Auto Suggest minimum characters are within 2 to 10.
For auto suggest, sorting can be as follows:
-- Keywords
- Data types
- Loaded Database Objects
- Each group should be in sorted order.
- Databases are classified by keyword and data type.
- If database is not connected, then default keywords must be displayed.
- When you press dot (.) then only respective database objects should be displayed. Keywords/Data types should not be displayed.
- Auto suggest should be triggered by shortcuts.
-
-
-
-
-
Environment
-Session Setting
Follow the steps to set Data Studio and file encoding:
-
-
- Choose Settings > Preferences from the main menu.
The Preferences dialog box is displayed.
- - Choose Environment > Session Setting.
The Session Setting pane is displayed.
- - Select the required Data Studio encoding from Data Studio Encoding drop-down.
- Select the file encoding from File Encoding field.
Data Studio supports only UTF-8 and GBK file encoding types.
-
- - Click OK. The Restart Data Studio dialog box is displayed.
- Click Yes to restart Data Studio. If any export, import or execution operations are in progress, then Data Studio displays the Process is running dialog box.
- Click Force Restart to discard operations and restart Data Studio. Click OK to continue performing operations.
Click Restore Defaults from Session Setting pane to reset to default values. The default value for Data Studio Encoding and File Encoding is UTF-8.
-
-
-
SQL Assistant
Follow the steps to enable/disable SQL Assistant tool:
-
- Choose Settings > Preferences from the main menu.
The Preferences dialog box is displayed.
- - Choose Environment > Session Setting.
The Session Setting pane is displayed.
- - Select Enable/Disable from SQL Assistant section.
- Click OK.
Click Restore Defaults from Session Setting pane to reset to default value. The default value for SQL Assistant is Enable.
-
-
-
-
Query/Function/Procedure Backup
Refer to the Backuping Unsaved Queries/Functions/Procedures section for information on backup feature provided by Data Studio.
-
Follow the steps to enable/disable backup of unsaved data in SQL Terminal/PL/SQL Viewer:
-
- Choose Settings > Preferences from the main menu.
The Preferences dialog box is displayed.
- - Choose Environment > Session Setting.
The Session Setting pane is displayed.
- - Select/unselect Auto Save from Auto Save section.
- Set the time interval to backup the data in Interval field.
- Click OK.
Click Restore Defaults from Session Setting pane to reset to default value. Backup of data will be enabled by default with 5 minutes as the default time interval.
-
-
-
Follow the steps to enable/disable data encryption of saved data:
-
- Choose Settings > Preferences from the main menu.
The Preferences dialog box is displayed.
- - Choose Environment > Session Setting.
The Session Setting pane is displayed.
- - Select/unselect Encryption from Auto Save section.
- Click OK.
Click Restore Defaults from Session Setting pane to reset to default value. Encryption will be enabled by default.
-
-
-
Follow the steps to set the size of Import Table Data Limit/Import File Data Limit:
-
- Choose Settings > Preferences from the main menu.
The Preferences dialog box is displayed.
- - Choose Environment > Session Setting.
The Session Setting pane is displayed.
-In File Limit section Import Table Data Limit and Import File Data Limit parameters are displayed.
-
-Import Table Data Limit value defines the maximum size of the table data to be imported.
-Import File Data Limit value defines the maximum size of the file to be imported.
- - Click OK.
Mentioned values in the above screenshot are the default values.
-
-
-
Follow the steps to perform rendering:
-
- Choose Settings > Preferences from the main menu.
The Preferences dialog box is displayed.
- - Choose Environment > Session Setting.
The Session Setting pane is displayed.
-In Lazy Rendering section, Number of objects in a batch parameter is displayed.
-
- - Provide required number of objects in a batch, want to be rendered. Range is from 100 to 1000. Default value is 200.
If you provide any value which is less than 100 or more than 1000, then Invalid Range, (100 -1000) error message is displayed.
- - Click OK.
-
-
System Requirements
-This section describes the minimum system requirements for using Data Studio.
-
Software Requirements
OS
-
The following table lists the OS requirements of Data Studio.
-
-
Table 1 Supported OSs and corresponding installation packagesServer
- |
-OS
- |
-Supported Version
- |
-
|---|
-
-General-purpose x86 servers
-
- |
-Windows
- |
-Windows 7 (64 bit)
- |
-
-Windows 10 (64 bit)
- |
-
-Windows 2012 (64 bit)
- |
-
-Windows 2016 (64 bit)
- |
-
-SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 12
-
- |
-SP0 (SUSE 12.0)
- |
-
-SP1 (SUSE 12.1)
- |
-
-SP2 (SUSE 12.2)
- |
-
-SP3 (SUSE 12.3)
- |
-
-SP4 (SUSE 12.4)
- |
-
-CentOS
-
-
- |
-7.4 (CentOS7.4)
- |
-
-7.5 (CentOS7.5)
- |
-
-7.6 (CentOS7.6)
- |
-
-TaiShan ARM server
- |
-NeoKylin
- |
-7.0
- |
-
-
-
-
-
Browser
-
The following table lists the browser requirement of Data Studio.
-
-
OS
- |
-Version
- |
-
|---|
-
-Windows
- |
-Internet Explorer 11 or later
- |
-
-
-
-
-
Other software requirements
-
The following table lists the software requirement of Data Studio.
-
-
Table 2 Data Studio software requirementSoftware
- |
-Specifications
- |
-
|---|
-
-Java
- |
-Open JDK 1.8 or later corresponding to the OS bit is recommended.
- |
-
-GTK
- |
-For Linux OSs, GTK 2.24 or later is required.
- |
-
-GNU libc
- |
-DDL can be displayed, imported, exported; and data operations can be performed only in libc 2.17 and later in GN.
- |
-
-
-
-
-
-
Table 3 Supported database versionsDatabase
- |
-Version
- |
-
|---|
-
-GaussDB(DWS)
- |
-1.2.x
-1.5.x
-8.0.x
-8.1.x
-8.2.x
- |
-
-
-
-
-
The recommended minimum screen resolution is 1080 x 768. If the resolution is lower than this value, the page display will be abnormal.
-
-
-
Result Management
-This section provides details on how to personalize the column width, number of records to be fetched in the query results, and result copy of column header or row number using the Query Results setting.
-
Query Results
Set column width of query results:
-
-
- Choose Settings > Preferences from the main menu.
The Preferences dialog box is displayed.
-
- Choose Result Management > Query Results.
The Query Results pane is displayed.
- - Select the required option.
Column Width customization options:
-
-Option
- |
-Outcome
- |
-
|---|
-
-Content Length
- |
-Selecting this option enables you to set the column width based on the content length of the column.
- |
-
-Custom Length
- |
-Selecting this option enables you to set the column width based on the value entered in this field.
- NOTE: This column accepts value between 100 and 500.
-
- |
-
-
-
-
- Click OK.
Click Restore Defaults from Query Results pane to reset to default values. The default value is Content Length.
-
-
-
Set the number of records to be fetched in the query results:
-
- Choose Settings > Preferences from the main menu.
The Preferences dialog box is displayed.
- - Choose Result Management > Query Results.
The Query Results pane is displayed.
- - Select the required option.
-
Option
- |
-Outcome
- |
-
|---|
-
-Fetch All records
- |
-Selecting this option enables you to fetch all the records in the query results.
- |
-
-Fetch custom number of records
- |
-Selecting this option enables you to set the number of records that needs to be fetched in the query results.
- NOTE: This column accepts value between 100 and 5000.
-
- |
-
-
-
-
- Click OK.
Click Restore Defaults from Query Results pane to reset to default values. The default value is Fetch custom number of records (1000).
-
-
-
Set preference to copy column name and row number from query results:
-
- Choose Settings > Preferences from the main menu.
The Preferences dialog box is displayed.
- - Choose Result Management > Query Results.
The Query Results pane is displayed.
- - Select the required option.
-
Option
- |
-Outcome
- |
-
|---|
-
-Include column header
- |
-Selecting this option enables you to copy column headers from the query results.
- |
-
-Include row number
- |
-Selecting this option enables you to copy the selected content along with the row number from the query results.
- |
-
-
-
-
- Click OK.
Click Restore Defaults from Query Results pane to reset to default values. The default value is Include column header.
-
-
-
Set preference to decide the behavior of opening up result set window/s:
-
- Choose Settings > Preferences from the main menu.
The Preferences dialog box is displayed.
- - Go to Result Management > Result Window.
- Select the required option.
-
Option
- |
-Outcome
- |
-
|---|
-
-Overwrite Resultset
- |
-Current result set opened window/s are closed and new result set window is opened.
- |
-
-Retain Current
- |
-New result set window/s are opened retaining already opened result set window/s.
- |
-
-
-
-
- Click OK.
-
Edit Table Data
Set save behavior of edit table data operation:
-
-
- Choose Settings > Preferences from the main menu. The Preferences dialog box is displayed.
- Choose Result Management > Edit Table Data. The Edit Table Data pane is displayed.
Select the required option:
-
Table 1 Edit table dataServer Type
- |
-Auto Commit
- |
-Reuse Connection
- |
-Table Data Save Option
- |
-Behavior
- |
-
|---|
-
-GaussDB(DWS)
-
-
-
-
-
- |
-ON
- |
-ON
- |
-Save Valid Data
- |
-All the valid data will be saved and committed. Incorrect data will be omitted.
- |
-
-ON
- |
-ON
- |
-Do Not Save
- |
-If an error occurs , no data will be saved.
- |
-
-ON
- |
-OFF
- |
-Save Valid Data
- |
-All the valid data will be saved and committed. Incorrect data will be omitted.
- |
-
-ON
-
- |
-OFF
- |
-Do Not Save
- |
-If an error occurs, no data will be saved.
- |
-
-OFF
- |
-ON
- |
-Save Valid Data
- |
-If an error occurs, no data will be saved. Perform Commit/Rollback to proceed further.
- |
-
-OFF
- |
-ON
- |
-Do Not Save
- |
-If an error occurs, no data will be saved. Perform Commit/Rollback to proceed further.
- |
-
-
-
-
-
- Click OK.
Click Restore Defaults from Edit Table Data pane to reset to default values. The default value is Save Valid Data.
-
-
-
Result Data Encoding
You can enable/disable to display the data encoding type in edit, view, and query results window.
-
Follow the steps to modify display of encoding option:
-
- Choose Settings > Preferences from the main menu.
The Preferences dialog box is displayed.
- - Choose Result Management > Query Results.
The Query Results pane is displayed.
- - Select Include result data encoding to include the Encoding drop-down in edit, view, and query results table.
- Click OK.
- Click Restore Defaults from Result Management pane to reset to default values. Include result data encoding will be unselected by default.
- Edit table, view table properties and query execution again to apply the changes.
-
-
-
-
Security
-This section provides details on how to personalize password and security disclaimer display.
-
Save Password Permanently
You can enable/disable to display the permanent option to save password in the connection window.
-
Follow the steps below to modify display of permanent save password option:
-
- Choose Settings > Preferences from the main menu.
The Preferences dialog box is displayed.
- - Choose Security > Password.
The Password pane is displayed.
- - Select the required option. Refer table below to understand the customization options available:
-
Option
- |
-Outcome
- |
-
|---|
-
-Yes
- |
-Selecting this option enables you to view the "Permanently" save password option from the Save Password drop-down list in the connection window.
- |
-
-No
- |
-Selecting this option removes the "Permanently" save password option from the Save Password drop-down list in the connection window and removes the saved passwords.
- |
-
-
-
-
- Click OK. The Restart Data Studio dialog box is displayed.
- Click Yes to restart Data Studio. If any export, import or execution operations are in progress, then Data Studio displays the Process is running dialog box.
Click Force Restart to discard operations and restart Data Studio.
- - Click OK to continue performing operations.
Click Restore Defaults from Password pane to reset to default values. The default value is No.
-
-
-
-
Password Expiry
This section provides details on how to continue/discontinue working with Data Studio once password expires using the Password setting.
-
Follow the steps below to modify the behavior of Data Studio once password expires:
-
- Choose Settings > Preferences from the main menu.
The Preferences dialog box is displayed.
- - Choose Security > Password.
The Password pane is displayed.
- - Select the required option. Refer table below to understand the customization options available:
-
Option
- |
-Outcome
- |
-
|---|
-
-Yes
- |
-Selecting this option allows you to login to Data Studio after the password has expired.
- NOTE: A message displays informing you that the password has expired and some operations may not work as expected in the following scenarios:
- - Establishing a new connection.
- Editing a connection.
- Connecting to a database while creating the database when no other database is connected in that connection profile.
- Connecting to a database when no other database is connected in that connection profile.
-
- |
-
-No
- |
-Selecting this option will not allow you to login to Data Studio once the password has expired. A message displays informing you that the password has expired.
- |
-
-
-
-
- Click OK. The Restart Data Studio dialog box is displayed.
- Click Yes to restart Data Studio. If any export, import or execution operations are in progress, then Data Studio displays the Process is running dialog box.
- Click Force Restart to discard operations and restart Data Studio. Click OK to continue performing operations.
The default value is Yes.
-
-
-
-
Security Disclaimer
You can enable/disable to display the security disclaimer for any unsecured connection/file operations.
-
Follow the steps below to modify the display of security disclaimer:
-
- Choose Settings > Preferences from the main menu.
The Preferences dialog box is displayed.
- - Choose Security > Security Disclaimer.
The Security Disclaimer pane is displayed.
- - Select the required option. Refer table below to understand the customization options available:
-
Option
- |
-Outcome
- |
-
|---|
-
-Enable
- |
-Selecting this option displays the security disclaimer each time you try to establish an unsecure connection or perform a file operation.
- |
-
-Disable
- |
-Selecting this option will not display the security disclaimer while establishing an unsecure connection or performing a file operation. You need to agree to the security implications that may arise due to unsecure connection.
- |
-
-
-
-
- Click OK. The Restart Data Studio dialog box is displayed.
- Click Yes to restart Data Studio. If any export, import or execution operations are in progress, then Data Studio displays the Process is running dialog box.
- Click Force Restart to discard operations and restart Data Studio. Click OK to continue performing operations.
Click Restore Defaults from Security Disclaimer pane to reset to default values. The default value is Enable.
-
-
-
-
Performance Specifications
-The loading and operation performance of Data Studio depends on the number of objects to be loaded in Object Browser, including tables, views, and columns.
-
Memory consumption also depends on the number of loaded objects.
-
To improve object loading performance and better utilize memory, you are advised to divide an object into multiple namespaces, and to avoid using namespaces that contain a large number of objects and cause data skew. By default, Data Studio loads the namespaces in the search_path set for the user logged in. Other namespaces and objects are loaded only when needed.
-
To improve performance, you are advised to load all objects. Do not load objects based on user permissions. Table 1 describes the minimum access permissions required to list objects in the Object Browser.
-
-
Table 1 Minimum permission requirementsObject Type
- |
-Type
- |
-Object Browser - Minimum Permission
- |
-
|---|
-
-Database
- |
-Create, Connect, Temporary/Temp, All
- |
-Connect
- |
-
-Schema
- |
-Create, Usage, All
- |
-Usage
- |
-
-Table
- |
-Select, Insert, Update, Delete, Truncate, References, All
- |
-Select
- |
-
-Column
- |
-Select, Insert, Update, References, All
- |
-Select
- |
-
-View
- |
-Select, Insert, Update, Delete, Truncate, References, All
- |
-Select
- |
-
-Sequences
- |
-Usage, Select, Update, All
- |
-Usage
- |
-
-Function
- |
-Execute, All
- |
-Execute
- |
-
-
-
-
-
To improve the performance of find and replace operations, you are advised to break a line that contains more than 10,000 characters into multiple short lines.
-
The following test items and results can help you learn the performance of Data Studio.
-
-
Recommended maximum memory (current version)
- |
-1.4 GB
- |
-
-Performance (The database contains a 150 KB table and a 150 KB view, each containing three columns. The maximum memory configuration is used.)
- |
-
->
- |
-Time taken to refresh namespaces in Object Browser
- |
-15s
- |
-
->
- |
-Time taken for initial loading and expanding of all tables/views in Object Browser
- |
-90s-120s
- |
-
->
- |
-Time taken for subsequent loading and expanding of all tables/views in Object Browser
- |
-<10s
- |
-
->
- |
-Total used memory
- |
-700 MB
- |
-
-
-
-
-
The performance data is for reference only. The actual performance may vary according to the application scenario.
-
-
Troubleshooting
-- Data Studio does not open.
Solution: Check whether JRE is missing. Verify the Java path in the environment. For details about the supported Java JDK versions, see System Requirements.
- - Data Studio does not open and displays a 'Java Runtime' error when I double-click the Data Studio.exe file.
Solution:
-- Without JRE:
-Check whether the Java Runtime Environment (JRE) or Java Development Kit (JDK) version 1.8.0_141 or above with appropriate bit number is installed on the system and Java Home path is set. If there are more than one version of Java installed, set the -vm parameter in the configuration file by referring to Installing and Configuring Data Studio. This is a prerequisite for running Data Studio.
- - Old JRE version:
-Check the version of Java Runtime Environment (JRE) or Java Development Kit (JDK) that is installed on the system. An older version installed on the system causes this error. Update the JRE to version 1.8.0_141 or above with appropriate bit number.
- - Java Incompatibility:
-
-Check the version of the JRE or JDK installed in the system. If the installed Java version is incompatible with the system, this error occurs. Update the JRE to version 1.8.0_141 or above with appropriate bit number.
-You are advised to run the batch file to check compatibility and launch Data Studio. For details, see Quick Start.
-
- - The following information is displayed when you run the StartDataStudio.bat file:
Solution:
-
-Message
- |
-Solution
- |
-
|---|
-
-You are attempting to run 32-bit Data Studio on:
-- 64-bit OS
- Windows 7 Professional
- 64-bit Java 1.8 JDK (incompatible)
Install 32-bit Java 1.8.
-
- |
-Install 32-bit Java 1.8.
- |
-
-The Java version supported by Data Studio must be 1.8 or later. Before using Data Studio, you need to install Java 1.8.
- |
-Install Java 1.8 that matches the number of bits of the operating system.
- |
-
-You are trying to run 64-bit Data Studio in the following environment:
-- 64-bit OS
- Windows 7 Professional
- 32-bit Java 1.8 JDK (incompatible): Install 64-bit Java 1.8.
-
- |
-Install 64-bit Java 1.8.
- |
-
-You are attempting to run 64-bit Data Studio on:
-
- |
-Install 32-bit Data Studio.
- |
-
-
-
-
- Why does Data Studio not connect to the server even with all valid inputs?
Solution: Check whether the server is running on the specified IP address and port. Use gsql to connect to a specified user and check the user availability.
- - What should I do for connection issues while using Data Studio?
Solution: A connection issue that may occur while using Data Studio is explained with an example:
-Establish a database connection.
-Run the query.
-When a connection exception occurs in any one of the databases (PostgreSQL), the connection is closed. When the database connection is closed, all the function and procedure tabs, if open, will be closed too.
-The system displays an error message. The Object Browser navigation tree displays the database status.
- Only the current database will be disconnected. Other databases remain connected or are reconnected.
-
-Re-connect to the database to proceed with execution.
- - When a Java application is used to obtain a process that contains Chinese comments, the Chinese characters are invisible. What should I do?
Solution: Set Preferences > Session Settings > Data Studio Encoding and File Encoding to GBK, so that Chinese characters can be displayed properly.
- - When I connect to the database and load a large number of SQL queries into SQL Terminal, the "Out Of Memory" or "Java Heap Error" error may occur in Data Studio. How do I solve this problem?
Solution: When the Data Studio has used up the allocated maximum Java memory, the message "Out of Memory" or "Java Heap Error" is displayed. By default, the Data Studio.ini configuration file (in the Data Studio installation path) contains the entry -Xmx1200m. 1200m indicates 1200 MB, which is the maximum Java memory that can be used by Data Studio. The memory usage of Data Studio depends on the size of data obtained by users during the use of Data Studio.
-To solve this problem, you can expand the Java memory size to an ideal value. For example, change -Xmx1200m to -Xmx2000m and restart Data Studio. If the updated memory is used up, the same problem may occur again.
- - For the 32-bit Data Studio with 8 GB RAM, the value of Xmx cannot exceed 2044. For the 64-bit Data Studio with 8 GB RAM, the value of Xmx cannot exceed 6000. The upper limit may vary with your current memory usage.
For example:
--Xms1024m
--Xmx1800m
- - The maximum file size supported by Data Studio in the SQL Terminal depends on the value of Xmx in the Data Studio.ini file and the available memory.
-
- - If a large amount of data is returned after the SQL query is executed, the Data Studio displays the "Insufficient Memory" error. What should I do?
Solution: Data Studio disconnects from the database specified in the file. Re-establish the connection and continue the operation.
- - Why do I receive an export failure message when exporting DDL or data?
Solution: The possible causes are as follows:
-- An invalid client SSL certificate and/or client SSL key file was selected. Select a correct file and try again. For details, see Adding a Connection.
- The identity of the object in the database may have changed. Check whether the identity of the object has changed and try again.
- You do not have the required permissions. Contact the database administrator to obtain required permissions.
- - Why does the system receive a message indicating that the DDL operation fails when the DDL operation is performed?
Solution: The possible causes are as follows:
-- An invalid client SSL certificate and/or client SSL key file was selected. Select a correct file and try again. For details, see Adding a Connection.
- The identity of the object in the database may have changed. Check whether the identity of the object has changed and try again.
- You do not have the required permissions. Contact the database administrator to obtain required permissions.
- - Why do I receive the following error message when performing a Show DDL or Export DDL operation?
"Failed to start this program because MSVCRT100.dll is missing. Try reinstalling the program to resolve the problem."
-Solution: gs_dump.exe needs to be executed to display or export DDL, which requires the VC runtime library msvcrt100.dll.
-To resolve this issue, copy the msvcrt100.dll file from the \Windows\System32 folder to the \Windows\SysWOW64 folder.
- - Why is the saved connection details not displayed when I try to establish a connection?
Solution: If the Profile folder in the User Data folder is unavailable or has been manually modified, this problem may occur. Ensure that the Profile folder exists and its name meets the requirements.
- - Why are historical sql query records lost when I close and restart data studio?
Solution: If the Profile folder in the User Data folder is lost or manually modified, this problem may occur. Ensure that the Profile folder exists and its name meets the requirements.
- - Why does the system display a message indicating that the modification fails to be saved when I attempt to modify the syntax highlighting setting?
Solution: This problem may occur if the Preferences file does not exist or its name has been changed. Restart Data Studio to resolve this issue.
- - What should I do if the Data Studio is in the idle state but the Data Studio.log file is in the No more handles state?
Solution: Restart Data Studio.
- - What happens if I send a 303 error after editing a table and I cannot continue to modify the table?
Solution: All edited data will be lost. Close the Edit Table Data dialog box and modify the data again.
- - Why is the message "The number of pasted cells does not match the number of selected cells" displayed when the operation is correct?
Solution: This problem occurs if you choose Preferences > Query Results and set the column headers to be included. The selected cells include the column header cells as well. Modify the settings to disable the Include column headers option and try again.
- - Why can't I edit temporary tables when the Reuse Connections option is disabled?
Answer: After the Reuse Connection option is disabled, the tool creates a new session, but the temporary table can be edited only in the existing connection. To edit temporary tables, enable the Reuse Connection option. For details, see Managing SQL Terminal Connections.
- - What happens when I add the same column multiple times in a multi-column sort dialog box?
Answer: If you add the same column multiple times in the multi-column sorting dialog box and click Apply, the following message is displayed. You need to click OK and select non-duplicate columns for sorting.
-
- - What happens when no column name is specified and Apply is clicked?
Answer: The following message is displayed. You need to set a valid column name and click Apply again. Then, the message is not displayed.
-
- - What happens when I click Cancel while multiple table queries are running in the SQL terminal window?
Answer: Canceling a table query that is being executed may cause the console to display the names of tables that are not created. In this case, you are advised to delete the table so that you can perform operations on tables with the same name.
- - What should I do if I cannot log in to Data Studio because the security key is cracked?
Solution: Perform the following steps to generate a new security key:
-- Choose Datastudio > Userdata and delete the security folder.
- Restart Data Studio
- Create a new security folder and generate a new key.
- Enter the password again to log in to Data Studio.
-
-
Security Management
-
-
-
diff --git a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_147.html b/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_147.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 277789cb1..000000000
--- a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_147.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,13 +0,0 @@
-
-
-Overview
- Ensure that the operating system and the required software's (refer to System Requirements for more details) are updated with the latest patches to prevent vulnerabilities and other security issues.
-
-
This section provides the security management information for Data Studio.
-
Login History
-The following information is critical to the security management for Data Studio:
-
- When you log into a database, Data Studio displays a pop-up with details of the last successful login and failure attempts between the last two successful logins for you on the logged database.
-
-
If the pop-up displays the message "Last login details not available", then it implies that the connected database does not support the last login display feature.
-
-
Password Expiry Notification
-The following information is critical to manage security for Data Studio:
-
- Your password will expire within 7 days from the date of notification. If the password expires, contact the database administrator to reset the password.
- The password must be changed every 90 days.
-
Securing the Application In-Memory Data
-The following information is critical to manage security for Data Studio:
-
While running Data Studio in a trusted environment, user must ensure to prevent malicious software scanning or accessing the memory which is used to store application data including sensitive information.
-
Alternatively, you can choose Do Not Save while connecting to the database, so that password does not get saved in the memory.
-
Data Encryption for Saved Data
-The following information is critical to manage security for Data Studio:
-
You can ensure encryption of auto saved data by enabling encryption option from Preferences page. Refer to Query/Function/Procedure Backup section for steps to encrypt the saved data.
-
SQL History
-The following information is critical to manage security for Data Studio:
-
- SQL History scripts are not encrypted.
- The SQL History list does not display sensitive queries that contain the following keywords:
- Alter Role
- Alter User
- Create Role
- Create User
- Identified by
- Password
- - Few query syntax examples are listed below:
- ALTER USER name [[ WITH ] option [ ... ]]
- CREATE USER name [ [ WITH ] option [ ... ] ]
- CREATE ROLE name [ [ WITH ] option [ ... ] ]
- ALTER ROLE name [ [ WITH ] option [ ... ] ]
-
-
SSL Certificates
- The information on using SSL certificates is for reference only. For details on the certificates and for security guidelines for managing the certificates and related files, refer to the database server documentation.
-
-
Data Studio can connect to the database using the Secure Sockets Layer [SSL] option. Adding a Connection lists the files required.
-
-
#
- |
-Certificate/Key
- |
-Description
- |
-
|---|
-
-1
- |
-Client SSL Certificate
- |
-Provided by System/Database Administrator
- |
-
-2
- |
-Client SSL Key
- |
-Provided by System/Database Administrator
- |
-
-3
- |
-Root Certificate
- |
-Provided by System/Database Administrator
- |
-
-
-
-
-
Server Configuration
After a GaussDB(DWS) cluster is deployed, the SSL authentication mode is enabled by default. The server certificate, private key, and root certificate have been configured by default.
-
-
SSL Certificate and Client Configuration
You need to configure the client.
-
- You can download an SSL certificate from GaussDB(DWS).
Log in to the GaussDB(DWS) management console. In the navigation pane, choose Connections. In the Driver area, click download an SSL certificate.
-
-
- - Decompress the downloaded dws_ssl_cert.zip package to obtain the certificate file. Click the SSL tab on the Data Studio client and set the following parameters:
-
Table 1 Configuring SSL parametersParameter
- |
-Description
- |
-
|---|
-
-Client SSL Certificate
- |
-Select the sslcert\client.crt file in the decompressed SSL certificate directory.
- |
-
-Client SSL Key
- |
-Only the PK8 format is supported. Select the sslcert\client.key.pk8 file in the directory where the SSL certificate is decompressed.
- |
-
-Root Certificate
- |
-When SSL Mode is set to verify-ca or verify-full, the root certificate must be configured. Select the sslcert\cacert.pem file in the decompressed SSL certificate directory.
- |
-
-SSL Password
- |
-SSL key password in PK8 format on the client.
- |
-
-SSL Mode
- |
-GaussDB(DWS) supports the following SSL modes:
-- require: The SSL factory does not require verification, nor does it check the certificate validity.
- verify-ca: The SSL factory checks whether the CA is correct.
- verify-full: The SSL factory checks whether the CA and database are correct.
-GaussDB(DWS) does not support the verify-full mode.
- |
-
-
-
-
- Selecting Client SSL Certificate and Client SSL Key ensures secured connection for export of DDL and data using Data Studio.
- Selecting invalid file for Client SSL Certificate and/or Client SSL Key will result in export failure. For details, see Troubleshooting.
- If you deselect Enable SSL check box and proceed, then Connection Security Alert dialog box is displayed. Refer to Security Disclaimer for information to display this security alert or not.
- Continue: Continues to use insecure connections.
- Cancel: Enables SSL.
- Do not show again: If you select this option, the Connection Security Alert dialog box is not displayed for the subsequent connections of logged Data Studio instances.
- - Data Studio prompts you to enter the client key upon the first access to the gs_dump feature.
-
-Figure 1 SSL parameters
-
-
-
-
FAQs
-- What do I need to check if my connection fails?
Answer: Check the following items:
-- Check whether Connection Properties are properly configured.
- Check whether the server version is compatible with the client version.
- Check whether the database\pg_hba.conf file is correctly configured.
- Check whether the Data Studio.ini file is correctly configured.
- - Why does the connection succeed when I try connecting to another server using an SSL certificate?
Answer: If the same SSL certificates are used by different servers, then the second connection will succeed because the certificates are cached.
-When you establish a connection with a different server using different SSL certificates, the connection will fail due to certificate mismatch.
- - When I right-click on a function/procedure and refresh it in Object Browser, why does the function/procedure disappear?
Answer: This problem may occur if you drop a function/procedure and recreate it. In this case, refresh the parent folder to view the function/procedure in Object Browser.
- - What do I do if a critical error occurs in a database session and operations cannot proceed?
Answer: Critical error may occur in some of the following cases. Check whether:
-- The connection is left idle for a long time and has timed out.
- The server is running.
- The server has sufficient memory and whether the Out Of Memory (OOM) error is reported to the server.
- - What is a constraint?
Answer: Constraints are used to deny the insertion of unwanted data in columns. You can create restrictions on one or more columns in any table. It maintains the data integrity of the table.
-The following constraints are supported:
-- Primary Key constraint
- Unique Key constraint
- Check constraint
- - What is an index?
Answer: An index is a copy of the selected column of a table that can be searched very efficiently. It also includes a low level disk block address or a direct link to the complete row of data it was copied from.
- - What is the default encoding for Data Studio's files?
Answer: Exported, imported, and system files are encoded with the system's default encoding as configured in Settings > Preferences. The default encoding is UTF-8.
- - When I try to open Data Studio, the system displays a message indicating that Data Studio does not support opening multiple instances. Why do I get this error message?
Answer: A user cannot open multiple instances in Data Studio.
- - What do I do if a DDL statement running indefinitely and cannot be canceled?
Answer: This problem may occur if other DML/DDL operations are being performed on the same object. In this case, stop all the DML/DDL operations on the object and try again. If the problem persists, there may be another user performing DML/DDL operations on the object. Try again later. You can customize table data and check the operations in a transaction by following the instructions provided in Data Studio GUI.
- - Why is the exported query result different from the data available on the Results tab?
Answer: When a result set data is exported, a new connection is used to execute the query again. The exported results may be different from the data on the Result tab.
- - Why does last login information show "Last login details not available"?
Answer: This message is displayed when you connect to the database server of an earlier version or log in to the database for the first time after it is created.
- - Why is the error marked incorrectly in SQL Terminal?
Answer: This problem occurs when the server returns an incorrect line number. You can view the error message on the Message tab and locate the correct row to rectify the fault.
- - Will deleted columns be displayed after "Show DDL" or "Export DDL" operations?
Answer: Yes.
- - Why can't Data Studio be started after the -Xmx parameter is modified?
Answer: The value of -Xmx may be invalid. For details, see Installing and Configuring Data Studio.
- - How do I quickly switch to the desired tab if there are multiple tabs open?
Answer: If the number of opened tabs reaches a certain limit (depending on your screen resolution), the 
icon will be displayed at the end of the tab list. Click this icon and select the required tab from the drop-down list. If this icon is not available, use the tooltip to identify the tabs. You also search for a SQL Terminal tab by its name. For example:
-- *s, this displays all Terminal names that start with s.
- test, this displays all Terminal names that start with test.
- *2, this displays all Terminal names that contain 2 in them.
- - Why does the language not change after I change the language setting and restart Data Studio?
Answer: Sometimes the language may not reflect the selected change post restart. Manually restart DS to open the tool in selected language.
- - Why does the last login details information not display?
Answer: At times the server returns an error while trying to fetch last login details. In such scenarios the last login pop-up message does not display.
- - When viewing/exporting DDL, why does the Chinese text not show properly?
Answer: This happens if the SQL, DDL, object names or data contains Chinese text and the Data Studio file encoding is not set to GBK. To solve this, go to Settings > Preferences > Environment > File Encoding and set the encoding to GBK. The supported combinations of Database and Data Studio encoding for export operation are shown in Table1 Supported combinations of file encoding.
-To open/view the exported files in Windows Explorer: Files exported with UTF-8 encoding can be opened/viewed by double-clicking it or by right-clicking on the file and selecting Open. Files exported with GBK encoding must be opened in Excel using the import external data feature (Data > Get External Data > From Text).
-
-Table 1 Supported combinations of file encodingDatabase Encoding
- |
-Data Studio File Encoding
- |
-Support for Chinese Text in Table Names
- |
-Support for English Text in Table Names
- |
-
|---|
-
-GBK
- |
-GBK
- |
-Yes
- |
-Yes
- |
-
-GBK
- |
-UTF-8
- |
-No - Incorrect details
- |
-No - Incorrect details
- |
-
-UTF-8
- |
-GBK
- |
-No - Export Fails
- |
-No - Incorrect details
- |
-
-UTF-8
- |
-UTF-8
- |
-Yes
- |
-Yes
- |
-
-UTF-8
- |
-LATIN1
- |
-No - Export Fails
- |
-Yes
- |
-
-SQL_ASCII
- |
-GBK
- |
-Yes
- |
-Yes
- |
-
-SQL_ASCII
- |
-UTF-8
- |
-No - Incorrect details
- |
-No - Incorrect details
- |
-
-
-
-
- Why do I get the error message "Conversion between GBK and LATIN1 is not supported"?
Answer: This message occurs if the Data Studio and Database encoding selected are incompatible. To solve this, select the compatible encoding. Compatible encoding is shown in Table 2.
-
-Table 2 Compatible encoding formatsData Studio File Encoding
- |
-Database Encoding
- |
-Compatible or Not
- |
-
|---|
-
-UTF-8
- |
-GBK
- |
-Yes
- |
-
-LATIN1
- |
-Yes
- |
-
-SQL_ASCII
- |
-Yes
- |
-
-GBK
- |
-UTF-8
- |
-Yes
- |
-
-LATIN1
- |
-No
- |
-
-SQL_ASCII
- |
-Yes
- |
-
-SQL_ASCII
- |
-UTF-8
- |
-Yes
- |
-
-LATIN1
- |
-Yes
- |
-
-GBK
- |
-Yes
- |
-
-
-
-
- Why is the PL/SQL procedure I compiled and executed is saved as PL/SQL function?
Answer: The database does not differentiate between PL/SQL function and procedure. All procedures in databases are functions. Hence PL/SQL procedure is saved as PL/SQL function.
- - Why is that I am not able to edit the distribution key?
Answer: The database allows you to edit the distribution key only for the first insert operation.
- - While editing table data if I do not enter a value for default value column, will the value be added by the database server?
Answer: Yes, the database server will add the value but the value will not be visible after save in the Edit Table Data tab. Use the refresh option from the Edit Table Data tab or re-open the table again to view the added default value(s).
- - While modifying/deleting table data why do I get a pop-up stating that more than one matching row found?
Answer: This happens because there are additional rows detected for modification/deletion based on Custom Unique Key or All Columns selection. If Custom Unique Key is selected, then it will delete/modify the rows that have exact match of the data in the column selected for deletion/modification. If All Columns is selected, then it will delete/modify the rows that match data in all columns. Hence the duplicate records matching the Custom Unique Key or All Columns will be deleted/modified if Yes is selected. If No is selected, the row that is not saved will be marked for correction.
- - When I right-click on a text box I see additional context menu options. Why does this happen?
Answer: The additional context menu options like Right to left Reading order, Show Unicode control characters and so on are provided by Windows 7 in case the keyboard you are using supports right to left and left to right input.
- - What are the objects that are not supported for batch export DDL & DDL and Data operations?
Answer: Following objects are not supported for DDL & DDL and Data operations.
-Export DDL:
-Connection, database, foreign table, sequence, column, index, constraint, partition, function/procedure group, regular tables group, views group, schemas group, and system catalog group.
-Export DDL and Data
-Connection, database, namespace, foreign table, sequence, column, index, constraint, partition, function/procedure, view, regular tables group, schemas group, and system catalog group.
- - Will the queries in SQL Terminal be committed if the resultset is modified and saved with Reuse Connection on and Auto Commit off?
Answer: No. Queries will only be committed when COMMIT command is executed in the Terminal.
-
-Auto Commit
- |
-Reuse Connection
- |
-Resultset Save
- |
-
|---|
-
-On
- |
-On
- |
-Commit
- |
-
-On
- |
-Off
- |
-Commit
- |
-
-Off
- |
-On
- |
-Does not commit
- |
-
-Off
- |
-Off
- |
-Not supported
- |
-
-
-
-
- When I query a temp table from a new SQL Terminal the resultset displays incorrect table details. Why does this happen?
Answer: When you query a temp table from a new SQL Terminal or with the Reuse Connection off, the resultset displays information of a regular/partition/foreign table, if a table with the same name as the temp table exists.
- If the Reuse Connection is On, the resultset displays information of the temp table even if another table with the same name exists.
-
- - Which are the operations that are performed on a locked object does not run in the background but needs to be manually closed?
Answer: Following are the operations that do not run in background while the object is locked in another operation:
-
-Operations
- |
-
|---|
-
-Renaming a table
- |
-Creating a constraint
- |
-
-Setting schema on table
- |
-Creating an index
- |
-
-Setting description in table
- |
-Adding column
- |
-
-Renaming a partition
- |
--
- |
-
-
-
-
- Do we have a limit on the column and row size while exporting table data to excel?
Answer: Yes, xlsx format supports maximum of 1 million rows and 16384 columns and xls format supports maximum of 64,000 rows and 256 columns.
-
-
Installing and Configuring Data Studio
-This section describes the installation and configuration steps to use Data Studio. It also explains the steps to configure servers for debugging PL/SQL Functions.
-
Installation Preparations
On the Connections page of the GaussDB(DWS) console, download the Data Studio GUI client.
-
-
-
Installing Data Studio
Data Studio can be run after decompression of the package.
-
Follow the steps below to install Data Studio:
-
-
- Unzip the required package (32-bit or 64-bit) to the program files (x86) or program files folder respectively. If the user prefers to install in other folder, then the admin should control the folder access permissions to users.
You will see the following files and folders:
-
- - Locate and double-click the Data Studio.exe to launch Data Studio.
The UserData folder is created after the first user launches Data Studio. Refer to Quick Start in case of any error while launching Data Studio.
-
-
-
See Adding a Connection to create a database connection.
-
Configuring Data Studio
Steps to configure Data Studio using Data Studio.ini file:
-
-
Restart Data Studio to view parameter changes. Invalid parameters added in the configuration file are ignored by Data Studio. All the following mentioned parameters are not mandatory.
-
-
List of configuration parameters used in Data Studio:
-
-
Table 1 Configuration parametersParameter
- |
-Description
- |
-Value Range
- |
-Default Value
- |
-
|---|
-
--startup
- |
-Defines the JAR files required to load Data Studio. This information varies based on the version used.
- |
-N/A
- |
-plugins/org.eclipse.equinox.launcher_1.3.100.v20150511-1540.jar
- |
-
---launcher.library
- |
-Specifies the library required for loading Data Studio. The library varies depending on the Data Studio version.
- |
-N/A
- |
-plugins/org.eclipse.equinox.launcher.win32.win32.x86_1.1.300.v20150602-1417 or plugins/org.eclipse.equinox.launcher.win32.win32.x86_64_1.1.300.v20150602-1417 depending on the installation package used
- |
-
--clearPersistedState
- |
-Removes any cached content on the GUI and reloads Data Studio.
- |
-N/A
- |
-N/A
- NOTE: You are advised to add this parameter.
-
- |
-
--consoleLineCount
- |
-Defines the maximum number of lines to be displayed in the Messages window.
- |
-1-5000
- |
-1000
- |
-
--logfolder
- |
-Used to create the log folder. The user can specify the path to save logs. If the default value "." is used, then the folder is created in Data Studio\UserData\<user name>\logs. For details, see Setting the Location for Creating Log Files.
- |
-N/A
- |
--
- |
-
--loginTimeout
- |
-Defines the connection wait time in seconds. Within the period specified by this parameter, Data Studio continuously attempts to connect to the database. If the connection times out, the system displays a message indicating that the connection times out or the connection fails.
- |
-N/A
- |
-180
- |
-
--data
- |
-Defines the instance data location for the session.
- |
-N/A
- |
-@none
- |
-
-@user.home/MyAppWorkspace
- |
-Eclipse workspace is created in this location while Data Studio is being launched.
-@user.home refers to C:/Users/<username>
-Eclipse log files are available in @user.home/MyAppWorkspace/.metadata
- |
-N/A
- |
-N/A
- |
-
--detailLogging
- |
-Defines the criteria with reference to logging error messages.
-Set to True to log all error messages.
-Set to False to log only error messages explicitly specified by Data Studio.
-Refer to Controlling Exception and Error Logs for more information.
-This parameter is not added by default and it can be set manually if logging is required.
- |
-True/False
- |
-False
- |
-
--logginglevel
- |
-Creates the log files based on the value specified. If the value provided is arbitrary or empty, log files will be created using WARN value. For details, see Different Types of Log Levels.
-This parameter is not added by default and it can be set manually if logging is required.
- |
-FATAL, ERROR, WARN, INFO, DEBUG TRACE, ALL, and OFF
- |
-WARN
- |
-
--focusOnFirstResult
- |
-Defines auto focus behavior for Result window.
-Set to false to automatically set focus to the last opened Result window.
-Set to true to disable the automatic set focus.
- |
-True/False
- |
-False
- |
-
- NOTE: - All the above parameters must be added before -vmargs.
- -startup and --launcher.library must be added as first and second parameter respectively.
-
- |
-
--vmargs
- |
-Specifies the start of virtual machine arguments.
- NOTE: -vmargs must be the last parameter in the configuration file.
-
- |
-N/A
- |
-N/A
- |
-
--vm
-<file name (javaw.exe) with relative path to Java executable>
- |
-Defines the relative path to Java executable
- |
-N/A
- |
-N/A
- |
-
--Dosgi.requiredJavaVersion
- |
-Defines the minimum java version required to run Data Studio. This value must not be modified.
- |
-N/A
- |
-1.5
- NOTE: Note: Recommended Java version is 1.8.0_141
-
- |
-
--Xms
- |
-Defines the initial heap space that Data Studio consumes. This value must be in multiples of 1024 and greater than 40 MB and less than or equal to -Xmx size. Append the letter k or K to indicate kilobytes, m or M to indicate megabytes, g or G to indicate gigabytes. For example:
--Xms40m
--Xms120m
-Refer to Java documentation for more information.
- |
-N/A
- |
--Xms40m
- |
-
--Xmx
- |
-Defines the maximum heap space that Data Studio consumes. This value can be modified based on the available RAM space. Append the letter k or K to indicate kilobytes, m or M to indicate megabytes, g or G to indicate gigabytes. For example:
--Xmx1200m
--Xmx1000m
-Refer to Java documentation for more information.
- |
-N/A
- |
--Xmx1200m
- |
-
--OLTPVersionOldST
- |
-Used to configure the earlier OLTP versions. You can log in to gsql and run SELECT VERSION() to update the OLTPVersionOldST parameter in the .ini file using the obtained version number.
- |
--
- |
--
- |
-
--OLTPVersionNewST
- |
-Used to configure the latest OLTP version. You can log in to gsql and run SELECT VERSION() to update the OLTPVersionNewST parameter in the .ini file using the obtained version number.
- |
--
- |
--
- |
-
--testability
- |
-This parameter is used to enable testability features. For the current version after this function is enabled:
-- The user can copy content of last triggered auto-suggest operation using the Ctrl+Space shortcut key.
- When Include Analyze is selected, Execution Plan and Cost is displayed in tree and graphical view.
-This parameter is available by default and needs to be added manually for testing.
- |
-True/False
- |
-False
- |
-
--Duser.language
- |
-Defines the language settings for Data Studio. This parameter is added after the language setting is changed.
- |
-zh/en
- |
-N/A
- |
-
--Duser.country
- |
-Specifies the country/region settings of Data Studio. This parameter is added after the language setting is changed.
- |
-CN/IN
- |
-N/A
- |
-
--Dorg.osgi.framework.bundle.parent=ext
- |
-This parameter specifies which class loader is used for boot delegation.
- |
-boot/app/ext
- |
-boot
- |
-
--Dosgi.framework.extensions=org.eclipse.fx.osgi
- |
-This parameter is used to specify a list of framework extension names. Framework extension bundles are fragments of the system bundle (org.eclipse.osgi). As a fragment, user can provide extra classes with the framework to use.
- |
-N/A
- |
-N/A
- |
-
-
-
-
-
-
- If you receive the message SocketException: Bad Address: Connect:
Check whether the client is connected to the server using the IPv6 or IPv4 protocol. You can also establish the connection by configuring the following parameters in the .ini file:
--Djava.net.preferIPv4Stack=true
--Djava.net.preferIPv6Stack=false
-Table 2 lists the supported communication scenarios.
-The first row and first column indicate the types of nodes that attempt to communicate with each other. x indicates that the nodes can communicate with each other.
-
-
-
-
Table 2 Communication scenariosNode
- |
-V4 Only
- |
-V4/V6
- |
-V6 Only
- |
-
|---|
-
-V4 only
- |
-x
- |
-x
- |
-No communication possible
- |
-
-V4/V6
- |
-x
- |
-x
- |
-x
- |
-
-V6 only
- |
-No communication possible
- |
-x
- |
-x
- |
-
-
-
-
-
Setting the Location for Creating Log Files
- Open the Data Studio.ini file.
- Provide the path for the -logfolder parameter.
For example:
--logfolder=c:\test1
-In this case, the Data Studio.log file is created in the c:\test1\<user name>\logs path.
- If any of the users does not have access to the path mentioned in the Data Studio.ini file, then Data Studio closes with the below pop-up message.
-
-
-
-
-
The Data Studio.log file will be created in the Data Studio\UserData\<user name>\logs path if:
-
-
Refer to the server manual for detailed information.
-
-
You can use any text editor to open and view the Data Studio.log file.
-
-
Controlling Exception and Error Logs
The stack running details of exception, error or throw-able are controlled based on the program argument parameter. This parameter is configured in the Data Studio.ini file.
-
-detailLogging=false
-
If the flag value is true, then the stack trace details of exception, error or throw-able will be saved in the log file.
-
If the flag value is false, then no stack trace details will be saved in the log file.
-
-
Description of the Log Message
The log message is described as follows:
-
-
When the size of the Data Studio.log file reaches 10,000 KB (the maximum value), the system automatically creates a file and saves it as Data Studio.log.1. Logs in Data Studio.log are stored in Data Studio.log.1. When the size of the Data Studio.log file reaches the maximum again, the system will automatically create a file and save it as Data Studio.log.2. Latest logs are always written in the Data Studio.log file. This process continues till Data Studio.log.5 reaches the maximum file size and the cycle restarts. The Data Studio deletes the old log file that is Data Studio.log.1. For example, the Data Studio.log.5 renames to Data Studio.log.4, the Data Studio.log.4 renames to Data Studio.log.3 and so on.
-
To enable performance logging in the server log file, the configuration parameter log_min_messages must be enabled and value must be set as debug1 in the configuration file data/postgresql.conf, that is, log_min_messages = debug1.
-
-
-
Different Types of Log Levels
The different types of log levels that are displayed in the Data Studio.log file are as follows:
-
- TRACE: The TRACE level provides more detailed information than the DEBUG level.
- DEBUG: The DEBUG level indicates the granular information events that are most useful for debugging an application.
- INFO: The INFO level indicates the information messages that highlight the progress of the application.
- WARN: The WARN level indicates potentially harmful situations.
- ERROR: The ERROR level indicates error events.
- FATAL: The FATAL level indicates event(s) which cause the application to abort.
- ALL: The ALL level turns on all the log levels.
- OFF: The OFF level turns off all the log levels. This is opposite to ALL level.
- If the user enters an invalid value to log level, then log level will be set to WARN.
- If the user does not provide any log level, then log level will be set to WARN.
-
-
-
-
The logger outputs all messages greater than or equal to its log level.
-
The order of the standard log4j levels is as follows:
-
-
Table 3 Log levels-
- |
-FATAL
- |
-ERROR
- |
-WARN
- |
-INFO
- |
-DEBUG
- |
-TRACE
- |
-
|---|
-
-OFF
- |
-x
- |
-x
- |
-x
- |
-x
- |
-x
- |
-x
- |
-
-FATAL
- |
-√
- |
-x
- |
-x
- |
-x
- |
-x
- |
-x
- |
-
-ERROR
- |
-√
- |
-√
- |
-x
- |
-x
- |
-x
- |
-x
- |
-
-WARN
- |
-√
- |
-√
- |
-√
- |
-x
- |
-x
- |
-x
- |
-
-INFO
- |
-√
- |
-√
- |
-√
- |
-√
- |
-x
- |
-x
- |
-
-DEBUG
- |
-√
- |
-√
- |
-√
- |
-√
- |
-√
- |
-x
- |
-
-TRACE
- |
-√
- |
-√
- |
-√
- |
-√
- |
-√
- |
-√
- |
-
-ALL
- |
-√
- |
-√
- |
-√
- |
-√
- |
-√
- |
-√
- |
-
-√- Creating a log file x - Not creating a log file
- |
-
-
-
-
-
Quick Start
-This section describes how to start Data Studio.
-
Prerequisites
The StartDataStudio.bat batch file checks the version of Operating System (OS), Java and Data Studio as a prerequisite to run Data Studio.
-
-
- In the Release package navigate to Tools folder, locate and double-click StartDataStudio.bat to execute and check Java version compatibility.
The batch file checks the version compatibility and will launch Data Studio or display appropriate message based on the OS, Java and Data Studio version installed.
-If the Java version installed is earlier than 1.8, then error message is displayed.
-The batch file determines the versions of the OS and Java for Data Studio based on the following scenarios:
-
-DS Installation (32-bit/64-bit)
- |
-OS (Bit)
- |
-Java (bit)
- |
-Outcome
- |
-
|---|
-
-32
- |
-32
- |
-32
- |
-Data Studio is launched.
- |
-
-32
- |
-64
- |
-32
- |
-Data Studio is launched.
- |
-
-32
- |
-64
- |
-64
- |
-Error Message is displayed.
- |
-
-64
- |
-32
- |
-32
- |
-Error Message is displayed.
- |
-
-64
- |
-64
- |
-32
- |
-Error Message is displayed.
- |
-
-64
- |
-64
- |
-64
- |
-Data Studio is launched.
- |
-
-
-
-
-
Data Studio GUI
-This section describes the Data Studio GUI.
-
The Data Studio GUI contains the following:
-
- Main Menu provides basic operations.
- Toolbar contains buttons for easy access to frequently used operations.
- SQL Terminal tab is used to execute SQL statements and functions/procedures.
- PL/SQL Viewer tab displays the content of functions/procedures.
- Editor Area is used to perform edit operations.
- Callstack pane shows the execution stack.
- Breakpoints pane shows any breakpoints that have been set.
- Variables pane shows variables and their values.
- SQL Assistant tab displays suggestion or reference for the information entered in the SQL Terminal and PL/SQL Viewer.
- Result tab displays the result(s) of an executed function/procedure, or an SQL statement.
- Message tab displays the process output, standard input, standard output, and standard errors.
- Object Browser contains a hierarchical tree display of database connection(s) and related database objects to which the user has access. All default created schemas except for public are grouped under Catalogs and user schemas are grouped under Schemas below the respective database.
- Minimized Window Panel is used to open Callstack, Breakpoints and Variables pane. This panel is displayed only when Callstack, Breakpoints or Variables pane or all three are minimized.
- Search Toolbar is used to search objects from the Object browser.
-
-
Supporting Sequence DDL
-Data Studio provides the option to show sequence DDL or allow users to export sequence DDL. It provides "Show DDL", "Export DDL", "Export DDL and Data"
-
Follow the steps to access the feature:
-
- In Object Browser, right click on any object under Sequences. A menu option will appear
- Select Show DDL option to see the DDL statements.
Or Select the Export DDL menu option to export DDL statements.
-Or Select the Export DDL and Data menu option to export DDL statements and the select statement.
-Refer to the following image:
-
- Only the sequence owner or sysadmin or has the select privilege of the sequence, then only the operation can be performed.
-
-
-
Data Studio Menus
-
-
-
diff --git a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_22.html b/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_22.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 8c5b0f865..000000000
--- a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_22.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,117 +0,0 @@
-
-
-File
-The File menu contains database connection options. Click File from main menu or press Alt+F to open the File menu.
-
-
Function
- |
-Button
- |
-Shortcut Key
- |
-Description
- |
-
|---|
-
-New Connection
- |
-
- |
-Ctrl+N
- |
-Creates and adds a new database connection to the Object Browser and SQL Terminal.
- |
-
-Remove Connection
- |
-
- |
--
- |
-Deletes the selected database connection from Object Browser.
- |
-
-Connect To DB
- |
-
- |
--
- |
-Connects to the database.
- |
-
-Disconnect From DB
- |
-
- |
-Ctrl+Shift+D
- |
-Disconnects from the selected database.
- |
-
-Disconnect All
- |
-
- |
--
- |
-Disconnects all the databases of a specified connection.
- |
-
-Open
- |
-
- |
-Ctrl+O
- |
-Loads SQL queries into the SQL Terminal.
- |
-
-Save
- |
-
- |
-Ctrl+S
- |
-Saves the SQL scripts of the SQL Terminal to an SQL file.
- |
-
-Save As
- |
-
- |
-CTRL+ALT+S
- |
-Saves the SQL scripts of the SQL Terminal to a new SQL file.
- |
-
-Exit
- |
--
- |
-Alt+F4
- |
-Exits from Data Studio and ends the connection.
- NOTE: Any unsaved changes will be lost.
-
- |
-
-
-
-
-
Stopping Data Studio
Follow the steps below to stop Data Studio:
-
- Click the
button.Alternatively choose File > Exit.
-The Exit Application dialog box is displayed prompting you to take the required actions.
- - Click the corresponding buttons as required.
- Force Exit: Exits the application without saving the SQL execution history.
- If you click Force Exit, the SQL execution history that is not saved may be lost.
-
-- Graceful Exit: Saves the SQL execution history that has not been saved to the disk before exiting.
- Cancel: Cancels the exit from the application.
-
-
-
Edit
-The Edit menu contains clipboard, Format, Find and Replace, and Search Objects operations to use in the PL/SQL Viewer and SQL Terminal tab. Press Alt+E to open the Edit menu.
-
-
Function
- |
-Shortcut Key
- |
-Description
- |
-
|---|
-
-Cut
- |
-Ctrl+X
- |
-Cuts the selected text
- |
-
-Copy
- |
-Ctrl+C
- |
-Copies the selected text or qualified object name
- |
-
-Paste
- |
-Ctrl+V
- |
-Pastes the selected text or qualified object name
- |
-
-Format
- |
-Ctrl+Shift+F
- |
-Formats all SQL statements and functions/procedures.
- |
-
-Select All
- |
-Ctrl+A
- |
-Selects all the text in SQL Terminal
- |
-
-Find and Replace
- |
-Ctrl+F
- |
-Finds and replaces text in SQL Terminal
- |
-
-Search Objects
- |
-Ctrl+Shift+S
- |
-Searches for objects within a connected database.
- |
-
-Undo
- |
-Ctrl+Z
- |
-Undoes the previous operation
- |
-
-Redo
- |
-Ctrl+Y
- |
-Redoes the previous operation
- |
-
-UPPERCASE
- |
-Ctrl+Shift+U
- |
-Changes the case of the selected text to uppercase
- |
-
-lowercase
- |
-Ctrl+Shift+L
- |
-Changes the case of the selected text to lowercase
- |
-
-Go To Line
- |
-Ctrl+G
- |
-Skips to a specific line in the Terminal or PL/SQL Viewer
- |
-
-Comment/Uncomment Lines
- |
-Ctrl+/
- |
-Comments/Uncomments each selected line
- |
-
-Comment/Uncomment Block
- |
-Ctrl+Shift+/
- |
-Comments/Uncomments all selected lines or a selected block
- |
-
-
-
-
-
Copy
Copy can also be used to copy objects from Object Browser.
-
The format of copied object name is:
-
-
Table 1 Object Type
- |
-Copied Format
- |
-
|---|
-
-Functions/Procedures
- |
-schema.object name(parameter name parameter type,...)
- |
-
-Databases
- |
-object name
- |
-
-Schemas
- |
-object name
- |
-
-Columns
- |
-object name
- |
-
-Constraints
- |
-object name
- |
-
-Partition names
- |
-object name
- |
-
-All other object types
- |
-schema.object name
- |
-
-
-
-
-
-
Search Objects
The Searching Objects option allows you to search for object(s) from the Object Browser based on the search criteria entered. The search operation can be executed either from Edit > Search Objects menu or by clicking 
from the Object Browser toolbar. The result of search displays tree structure similar to Object Browser. Right-click operations except for Refresh can be performed on the search result objects. Modified objects as a result of drop, set schema, rename, and so on can be viewed only from the main Object Browser after refresh. Right-click options on group names (tables, schema, views and so on) are not allowed on search result objects. Only objects to which you have access can be searched. Objects that you do not have access do not appear in the Search Scope.
-
Newly added objects can be viewed in the Search window by clicking the refresh option at the end of the object type.
-
-
-
-
Supported Search Options:
-
-
Search Options
- |
-Search Behavior
- |
-
|---|
-
-Contains
- |
-A search text which contains the searched characters will be displayed.
- |
-
-Starts With
- |
-A search text which starts with the searched character will be displayed.
- |
-
-Exact Word
- |
-A search text which matches exactly with searched characters will be displayed.
- |
-
-Regular Expression
- |
-A search text with regular expression searches for similar pattern in Object Browser that fulfills the search condition. Select Regular Expression from Search Criteria drop-down to perform this search. For more information refer to POSIX Regular Expressions rules.
-Example:
-- ^a, this displays all objects that start with the letter a.
- ^[^A-Za-z]+$, this displays all objects that do not have alphabets in them.
- ^[^0-9]+$, this displays all objects that do not have numbers in them.
- ^[a-t][^r-z]+$, this displays all objects whose name starts between a and t and excludes those that have characters between r and z in them.
- ^e.*a$, this displays all objects that start with the letter e and end with letter a.
- ^[a-z]+$ and select Match Case, this displays all objects that contain only alphabets in lowercase.
- ^[A-Z]+$ and select Match Case, this displays all objects that contain only alphabets in uppercase.
- ^[A-Za-z]+$ and select Match Case, this displays all objects that contain only alphabets in lowercase and uppercase.
- ^[A-Za-z0-9]+$ and select Match Case, this displays all objects that contain only alphabets in lowercase, uppercase and numbers.
- ^".*"$, this displays all objects that are within in quotes.
- |
-
-
-
-
-
Underscore and % search:
-
-
Search Value
- |
-Search Behavior
- |
-
|---|
-
-_
- |
-A search text with _ (underscore) in it considers the underscore as a wildcard of single character. This does not apply to regular expression, starts with and exact word search.
-Example:
-- _ed, this displays all objects that starts with any single character followed by "ed".
- D_t_e, this displays all objects that have character "d", followed by any single character, followed by character "t", followed by any single character, and followed by character "e".
- |
-
-%
- |
-A search text with % (percentage) in it considers the percentage as a wildcard of multiple characters. This does not apply to regular expression, starts with and exact word search.
-Example:
-- %ed, this displays all objects that have "ed" pattern in it.
- D%t%e, this displays all objects that have character "d", followed by any number of characters, followed by character "t", followed by any number of characters, and followed by character "e".
- |
-
-
-
-
-
Match case runs the search to match with the search text case.
-
-
Run
-The Run menu contains options to execute a database object in the PL/SQL Viewer tab and to execute SQL statements in the SQL Terminal tab. Press Alt+R to open the Run menu.
-
-
Function
- |
-Button
- |
-Shortcut Key
- |
-Description
- |
-
|---|
-
-Execute DB Object
- |
-
- |
-Ctrl+E
- |
-Starts execution (in normal mode) of the specified function/procedure.
-Displays the result in Result tab.
-Displays the information on actions performed in Messages tab.
- |
-
-Compile/Execute Statement
- |
-
- |
-Ctrl+Enter
- |
-Compiles the function/procedure.
-Starts execution of SQL statements in the SQL Terminal tab.
- |
-
-Compile/Execute in New Tab
- |
-
- |
-Ctrl+Alt+Enter
- |
-Executes statement in new tab retaining old.
-Disabled, when Retain Current is selected.
- |
-
-Cancel
-
- |
-
- |
-Shift+Esc
- |
-Cancels the executing query.
-Displays the result in Result tab.
-Displays the information on actions performed in Messages tab.
- |
-
-
-
-
-
Debug
-The Debug menu contains debug operations in the PL/SQL Viewer and SQL Terminal tab. Press Alt+D to open the Debug menu.
-
-
Function
- |
-Button
- |
-Shortcut Key
- |
-Description
- |
-
|---|
-
-Debug DB Object
- |
-
- |
-Ctrl+D
- |
-Starts the debugging process.
- |
-
-Continue
- |
-
- |
-F9
- |
-Continues with debugging.
- |
-
-Terminate Debugging
- |
-
- |
-F10
- |
-Terminates debugging.
- |
-
-Step Into
- |
-
- |
-F7
- |
-Steps through the code statement.
- |
-
-Step Over
- |
-
- |
-F8
- |
-Steps over the function.
- |
-
-Step Out
- |
-
- |
-Shift+F7
- |
-Steps out of the function.
- |
-
-
-
-
-
Settings
-The Settings menu contains the option to change the language. Press Alt+G to open the Settings menu.
-
-
Function
- |
-Shortcut Key
- |
-Description
- |
-
|---|
-
-Language
- |
--
- |
-Sets the language for the Data Studio GUI.
- |
-
-Preferences
- |
--
- |
-Sets the user preferences in Data Studio.
- |
-
-
-
-
-
Help
-The Help menu contains the user manual and version information of Data Studio. Press Alt+H to open the Help menu.
-
-
Function
- |
-Shortcut Key
- |
-Description
- |
-
|---|
-
-User Manual
- |
-F1
- |
-Opens the Data Studio User Manual.
- |
-
-About Data Studio
- |
--
- |
-Displays the current version and copyright information of Data Studio.
- |
-
-
-
-
-
- Visit https://java.com/en/download/help/path.xml to set the Java Home path.
-
-
Data Studio Toolbar
-The following image shows the toolbar:
-
-
The toolbar contains the following operations:
-
-
Data Studio Right-Click Menus
-This section describes the right-click menus of Data Studio.
-
Object Browser Pane
The following figure shows the Object Browser pane.
-
-
-
Right-clicking the connection name allows you to select Rename Connection, Edit Connection, Remove Connection, and Properties along with Refresh options.
-
-
Menu Item
- |
-Shortcut Key
- |
-Description
- |
-
|---|
-
-Rename Connection
- |
--
- |
-Renames a connection.
- |
-
-Edit Connection
- |
--
- |
-Modifies connection details.
- |
-
-Remove Connection
- |
--
- |
-Removes the existing database connection.
- |
-
-Properties
- |
--
- |
-Shows the details of a connection.
- |
-
-Refresh
- |
-F5
- |
-Refreshes a connection.
- |
-
-
-
-
-
Right-clicking the Databases tab allows you to select Create Database, Disconnect All, and Refresh options.
-
-
Menu Item
- |
-Shortcut Key
- |
-Description
- |
-
|---|
-
-Create Database
- |
--
- |
-Creates a database of this connection.
- |
-
-Disconnect All
- |
--
- |
-Disconnects all the databases of this connection.
- |
-
-Refresh
- |
-F5
- |
-Refreshes a database group.
- |
-
-
-
-
-
Right-clicking the active database allows you to select Disconnect from DB, Open Terminal, Properties, and Refresh options.
-
-
Menu Item
- |
-Shortcut Key
- |
-Description
- |
-
|---|
-
-Disconnect from DB
- |
-Ctrl+Shift+D
- |
-Disconnects from a database.
- |
-
-Open Terminal
- |
-Ctrl+T
- |
-Opens a terminal of this connection.
- |
-
-Properties
- |
--
- |
-Displays the properties of a database.
- |
-
-Refresh
- |
-F5
- |
-Refreshes a database.
- |
-
-
-
-
-
Right-clicking the inactive database allows you to select Connect to DB, Rename Database, and Drop Database options.
-
-
Menu Item
- |
-Shortcut Key
- |
-Description
- |
-
|---|
-
-Connect to DB
- |
--
- |
-Connects to a database.
- |
-
-Rename Database
- |
--
- |
-Renames a database.
- |
-
-Drop Database
- |
--
- |
-Drops a database.
- |
-
-
-
-
-
Right-clicking the Catalogs tab allows you to select the Refresh option.
-
-
Menu Item
- |
-Shortcut Key
- |
-Description
- |
-
|---|
-
-Refresh
- |
-F5
- |
-Refreshes a function/procedure.
- |
-
-
-
-
-
Right-clicking the Schemas tab allows you to select Create Schema, Grant/Revoke, and Refresh options.
-
-
Menu Item
- |
-Shortcut Key
- |
-Description
- |
-
|---|
-
-Create Schema
- |
--
- |
-Creates a schema.
- |
-
-Grant/Revoke
- |
--
- |
-Grants or revokes permissions for a schema group.
- |
-
-Refresh
- |
-F5
- |
-Refreshes a schema.
- |
-
-
-
-
-
Right-clicking the schema allows you to select Export DDL, Export DDL and Data, Rename Schema, Drop Schema, Grant/Revoke, and Refresh options.
-
-
Menu Item
- |
-Shortcut Key
- |
-Description
- |
-
|---|
-
-Export DDL
- |
--
- |
-Exports DDL of a schema.
- |
-
-Export DDL and Data
- |
--
- |
-Exports DDL and data of a schema.
- |
-
-Rename Schema
- |
--
- |
-Renames a schema.
- |
-
-Drop Schema
- |
--
- |
-Drops a schema.
- |
-
-Grant/Revoke
- |
--
- |
-Grants or revokes permissions for a schema.
- |
-
-Refresh
- |
-F5
- |
-Refreshes a schema.
- |
-
-
-
-
-
Right-clicking Functions/Procedures allows you to select Refresh and Create Function/Procedure and Grant/Revoke options.
-
-
Menu Item
- |
-Shortcut Key
- |
-Description
- |
-
|---|
-
-Create PL/SQL Function
- |
--
- |
-Creates a PL/SQL function.
- |
-
-Create PL/SQL Procedure
- |
--
- |
-Creates a PL/SQL procedure.
- |
-
-Create SQL Function
- |
--
- |
-Creates an SQL function.
- |
-
-Create C Function
- |
--
- |
-Creates a C function.
- |
-
-Grant/Revoke
- |
--
- |
-Grants or revokes permissions for a function/procedure.
- |
-
-Refresh
- |
-F5
- |
-Refreshes a function/procedure.
- |
-
-
-
-
-
Right-clicking Tables allows you to select Create table, Create partitioned table, Grant/Revoke, and Refresh options.
-
-
Menu Item
- |
-Shortcut Key
- |
-Description
- |
-
|---|
-
-Create table
- |
--
- |
-Creates a common table.
- |
-
-Create partitioned table
- |
--
- |
-Creates a partitioned table.
- |
-
-Grant/Revoke
- |
--
- |
-Grants or revokes permissions for a table.
- |
-
-Refresh
- |
-F5
- |
-Refreshes a table.
- |
-
-
-
-
-
Right-clicking Views allows you to select Create View, Grant/Revoke, and Refresh options.
-
-
Menu Item
- |
-Shortcut Key
- |
-Description
- |
-
|---|
-
-Create View
- |
--
- |
-Creates a view.
- |
-
-Grant/Revoke
- |
--
- |
-Grant/revokes permissions for a view.
- |
-
-Refresh
- |
-F5
- |
-Refreshes a view.
- |
-
-
-
-
-
Right-clicking the PL/SQL Viewer tab allows you to select Cut, Copy, Paste, Select All, Comment/Uncomment Lines, Comment/Uncomment Block, Compile, Execute, Add Variable To Monitor, Debug with Rollback, and Debug options.
-
-
Right-Click Option
- |
-Shortcut Key
- |
-Description
- |
-
|---|
-
-Cut, Copy, Paste
- |
-Ctrl+X, Ctrl+C, Ctrl+V
- |
-Specifies clipboard operations.
- |
-
-Select All
- |
-Ctrl+A
- |
-Selects options in the PL/SQL Viewer tab.
- |
-
-Comment/Uncomment Lines
- |
--
- |
-Comments or uncomments all selected rows.
- |
-
-Comment/Uncomment Block
- |
--
- |
-Comments or uncomments all selected rows or blocks.
- |
-
-Compile
- |
--
- |
-Compiles a function/procedure.
- |
-
-Execute
- |
--
- |
-Executes a function/procedure.
- |
-
-Add Variable To Monitor
- |
--
- |
-Adds variables to the monitor window.
- |
-
-Debug with Rollback
- |
--
- |
-Debugs a function/procedure and rolls back changes after the debugging is complete.
- |
-
-Debug
- |
--
- |
-Debugs a function/procedure.
- |
-
-
-
-
-
Right-clicking the SQL Terminal tab allows you to select Cut, Copy, Paste, Select All, Execute Statement, Open, Save, Find and Replace, Execution Plan, Comment/Uncomment, Save As, Format , and Cancel options.
-
-
Right-Click Option
- |
-Shortcut Key
- |
-Description
- |
-
|---|
-
-Cut, Copy, Paste
- |
-Ctrl+X, Ctrl+C, Ctrl+V
- |
-Specifies clipboard operations.
- |
-
-Select All
- |
--
- |
-Selects all text.
- |
-
-Execute Statement
- |
--
- |
-Executes a query.
- |
-
-Open
- |
--
- |
-Opens a file.
- |
-
-Save
- |
--
- |
-Saves a query.
- |
-
-Find and Replace
- |
--
- |
-Finds and replaces text in the SQL Terminaltab.
- |
-
-Execution Plan
- |
--
- |
-Executes a query.
- |
-
-Comment/Uncomment Lines
- |
-Ctrl+/
- |
-Comments or uncomments all selected rows.
- |
-
-Comment/Uncomment Block
- |
-Ctrl+Shift+/
- |
-Comments or uncomments all selected rows or blocks.
- |
-
-Cancel
- |
--
- |
-Cancels the execution.
- |
-
-Save As
- |
-CTRL+ALT+S
- |
-Saves the query to a new file.
- |
-
-Format
- |
-CTRL+SHIFT+F
- |
-Formats the selected SQL statements using the rules configured in the query.
- |
-
-
-
-
-
Right-clicking the Messages tab allows you to select Copy, Select All, and Clear options.
-
-
Right-Click Option
- |
-Shortcut Key
- |
-Description
- |
-
|---|
-
-Copy
- |
-Ctrl+C
- |
-Copies the text.
- |
-
-Select All
- |
-Ctrl+A
- |
-Selects all text.
- |
-
-Clear
- |
--
- |
-Clears the text.
- |
-
-
-
-
-
Connection Profiles
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_33.html b/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_33.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 87843cc62..000000000
--- a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_33.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,14 +0,0 @@
-
-
-Overview
-When Data Studio is started, the New Database Connection dialog box will open by default. To perform any DB operations, Data Studio must be connected to at least one database.
-
Enter the connection parameters to create a new database connection between Data Studio and the database in the server. Hovering over the connection name will display the server information.
-
You need to fill all the mandatory parameters, that are marked with asterisk (*) to complete the operation successfully.
-
-
Adding a Connection
-Performing the following steps to establish a new database connection.
-
- Choose File > New Connection from the main menu, or
click 
on the toolbar, or press Ctrl+N to connect to the database. The New Database Connection dialog box is displayed.
-
- While establishing a connection, if the preference file is corrupted or the preferences values are invalid, then an error message is displayed informing you that preference values are invalid and default values are set for preferences. To complete establishing a new database connection operation, click OK.
+
Connection Management
+
When Data Studio is started, the New Database Connection dialog box is displayed by default. To perform database operations, Data Studio must be connected to at least one database.
+
Enter the connection parameters to create a database connection between Data Studio and the database server. Hover the mouse cursor over the connection name to view the database information.
+
Adding a Connection
- Choose File > New Connection from the main menu, or click new connection icon on the toolbar. The New Database Connection dialog box is displayed.
+
+
- The table on the left lists the details of the existing connection profile(s) used to connect to the database along with the server information.
You can populate connection parameters, such as Connection Name, Host, and Host Port, by double-clicking the connection name.
+ If the password or key for any of the existing connections is damaged, you need to enter the password for whichever connection you use.
- - The table on the left lists the details of the existing connection profile(s) used to connect to the database along with the server information.
The server information will be displayed only after one successful connection.
-
-- Double clicking a connection name populates the connection parameters such as Connection Name, Host, and Host Port.
- If password is corrupted for any of the existing connection profile or the key is corrupted, then the password field needs to be filled in for all created connections.
-
-- Clicking
displays different pop-up messages based on the connection status of database.- If the database connection is active, then Remove Connection Confirmation pop-up is displayed. Click Yes to disconnect all databases.
-- If the database connection is not active, then Remove Connection Confirmation pop-up is displayed.
-
-- Clicking
without a connection name displays a pop-up stating to select at least one connection profile.
- - Provide the following credentials to enter a new set of parameters to connect to the database:
- You can click Clear to clear all fields in the New Database Connection dialog box.
- Use shortcut key (Ctrl+V) to paste data in Connection window. Data Studio does not support right-click options for all dialog boxes.
-
-
-
Field Name
+- Configure the following parameters to create a database connection.
+ Table 1 Database connection informationField
|
-Description
+ | Description
|
-Example
+ | Example
|
|---|
-Database Type
+ | Database Type
|
-Select the database type.
+ | Database type
|
--
+ | -
|
-Connection Name
+ | Name
|
-Provide a connection name.
+ | Connection name
|
-My_Connection_DB
+ | My_Connection_DB
|
-Host
+ | Host
|
-Provide the IP address (IPv4) or server domain name.
- NOTE: - If domain name length is greater than 25 characters, then the complete domain name will not be displayed.
Example: test1(db.dws…com:25xxx)
- - Hovering over the connection name once the connection is established will show the server IP and version.
- Entry made in this field will be validated for IP address if it has format of digits with three separators (.). Any entry not meeting this validation will be considered as domain name.
- A typical domain name:
- Starts with a letter.
- Allows letters, digits, hyphens (-), and period (.). All other special characters are not allowed.
- Does not allow space/tabs.
- Length cannot exceed 253 characters and a maximum of 63 characters is allowed in between periods.
+Specifies the host IP address (IPv4) or database domain name.
+
|
-db.dws.mycloud.com
-10.xx.xx.xx
+ | db.dws.mycloud.com
+10.xx.xx.xx
|
|
-Host Port
+ | Host Port
|
-Provide the port address.
+ | Provide the port address.
|
-8000
+ | 8000
|
-Database Name
+ | Databases
|
-Provide the database name.
+ | Specifies the database name.
|
-gaussdb
+ | gaussdb
|
-User Name
+ | Username
|
-Provide the user name to connect to the selected database.
+ | Provide the username to connect to the selected database.
|
--
+ | -
|
-Password
+ | Password
|
-Provide the password to connect to the database. The password text is masked.
+ | Specifies the password for connecting to the selected database. The password is masked.
|
--
+ | -
+ |
+
+Save Password
+ |
+- Current Session Only: The password is saved only for the current session.
- Do Not Save: The password is not saved.
+ |
+-
|
- Click Clear to clear all fields in the New Database Connection dialog box.
- Press Ctrl+V to paste data in the New Database Connection dialog box. Right-click options are not available in the dialog boxes of Data Studio.
+
+ - Select the Enable SSL option and click the SSL tab. For details, see Configuring SSL Connection.
Figure 1 Configuring SSL parameters
+ - Perform the following steps to set Fast Load Options:
Click the Advanced tab. Figure 2 Configuring fast load options
- Select an option from the Save Password drop-down list. The options available are:
- Permanently: Saves the password even after exiting Data Studio. While establishing the connection for the first time this option will not be available. To hide or view this drop-down option, see the Password section.
- Current Session Only: Saves the password only for the current session.
- Do Not Save: Does not save the password. If this option is selected, Data Studio will prompt for the password for certain operations like:
-
-
-- Enable SSL check box is selected by default.
- - Follow the steps below to enable SSL:
- Select the Enable SSL option.
- Click the SSL tab.
- - Provide the following information. The following files are required for secured connection. Refer to SSL Certificates section.
- To select the Client SSL Certificate, click
 and select the Client SSL Certificate. - To select the Client SSL Key, click
 and select the Client SSL key. - To select the Root Certificate, click
 and select the Root Certificate. - Select the SSL Mode from SSL Mode drop-down. Refer to table below for description of different SSL modes.
- If SSL Mode is set to verify-ca, Root Certificate must be selected.
- DS prompt for the Client key while accessing the gs_dump feature for the first time.
+ - Enter the schema names separated by commas in the Include field to load these schemas preferentially.
- Enter the schema names separated by commas in the Exclude field to avoid loading these schemas preferentially.
+ - Select either of the following options for Load Objects:
- All Objects: Loads all objects.
- Objects allowed as per user privilege: loads only objects that the user has permissions for accessing. For details about the minimum permissions for accessing objects listed in Object Browser, see Table 2.
+ The default value is Objects allowed as per user privilege.
-
-SSL Mode
- |
-Description
- |
-
|---|
-
-require
- |
-Selecting require will not check the validity of the certificates since a non-validating SSL factory is used.
- |
-
-verify-ca
- |
-Selecting verify-ca checks if the CA is correct using a validating SSL factory.
- |
-
-
-
- - Selecting Client SSL Certificate and Client SSL Key ensures secured connection for export of DDL and data using Data Studio.
- Selecting invalid file for Client SSL Certificate and/or Client SSL Key will result in export failure. For details, see Troubleshooting.
- If you deselect Enable SSL check box and proceed, then Connection Security Alert dialog box is displayed. Refer to Security Disclaimer for information to display this security alert or not.
- Continue: Continues to use insecure connections.
- Cancel: Enables SSL.
- Do not show again: If you select this option, the Connection Security Alert dialog box is not displayed for the subsequent connections of logged Data Studio instances.
- - Refer to server manuals for more details.
+ - Enter the number of database objects that can be loaded in Load Limit. The maximum number is 30,000.
- If the number of object types (such as tables and views) of the schema entered in Include is greater than the value of Load Limit, only the parent objects of the schema will be loaded. This indicates that child objects containing more than three parameters will not be loaded, such as columns, constraints, indexes, and functions.
- Schema names provided in Include and Exclude are validated.
+ - If you cannot access the schema specified in Include, an error message of the schema will be displayed during connection.
- If you cannot access the schema specified in Exclude, the schema will not be loaded in Object Browser after the connection is created.
-
- - Follow the steps below to set the Fast Load Options:
- Click the Advanced tab.
- - Enter the schema names using comma separator to load on priority while establishing a connection in the Include field.
- Enter the schema names using comma separator to avoid loading on priority while establishing a connection in the Exclude field.
- Select an option from the Load Objects options. The options available are:
- All Objects: Loads all objects.
- Objects allowed as per user privilege: Loads only objects for which the user has permissions. For details about the minimum access permissions for objects listed in the object browser, see Table 1.
- The default value is Objects allowed as per user privilege.
-
- - Enter the load limit in Load Limit field. The maximum value allowed is 30000. This is the database object count.
- If the number of object types (tables, view..) of the schema mentioned in the Include field is greater than the value entered in the Load Limit field, then the only the parent objects for a schema will be loaded. This implies that child objects like columns, constraints, indexes, functions with more than three parameters, and so on will not be loaded.
- Schema names provided in the Include and Exclude lists are validated.
- - If you do not have access to the schema name entered in the Include field, then an appropriate error message is displayed for that schema during connection.
- If you do not have access to the schema name entered in the Exclude field, then the schema will not be loaded in Object Browser after connection is established.
-
-
- - Click OK to establish the connection successfully.
The status bar displays the status of the completed operation.
-While Data Studio is connecting to the database, the following status bar shows the status:
-
-Once the connection is established, all schema objects will be displayed in the Object Browser pane.
- - Data Studio allows you to log in even if the password has expired with a message informing that some operations may not work as expected. For details, see Password Expiry.
- To cancel the connection, see Canceling the Connection.
- Postgres specific schemas are not displayed in the Object Browser.
+ - Click OK.
The status bar displays the status of the completed operation.
+When Data Studio is connecting to the database, the connection status is displayed as follows:
+
+Once the connection is created, all schemas will be displayed in the Object Browser pane.
+ - You can still log in to Data Studio even if the password has expired, but a message indicating that some operations may not be performed normally will be displayed. For details about how to change the configurations, see Table 1.
- PostgreSQL schema names are not displayed in the Object Browser pane.
- Canceling the ConnectionFollow the steps below to cancel the connection:
- - Click Cancel.
The Cancel Connection dialog box is displayed.
- - Click Yes.
A message confirmation dialog box is displayed.
- - Click OK.
- Lazy LoadingLazy loading feature delays the loading of objects until required.
- When you connect to a database only child objects of schema saved under search_path will be loaded as shown below:
- 
- Unloaded schemas are displayed as schema name (...).
- 
- To load child objects, expand the schema. During expansion of schema, the objects under the schema will show as loading:
+ Renaming a Connection- In the Object Browser pane, right-click the selected connection name and select Rename Connection.
A Rename Connection dialog box is displayed, prompting you to enter the new connection name.
+ - Enter the new connection name. Click OK to rename the connection.
The status bar displays the status of the completed operation. The new connection name must be unique. Otherwise, the rename operation will fail.
+
- If you try to load an unloaded object while loading is in progress for another object, a pop-up message is displayed informing you that another loading is in progress. The  icon next to the unloaded object disappears. Refresh at the object or database level to display this icon again for loading.
- Expand schema to load and view the child objects. The Object Browser can load child objects of only one schema at a time.
+
+
+ Editing a Connection- In the Object Browser pane, right-click the selected connection name and select Edit Connection. The Edit Connection dialog box is displayed.
To edit an active connection, you need to disable the connection and then open the connection with the new properties. A warning message about connection resetting is displayed.
+ - Edit the connection parameters. For details, see Table 1.
The database type and name cannot be modified.
-If search_path is modified after establishing connection, then the changes will be reflected only after reconnecting the database. Auto-suggest works on keywords, data types, schema names, table names, views, and table name aliases for all schema objects that you have access.
-A maximum of 50,000 objects will be loaded in the Object Browser pane within 1 minute.
-The database connection timeout interval defaults to 3 minutes (180 seconds). If the connection fails within this interval, a timeout error is displayed.
-You can set the loginTimeout value in the Data Studio.ini file located in the Data Studio\ directory.
- When you log in to the Data Studio, pg_catalog is loaded automatically.
+ - Click OK.
- You can click Clear to clear all fields in the Edit Database Connection dialog box.
- If you click OK without modifying any connection parameters, a dialog box is displayed, indicating that the modification is not saved. After the connection parameters are modified, a dialog box is displayed.
+ - If SSL is not enabled, a Connection Security Alert dialog box is displayed. Click Continue to proceed with insecure connections or click Cancel to return to the Edit Connection dialog box to enable SSL.
Do not show again option is used to hide the Connection Security Alert dialog box for subsequent connections.
+A dialog box is displayed asking users to confirm whether the database whose connection has been edited is deleted.
+ - Click Yes to proceed to updating the connection information and reconnecting the connection with the updated parameters.
The status bar displays the status of the completed operation.
+
+
+ Removing a Connection- Right-click the selected connection name and select Remove Connection.
A confirmation dialog box is displayed.
+ - Click Yes to remove the server connection.
The status bar displays the status of the completed operation.
+This operation will remove the connection from the Object Browser. Any unsaved data will be lost.
+
+
+ Refreshing Connection Data- In the Object Browser pane, right-click the selected connection name and select Refresh or press F5 to update the connection with the latest content on the server.
The status bar displays the status of the completed operation.
+
+ - The time taken to refresh a database depends on the number of objects in the database. Therefore, you are advised to perform this operation during off-peak hours in a large-scale database.
- If you refresh the entire database or connection, all child objects of schemas in search_path, as well as the schemas already expanded by the user, will be loaded again.
- If you reconnect to the database, only schema objects saved under search_path will be loaded. Objects that have been expanded will not be loaded.
- A database and multiple objects under it cannot be refreshed simultaneously.
+
+ Viewing Connection Properties- Right-click the selected connection and select Properties.
The status bar displays the status of the completed operation.
+Properties of the selected connection are displayed.
+ If the property of a created connection is modified, then open the properties of the connection again to view the updated information.
+
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_35.html b/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_35.html
deleted file mode 100644
index bb7a293f2..000000000
--- a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_35.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,16 +0,0 @@
-
-
-Renaming a Connection
-Follow the steps below to rename a database connection:
- - In the Object Browser pane, right-click the selected connection name and select Rename Connection.
A Rename Connection dialog box is displayed prompting you to provide the new name for the connection.
- - Enter the new connection name. Select OK to rename the connection.
The status bar displays the status of the completed operation. The new connection name must be unique. Otherwise, the rename operation will fail.
-
-
- Editing a Connection
-Follow the steps below to edit the database connection properties:
- - In the Object Browser pane, right-click the selected connection name and select Edit Connection.
Editing an active connection will require closing the connection and then reopening the connection with the new properties. A warning message about connections being reset is shown.
-The Edit Connection dialog box is displayed.
- - Click OK to proceed or Cancel to exit the operation.
The Connection Name field cannot be modified.
-
- - Edit the connection parameters. Connection parameters are explained in Adding a Connection.
- Click OK to save the updated connection information.
- You can click Clear to clear all fields in the Edit Database Connection dialog box.
- If you click OK without modifying any connection parameters, a dialog box is displayed, indicating that the modification is not saved. After the connection parameters are modified, a dialog box is displayed.
- You can still log in to Data Studio even if the password has expired, but a message indicating that some operations may not be performed normally will be displayed. For details, see Password Expiry.
- Refer to Canceling the Connection to cancel the connection.
-
-If SSL is not enabled, a Connection Security Alert dialog box is displayed.
- - Click Continue to proceed with insecure connections or click Cancel to return to the Edit Connection dialog box to enable SSL.
Do not show again option is used to hide the Connection Security Alert dialog box for subsequent connections.
-
-The Remove Server Confirmation is displayed to confirm closing databases for the edited connection.
- - Click Yes to proceed to updating the connection information and reconnecting the connection with the updated parameters.
The status bar displays the status of the completed operation.
-
- Removing a Connection
-
- Follow the steps below to remove an existing database connection:
- - Right-click the selected connection name and select Remove Connection.
A confirmation dialog box is displayed to remove the connection.
- - Click Yes to remove the server connection.
The status bar displays the status of the completed operation.
-This action will remove the connection from the Object Browser. Any unsaved data will be lost.
-
- Viewing Connection Properties
-
- Follow the steps below to view the properties of a connection:
- - Right-click the selected connection and select Properties.
The status bar displays the status of the completed operation.
-Properties of the selected connection is displayed.
- If the property of a connection is modified for the connection that is already opened, then open the properties of the connection again to view the updated information on the same opened window.
-
-
- Refreshing a Database Connection
-Follow the steps below to refresh the database connection:
- - In the Object Browser pane, right-click the selected connection name and select Refresh or press F5.
The status bar displays the status of the completed operation.
-
- The time taken to refresh the database depends on the number of objects present in the database. For a large database, it is recommended to perform this operation only if required.
-
- - If you right-click a specific function/procedure and select Refresh, the specific function/procedure is refreshed. During refresh, the specific function/procedure is updated with the latest copy from the server.
- If you refresh at database level or connection profile level, then all the child objects of schema in search_path along with the schema already expanded by the user will be loaded.
- If you re-connect to the Database, then only schema objects saved under search_path will be loaded. Previously expanded objects will not be loaded.
- Database and multiple objects under a database cannot be refreshed simultaneously.
- Exporting/Importing Connection DetailsData Studio provides the option to export/import connection details from the connection dialog for future reference.
- The following fields are exported:
- - SSL Mode
- Connection name
- Server IP
- Server Port
- Database Name
- Username
- clSSLCertificatePath
- clSSLKeyPath
- profileId
- rootCertFilePathText
- connctionDriverName
- schemaExclusionList
- schemaInclusionList
- loadLimit
- privilegeBasedObAcess
- databaseVersion
- savePrdOption
- dbType
- version
- Follow the steps to access the feature:
- - Click File on Menu Bar.
The following window is displayed:
-
- - Select Export Connections to export the configuration files.
The Export Connection Profiles dialog box is displayed. You can select the links to be exported in this window.
-
-Select the connections you want to export and enter a file name where the exported connections will be saved. Click OK.
-Select the location where you want to save the file and click OK.
-
-A dialog box is displayed once the connections are exported successfully.
-
- - Select Import Connections to import the configuration files.
- Select the file you want to import and click Open.
-If the connection to be imported matches the existing connection, a dialog box is displayed as follows:
-
-- Replace: The imported connection configuration file will be replaced with the existing one.
- Copy, but keep both files: The imported connection configuration file will be renamed.
- Don't Copy: The existing connection configuration file will remain unchanged.
- Do this for all conflicts: The same operation will be repeated for all the matches.
-Click any of the given options as required and click OK.
-
- Password and SSL password fields will not be exported.
-
-
- Databases
-
-
-
diff --git a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_41.html b/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_41.html
deleted file mode 100644
index ee31bbdbb..000000000
--- a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_41.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,25 +0,0 @@
-
-
-Creating a Database
-A relational database is a database that has a set of tables which is manipulated in accordance with the relational model of data. It contains a set of data objects used to store, manage, and access data. Examples of such data objects are tables, views, indexes, functions and so on.
- Follow the steps below to create a database:
- - In the Object Browser pane, right-click the selected Databases group and select Create Database.
This operation can be performed only when there is at least one active database.
-
-A Create Database dialog box is displayed prompting you to provide the necessary information to create the database.
- - Enter the database name. Refer to the server manual for database naming rules.
- Select the required type of encoding character set from the Database Encoding drop-down list.
The database supports UTF-8, GBK, SQL_ASCII, and LATIN1 types of encoding character sets. Creating the database with other encoding character sets may result in erroneous operations.
- - Select the Connect to the DB check box and click OK.
The status bar displays the status of the completed operation.
-You can view the created database in the Object Browser. The system related schema present in the server is automatically added to the new database.
- Data Studio allows you to login even if the password has expired with a message informing that some operations may not work as expected when no other database is connected in that connection profile. Refer to Password Expiry for information to change this behavior.
-
-
- Cancelling ConnectionFollow the steps below to cancel the connection operation:
- - Double-click the status bar to open the Progress View tab.
- In the Progress View tab, click
 . - In the Cancel Operation dialog box, click Yes.
The status bar displays the status of the cancelled operation.
-
-
- Disconnecting All Databases
-You can disconnect all the databases from a connection.
- Follow the steps below to disconnect all the databases from a connection:
- - In the Object Browser pane, right-click the selected the Databases group and select Disconnect All. This will disconnect all the databases under that connection.
This operation can be performed only when there is at least one active database.
-
-A confirmation dialog box is displayed to disconnect all databases for the connection.
- - Click Yes to disconnect.
The status bar displays the status of the completed operation.
-Data Studio populates all the connection parameters (except password) that were provided during the last successful connection with the database. To reconnect, you need to enter only the password in the connection wizard.
-
- Connecting to a Database
-You can connect to the database.
- Follow the steps below to connect a database:
- - In the Object Browser pane, right-click the selected database name and select Connect to DB.
This operation can be performed only on an inactive database.
-
-The database is connected.
-The status bar displays the status of the completed operation.
- - Data Studio allows you to login even if the password has expired with a message informing that some operations may not work as expected when no other database is connected in that connection profile. Refer to Password Expiry for information to change this behavior.
- Refer to Cancelling Connection section to cancel the connection to database.
-
-
- Disconnecting a Database
-You can disconnect the database.
- Follow the steps below to disconnect a database:
- - In the Object Browser pane, right-click the selected database name and select Disconnect from DB.
This operation can be performed only on an active database.
-
-A confirmation dialog box is displayed to disconnect database.
- - Click Yes to disconnect.
The database is disconnected.
-The status bar displays the status of the completed operation.
-
- Renaming a Database
-Follow the steps below to rename a database:
- - In the Object Browser pane, right-click the selected database and select Rename Database.
This operation can be performed only on an inactive database.
-
-A Rename Database dialog box is displayed prompting you to provide the necessary information to rename the database.
- - Enter the new database name. Select the Connect to the DB? check box and click OK.
A confirmation dialog box is displayed to rename the database.
- - Click OK to rename the database.
The status bar displays the status of the completed operation.
-You can view the renamed database in the Object Browser.
-
-
- Dropping a Database
-Individual or batch drop can be performed on databases. Refer to Dropping a Batch of Objects section for batch drop.
- Follow the steps below to drop a database:
- - In the Object Browser pane, right-click the selected database and select Drop Database.
This operation can be performed only on an inactive database.
-
-A confirmation dialog box is displayed to drop the database.
- - Click OK to drop the database.
A popup message and the status bar display the status of the completed operation.
-
- Viewing Properties of a Database
-Follow the steps below to view the properties of a database:
- - Right-click the selected database and select Properties.
This operation can be performed only on an active database.
-
-The status bar displays the status of the completed operation.
-The properties of the selected database are displayed.
- If the property of a database is modified for the database that is already opened, then refresh and open the properties of the database again to view the updated information on the same opened window.
-
-
- Schemas
-
-
-
diff --git a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_49.html b/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_49.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 8a4e63a9d..000000000
--- a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_49.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,11 +0,0 @@
-
-
-Overview
-This section describes working with database schemas. All system schemas are grouped under Catalogs and user schemas under Schemas.
- Creating a Schema
-In relational database technology, schemas provide a logical classification of objects in the database. Some of the objects that a schema may contain include functions/procedures, tables, sequences, views, and indexes.
- Follow the steps below to define a schema:
- - In the Object Browser pane, right-click the selected Schemas group and select Create Schema.
Only refresh can be performed on Catalogs group.
-
- - Enter the schema name and click OK. You can create the schema only if the database connection is active.
You can view the new schema in the Object Browser pane.
-The status bar displays the status of the completed operation.
-
- You can perform the following actions on a schema:
-
- Displaying the Default SchemaData studio displays default schema of the user in the toolbar.
- 
- When a create query without mentioning the schema name is executed from SQL Terminal, the corresponding objects are created under the default schema of the user.
- When a select query is executed in SQL terminal without mentioning the schema name, the default schemas are searched to find these objects.
- When Data Studio starts, the default schemas are set to <username>, public schemas in same priority.
- If another schema is selected in the drop-down, the selected schema will be set as the default schema, overriding previous setting.
- The selected schema is set as the default schema for all active connections of the database (selected in database list drop-down).
- This feature is not available for OLTP database.
-
-
- Exporting Schema DDL
-Exporting the schema DDL exports the DDLs of functions/procedures, tables, sequences and views of the schema.
- Follow the steps to export the schema DDL:
- - In the Object Browser pane, right-click the selected schema and select Export DDL.
The Data Studio Security Disclaimer dialog box is displayed. You can close this security disclaimer message. For details, see Security Disclaimer.
- - Click OK.
The Save As dialog box is displayed.
-
-
- - In the Save As dialog box, select the location to save the DDL and click Save. The status bar displays the progress of the operation.
- To cancel the export operation, double-click the status to open the Progress View tab and click
 . For details, see Canceling the Table Data Export Operation. - If the file name contains characters that are not supported by Windows, the file name will be different from the schema name.
- MS Visual C runtime file (msvcrt100.dll) is required to complete this operation. For details, see Troubleshooting.
-
-The Export message and the status bar display the status of the completed operation.
-
-Database Encoding
- |
-File Encoding
- |
-Support for Exporting a DDL
- |
-
|---|
-
-UTF-8
- |
-UTF-8
- |
-Yes
- |
-
-GBK
- |
-Yes
- |
-
-LATIN1
- |
-Yes
- |
-
-GBK
- |
-GBK
- |
-Yes
- |
-
-UTF-8
- |
-Yes
- |
-
-LATIN1
- |
-No
- |
-
-LATIN1
- |
-LATIN1
- |
-Yes
- |
-
-GBK
- |
-No
- |
-
-UTF-8
- |
-Yes
- |
-
-
-
- You can select multiple objects and export their DDL. Batch Export lists the objects whose DDL cannot be exported.
-
-
- Exporting Schema DDL and Data
-The exported schema DDL and data include the following:
- - DDLs of functions/procedures of the schema.
- DDLs and data of tables of the schema.
- DDLs of views of the schema.
- DDLs of sequences of the schema.
- Follow steps below to export the schema DDL and data:
- - In the Object Browser pane, right-click the selected schema and select Export DDL and Data.
The Data Studio Security Disclaimer dialog box is displayed.
-You can close this security disclaimer message. For details, see Security Disclaimer.
- - Click OK.
The Save As dialog box is displayed.
- - In the Save As dialog box, select the location to save the DDL and data and click Save. The status bar displays the progress of the operation.
- To cancel the export operation, double-click the status to open the Progress View tab and click
 . For details, see Canceling the Table Data Export Operation. - The exported file name will not be the same as schema name, if the schema name contains characters which are not supported by Windows.
- MS Visual C runtime file (msvcrt100.dll) is required to complete this operation. For details, see Troubleshooting.
-
-The Export message and the status bar display the status of the completed operation.
-
-Database Encoding
- |
-File Encoding
- |
-Support for Exporting a DDL
- |
-
|---|
-
-UTF-8
- |
-UTF-8
- |
-Yes
- |
-
-GBK
- |
-Yes
- |
-
-LATIN1
- |
-Yes
- |
-
-GBK
- |
-GBK
- |
-Yes
- |
-
-UTF-8
- |
-Yes
- |
-
-LATIN1
- |
-No
- |
-
-LATIN1
- |
-LATIN1
- |
-Yes
- |
-
-GBK
- |
-No
- |
-
-UTF-8
- |
-Yes
- |
-
-
-
- You can select multiple objects and export their DDL and data. Batch Export lists the objects whose DDL and data cannot be exported.
-
-
- Renaming a Schema
-Follow the steps to rename a schema:
- - In the Object Browser pane, right-click the selected schema and select Rename Schema.
- Enter the schema name and click OK.
You can view the renamed schema in the Object Browser.
-The status bar displays the status of the completed operation.
-
- Granting/Revoking a Privilege
-Follow the steps below to grant/revoke a privilege:
- - Right-click the schema group and select the Grant/Revoke.
The Grant/Revoke dialog is displayed.
- - Select the objects to grant/revoke privilege from the Object Selection tab and click Next.
- Select the role from the Role drop-down in the Privilege Selection tab.
- Select Grant/Revoke in the Privilege Selection tab.
- Select/unselect the required privileges in the Privilege Selection tab.
In SQL Preview tab, you can view the SQL query automatically generated for the inputs provided.
- - Click Finish.
- Dropping a Schema
-Individual or batch dropping can be performed on schemas. Refer to Dropping a Batch of Objects section for batch dropping.
- Follow the steps below to drop a schema:
- - In the Object Browser pane, right-click the selected schema and select Drop Schema.
A confirmation dialog to drop the schema is displayed.
- - Click OK to drop the schema. This action will remove the schema from the Object Browser.
A popup message and the status bar display the status of the completed operation.
-
- Creating a Function/Procedure
-Perform the following steps to create a function/procedure and SQL function:
- - In the Object Browser pane, right-click Functions/Procedures under the schema where you want to create the function/procedure. Then select Create PL/SQL Function, Create SQL Function, Create PL/SQL Procedure, or Create C Function as required.
The selected template is displayed in the new tab of Data Studio.
- - Add the function/procedure by right-clicking the tab and selecting Compile, or choosing Run > Compile/Execute Statement from the main menu, or pressing Ctrl+Enter to compile the procedure.
The Created function/procedure Successfully dialog box is displayed, and the new function/procedure is displayed under the Object Browser. Click OK to close the NewObject() tab and add the debugging object to Object Browser.
-Refer to Execute SQL Queries for re-obtaining connection options when connections are lost during execution.
- - The asterisk (*) next to the procedure name indicates that the procedure is not compiled or added to Object Browser.
Refresh Object Browser by pressing F5 to view the newly added debugging object.
- - C functions do not support debugging operations.
- A popup message displays the status of the completed operation, which is not displayed in the status bar.
-
-
- Compiling a FunctionWhen a user creates a PL/SQL object from the template or by editing an existing PL/SQL object, the created PL/SQL object will be displayed in a new tab page.
- Perform the following steps to compile a created function:
- - Select Functions/Procedures from the Object Browser tab page.
- Right-click Functions/Procedures and a menu is displayed.
- - Click Create PL/SQL Function and a new tab page is opened.
- - Edit the code.
- Right-click the blank area of the tab page and a menu is displayed.
- - Click Compile. A pop-up message is displayed as follows.
-The function is displayed in a new tab page.
-
-
- Editing a Function/Procedure
-Follow the steps below to open and edit the function/procedure or SQL function:
- - In the Object Browser pane, double-click the required function/procedure or SQL function or right-click the function/procedure or SQL function and select View Source. You must refresh the Object Browser to view the latest DDL.
The function/procedure or SQL function based on your selection is displayed.
-
-
-Only one function/procedure or SQL function with the same schema, name, and input parameters can be opened in Data Studio.
- - After editing or updating, compile and execute the PL/SQL program or SQL function. For more details, refer to Executing a Function/Procedure.
If you execute the function/procedure or SQL function before compiling, the Source Code Change dialog box is displayed.
- - Click Yes to compile and execute the function/procedure.
The status of the completed operation is displayed on the Message tab page.
-Refer to the Execute SQL Queries for information on reconnect option in case connection is lost during execution.
- - After compiling the function/procedure or SQL function, refresh the Object Browser (using F5) to view the updated code.
- Granting/Revoking a Permission (Function/Procedure)
-Perform the following steps to grant or revoke a permission:
- - Right-click functions/procedures group and select the Grant/Revoke.
The Grant/Revoke dialog box is displayed.
- - Select the objects to grant/revoke privilege from the Object Selection tab and click Next.
The Privilege Selection tab is displayed.
- - Select the role from the Role drop-down list.
- Select Grant/Revoke.
- Select or deselect the required permissions.
The SQL Preview tab displays the SQL query automatically generated for the inputs provided.
- - Click Finish.
- This feature is only supported in OLAP, not in OLTP.
-
- Working with Functions/Procedures
-
-
-
diff --git a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_61.html b/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_61.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 94740a58c..000000000
--- a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_61.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,14 +0,0 @@
-
-
-Overview
-This section provides you with details on working with functions/procedures and SQL functions in Data Studio.
- Data Studio supports PL/pgSQL and SQL languages for the operations are listed as follows:
-
-
- Debugging a PL/SQL Function
-
-
-
diff --git a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_621.html b/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_621.html
deleted file mode 100644
index fc94c60fb..000000000
--- a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_621.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,14 +0,0 @@
-
-
-Overview
-During debugging, if the connection is lost but the database remains connected to Object Browser, the Connection Error dialog box is displayed with the following options:
- - Yes: Establishes the connection again and restarts the debugging.
- No: Disconnects the database from Object Browser.
- SQL language function does not support debugging operations.
-
- Using Breakpoints
-This section contains the following topics:
-
- A breakpoint is used to suspend the execution of a PL/SQL program at the row where the breakpoint is set. You can use breakpoints to control the execution and debug the function.
- - An enabled breakpoint suspends the execution of the PL/SQL program whenever a breakpoint is encountered. When the execution hits the row of breakpoint, the execution will stop and you will be able to carry out other debug operations. Data Studio supports the following breakpoint operations:
- Setting or adding breakpoint on a row
- Enabling or disabling a breakpoint on a row
- Removing a breakpoint on a row
- - A disabled breakpoint will not suspend execution of PL/SQL program.
- When you run a PL/SQL program, the execution pauses at every row where you set a breakpoint. When the program execution is paused, Data Studio retrieves information about the current program state, such as the values of the program variables.
- Perform the following steps to debug a PL/SQL program:
- - Set a breakpoint at the row where PL/SQL program execution should be paused.
- Start the debugging session.
When a row with a breakpoint is reached, monitor the state of the application in the debugger pane, and continue the execution.
- - Close the debugging session.
- Data Studio provides debugging options in the toolbar that helps you step through the debug objects.
- Using the Breakpoints PaneYou can use the Breakpoints pane to view and manage the currently set breakpoints. From the minimized window panel, click the breakpoint option to open the Breakpoints pane.
- The Breakpoints pane lists each breakpoint with the row number and the debug object name.
- You can enable or disable all the breakpoints by clicking  in the Breakpoints pane. You can enable, disable or remove a specific breakpoint by selecting the breakpoint check box and clicking  ,  or  in the Breakpoints pane.
- Double-click the required breakpoint in the Breakpoint Info column to locate the breakpoint in the PL/SQL Viewer pane.
- 
- - Disabling a breakpoint prevents the execution from pausing at the breakpoint, but leaves the definition in place (to enable the breakpoint later).
- Deleting a breakpoint removes it permanently.
- The content of the Breakpoints pane can be copied to the clipboard using Alt+Y.
-
-
- Setting or Adding Breakpoints on a RowFollow the steps to set or add breakpoints on a row:
- - Open the PL/SQL function on a row where you want to add a breakpoint.
- In the PL/SQL Viewer, double-click the breakpoint ruler on the left side of the Line column. The added breakpoint is indicated by an enable breakpoint sign [
 ] in the PL/SQL Viewer. If the execution of the function does not break or stop the breakpoint during debugging, the breakpoint that is already set will not be validated.
-
-
-
- Enabling or Disabling a Breakpoint on a RowOnce a breakpoint is set, you can temporarily disable it by selecting the corresponding check box in the left-side of the Breakpoints pane and clicking  at the top of the Breakpoints pane. Disabled breakpoints will be grayed out [] in the PL/SQL Viewer and Breakpoints pane. To enable a disabled breakpoint, select the corresponding breakpoint (using check box) and click  .
-
- Removing a Breakpoint on a RowYou can remove an unused breakpoint using the same method as that for creating a breakpoint.
- In the PL/SQL Viewer tab, open the function in which you want to remove the breakpoint. Double-click  in the PL/SQL Viewer to disable the breakpoint. The breakpoint is removed from the work area.
- You can also enable or disable breakpoints using the preceding method.
-
- Changing Source CodeDuring debugging, if the source code is changed after it is fetched from the server and the debugging is continued, Data Studio displays an error.
- You are advised to refresh the object and perform the debug operation again.
- If the source code is changed after it is fetched from the server, and if you perform the execution or debug operation with no breakpoint set, then the result of the source code at the server will be displayed on Data Studio. You are advised to refresh before performing debug or execute operation.
-
-
- Debugging a PL/SQL Program Using a BreakpointPerform the following steps to debug a PL/SQL program using a breakpoint:
- - Open the PL/SQL program and add a breakpoint on the row to be debugged.
An example is as follows:
-Rows 11, 12, 13
-
- - To start debugging, click
 or press Ctrl+D, or right-click the selected PL/SQL program in the Object Browser and select Debug. In the Debug Function/Procedure dialog box, enter the parameter information. If there is no input parameter, the Debug Function/Procedure dialog box will not be displayed.
-
- - Enter the information and click OK. Single quotation marks (') are mandatory for the parameters of varchar and date data types, but not mandatory for the parameters of numeric data type.
To set NULL as the parameter value, enter NULL or null.
-On clicking the Debug button, you will see an arrow  pointing to the row where the breakpoint is set. The arrow indicates the row number at which execution will resume from.
-
-You can terminate debugging by clicking  from the toolbar, or pressing F10, or select Terminate Debugging from the Debug menu. After the debugging is complete, the function execution proceeds and will not be terminated at any breakpoint.
-The Callstack and Variables panes are populated.
-
-
-The Variables pane shows the current value of variables. Mouse over the variable in the function/procedure also shows the current value of variables.
-
-
-You can step through the code using Step Into, Step Out or Step Over. For details, see Controlling Execution.
- - Click Continue
 to continue the execution till the next breakpoint (if any). The result of the executed PL/SQL program is displayed in the Result tab and the Callstack and Variables panes are cleared. You can copy the content of the Result tab, by clicking  .To remove the breakpoint, do the following:
-- Double-click again on the breakpoint to remove it from the PL/SQL Viewer.
- Select the breakpoint in the breakpoint check box and click
 in the Breakpoints pane.
-
-
- Rearranging the Variable WindowThis feature enables the Variable Window and columns to be rearranged. You are able to arrange Variable Window to the following places:
- - Next to the SQL Assistant tab
- Next to the SQL Terminal tab
- Next to the Object Browser tab
- Next to the Resultset tab
- Next to the Breakpoints tab
- Next to the Callstack tab
- Next to the Object Browser tab
- When debugging is finished, the variable window will be minimized even if the variable window is rearranged while debugging. If variable window is rearranged as the Terminal tab or the Result tab, on completion of debugging, the tab should be minimized manually. The position of variable window is maintained after it is rearranged.
-
-
- Enabling/Disabling System VariablesSystem Variables are displayed by default. You can disable the system variables whenever required.
- - Click the red button under Variables to disable system variables.
-The button is in ON state by default.
-
-
- Displaying Cached ParametersWhen a PL/SQL function or procedure is debugged or executed, the same parameter values are used for the next debugging or execution.
- While executing a PL/SQL object, following window is displayed:
- 
- For the first time, parameter values are empty. Enter the value as required.
- 
- Click OK. The parameter values will be cached. Next time during the query execution/debug same parameter values will be displayed.
- Once the specific connection is removed, all the parameter values in cache are cleared.
-
-
- Displaying Variable in Monitor WindowData Studio displays the variables which are being monitored in the Monitor Window while debugging.
- In the Monitor Window, variables must be added in following ways:
-
- 
-
- The Monitor window can be dragged to anywhere in the Data Studio window.
- Displaying Cursor Information for Variables During DebuggingIn Data Studio, variable information is displayed if the cursor is hovered over that variable during the debugging of PL/SQL functions.
- 
-
-
- Supporting Rollback/Commit During DebuggingData Studio provides the option to commit/rollback the PL/SQL query execution result after debugging is finished.
- - If Debug With Rollback option is enabled, the PL/SQL execution result after debugging is not saved to the database.
- If Debug With Rollback option is disabled, the PL/SQL execution result after debugging is submitted to the database.
- Perform the following steps to enable the rollback function:
- - Check the Debug With Rollback box to enable the rollback function during PL/SQL debugging.
Or
-Right-click the SQL Terminal window where the PL/SQL function is executed.
-
-Select Debug With Rollback to enable the rollback function after the debugging is complete.
-Or
-Right-click any PL/SQL function under Functions/Procedure in Object Browser.
-
-
-
- Controlling Execution
-This section contains the following topics:
-
- Starting DebuggingSelect the function that you want to debug in the Object Browser pane. Start debugging by clicking  on the toolbar (or any other method as mentioned in the earlier sections). If no breakpoint is set, or the set breakpoint is invalid, the debugging operation will not halt at any statement and Data Studio will simply execute the object and display the results (if any).
-
- Stepping Through a PL/SQL FunctionYou can step through the debugging execution using the debug step commands from the toolbar. Step controls are used to step through the execution of the program line by line. If a breakpoint is encountered while performing a step operation, the execution will suspend at the breakpoint and the step operation is ended.
- Stepping is the process of running one statement at a time. After stepping through a statement, you can see the execution result in other debugging tabs.
- A maximum of 100 PL/SQL Viewer tabs can be displayed at a time. If a new tab beyond 100 is opened, the tab of the calling function is closed. For example, if 100 tabs are already opened and if one of the debug objects calls a new debug object (other than already opened 100 tabs), then Data Studio will close the calling function, and open the new debug object.
-
-
- Step IntoTo step through code one statement at a time, select Step Into from the Debug menu, or click  , or press F7.
-
- When stepping into a function, Data Studio executes the current statement and then enters the break mode. The debug position will be indicated by an arrow  on the left ruler pane. If the executed statement calls another function, Data Studio will step into that function. Once you have stepped through all the statements in that function, Data Studio will jump back to the next statement of the function it was called from.
- To go into the next statement, click the Step Into button or press F7 again. If you click the Continue button, PL/SQL code execution will continue.
- An example is as follows:
- When entering line 8, enter m := F3_TEST();. That is, go to the line 9 in f3_test(). You can step through all the statements in f3_test() by stepping into each line by clicking the Step Into button or pressing F7 repeatedly. Once you have stepped through all the statements in that function, Data Studio jumps to Line 10 in f2_test().
- The currently debugging object is marked with the  symbol in the tab title with the function name.
- 
- Step OverStepping over is the same as Stepping into, except that when it reaches a call for another function, it will not step into the function. The function will run, and you will be brought to the next statement in the current function. F8 is the shortcut key for Step Over. However, if there is a breakpoint set inside the called function, Step Over will enter the function, and hit the set breakpoint.
-
- In the below example, when you click Step Over in Line 10, Data Studio runs the f3_test() function.
- 
- The cursor will be moved to the next statement in f2_test(), that is, Line 11 in f2_test().
- 
- You can step over a function when you are familiar with the way the function works and are sure that its execution will not affect the issue that you are investigating.
- Stepping over a line of code that does not contain a function call executes the line just like stepping into the line.
-
- Step OutStepping out of a sub-program continues execution of the function and then suspends execution after the function returns to its calling function. You can step out of a long function when you have determined that the rest of the function is not significant to debug. However, if a breakpoint is set in the remaining part of the function, then that breakpoint will be hit before returning to the calling function.
-
- Both stepping over and stepping out of a function will execute a function. The shortcut key for the step out operation is Shift+F7.
- 
-
- In the preceding example,
- - Choose Debug > Step Into to step into f3_test().
- Choose Debug > Step Out to step out of f3_test()
- Continuing the Debug ExecutionWhen the debugging process stops at a specific location, you can select Continue (F9) from the Debug Menu or click button from the toolbar to continue the PL/SQL function execution.
-
- Viewing CallstackThe Callstack pane displays the chain of functions as they are called. The Callstack pane can be opened from the minimized window panel. The most recent functions are listed on the top, and the least recent on the bottom. At the end of each function name is the current line number in that function.
- You can navigate among multiple functions through the Callstack pane by double-clicking the function name in the Callstack pane. For example, when f2_test() calls f3_test() at Line 10, the debug pointer will point to the first valid executable line (which is Line 9, in the above example) in the called function.
- In this case, the Callstack pane will be as shown below:
- 
- The content of the Callstack pane can be copied to the clipboard using Alt+J.
-
-
- Checking Debugging Information
-When you use Data Studio, you can examine debugging information through several debugging tabs. This section describes how to check the debugging information:
-
- Operating on VariablesThe Variables pane is used to monitor information or evaluate values. The Variables pane can be opened from the minimized window panel. Using this pane, you can evaluate or modify variables or arguments in a PL/SQL function. As you step through the code, the values of some local variables may change.
- 
- The content of the Variables pane can be copied to the clipboard using Alt+K.
-
- You can double-click the corresponding row of the variable and manually change variable values during run-time.
- Click the Variable, Datatype, or Value column in the Variables pane to sort the values. For example, to change the value of the percentage variable from 5 to 15, double-click the corresponding row in the Variable pane. The Set Variable Value dialog box will be displayed, which prompts you to input the variable value. Input the variable value and click OK.
- To set NULL as a variable value, enter NULL or null in the Value column.
- If the variable is read-only, it will be indicated by  beside the corresponding variable.
- Users cannot update these variables. A variable declared as a constant will not be shown as read-only in the Variables pane. However, while updating it, an error will occur.
- - In the Variables pane, the parameter value will be displayed as NULL, if the input to the parameter value is string literal 'NULL'.
- When the value is set to a variable using Data Studio, then the value of the variable is the same as the value returned by the statement "select expression" executed from gsql.
-
-
- Setting/Displaying Variables
- |
-Description
- |
-
|---|
-
-Setting NULL Values
- |
-- Double-click a variable value in the Variables pane.
A dialog box is displayed.
- - Set the variable to an empty value.
- |
-
-Configuring String Values
- |
-Configure the string values as follows:
-- To configure abc, enter abc.
- To configure Master's Degree, enter Master's Degree.
- To set variable as text (NULL), configure NULL in the Variables pane.
- |
-
-Setting Boolean Values
- |
-Enclose the boolean values t or f within single quotes. To set t to a boolean variable, enter 't' in the Variables pane.
- |
-
-Displaying Variable Value
- |
-If the variable value is NULL text, it will be displayed as NULL.
-If the variable value is NULL, it will be displayed as empty.
-If the variable value is a string, for example, abc, it will be displayed as abc.
- |
-
-
-
-
-
- Viewing ResultsThe Result tab displays the output for the PL/SQL debugging session, with the corresponding function/procedure name at the top of the tab. The Result tab will appear automatically, only if there is a result for the executed PL/SQL program.
- You can copy the content of the Result tab, by clicking  . For details, see Working with SQL Terminals.
- - The tool tip in the Result tab displays a maximum of 10 lines, where each line contains maximum of 80 characters.
- If the result of the executed query is NULL, it will be displayed as <NULL>.
- Tab characters (ASCII 009) in table data will not be displayed in the Results/View Table Data/Properties window. Tab characters will be included correctly when copying/exporting the data. Tool tip will also display the tab characters correctly.
-
-
- Selecting a DB Object in the PL/SQL Viewer
-Data Studio suggests a list of possible schema names, table names, column names, views, sequences, and functions in the PL/SQL Viewer.
- Follow the steps below to select a DB object:
- - Press Ctrl+Space and enter the required parent DB object name. The DB objects list is refined as you continue typing the DB object name. The DB objects list displays all DB objects of the database connected to SQL Terminal.
- - To select the parent DB object, use the Up or Down arrow keys and press Enter on the keyboard, or double-click the parent DB object.
- Enter . (period) to list all child DB objects.
- - To select the child DB object, use the Up or Down arrow keys and press Enter on the keyboard, or double-click the child DB object.
On selection, the child DB object will be appended to the parent DB object (with a period(.)).
-
-
- Exporting a Function/Procedure DDL
-Follow the steps below to export the function/procedure DDL:
- - In the Object Browser pane, right-click the selected function/procedure and select Export DDL.
The Data Studio Security Disclaimer dialog box is displayed.
- - Click OK.
The Save As dialog box is displayed.
- - In the Save As dialog box, select the location to save the DDL and click Save. The status bar displays the progress of the operation.
- To cancel the export operation, double-click the status to open the Progress View tab and click
 . For details, see Canceling the Table Data Export Operation. - The exported file name will not be the same as function/procedure name, if the function/procedure name contains characters which are not supported by Windows.
- MS Visual C runtime file (msvcrt100.dll) is required to complete this operation. For details, see Troubleshooting.
- Multiple objects can be selected to export DDL. Refer to Batch Export section for list of objects not supported for export DDL operation.
-
-The Export message and status bar displays the status of the completed operation.
-
-Database Encoding
- |
-File Encoding
- |
-Support for DDL Export
- |
-
|---|
-
-UTF-8
- |
-UTF-8
- |
-Yes
- |
-
-GBK
- |
-Yes
- |
-
-LATIN1
- |
-Yes
- |
-
-GBK
- |
-GBK
- |
-Yes
- |
-
-UTF-8
- |
-Yes
- |
-
-LATIN1
- |
-No
- |
-
-LATIN1
- |
-LATIN1
- |
-Yes
- |
-
-GBK
- |
-No
- |
-
-UTF-8
- |
-Yes
- |
-
-
-
-
- Viewing Object Properties in the PL/SQL Viewer
-Data Studio allows you to view table properties, procedures/functions and SQL functions.
- Follow the steps below to view table properties:
- - Press Ctrl and point to the table name.
- - Click the highlighted table name.
The properties of the selected table is displayed. The table properties are read-only.
-
-
- Follow the steps below to view functions/procedures or SQL functions:
- - Press Ctrl and point to the procedure/function name or SQL function name.
- - Click the highlighted function/procedure name or SQL function name. The function/procedure or SQL function is displayed in a new PL/SQL Viewer tab based on your selection.
- Follow the steps below to view object DDL:
- - Press Ctrl and point to the name of an object DDL to be viewed.
- - Click the highlighted Object DDL name. A new tab page for viewing the object DDL is displayed based on your selection.
- Dropping a Function/Procedure
-Individual or batch drop can be performed on functions/procedures. Refer to Dropping a Batch of Objects section for batch drop.
- Follow the steps below to drop a function/procedure or SQL function object:
- - In the Object Browser pane, right-click the selected function/procedure object and select Drop Object.
- To drop objects in batches, right-click two or more selected function/procedure objects and choose Drop Objects.
- In the confirmation dialog box, click Yes to complete the operation successfully.
The status bar displays the status of the completed operation.
-
- Executing a Function/Procedure
-
- After you connect to the database, all the stored functions/procedures and tables will be automatically populated in the Object Browser pane. You can use Data Studio to execute PL/SQL programs or SQL functions.
- - Blank lines occurring above or below in a function/procedure will be trimmed by Data Studio before being sent to the server. Blank lines will also be trimmed when displaying the source received from the server.
- To execute a function/procedure, enter the same values in Data Studio and the gsql client. If you do not enter any value in Data Studio, then NULL is considered as the input.
For example:
-- To execute the function/procedure with string, enter the value as data.
-- To execute the function/procedure with date, enter the value as to_date('2012-10-10', 'YYYY-MM-DD').
- - A function/procedure with OUT and INOUT parameter types cannot be executed directly.
- Data Studio will not execute any function/procedure with unknown data type parameters.
-
- You can right-click the function/procedure in the Object Browser to perform the following operations:
- - Refresh the program to get the latest program from the server.
- Execute the function/procedure or SQL function.
- Debug a PL/SQL function.
- Drop the debug object.
- Executing a PL/SQL Program or SQL FunctionFollow the steps below to execute a PL/SQL program or SQL function:
- - Double-click and open the PL/SQL program or SQL function. Each debug object will be opened in a new tab. You can open a maximum of 100 tabs in Data Studio.
- Click
 on the toolbar or choose Run > Execute from the main menu,or right-click the program name in the Object Browser and select Execute.
- - The Execute Function/Procedure dialog box is displayed prompting for your input.
If there is no input parameter, then the Execute Function/Procedure dialog box will not appear. Instead, the PL/SQL program will execute and the result (if any) will be displayed in the Result tab.
-
- - Provide your input for the function/procedure in the Execute PL/pgSQL dialog box and click OK.
To set NULL as the parameter value, enter NULL or null.
-
-- If quotes are already provided, you need to take care of escaping the quotes.
Example: If the input value is ab'c, then you need to enter ab''c.
-The PL/SQL program is executed in the SQL Terminal tab and the result is displayed in the Result tab. You can copy the contents of the Result tab by clicking  . Refer to Working with SQL Terminals for more information on toolbar options..
-Refer to the Execute SQL Queries section for information on reconnect option in case connection is lost during execution.
-
-
-
- Granting/Revoking a Privilege
-Follow the steps below to grant/revoke a privilege:
- - Right-click selected function/procedure and select the Grant/Revoke.
The Grant/Revoke dialog box is displayed.
- - Refer to Granting/Revoking a Permission (Function/Procedure) section to grant/revoke a privilege.
- GaussDB(DWS) Tables
-
-
-
diff --git a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_70.html b/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_70.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 7a150c05d..000000000
--- a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_70.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,13 +0,0 @@
-
-
-Table Management Overview
-This section describes how to manage tables efficiently.
- - You need to configure all mandatory parameters to complete the operation. Mandatory parameters are marked with an asterisk (*).
-
- Creating Regular Table
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_72.html b/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_72.html
index 1d1ad81bc..d512268cc 100644
--- a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_72.html
+++ b/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_72.html
@@ -1,437 +1,425 @@
-
+
-Overview
-This section describes how to create a common table.
- A table is a logical structure maintained by a database administrator and consists of rows and columns. You can define a table as a part of your data definitions from the data perspective. Before defining a table, you need to define a database and a schema. This section describes how to use Data Studio to create a table. To define a table in the database, perform the following steps:
- - In the Object Browser pane, right-click Regular Tables, and choose Create Regular Table.
- Define basic table information, such as the table name and table type. For details, see Providing Basic Information.
- Define column information, such as the column name, data type schema, data type, and column constraint. For details, see Defining a Column.
- For details about how to determine table data distribution settings, see Selecting Data Distribution.
- Define column constraints for different constraint types. Constraint types include PRIMARY KEY, UNIQUE, and CHECK. For details, see Defining Table Constraints.
- Define table index information, such as the index name and access mode. For details, see Defining an Index.
On the SQL Preview tab, you can check the automatically generated SQL query. For details, see SQL Preview.
+Defining a Regular Table
+A table is a logical structure maintained by a database administrator and consists of rows and columns. You can define a table as a part of your data definitions from the data perspective. Before defining a table, you need to define a database and a schema. This section describes how to use Data Studio to create a table. To define a table in the database, perform the following steps:
+ - In the Object Browser pane, right-click Regular Tables, and choose Create Regular Table.
- Define basic table information, such as the table name and table type. For details, see Providing Basic Information.
- Define column information, such as the column name, data type schema, data type, and column constraint. For details, see Defining a Column.
- For details about how to determine table data distribution settings, see Selecting Data Distribution.
- Define column constraints for different constraint types. Constraint types include PRIMARY KEY, UNIQUE, and CHECK. For details, see Defining Table Constraints.
- Define table index information, such as the index name and access mode. For details, see Defining an Index.
On the SQL Preview tab, you can check the automatically generated SQL query. For details, see SQL Preview.
- Providing Basic InformationIf you create a table in a schema, the current schema will be used as the schema of the table. Perform the following steps to create a common table:
+ Providing Basic InformationIf you create a table in a schema, the current schema will be used as the schema of the table. Perform the following steps:
- - Enter a table name. It specifies the name of the table to be created.
Select the Case check box to retain the capitalization of the value of the Table Name parameter. For example, if you enter the table name Employee, the table name will be created as Employee.
+ - Enter a table name. It specifies the name of the table to be created.
Select the Case check box to retain the capitalization of the value of the Table Name parameter. For example, if you enter the table name Employee, the table name will be created as Employee.
-The name of the table schema is displayed in Schema.
- - Select a table storage mode from the Table Orientation drop-down list.
- Select a table type. Its value can be:
- Normal: a normal table
- Unlogged: An unlogged table. When data is written to an unlogged table, the data is not recorded in logs. The speed of writing data to an unlogged table is much higher than that of writing data to a common table. However, an unlogged table is insecure. In the case of a conflict or abnormal shutdown, an unlogged table is automatically truncated. The content of unlogged tables is not backed up to the standby node, and no log is automatically recorded when an index is created for unlogged tables.
- - Configure Options.
- IF NOT EXISTS: Create the table only if a table with same name does not exist.
- WITH OIDS: Create a table and assign OIDs.
- Configure Filler Factor. The value range is 10 to 100. The default value is 100 (filled to capacity).
-If Fill Factor is set to a smaller value, the INSERT operation fills only the specified percentage of a table page. The free space of the page will be used to update rows on the page. In this way, the UPDATE operation can place the updated row content on the original page, which is more efficient than placing the update on a different page. Set it to 100 for a table that has never been updated. Set it to a smaller value for largely updated tables. TOAST tables do not support this parameter.
- - Enter table description in the Description of Table text box.
- Click Next to define the column information of the table.
- You can configure the following parameters of a common table:
+ The name of the table schema is displayed in Schema.
+ - Select a table storage mode from the Table Orientation drop-down list.
- ROW: Create a row-store table.
- COLUMN: Create a column-store table.
+ - Select a table type. Its value can be:
- Normal: a normal table
- Unlogged: An unlogged table. When data is written to an unlogged table, the data is not recorded in logs. The speed of writing data to an unlogged table is much higher than that of writing data to a common table. However, an unlogged table is insecure. In the case of a conflict or abnormal shutdown, an unlogged table is automatically truncated. The content of unlogged tables is not backed up to the standby node, and no log is automatically recorded when an index is created for unlogged tables.
+ - Configure Options.
- IF NOT EXISTS: Create the table only if a table with same name does not exist.
- WITH OIDS: Create a table and assign OIDs.
- Configure Filler Factor. The value range is 10 to 100. The default value is 100 (filled to capacity).
+If Fill Factor is set to a smaller value, the INSERT operation fills only the specified percentage of a table page. The free space of the page will be used to update rows on the page. In this way, the UPDATE operation can place the updated row content on the original page, which is more efficient than placing the update on a different page. Set it to 100 for a table that has never been updated. Set it to a smaller value for largely updated tables. TOAST tables do not support this parameter.
+ - Enter table description in the Description of Table text box.
- Click Next to define the column information of the table.
+ You can configure the following parameters of a common table.
- Table 1 ParametersParameter
+Table 1 ParametersParameter
|
-Row-store Table
+ | Row-store Table
|
-Column-store Table
+ | Column-store Table
|
-ORC Table
+ | ORC Table
|
|---|
-Table Type
+ | Table Type
|
-
+ | 
|
-
+ | 
|
-
+ | 
|
-If Not Exists
+ | If Not Exists
|
-
+ | 
|
-
+ | 
|
-
+ | 
|
-With OIDS
+ | With OIDS
|
-
+ | 
|
-
+ | 
|
-
+ | 
|
-Fill Factor
+ | Fill Factor
|
-
+ | 
|
-
+ | 
|
-
+ | 
|
Defining a ColumnA column defines a unit of information within a table's row. Each row is an entry in the table. Each column is a category of information that applies to all rows. When you add a table to a database, you can define the columns that compose it. Columns determine the type of data that the table can hold. After providing the general information about the table, click the Columns tab to define the list of table columns. Each column contains name, data type, and other optional properties.
- You can perform the following operations only in a common table:
-
- To define a column, perform the following steps:
- - Enter the column name in Column Name field. It specifies the name of a column to be created in the new table. This must be a unique name in the table.
Select the Case check box to retain the capitalization of the value of the Column Name parameter. For example, if the column name entered is "Name", then the column name is created as "Name".
+ Defining a ColumnA column defines a unit of information within a table's row. Each row is an entry in the table. Each column is a category of information that applies to all rows. When you add a table to a database, you can define the columns that compose it. Columns determine the type of data that the table can hold. After providing the general information about the table, click the Columns tab to define the list of table columns. Each column contains name, data type, and other optional properties.
+ - Enter the column name in Column Name field. It specifies the name of a column to be created in the new table. This must be a unique name in the table.
Select the Case check box to retain the capitalization of the value of the Column Name parameter. For example, if the column name entered is "Name", then the column name is created as "Name".
- - Configure Array Dimensions. It specifies the array dimensions for the column.
Example: If array dimension for a column is defined as integer [], then it will add the column data as single dimension array.
-
-The marks column in the above table was created as single dimension and subject column as two dimensions.
- - Select the data type of the column from the Data Type drop-down list. For example, bigint for integer values.
For complex data types,
-- Select the required schema from the Data type Schema drop-down list.
- Select the corresponding data type from the Data Type drop-down list. This list displays the tables and views for the selected schema.
User-defined data types are not available for selection.
+ - Configure Array Dimensions. It specifies the array dimensions for the column.
Example: If array dimension for a column is defined as integer [], then it will add the column data as single dimension array.
+
+The marks column in the above table was created as single dimension and subject column as two dimensions.
+ - Select the data type of the column from the Data Type drop-down list. For example, bigint for integer values.
For complex data types,
+- Select the required schema from the Data type Schema drop-down list.
- Select the corresponding data type from the Data Type drop-down list. This list displays the tables and views for the selected schema.
User-defined data types are not available for selection.
- - Enter the precision/size value of the data type entered in the Precision/Size field. This parameter is valid only when the data type can be defined by precision or size.
- Select the scale of the data type entered in the Scale field.
- Choose the following Column Constraints if required:
- NOT NULL: The column cannot contain null values.
- UNIQUE: The column may contain only unique values.
- DEFAULT: The default value used when no value is defined for the column.
- Check: An expression producing a Boolean result, which new or updated rows must satisfy for an INSERT or UPDATE operation to succeed.
- - To add comments to Column in the Create Regular Table dialog box, add column information in Description of Column (Max 5000 chars) text box and click Add. You can also add comments in the column addition dialog box. You can check comments in general table properties.
- After you enter all information for new column, click Add. You can also delete a column from a list or change the order of columns. After defining all columns, click Next.
- You can configure the following parameters of a column in a common table:
-
- Table 2 ParametersParameter
- |
-Row-store Table
- |
-Column-store Table
- |
-ORC Table
- |
-
|---|
-
-Array Dimensions
- |
-√
- |
-x
- |
-x
- |
-
-Data Type Schema
- |
-√
- |
-x
- |
-x
- |
-
-NOT NULL
- |
-√
- |
-√
- |
-√
- |
-
-Default
- |
-√
- |
-√
- |
-√
- |
-
-UNIQUE
- |
-√
- |
-x
- |
-x
- |
-
-CHECK
- |
-√
- |
-x
- |
-x
- |
-
-
-
-
-
- Deleting a ColumnTo delete a column, perform the following steps:
- - Select a column.
- Click Delete.
-
- Editing a ColumnFollow the steps to edit a column:
- - Select a column.
- Click Edit.
- Edit the column details as required and click Update to save changes.
You must complete the edit operation and save the changes to continue with other operations.
-
+ - Enter the precision/size value of the data type entered in the Precision/Size field. This parameter is valid only when the data type can be defined by precision or size.
- Select the scale of the data type entered in the Scale field.
- Choose the following Column Constraints if required:
- NOT NULL: The column cannot contain null values.
- UNIQUE: The column may contain only unique values.
- DEFAULT: The default value used when no value is defined for the column.
- Check: An expression producing a Boolean result, which new or updated rows must satisfy for an INSERT or UPDATE operation to succeed.
+ - To add comments to Column in the Create Regular Table dialog box, add column information in Description of Column (Max 5000 chars) text box and click Add. You can also add comments in the column addition dialog box. You can check comments in general table properties.
- After you enter all information for new column, click Add. You can also delete a column from a list or change the order of columns. After defining all columns, click Next.
- You can add, delete, and edit columns, and adjust the sequence of columns.
+
-
- Moving a ColumnYou can move a column in a table. To move a column, select the column and click Up or Down.
-
- Selecting Data DistributionData distribution specifies how the table is distributed or replicated among data nodes.
-
- Select one of the following options for the distribution type:
+ You can configure the following parameters of a column in a common table:
- Distribution Type
+Table 2 ParametersParameter
|
-Description
+ | Row-store Table
+ |
+Column-store Table
+ |
+ORC Table
|
|---|
-DEFAULT DISTRIBUTION
+ | Array Dimensions
|
-The default distribution type will be assigned for this table.
+ | √
+ |
+x
+ |
+x
|
-REPLICATION
+ | Data Type Schema
|
-Each row of the table will be replicated in all the data nodes of the database cluster.
+ | √
+ |
+x
+ |
+x
|
-HASH
+ | NOT NULL
|
-Each row of the table will be placed based on the hash value of the specified column.
+ | √
+ |
+√
+ |
+√
|
-RANGE
+ | Default
|
-Each row of the table will be placed based on the range value.
+ | √
+ |
+√
+ |
+√
|
-LIST
+ | UNIQUE
|
-Each row of the table will be placed based on the list value.
+ | √
+ |
+x
+ |
+x
|
-
-
- After selecting data distribution, click Next.
-The following table lists the data distribution parameters that can be configured for common tables.
-
-Table 3 Distribution typesDistribution Type
- |
-Row-store Table
- |
-Column-store Table
- |
-ORC Table
- |
-
|---|
-
-DEFAULT DISTRIBUTION
+ | CHECK
|
-√
+ | √
|
-√
+ | x
|
-x
- |
-
-HASH
- |
-√
- |
-√
- |
-√
- |
-
-REPLICATION
- |
-√
- |
-√
- |
-x
- |
-
-
-
- Defining Table ConstraintsCreating constraints is optional. A table can have one (and only one) primary key. Creating the primary key is a good practice.
- You can select the following types of constraints from the Constraint Type drop-down list:
-
-Primary KeyThe primary key is the unique identity of a row and consists of one or more columns.
- Only one primary key can be specified for a table, either as a column constraint or as a table constraint. The primary key constraint must name a set of columns that is different from other sets of columns named by any unique constraint defined for the same table.
- Set the constraint type to PRIMARY KEY and enter the constraint name. Select a column from the Available Columns list and click Add. If you need a multi-column primary key, repeat this step for another column.
- Fill Factor for a table is in the range 10 and 100 (unit: %). The default value is 100 (filled to capacity). If Fill Factor is set to a smaller value, the INSERT operation fills only the specified percentage of a table page. The free space of the page will be used to update rows on the page. In this way, the UPDATE operation can place the updated row content on the original page, which is more efficient than placing the update on a different page. Set it to 100 for a table that has never been updated. Set it to a smaller value for largely updated tables. TOAST tables do not support this parameter.
- DEFERRABLE: Defer an option.
- INITIALLY DEFERRED: Check the constraint at the specified time point.
- In the Constraints area, click Add.
- You can click Delete to delete a primary key from the list.
- Mandatory parameters are marked with asterisks (*).
- UNIQUESet the constraint type to UNIQUE and enter the constraint name.
- Select a column from the Available Columns list and click Add. To configure unique for multiple columns, repeat this step for another column. After adding the first column, the UNIQUE constraint name will be automatically filled. The name can be modified.
-
- Fill Factor: For details, see Primary Key.
- DEFERRABLE: For details, see Primary Key.
- INITIALLY DEFERRED: For details, see Primary Key.
- You can click Delete to delete UNIQUE from the list.
- Mandatory parameters are marked with asterisks (*).
- CHECKSet the constraint type to CHECK and enter the constraint name.
- When the INSERT or UPDATE operation is performed, and if the check expression fails, then table data is not altered.
- If you double-click column in Available Columns list, it is inserted to Check Expression edit line to current cursor position.
- In the Constraints area, click Add. You can click Delete to delete CHECK from the list. Mandatory parameters are marked with asterisks (*). After defining all constraints, click Next.
- The following table lists the table constraint parameters that can be configured for common tables.
-
- Table 4 Constraint typesConstraint Type
- |
-Row-store Table
- |
-Column-store Table
- |
-ORC Table
- |
-
|---|
-
-CHECK
- |
-√
- |
-x
- |
-x
- |
-
-UNIQUE
- |
-√
- |
-x
- |
-x
- |
-
-PRIMARY KEY
- |
-√
- |
-x
- |
-x
+ | x
|
Defining an IndexIndexes are optional. They are used to enhance database performance. This operation constructs an index on the specified column(s) of the specified table. Select the Unique Index check box to enable this option.
- Choose the name of the index method from the Access Method list. The default method is B-tree.
- The Fill factor for an index is a percentage that determines how full the index method will try to pack index pages. For B-trees, leaf pages are filled to this percentage during initial index build, and also when extending the index at the right (adding new largest key values). If pages subsequently become completely full, they will be split, leading to gradual degradation in the index's efficiency. B-trees use a default fill factor of 90, but any integer value from 10 to 100 can be selected. If the table is static, then a fill factor of 100 can minimize the index's physical size. For heavily updated tables, an explain plan smaller fill factor is better to minimize the need for page splits. Other indexing methods use different fill factors but work in similar ways. The default fill factor varies between methods.
- You can either enter a user-defined expression for the index or you can create the index using the Available Columns list. Select the column in the Available Columns list and click Add. If you need a multi-column index, repeat this step for other columns.
- After entering the required information for the new index, click Add.
- You can also delete an index from the list using the Delete button. After defining all indexes, click Next.
- You can configure the following parameters of an index in a common table.
+ Selecting Data DistributionData distribution specifies how the table is distributed or replicated among data nodes.
+
+ Select one of the following options for the distribution type:
- Table 5 ParametersParameter
+Distribution Type
|
-Row-store Table
- |
-Column-store Table
- |
-ORC Table
+ | Description
|
|---|
-Unique Indexes
+ | DEFAULT DISTRIBUTION
|
-√
- |
-x
- |
-x
+ | The default distribution type will be assigned for this table.
|
-btree
+ | REPLICATION
|
-√
- |
-√
- |
-x
+ | Each row of the table will be replicated in all the data nodes of the database cluster.
|
-gin
+ | HASH
|
-√
- |
-√
- |
-x
+ | Each row of the table will be placed based on the hash value of the specified column.
|
-gist
+ | RANGE
|
-√
- |
-√
- |
-x
+ | Each row of the table will be placed based on the range value.
|
-hash
+ | LIST
|
-√
- |
-√
- |
-x
+ | Each row of the table will be placed based on the list value.
|
-psort
+ |
+
+ After selecting data distribution, click Next.
+The following table lists the data distribution parameters that can be configured for common tables.
+
+Table 3 Distribution typesDistribution Type
+ |
+Row-store Table
+ |
+Column-store Table
+ |
+ORC Table
+ |
+
|---|
+
+DEFAULT DISTRIBUTION
|
-√
+ | √
|
-√
+ | √
|
-x
+ | x
|
-spgist
+ | HASH
|
-√
+ | √
|
-√
+ | √
|
-x
+ | √
|
-Fill Factor
+ | REPLICATION
|
-√
+ | √
|
-x
+ | √
|
-x
+ | x
|
-User Defined Expression
+ |
+
+ Defining Table ConstraintsCreating constraints is optional. A table can have one (and only one) primary key. Creating the primary key is a good practice.
+ The following table lists the table constraint parameters that can be configured for common tables.
+
+ Table 4 Constraint typesConstraint Type
+ |
+Row-store Table
+ |
+Column-store Table
+ |
+ORC Table
+ |
+
|---|
+
+CHECK
|
-√
+ | √
|
-x
+ | x
|
-x
+ | x
|
-Partial Index
+ | UNIQUE
|
-√
+ | √
|
-x
+ | x
|
-x
+ | x
+ |
+
+PRIMARY KEY
+ |
+√
+ |
+x
+ |
+x
|
SQL PreviewData Studio generates a DDL statement based on the inputs provided in Create New table wizard.
- You can only view, select, and copy the query. You cannot edit the query.
- - To select all queries, press Ctrl+A or right-click and select Select All.
- To copy the selected query, press Ctrl+C or right-click and select Copy.
- Click Finish to create the table. On clicking the Finish button, the generated query will be sent to the server. Any errors are displayed in the dialog box and status bar.
+ You can select the following types of constraints from the Constraint Type drop-down list:
+ - PRIMARY KEY
The primary key is the unique identity of a row and consists of one or more columns.
+Only one primary key can be specified for a table, either as a column constraint or as a table constraint. The primary key constraint must name a set of columns that is different from other sets of columns named by any unique constraint defined for the same table.
+Set the constraint type to PRIMARY KEY and enter the constraint name. Select a column from the Available Columns list and click Add. If you need a multi-column primary key, repeat this step for another column.
+Fill Factor for a table is in the range 10 and 100 (unit: %). The default value is 100 (filled to capacity). If Fill Factor is set to a smaller value, the INSERT operation fills only the specified percentage of a table page. The free space of the page will be used to update rows on the page. In this way, the UPDATE operation can place the updated row content on the original page, which is more efficient than placing the update on a different page. Set it to 100 for a table that has never been updated. Set it to a smaller value for largely updated tables. TOAST tables do not support this parameter.
+DEFERRABLE: Defer an option.
+INITIALLY DEFERRED: Check the constraint at the specified time point.
+In the Constraints area, click Add.
+You can click Delete to delete a primary key from the list.
+Mandatory parameters are marked with asterisks (*).
+ - UNIQUE
Set the constraint type to UNIQUE and enter the constraint name.
+Select a column from the Available Columns list and click Add. To configure unique for multiple columns, repeat this step for another column. After adding the first column, the UNIQUE constraint name will be automatically filled. The name can be modified.
+You can click Delete to delete UNIQUE from the list.
+ - CHECK
Set the constraint type to CHECK and enter the constraint name.
+When the INSERT or UPDATE operation is performed, and if the check expression fails, then table data is not altered.
+If you double-click column in Available Columns list, it is inserted to Check Expression edit line to current cursor position.
+In the Constraints area, click Add. You can click Delete to delete CHECK from the list. Mandatory parameters are marked with asterisks (*).
+
+ Defining an IndexIndexes are optional. They are used to enhance database performance. This operation constructs an index on the specified column(s) of the specified table. Select the Unique Index check box to enable this option.
+ Choose the name of the index method from the Access Method list. The default method is B-tree.
+ The Fill factor for an index is a percentage that determines how full the index method will try to pack index pages. For B-trees, leaf pages are filled to this percentage during initial index build, and also when extending the index at the right (adding new largest key values). If pages subsequently become completely full, they will be split, leading to gradual degradation in the index's efficiency. B-trees use a default fill factor of 90, but any integer value from 10 to 100 can be selected. If the table is static, then a fill factor of 100 can minimize the index's physical size. For heavily updated tables, an explain plan smaller fill factor is better to minimize the need for page splits. Other indexing methods use different fill factors but work in similar ways. The default fill factor varies between methods.
+ You can either enter a user-defined expression for the index or you can create the index using the Available Columns list. Select the column in the Available Columns list and click Add. If you need a multi-column index, repeat this step for other columns.
+ After entering the required information for the new index, click Add.
+ You can also delete an index from the list using the Delete button. After defining all indexes, click Next.
+ You can configure the following parameters of an index in a common table.
+
+ Table 5 ParametersParameter
+ |
+Row-store Table
+ |
+Column-store Table
+ |
+ORC Table
+ |
+
|---|
+
+Unique Indexes
+ |
+√
+ |
+x
+ |
+x
+ |
+
+btree
+ |
+√
+ |
+√
+ |
+x
+ |
+
+gin
+ |
+√
+ |
+√
+ |
+x
+ |
+
+gist
+ |
+√
+ |
+√
+ |
+x
+ |
+
+hash
+ |
+√
+ |
+√
+ |
+x
+ |
+
+psort
+ |
+√
+ |
+√
+ |
+x
+ |
+
+spgist
+ |
+√
+ |
+√
+ |
+x
+ |
+
+Fill Factor
+ |
+√
+ |
+x
+ |
+x
+ |
+
+User Defined Expression
+ |
+√
+ |
+x
+ |
+x
+ |
+
+Partial Index
+ |
+√
+ |
+x
+ |
+x
+ |
+
+
+
+
+
+ SQL PreviewData Studio generates a DDL statement based on the inputs provided in Create New table wizard.
+ You can only view, select, and copy the query. You cannot edit the query.
+ - To select all queries, press Ctrl+A or right-click and select Select All.
- To copy the selected query, press Ctrl+C or right-click and select Copy.
+ Click Finish to create the table. On clicking the Finish button, the generated query will be sent to the server. Any errors are displayed in the dialog box and status bar.
Working with Columns
-
- After creating a table, you can add new columns in that table. You can also perform the following operations on the existing column only for a Regular table:
-
- Creating a New ColumnFollow the steps below to add a new column to the existing table:
- - Right-click Columns and select Create column.
The Add New Column dialog box is displayed prompting you to add information about the new column.
- - Enter the details and click Add. You can view the added column in the corresponding table.
Data Studio displays the status of the operation in the status bar.
+Managing Columns
+After creating a table, you can create a new column, rename a column, and modify attributes in the table.
+ Creating a New Column- Right-click Columns and select Create column.
The Add New Column dialog box is displayed prompting you to add information about the new column. Enter the details and click Add.
+
+
+ - You can view the added column in the corresponding table.
Data Studio displays the status of the operation in the status bar.
- Renaming a ColumnFollow the steps below to rename a column:
- - Right-click the selected column and select Rename Column.
A Rename Column dialog box is displayed prompting you to provide the new name.
- - Enter the name and click OK. Data Studio displays the status of the operation in the status bar.
+ Toggle Not NullFollow the steps below to set or reset the Not Null option:
+ - Right-click the selected column and select Toggle Not Null.
Data Studio displays the Toggle Not-null Property dialog box.
+ - Click OK to complete the operation successfully. Data Studio displays the status of the operation in the status bar.
- Toggle Not NullFollow the steps below to set or reset the Not Null option:
- - Right-click the selected column and select Toggle Not Null.
A Toggle Not Null Property dialog box is displayed prompting you to set or reset the Not Null option.
- - In the confirmation dialog box, click OK to complete the operation successfully. Data Studio displays the status of the operation in the status bar.
+ Setting the Default Value of a Column- Right-click the selected column and select Set Column Default Value.
A dialog box with the current default value (if it is set) is displayed, prompting you to provide the default value.
+
+
+ - Enter the value and click OK. Data Studio displays the status of the operation in the status bar.
- Dropping a ColumnFollow the steps below to drop a column:
- - Right-click the selected column and select Drop Column. This operation deletes the column from the table.
A Drop Column dialog box is displayed.
- - Click OK to complete the operation successfully. Data Studio displays the status of the operation in the status bar.
-
- Setting the Default Value of a ColumnFollow the steps below to set the default value for a column:
- - Right-click the selected column and select Set Column Default Value.
A dialog box with the current default value (if it is set) is displayed, prompting you to provide the default value.
- - Enter the value and click OK. Data Studio displays the status of the operation in the status bar.
-
- Changing the Data TypeFollow the steps below to change the data type of a column:
- - Right-click the selected column and select Change Data Type.
Change Data Type dialog box is displayed.
- The existing data type will show as Unknown while modifying complex data types.
+ Changing the Data Type- Right-click the selected column and select Change Data Type.
Change Data Type dialog box is displayed.
+
+
+ The existing data type will be displayed as Unknown while you modify complex data types.
- - Select the Data type Schema and Data Type. If the Precision/Size spin box is enabled, enter the required details and click OK. Data Studio displays the status of the operation in the status bar.
+ - Select the Data type Schema and Data Type. If the Precision/Size spin box is enabled, enter the required details and click OK. Data Studio displays the status of the operation in the status bar.
+
+ Renaming a Column- Right-click the selected column and select Rename Column.
The Rename Column dialog box is displayed prompting you to provide the new name.
+ - Enter the name and click OK. Data Studio displays the status of the operation in the status bar.
+
+ Dropping a Column- Right-click the selected column and select Drop Column. This operation deletes the column from the table.
A Drop Column dialog box is displayed.
+ - Click OK to complete the operation successfully. Data Studio displays the status of the operation in the status bar.
-
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_74.html b/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_74.html
index 3b0c331b3..e50fa690c 100644
--- a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_74.html
+++ b/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_74.html
@@ -1,30 +1,37 @@
-
+
-
- Working with Constraints
-
- You can perform the following operations after a table is created only for a Regular table:
-
- Creating a ConstraintFollow the steps below to add a new constraint to the existing table:
- - Right-click the selected constraint of the table and select Create constraint.
The Add New Constraint dialog box is displayed prompting you to add information about the new constraint.
- - Enter the Constraint Name, Check Expression, and click Add. You can view the added constraint in the corresponding table.
Data Studio displays the status of the operation in the status bar.
- The status bar will show the name of the constraint if it has been provided in the Constraint Name field, or else the constraint name will not be displayed as it is created by database server.
+ Managing Constraints
+ Creating, dropping, and renaming constraints for a created table.
+ Constraints cannot be added to column-store tables.
+
+ Creating a Constraint- Right-click the selected constraint of the table and select Create constraint.
The Add New Constraint dialog box is displayed prompting you to add information about the new constraint.
+There are three options of constraint type: CHECK, PRIMARY KEY, and UNIQUE. For details, see Defining Table Constraints.
+
+
+ - Enter the Constraint Name, Check Expression, and click Add. You can view the added constraint in the corresponding table.
Data Studio displays the status of the operation in the status bar.
+ The status bar will show the name of the constraint if it has been provided in the Constraint Name field, or else the constraint name will not be displayed as it is created by database server.
- Renaming a ConstraintFollow the steps below to rename a constraint:
- - Right-click the selected constraint and select Rename Constraint.
The Rename Constraint dialog box is displayed prompting you to provide the new name.
- - Enter the constraint name and click OK. Data Studio displays the status of the operation in the status bar.
+ Renaming a ConstraintFollow the steps below to rename a constraint:
+ - Right-click the selected constraint and select Rename Constraint.
The Rename Constraint dialog box is displayed prompting you to provide the new name.
+ - Enter the constraint name and click OK. Data Studio displays the status of the operation in the status bar.
- Dropping a ConstraintFollow the steps below to drop a constraint:
- - Right-click the selected constraint and select Drop Constraint.
The Drop Constraint dialog box is displayed.
- - Click OK to complete the operation successfully. Data Studio displays the status of the operation in the status bar.
+ Dropping a ConstraintFollow the steps below to drop a constraint:
+ - Right-click the selected constraint and select Drop Constraint.
The Drop Constraint dialog box is displayed.
+ - Click OK to complete the operation successfully. Data Studio displays the status of the operation in the status bar.
-
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_75.html b/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_75.html
index 4fb387bf7..87aa0a5c9 100644
--- a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_75.html
+++ b/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_75.html
@@ -1,31 +1,45 @@
-
+
Managing Indexes
- You can create indexes in a table to search for data efficiently.
- After a table is created, you can add indexes to it. You can perform the following operations only in a common table:
-
- Creating an IndexPerform the following steps to add an index to a table:
- - Right-click Indexes and choose Create Index from the shortcut menu.
The Create Index dialog box is displayed.
- - Enter the details and click Create. You can also view the SQL statement by clicking the Preview Query button. Items in Available Columns are not sorted. Items moved back from Index Columns to Available Columns are unsorted, and is not related to the column order in the table. You can set the order of the Index Columns using the arrow buttons. Data Studio displays the operation status in the status bar.
+ You can create indexes in a table to search for data efficiently.
+ After a table is created, you can add indexes to it.
+ Creating an Index- Right-click Indexes and choose Create Index from the shortcut menu.
The Create Index dialog box is displayed.
+
+
+ - Enter the details and click Create. You can also view the SQL statement by clicking the Preview Query button. Items in Available Columns are not sorted. Items moved back from Index Columns to Available Columns are unsorted, and is not related to the column order in the table. You can set the order of the Index Columns using the arrow buttons. Data Studio displays the operation status in the status bar.
- Renaming an IndexFollow the steps below to rename an index:
- - Right-click the selected index and select Rename Index.
The Rename Index dialog box is displayed.
- - Enter a new name and click OK. Data Studio displays the operation status in the status bar.
+ Setting a Tablespace- Right-click an index and choose Set Tablespace from the shortcut menu.
The Set Tablespace dialog box is displayed.
+
+
+ - Select a tablespace and click OK. Data Studio displays the operation status in the status bar.
- Changing a Fill FactorTo change a fill factor, perform the following steps:
- - Right-click an index and choose Change Fill Factor from the shortcut menu.
The Change Fill Factor dialog box is displayed.
- - Select a fill factor and click OK. Data Studio displays the operation status in the status bar.
+ Changing a Fill FactorTo change a fill factor, perform the following steps:
+ - Right-click an index and choose Change Fill Factor from the shortcut menu.
The Change Fill Factor dialog box is displayed.
+
+
+ - Select a fill factor and click OK. Data Studio displays the operation status in the status bar.
- Deleting an IndexPerform the following steps to delete an index:
- - Right-click an index and choose Drop Index from the shortcut menu.
The Drop Index dialog box is displayed.
- - In the confirmation dialog box, click OK. Data Studio displays the operation status in the status bar. The index will be deleted from the table.
When the last index of a table is deleted, the value of the Has Index parameter may still be TRUE. After a vacuum operation is performed on the table, this parameter will change to FALSE.
+ Renaming an IndexFollow the steps below to rename an index:
+ - Right-click the selected index and select Rename Index.
The Rename Index dialog box is displayed.
+ - Enter a new name and click OK. Data Studio displays the operation status in the status bar.
+
+ Deleting an IndexPerform the following steps to delete an index:
+ - Right-click an index and choose Drop Index from the shortcut menu.
The Drop Index dialog box is displayed.
+ - In the confirmation dialog box, click OK. Data Studio displays the operation status in the status bar. The index will be deleted from the table.
When the last index of a table is deleted, the value of the Has Index parameter may still be TRUE. After a vacuum operation is performed on the table, this parameter will change to FALSE.
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_76.html b/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_76.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 25ce6e8b6..000000000
--- a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_76.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,17 +0,0 @@
-
-
-
- Creating Foreign Table
-
- Foreign tables created using query execution in SQL Terminal or any other tool can be viewed in the Object browser after refresh.
- - To view the newly created foreign table, right-click and select Refresh either at database, schema and foreign table group level.
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_77.html b/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_77.html
deleted file mode 100644
index e78dad067..000000000
--- a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_77.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,20 +0,0 @@
-
-
-
- Creating Partition Table
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_78.html b/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_78.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 0aff97a9d..000000000
--- a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_78.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,400 +0,0 @@
-
-
- Overview
- Partitioning refers to splitting what is logically one large table into smaller physical pieces based on specific schemes. The table based on the logic is called a partitioned table, and a physical piece is called a partition. Data is stored on these smaller physical pieces, namely, partitions, instead of the larger logical partitioned table.
- Follow the steps below to define a table in your database:
- - In the Object Browser pane, right-click Regular Tables, and choose Create Partition Table.
- Define basic table information, such as the table name and table type. For details, see Providing Basic Information.
- Define column information, such as the column name, data type schema, data type, and column constraint. For details, see Defining a Column.
- Select the data distribution information for the table. For details, see Change Order of Partition.
- Define column constraints for different constraint types. Constraint types include PRIMARY KEY, UNIQUE, and CHECK. For details, see Defining Table Constraints.
- Define table index information, such as the index name and access mode. For details, see Defining an Index.
- Define the partition information for the table such as partition name, partition column, partition value and so on. For details, see Defining a Partition.
On the SQL Preview tab, you can check the automatically generated SQL query. For details, see Checking the SQL Preview.
- - To add comments to Column in the Create Partition Table dialog box, add column information in Description of Column (Max 5000 chars) text box and click Add.
- Providing Basic InformationProvide the following information to create a table:
-
- For details, see Providing Basic Information.
- - Table Name
- Schema
- Options
- Description of Table
- Perform the following steps to configure other parameters:
- - Select a table storage mode from the Table Orientation drop-down list.
If table orientation is selected as ORC, then an HDFS Partitioned table is created.
-
- - Enter the ORC version number in the ORC Version field. This is applicable only for HDFS Partitioned table.
- After providing the general information about the table, click Next to define the columns information for the table.
The following table describes the parameters of partitioned tables.
-
-Table 1 ParametersParameter
- |
-Row Partition
- |
-Column Partition
- |
-ORC Partition
- |
-
|---|
-
-Table Type
- |
-x
- |
-x
- |
-x
- |
-
-If Not Exists
- |
-√
- |
-√
- |
-√
- |
-
-With OIDS
- |
-x
- |
-x
- |
-x
- |
-
-Fill Factor
- |
-√
- |
-x
- |
-x
- |
-
-
-
-
-
- The following table describes the parameters of partitioned tables.
-
- Table 2 ParametersField
- |
-Row Partition
- |
-Column Partition
- |
-ORC Partition
- |
-
|---|
-
-Array Dimensions
- |
-√
- |
-x
- |
-x
- |
-
-Data Type
- |
-√
- |
-x
- |
-x
- |
-
-NOT NULL
- |
-√
- |
-√
- |
-√
- |
-
-Default
- |
-√
- |
-√
- |
-√
- |
-
-UNIQUE
- |
-√
- |
-x
- |
-x
- |
-
-CHECK
- |
-√
- |
-x
- |
-x
- |
-
-
-
-
- Change Order of PartitionYou can change the order of partition as required in the table. To change the order, select the required partition and click Up or Down.
-
- Checking the SQL PreviewFor details, see SQL Preview.
-
- Editing a PartitionPerform the following steps to edit a partition:
- - Select a partition.
- Click Edit.
- Edit partition configurations as needed and click Update to save the changes.
You must complete the edit operation and save the changes to continue with other operations.
-
-
-
- Deleting a PartitionPerform the following steps to delete a partition:
- - Select a partition.
- Click Delete.
-
- Defining a PartitionThe following table describes the parameters of partitioned tables.
-
- Table 3 ParametersParameter
- |
-Row Partition
- |
-Column Partition
- |
-ORC Partition
- |
-
|---|
-
-Partition Type
- |
-By Range
- |
-By Range
- |
-By Value
- |
-
-Partition Name
- |
-√
- |
-√
- |
-x
- |
-
-Partition Value
- |
-√
- |
-√
- |
-x
- |
-
-
-
-
- Perform the following steps to define a table partition:
- - If Row or Column is selected for Table Orientation on the General tab, By Range will be displayed in the Partition Type area. If ORC is selected for Table Orientation on the General tab, By Value will be displayed in the Partition Type area.
- In the Available Column area, select a column and click
 .The column will be moved to the Partition Column area.
- - If Table Orientation is set to Row or Column, only one column can be selected for partitioning.
- If Table Orientation is set to ORC, up to four columns can be selected for partitioning.
- A maximum of four columns can be selected to define partitions.
-
- - Enter a partition name.
- Click
 next to Partition Value.- Enter the value by which you want to partition the table in Value column.
- Click OK.
- - After you enter all information for partition, click Add.
- After defining all partitions, click Next.
- You can perform the following operations on the partitions of a row-or column-partitioned table, but not on ORC partitioned tables:
- Deleting a Partition
- Editing a Partition
-
- Defining an IndexFor details about index definitions, see Defining an Index.
-
- Table 4 ParametersParameter
- |
-Row Partition
- |
-Column Partition
- |
-ORC Partition
- |
-
|---|
-
-Unique Indexes
- |
-√
- |
-x
- |
-x
- |
-
-btree
- |
-√
- |
-√
- |
-x
- |
-
-gin
- |
-√
- |
-√
- |
-x
- |
-
-gist
- |
-√
- |
-√
- |
-x
- |
-
-hash
- |
-√
- |
-√
- |
-x
- |
-
-psort
- |
-√
- |
-√
- |
-x
- |
-
-spgist
- |
-√
- |
-√
- |
-x
- |
-
-Fill Factor
- |
-√
- |
-x
- |
-x
- |
-
-User Defined Expression
- |
-√
- |
-x
- |
-x
- |
-
-Partial Index
- |
-√
- |
-x
- |
-x
- |
-
-
-
-
-
- Defining Table ConstraintsFor details about how to define table constraints, see Defining Table Constraints.
-
- Table 5 ParametersParameter
- |
-Partition
- |
-Column Partition
- |
-ORC Partition
- |
-
|---|
-
-Check
- |
-√
- |
-x
- |
-x
- |
-
-Unique
- |
-√
- |
-x
- |
-x
- |
-
-Primary Key
- |
-√
- |
-x
- |
-x
- |
-
-
-
-
-
- Configuring Data DistributionFor details about how to select a distribution type, see Selecting Data Distribution.
-
- Table 6 ParametersParameter
- |
-Row Partition
- |
-Column Partition
- |
-ORC Partition
- |
-
|---|
-
-DEFAULT DISTRIBUTION
- |
-√
- |
-√
- |
-x
- |
-
-Hash
- |
-√
- |
-√
- |
-√
- |
-
-Replication
- |
-√
- |
-√
- |
-x
- |
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_79.html b/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_79.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 3847b8029..000000000
--- a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_79.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,26 +0,0 @@
-
-
-
- Working with Partitions
-
- After creating a table, you can add/modify partitions. You can also perform the following operations on an existing partition:
- Renaming a Partition
- Dropping a Partition
- Renaming a PartitionFollow the steps below to rename a partition:
- - Right-click the selected partition and select Rename Partition.
Rename Partition Table dialog box is displayed prompting you to provide the new name for the partition.
- - Enter new name and click OK.
Data Studio displays the status of the operation in the status bar.
-
-
- Dropping a PartitionFollow the steps below to drop a partition:
- - Right-click the selected index and select Drop Partition.
Drop Partition Table dialog box is displayed.
- - Click OK.
The partition is dropped from the table. Data Studio displays the status of the operation in the status bar.
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_80.html b/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_80.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 6b93a081b..000000000
--- a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_80.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,17 +0,0 @@
-
-
-
- Grant/Revoke Privilege - Regular/Partition Table
-
- Follow the steps below to grant/revoke a privilege:
- - Right-click regular tables group and select the Grant/Revoke.
The Grant/Revoke dialog box is displayed.
- - Select the objects to grant/revoke privilege from the Object Selection tab and click Next.
- Select the role from the Role drop-down list in the Privilege Selection tab.
- Select Grant/Revoke in the Privilege Selection tab.
- Select/unselect the required privileges in the Privilege Selection tab.
In the SQL Preview tab, you can view the SQL query automatically generated for the inputs provided.
- - Click Finish.
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_81.html b/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_81.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 07f4d9fd4..000000000
--- a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_81.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,38 +0,0 @@
-
-
-
- Managing Table
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_82.html b/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_82.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 8740b1947..000000000
--- a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_82.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,116 +0,0 @@
-
-
- Overview
- This section describes how to manage tables efficiently.
- - You need to configure all mandatory parameters to complete the operation. Mandatory parameters are marked with asterisks (*).
- Refreshing is the only operation supported for foreign table.
-
- After creating the table, you can perform operations on the existing table. Right-click the selected table and select the required operation.
- Context MenuAdditional options for table operations are available in the table context menu. The context menu options available for table operations are:
-
- Table 1 Table context menu optionsMenu Item
- |
-Description
- |
-
|---|
-
-View Table Data
- |
-Opens the table data information. For details, see Viewing Table Data.
- |
-
-Edit Table Data
- |
-Opens the window for editing table data. For details, see Editing Table Data.
- |
-
-Reindex Table
- |
-Re-creates the table index. For details, see Reindexing a Table.
- |
-
-Analyze Table
- |
-Analyzes a table. For details, see Analyzing a Table.
- |
-
-Truncate Table
- |
-Truncates table data. For details, see Truncating a Table.
- |
-
-Vacuum Table
- |
-Vacuums table data. For details, see Vacuuming a Table.
- |
-
-Set Table Description
- |
-Sets table description. For details, see Setting the Table Description.
- |
-
-Set Schema
- |
-Sets the schema of a table. For details, see Setting the Schema.
- |
-
-Export Table Data
- |
-Exports table data. For details, see Exporting Table Data.
- |
-
-Import Table Data
- |
-Imports table data. For details, see Importing Table Data.
- |
-
-Show DDL
- |
-Shows the DDL of a table. For details, see Show DDL.
- |
-
-Export DDL
- |
-Exports Table DDL. For details, see Exporting Table DDL.
- |
-
-Export DDL and Data
- |
-Exports DDL and table data. For details, see Exporting Table DDL and Data.
- |
-
-Rename Database
- |
-Renames a table. For details, see Renaming a Table.
- |
-
-Drop Table
- |
-Drops (deletes) a table. For details, see Dropping a Table.
- |
-
-Properties
- |
-Shows table properties. For details, see Viewing Table Properties.
- |
-
-Grant/Revoke
- |
-Grants or revokes permissions. For details, see Grant/Revoke Privilege.
- |
-
-Refresh
- |
-Refreshes a table.
- |
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_83.html b/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_83.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 295393777..000000000
--- a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_83.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,19 +0,0 @@
-
-
-
- Renaming a Table
-
- Follow the steps below to rename a table:
- - Right-click the selected table and select Rename Table.
The Rename Table dialog box is displayed prompting you to provide the new name.
-
- Enter the table name and click OK. You can view the updated table name in Object Browser.
Data Studio displays the status of the operation in the status bar. This operation is not supported for Partition ORC tables.
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_84.html b/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_84.html
deleted file mode 100644
index dbe907bb0..000000000
--- a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_84.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,18 +0,0 @@
-
-
-
- Truncating a Table
-
- Follow the steps below to truncate a table:
- - Right-click the selected table and select Truncate Table. This operation deletes the data from an existing table.
- Data Studio prompts you to confirm this operation.
- - In the confirmation dialog box, click OK to complete the operation successfully.
A popup message and status bar display the status of the completed operation.
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_85.html b/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_85.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 21eceeed9..000000000
--- a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_85.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,20 +0,0 @@
-
-
-
- Reindexing a Table
-
- Index facilitate lookup of records. You need to reindex tables in the following scenarios:
- - The index is corrupted and no longer contains valid data. Although in theory this must never happen, in practice, indexes can become corrupted due to software bugs or hardware failures. Reindexing provides a recovery method.
- The index has become "bloated". That is, it contains many empty or nearly-empty pages. This can occur with B-tree indexes in PostgreSQL under certain uncommon access patterns. Reindexing provides a way to reduce the space consumption of the index by writing a new version of the index without the dead pages.
- You have altered a storage parameter (such as the fill factor) for an index, and wish to ensure that the change has taken full effect.
- Follow the steps below to reindex a table:
- - Right-click the selected table and select Reindex Table.
A pop-up message and status bar display the status of the completed operation.
- This operation is not supported for Partition ORC tables.
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_86.html b/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_86.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 4e3b1d348..000000000
--- a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_86.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,17 +0,0 @@
-
-
-
- Analyzing a Table
-
- The analyzing table operation collects statistics about tables and table indicies and stores the collected information in internal tables of the database where the query optimizer can access the information and use it to help make better query planning choices.
- Follow the steps below to analyze a table:
- - Right-click the selected table and select Analyze Table.
The Analyze Table message and status bar displays the status of the completed operation.
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_87.html b/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_87.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 0c4446d1a..000000000
--- a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_87.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,17 +0,0 @@
-
-
-
- Vacuuming a Table
-
- Vacuuming table operation reclaims space and makes it available for re-use.
- Follow the steps below to vacuum the table:
- - Right-click the selected table and select Vacuum Table.
The Vacuum Table message and status bar display the status of the completed operation.
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_88.html b/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_88.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 1b438c1e9..000000000
--- a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_88.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,17 +0,0 @@
-
-
-
- Setting the Table Description
-
- Follow the steps below to set the description of a table:
- - Right-click the selected table and select Set Table Description.
The Update Table Description dialog box is displayed. It prompts you to set the table description.
- - Enter the description and click OK.
The status bar displays the status of the completed operation.
- - To view the table description, right-click the selected table and select Properties.
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_90.html b/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_90.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 371ff5eed..000000000
--- a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_90.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,16 +0,0 @@
-
-
- Setting the Schema
- Follow the steps below to set a schema:
- - Right-click the selected table and select Set Schema.
The Set Schema dialog box is displayed, prompting you to select the new schema for the selected table.
- - Select the schema name from the drop-down list and click OK. The selected table will be moved to the new schema.
The status bar displays the status of the completed operation.
- - This operation is not supported for partitioned ORC tables.
- If the required schema contains a table with the same name as the current table, then Data Studio does not allow setting the schema for the table.
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_91.html b/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_91.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 5c4d5e5fd..000000000
--- a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_91.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,19 +0,0 @@
-
-
-
- Dropping a Table
-
- Individual or batch dropping can be performed on tables. Refer to Dropping a Batch of Objects section for batch dropping.
- This operation removes the complete table structure (including the table definition and index information) from the database and you have to re-create this table once again to store data.
- Follow the steps below to drop the table:
- - Right-click the selected table and select Drop Table.
Data Studio prompts you to confirm this operation.
- - In the confirmation dialog box, click OK to complete the operation successfully.
The status bar displays the status of the completed operation.
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_92.html b/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_92.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 8ef6d8d9b..000000000
--- a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_92.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,51 +0,0 @@
-
-
- Viewing Table Properties
- Perform the following operations to view the table properties:
- - Right-click the selected table and select Properties.
Data Studio displays the properties (General, Columns, Constraints, and Index) of the selected table in different tabs.
-The following table lists the operations that can be performed on each tab page, as well as editing and refreshing operations. You can double-click a cell to edit it.
-
-Tab
- |
-Operation
- |
-
|---|
-
-General
- |
-Save, Cancel, and Copy
- NOTE: Only the Table Description field can be modified.
-
- |
-
-Column
- |
-Add, Delete, Save, Cancel, and Copy
- |
-
-CONSTRAINT
- |
-Add, Delete, Save, Cancel, and Copy
- |
-
-Indexes
- |
-Add, Delete, Save, Cancel, and Copy
- |
-
-
-
- For more information about Edit, Save, Cancel, Copy, and Refresh operations, see Editing Table Data.
- When viewing table data, Data Studio automatically adjusts the column widths for table view. Users can resize the columns as needed. If the text content of a cell exceeds the total available display area, then resizing the cell column may cause Data Studio to become unresponsive.
-
- - A property window is displayed for each table.
- If the property of a table is modified for a table that is already opened, refresh and open the properties of the table again to view the updated information on the same opened window.
- If the text of a column contains spaces, word wrapping is applied to fit the column width. Word wrapping is not applied to columns without spaces.
- The size of the column is determined by the maximum content length column.
- After you refresh (click
 ) the Properties tab, the changes made to the table properties on the Object Browser are displayed. - Pasting operation is not allowed in the Data Type column.
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_93.html b/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_93.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 452aeccfd..000000000
--- a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_93.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,16 +0,0 @@
-
-
-
- Grant/Revoke Privilege
-
- Follow the steps below to grant/revoke a privilege:
- - Right-click the selected regular/partitioned table and select Grant/Revoke.
The Grant/Revoke dialog is displayed.
- - Refer to Grant/Revoke Privilege - Regular/Partition Table to grant/revoke privilege.
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_94.html b/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_94.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 65d6723e5..000000000
--- a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_94.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,32 +0,0 @@
-
-
-
- Managing Table Data
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_95.html b/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_95.html
deleted file mode 100644
index b16a0b7f3..000000000
--- a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_95.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,14 +0,0 @@
-
-
-
- Overview
-
- This section describes how to manage table data.
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_96.html b/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_96.html
deleted file mode 100644
index c33100c00..000000000
--- a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_96.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,82 +0,0 @@
-
-
- Exporting Table DDL
- Follow the steps below to export the table DDL:
- - In the Object Browser pane, right-click the selected table and select Export DDL.
The Data Studio Security Disclaimer dialog box is displayed.
- - Click OK.
The Save As dialog box is displayed.
- - In the Save As dialog box, select the location to save the DDL and click Save. The status bar displays the progress of the operation.
- To cancel the export operation, double-click the status to open the Progress View tab and click
 . For details, see Canceling the Table Data Export Operation. - If the table name contains characters which are not supported by Windows, the exported file name will not be the same as table name.
- MS Visual C runtime file (msvcrt100.dll) is required to complete this operation. For details, see Troubleshooting.
-
-The Export message and the status bar display the status of the completed operation.
-
-Database Encoding
- |
-File Encoding
- |
-Support for Exporting a DDL
- |
-
|---|
-
-UTF-8
- |
-UTF-8
- |
-Yes
- |
-
-GBK
- |
-Yes
- |
-
-LATIN1
- |
-Yes
- |
-
-GBK
- |
-GBK
- |
-Yes
- |
-
-UTF-8
- |
-Yes
- |
-
-LATIN1
- |
-No
- |
-
-LATIN1
- |
-LATIN1
- |
-Yes
- |
-
-GBK
- |
-No
- |
-
-UTF-8
- |
-Yes
- |
-
-
-
- You can select multiple objects and export their DDL. Batch Export lists the objects whose DDL cannot be exported.
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_97.html b/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_97.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 649a94a24..000000000
--- a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_97.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,84 +0,0 @@
-
-
- Exporting Table DDL and Data
- The exported table DDL and data include the following:
- - DDL of the table.
- Columns and rows of the table.
- Follow the steps below to export the table DDL:
- - In the Object Browser pane, right-click the selected table and select Export DDL and Data.
The Data Studio Security Disclaimer dialog box is displayed.
- - Click OK.
The Save As dialog box is displayed.
- - In the Save As dialog box, select the location to save the DDL and click Save. The status bar displays the progress of the operation.
- To cancel the export operation, double-click the status to open the Progress View tab and click . For details, see Canceling the Table Data Export Operation.
- If the table name contains characters which are not supported by Windows, the exported file name will not be the same as table name.
- MS Visual C runtime file (msvcrt100.dll) is required to complete this operation. For details, see Troubleshooting.
-
-The Export message and status bar display the status of the completed operation.
-
-Database Encoding
- |
-File Encoding
- |
-Support for Exporting a DDL
- |
-
|---|
-
-UTF-8
- |
-UTF-8
- |
-Yes
- |
-
-GBK
- |
-Yes
- |
-
-LATIN1
- |
-Yes
- |
-
-GBK
- |
-GBK
- |
-Yes
- |
-
-UTF-8
- |
-Yes
- |
-
-LATIN1
- |
-No
- |
-
-LATIN1
- |
-LATIN1
- |
-Yes
- |
-
-GBK
- |
-No
- |
-
-UTF-8
- |
-Yes
- |
-
-
-
- You can select multiple objects from regular and partitioned tables to export DDL and data, including columns, rows, indexes, constraints, and partitions. Batch Export lists the objects whose DDL and data cannot be exported.
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_98.html b/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_98.html
index 4d1e1d7d6..e0ee2d030 100644
--- a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_98.html
+++ b/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_98.html
@@ -1,32 +1,254 @@
-
+
- Exporting Table Data
- Perform the following steps to export table data:
- - Right-click the selected table and select Export Table Data.
The Export Table Data dialog box is displayed with the following options:
-- Format: Table data can be exported in Excel (xlsx/xls), CSV, TXT, or binary format. The default format is Excel (xlsx/xls).
- Include Header: This option is available for CSV and TXT files. If this option is selected, the exported data will include the column headers. By default, this option is selected when a CSV or TXT file is exported, but it is not mandatory. This option will be disabled for Excel (xlsx/xls) and binary formats.
- Quotes: Use this option to define quotes. You can enter only a single-byte character for this option, and the value of Quotes should be different from that of Delimiter. By default, this option is selected when a CSV or TXT file is exported, but it is not mandatory. This option will be disabled for Excel (xlsx/xls) and binary formats.
- If table data includes delimiters, the character specified in this option will be used.
- If the value includes a quote, it will not be escaped by the same quote.
- If the result contains the values of multiple rows, it will be quoted by quotes.
- - Escape: Use this option to define escape values. You can enter only a single-byte character for this option, and the value of Escape must be different from that of Quotes. By default, this option is selected when a CSV or TXT file is exported, but it is not mandatory. This option will be disabled for Excel (xlsx/xls) and binary formats.
- Replace NULL with: Use this option to replace the null value in the table with a specified string. This option contains a maximum of 100 characters, and cannot contain newline characters or carriage return characters. The value of this option must be different from the values of Delimiter and Quotes. By default, this option is selected when a CSV or TXT file is exported, but it is not mandatory. This option will be disabled for Excel (xlsx/xls) and binary formats.
- Encoding (optional): This option will be pre-populated with the encoding options made in the Preferences > Session Setting tab.
- Delimiter: Use this option to define delimiters. You can select the provided delimiters or customize delimiters in Delimiter > Other. The default delimiter for CSV and TXT formats is commas (,). The Other field can contain a maximum of 10 bytes. By default, this option is selected when a CSV or TXT file is exported, but it is not mandatory. This option will be disabled for Excel (xlsx/xls) and binary formats. It is mandatory when the Other field is selected.
- All Columns: Use this option to quickly select all columns. This option is selected by default. To manually select columns, deselect this option and select the columns to export from the Available Columns list.
- Available Columns: Use this option to select the columns to export.
- Selected Columns: This option displays the selected columns to export. The column sequence can be adjusted. By default, all columns are displayed in this option.
Column/Row Size in FAQ describes the row and column size supported by xlsx and xls.
+ Managing Table Data
+ After creating a table, you can query, edit, and analyze the table and table data.
+ Viewing Table DataRight-click the selected table and select View Table Data. The View Table Data tab is displayed where you can view the table data information.
+ 
+
+
+ Toolbar menu in the View Table Data window:
+
+ Toolbar Name
+ |
+Description
+ |
+
|---|
+
+Copy
+ |
+Click the icon to copy selected content from View Table Data window to clipboard. Shortcut key - Ctrl+C.
+ |
+
+Advanced Copy
+ |
+Click the icon to copy content from result window to the clipboard. Results can be copied to include the row number and/or column header. Refer to Table 1 to set this preference. The shortcut key is Ctrl+Shift+C.
+ |
+
+Show/Hide Search Bar
+ |
+Click the icon to display/hide the search text field. This is a toggle button.
+ |
+
+Encoding
+ |
+Refer to Execute SQL Queries for information on encoding selection.
+ |
+
+
+
+
+ Icons in the Search field:
+
+ Icon Name
+ |
+Description
+ |
+
|---|
+
+Search
+ |
+Click the icon to search the table data displayed based on the criteria defined. The text is case-insensitive.
+ |
+
+Clear Search Text
+ |
+Click the icon to clear the search texts entered in the search field.
+ |
+
+
+
+
+ Refer to Execute SQL Queries for column reordering and sorting options. - Query Submit Time: Provides the query submitted time.
- Number of rows fetched with execution time is displayed. The default number of rows is displayed. If there are additional rows to be fetched, then it will be denoted with the word "more". You can scroll to the bottom of the table to fetch and display all rows.
- When you view table data, Data Studio automatically adjusts the column widths for an optimal table view. You can resize the columns as needed. If the text content of a cell exceeds the total available display area, then resizing the cell column may cause DS to become unresponsive.
+ - When the data in a table cell is more than 1,000 characters, it will be trimmed to 1,000 characters with "..." at the end.
- - File Name: Use this option to specify the name of the exported file. By default, the table name is displayed in this option.
The file name follows the Windows file naming convention.
+
+ - Individual table data window is displayed for each table.
- If the data of the table that is already opened is modified, then refresh and open the table data again to view the updated information on the same opened window.
- While the data is loading a message displays at the bottom stating "fetching".
- If the text of a column contains spaces, word wrapping is applied to fit the column width. Word wrapping is not applied to columns without spaces.
- Select part of cell content and press Ctrl+C.
- The size of a column is determined by the maximum content length in the column.
+
+
+Editing Table DataRight-click the selected table and select Edit Table Data. The Edit Table data tab is displayed.
+ Refer to Viewing Table Data for description on copy and search toolbar options.
+ 
+
+ Data Studio validates only the following data types entered into cells: Bigint, bit, boolean, char, date, decimal, double, float, integer, numeric, real, smallint, tinyint, and varchar.
+ Editing of array data, time with time zone, and time stamp with time zone are not supported.
+ Any related errors during this operation reported by database will be displayed in Data Studio.
+ Reindexing a TableIndex facilitates lookup of records. You need to reindex tables in the following scenarios:
+ - The index is corrupted and no longer contains valid data. Although in theory this will never happen, in practice, indexes can become corrupted due to software bugs or hardware failures. Reindexing provides a recovery method.
- An index in the GaussDB(DWS) database may have numerous empty or nearly empty pages when accessed in an unconventional manner. By using the REINDEX mode, the space used by the index can be reduced. This mode creates a new index without any empty pages.
- You have altered a storage parameter (such as the fill factor) for an index, and wish to ensure that the change has taken full effect.
+ Follow the steps below to reindex a table:
+ Right-click the selected table and select Reindex Table. A pop-up message and the status bar display the status of the completed operation.
+ This operation is not supported for Partition ORC tables.
+
+ Analyzing a TableThe analyzing table operation collects statistics about tables and table indexes and stores the collected information in internal tables of the database where the query optimizer can access the information and use it to help make better query planning choices.
+ Right-click the selected table and select Analyze Table. The Analyze Table message and status bar displays the status of the completed operation.
+ Truncating a TableThis operation deletes the all data from an existing table. Exercise caution when performing this operation.
+ Right-click the selected table and select Truncate Table. Data Studio prompts you to confirm this operation. In the confirmation dialog box, click OK to complete the operation successfully.
+ A pop-up message and the status bar display the status of the completed operation.
+ ER DiagramsView table relationships, including primary keys, foreign keys, and associated tables with ER diagram.
+ 
+
+ Vacuuming a TableVacuuming table operation reclaims space and makes it available for re-use.
+ Right-click the selected table and select Vacuum Table. The Vacuum Table message and status bar display the status of the completed operation.
+ Setting the Table DescriptionRight-click the selected table and select Set Table Description. The Update Table Description dialog box is displayed. It prompts you to set the table description.
+ 
+
+ Enter the description and click OK. The status bar displays the status of the completed operation.
+ Setting a SchemaRight-click the selected table and select Set Schema. The Set Schema dialog box is displayed, prompting you to select the new schema for the selected table.
+ Select the schema name from the drop-down list and click OK. The selected table will be moved to the new schema.
+ 
+
+ The status bar displays the status of the completed operation.
+ - This operation is not supported for partitioned ORC tables.
- If the required schema contains a table with the same name as the current table, then Data Studio does not allow setting the schema for the table.
+
+ Exporting Table Data- Right-click the selected table and select Export Table Data.
The Export Table Data dialog box is displayed with the following options:
+- Format: Table data can be exported in Excel (xlsx/xls), CSV, TXT, or binary format. The default format is Excel (xlsx/xls).
- Include Header: This option is available for CSV and TXT files. If this option is selected, the exported data will include the column headers. By default, this option is selected when a CSV or TXT file is exported, but it is not mandatory. This option will be disabled for Excel (xlsx/xls) and binary formats.
- Quotes: Use this option to define quotes. You can enter only a single-byte character for this option, and the value of Quotes should be different from that of Delimiter. By default, this option is selected when a CSV or TXT file is exported, but it is not mandatory. This option will be disabled for Excel (xlsx/xls) and binary formats.
- If table data includes delimiters, the character specified in this option will be used.
- If the value includes a quote, it will not be escaped by the same quote.
- If the result contains the values of multiple rows, it will be quoted by quotes.
+ - Escape: Use this option to define escape values. You can enter only a single-byte character for this option, and the value of Escape must be different from that of Quotes. By default, this option is selected when a CSV or TXT file is exported, but it is not mandatory. This option will be disabled for Excel (xlsx/xls) and binary formats.
- Replace NULL with: Use this option to replace the null value in the table with a specified string. This option contains a maximum of 100 characters, and cannot contain newline characters or carriage return characters. The value of this option must be different from the values of Delimiter and Quotes. By default, this option is selected when a CSV or TXT file is exported, but it is not mandatory. This option will be disabled for Excel (xlsx/xls) and binary formats.
- Encoding (optional): This option will be pre-populated with the encoding options made in the Preferences > Session Setting tab.
- Delimiter: Use this option to define delimiters. You can select the provided delimiters or customize delimiters in Delimiter > Other. The default delimiter for CSV and TXT formats is commas (,). The Other field can contain a maximum of 10 bytes. By default, this option is selected when a CSV or TXT file is exported, but it is not mandatory. This option will be disabled for Excel (xlsx/xls) and binary formats. It is mandatory when the Other field is selected.
- All Columns: Use this option to quickly select all columns. This option is selected by default. To manually select columns, deselect this option and select the columns to export from the Available Columns list.
- Available Columns: Use this option to select the columns to export.
- Selected Columns: This option displays the selected columns to export. The column sequence can be adjusted. By default, all columns are displayed in this option.
The .xlsx format supports a maximum of 1 million rows and 16,384 columns. The .xls format supports a maximum of 64,000 rows and 256 columns.
- - Output Path: Use this option to select the location where the exported file is saved. The Output Path field is auto-populated with the selected path.
- Security Disclaimer: This option displays the security disclaimer. To continue the export operation, you need to read and agree to the disclaimer.
- I Agree: By default this option is selected. You cannot proceed if this option is deselected.
- Do not show again: You can select this option to hide the Security Disclaimer for the subsequent table data export from the current Data Studio instance.
- - String, double, date, calendar, and Boolean data will be stored in the Excel format. All other data types will be converted into strings and stored in the Excel format.
- To export an Excel file, if a cell contains more than 32767 characters, the data exported to the cell will be truncated.
+ - File Name: Use this option to specify the name of the exported file. By default, the table name is displayed in this option.
The file name follows the Windows file naming convention.
- - Complete the required fields and click OK.
The Save As dialog box is displayed.
- - Click Save to save the exported data in the selected format. The status bar displays the progress of the operation.
The Data Exported Successfully dialog box and status bar displays the status of the completed operation. - If the disk is full during table export, Data Studio displays an I/O error. Perform the following operations to rectify this error:
- Click OK to close the connection profile.
- Clean the disk.
- Re-establish the connection and export the table data.
- - The exported file name will not be the same as table name, if the table name contains characters which are not supported by Windows.
+ - Output Path: Use this option to select the location where the exported file is saved. The Output Path field is auto-populated with the selected path.
- Security Disclaimer: This option displays the security disclaimer. To continue the export operation, you need to read and agree to the disclaimer.
- I Agree: By default this option is selected. You cannot proceed if this option is deselected.
- Do not show again: You can select this option to hide the Security Disclaimer for the subsequent table data export from the current Data Studio instance.
+
+ - String, double, date, calendar, and Boolean data will be stored in the Excel format. All other data types will be converted into strings and stored in the Excel format.
- To export an Excel file, if a cell contains more than 32767 characters, the data exported to the cell will be truncated.
+
+ - Complete the required fields and click OK.
The Save As dialog box is displayed.
+ - Click Save to save the exported data in the selected format. The status bar displays the progress of the operation.
The Data Exported Successfully dialog box and status bar displays the status of the completed operation. - If the disk is full during table export, Data Studio displays an I/O error. Perform the following operations to rectify this error:
- Click OK to close the connection profile.
- Clean the disk.
- Re-establish the connection and export the table data.
+ - The exported file name will not be the same as table name, if the table name contains characters which are not supported by Windows.
- Canceling the Table Data Export OperationPerform the following steps to cancel the table data export operation:
- - Double-click the status bar to open the Progress View tab.
- In the Progress View tab, click
 . - In the Cancel Operation dialog box, click Yes.
The Messages tab and status bar display the status of the canceled operation.
+
+ Importing Table DataPrerequisites:
+ - If the definition of the source file does not match that of the destination table, modify the properties of the destination table in the Import Table Data dialog box. Additional columns of the destination table will be inserted with default values.
- You should know the export properties of the file to be imported, such as Delimiter, Quotes, and Escape. Export properties saved during data export cannot be changed when a file is being imported.
+ Perform the following steps to import table data:
+ - Right-click the selected table and select Import Table Data.
The Import Table Data dialog box is displayed with the following options:
+- Import Data File: This option displays the path of the imported file. Click Browse to select other files.
- Format: Table data can be imported in CSV, TXT, or binary format. CSV is the default format.
- Include Header: Select this option if the imported file contains a column header. By default, this option is selected when a CSV or TXT file is exported, but it is not mandatory. This option will be disabled for the binary format.
- Quotes: You can enter only a single-byte character for this option, and the value of Quotes should be different from the null value of Delimiter. By default, this option is selected when a CSV or TXT file is exported, but it is not mandatory. This option will be disabled for the binary format.
- Escape: You can enter only a single-byte character for this option. If the value of Escape is the same as that of Quotes, the value of Escape will be replaced with \0. This option defaults to double quotation marks (") when a CSV or TXT file is exported, but it is not mandatory. This option will be disabled for the binary format.
- Replace with Null: You can configure this option to replace the null value in the table with a string. The null string used for exporting data should be used for importing data, and the null string needs to be specified. By default, this option is selected when a CSV or TXT file is exported, but it is not mandatory. This option will be disabled for the binary format.
- Encoding (optional): This option will be pre-populated with the encoding options made in the Preferences > Session Setting tab.
- Delimiter: You can select the provided delimiters or customize delimiters in Delimiter > Other. The default delimiter for CSV and TXT formats is commas (,). The value of this option should be different from those of Quotes and Replace with Null. By default, this option is selected when a CSV or TXT file is exported, but it is not mandatory. This option will be disabled for the binary format. It is mandatory when the Other field is selected.
- All Columns: Use this option to quickly select all columns. This option is selected by default. To manually select columns, deselect this option and select the columns to export from the Available Columns list.
- Available Columns: Use this option to select the columns to export.
- Selected Columns: This option displays the selected columns to export. The column sequence can be adjusted. By default, all columns are displayed in this option.
+
+ - Click Browse next to the Import Data File field.
The Open dialog box is displayed.
+ - In the Open dialog box, select the file to import and click Open.
- Complete the required fields and click OK.
The status bar displays the operation progress. The imported data will be added to the existing table data.
+The Data Imported Successfully dialog box and status bar display the status of the completed operation.
+ Show DDLRight-click the table, and then select Show DDL. Data Studio displays the DDL of the selected table.
+ - A new terminal window is opened each time you select to show DDL.
- MS Visual C runtime file (msvcrt100.dll) is required to complete this operation. For details, see Troubleshooting.
+
+
+ Exporting Table DDL and DataFollow the steps below to export the table DDL:
+ - In the Object Browser pane, right-click the selected table and select Export DDL and Data.
You need to customize the export path. To compress data, select .zip
+
+
+You must click I agree under Security Disclaimer, then click OK. You can disable the security disclaimer. After the disclaimer is disabled, it will not be displayed when you export the DDL. For details, see Table 1.
+ - Click OK. The operation progress is displayed on the status bar in the lower right corner.
- If the table name contains characters which are not supported by Windows, the exported file name will not be the same as table name.
- MS Visual C runtime file (msvcrt100.dll) is required to complete this operation. For details, see Troubleshooting.
+
+The Export message and status bar display the status of the completed operation.
+
+Table 1 Supported DDL encoding formatsDatabase Encoding
+ |
+File Encoding
+ |
+Support for Exporting a DDL
+ |
+
|---|
+
+UTF-8
+ |
+UTF-8
+ |
+Yes
+ |
+
+GBK
+ |
+Yes
+ |
+
+LATIN1
+ |
+Yes
+ |
+
+GBK
+ |
+GBK
+ |
+Yes
+ |
+
+UTF-8
+ |
+Yes
+ |
+
+LATIN1
+ |
+No
+ |
+
+LATIN1
+ |
+LATIN1
+ |
+Yes
+ |
+
+GBK
+ |
+No
+ |
+
+UTF-8
+ |
+Yes
+ |
+
+
+
+ You can select multiple objects from regular and partitioned tables to export DDL and data, including columns, rows, indexes, constraints, and partitions.
+
+
+
+ Renaming a tableRight-click the selected table and select Rename Table. The Rename Table dialog box is displayed prompting you to provide the new name.
+ Enter the table name and click OK. You can view the updated table name in Object Browser. This operation is not supported for partitioned ORC tables.
+
+
+
+ Dropping a TableRight-click the selected table and select Drop Table. Press Ctrl+left-click (select objects one by one) or Shift+left-click (select objects in batches) to select the objects to be dropped.
+ This operation removes the complete table structure (including the table definition and index information) from the database and you have to re-create this table once again to store data.
+
+ Viewing Table PropertiesRight-click the selected table and select Properties.
+ Data Studio displays the properties (General, Columns, Constraints, and Index) of the selected table in different tabs. The following table lists the operations that can be performed on each tab along with data editing and refreshing operation. Edit operation is performed by double-clicking the cell.
+ When viewing table data, Data Studio automatically adjusts the column widths for table view. You can resize the columns as needed. If the text content of a cell exceeds the total available display area, then resizing the cell column may cause Data Studio to become unresponsive.
+
+ - Individual property window is displayed for each table.
- If the property of a table is modified for a table that is already opened, refresh and open the properties of the table again to view the updated information on the same opened window.
- If the content of the column has spaces between the words, then word wrapping is applied to fit the column within the display area. Word wrapping is not applied if the content does not have any spaces between the words.
- The size of the column is determined by the maximum content length column.
- Any change made to the table properties from Object Browser will be reflected after refreshing the Properties tab.
- Pasting operation is not allowed in the Data Type column.
+
+
+ Grant/Revoke Privilege- Right-click the selected regular/partitioned table and select Grant/Revoke.
The Grant/Revoke dialog box is displayed.
+
+
+ - Select the objects to grant/revoke privilege from the Object Selection tab and click Next.
+
+ - Select the role from the Role drop-down list in the Privilege Selection tab. Select Grant/Revoke in the Privilege Selection tab.
- On the SQL Preview tab, you can check the automatically generated SQL query.
- Click Finish.
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_99.html b/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_99.html
deleted file mode 100644
index fc35f9fb1..000000000
--- a/docs/dws/tool/DWS_DS_99.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,78 +0,0 @@
-
-
- Show DDL
- To display a DDL query for a table, perform the following steps:
- - Right-click the table, and then select Show DDL.
Data Studio displays the DDL of the selected table.
- - A new terminal window is opened each time you select to show DDL.
- MS Visual C runtime file (msvcrt100.dll) is required to complete this operation. For details, see Troubleshooting.
-
-
-Database Encoding
- |
-File Encoding
- |
-Show DDL
- |
-
|---|
-
-UTF-8
- |
-UTF-8
- |
-Yes
- |
-
-GBK
- |
-Yes
- |
-
-LATIN1
- |
-Yes
- |
-
-GBK
- |
-GBK
- |
-Yes
- |
-
-UTF-8
- |
-Yes
- |
-
-LATIN1
- |
-No
- |
-
-LATIN1
- |
-LATIN1
- |
-Yes
- |
-
-GBK
- |
-No
- |
-
-UTF-8
- |
-Yes
- |
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/docs/dws/tool/dws_07_0001.html b/docs/dws/tool/dws_07_0001.html
index 38d3d6990..7b06d373e 100644
--- a/docs/dws/tool/dws_07_0001.html
+++ b/docs/dws/tool/dws_07_0001.html
@@ -1,84 +1,79 @@
-
+
Overview
- This document describes how to use GaussDB(DWS) tools, including client tools, as shown in Table 1, and server tools, as shown in Table 2.
- The client tools can be obtained by referring to Downloading Related Tools.
- The server tools are stored in the $GPHOME/script and $GAUSSHOME/bin paths on the database server.
+ This document describes how to use GaussDB(DWS) tools, including client tools, as shown in Table 1, and server tools, as shown in Table 2.
+ The client tools can be obtained by referring to Downloading Related Tools.
+ The server tools are stored in the $GPHOME/script and $GAUSSHOME/bin paths on the database server.
- Table 1 Client ToolsTool
+Table 1 Client toolsTool
|
-Description
+ | Overview
|
|---|
-gsql
+ | gsql
|
-A command-line interface (CLI) SQL client tool running on the Linux OS. It is used to connect to the database in a GaussDB(DWS) cluster and perform operation and maintenance on the database.
+ | A command-line interface (CLI) SQL client tool running on the Linux OS. It is used to connect to the database in a data warehouse cluster and operate and maintain the database.
|
-Data Studio
+ | Data Studio
|
-A client tool used to connect to a database. It provides a GUI for managing databases and objects, editing, executing, and debugging SQL scripts, and viewing execution plans. Data Studio can run on a 32-bit or 64-bit Windows OS. You can use it after decompression without installation.
+ | A client tool used to connect to a database. It provides a GUI for managing databases and objects, editing, executing, and debugging SQL scripts, and viewing execution plans. Data Studio can run on a 32-bit or 64-bit Windows OS. You can use it after decompression without installation.
|
-GDS
+ | GDS
|
-A CLI tool running on the Linux OS. It works with foreign tables to quickly import and export data. The GDS tool package needs to be installed on the server where the data source file is located. This server is called the data server or the GDS server.
+ | A CLI tool running on the Linux OS. It efficiently handles the import and export of data using foreign tables. The GDS tool package needs to be installed on the server where the data source file is located. This server is called the data server or the GDS server.
|
-DSC
+ | DSC
|
-A CLI tool used for migrating SQL scripts from Teradata or Oracle to GaussDB(DWS) to rebuild a database on GaussDB(DWS). DSC runs on the Linux OS. You can use it after decompression without installation.
+ | Database Schema Convertor (DSC) is a CLI tool running on Linux or Windows. It migrates SQL scripts in Teradata or Oracle databases to SQL scripts applicable to GaussDB(DWS), enabling GaussDB(DWS) database rebuilding. DSC runs on the Linux OS. You can use it after decompression without installation.
|
Table 2 Server ToolsTool
+Table 2 Server ToolsTool
|
-Description
+ | Description
|
|---|
-gs_dump
+ | gs_dump
|
-gs_dump exports database information, such as the complete and consistent data of database objects (including databases, schemas, tables, and views), without affecting the normal access of users to the database.
+ | gs_dump exports database information, such as the complete and consistent data of database objects (including databases, schemas, tables, and views), without affecting the normal access of users to the database.
|
-gs_dumpall
+ | gs_dumpall
|
-gs_dumpall exports database information, such as the complete and consistent data of database objects, without affecting the normal access of users to the database.
+ | gs_dumpall exports database information, such as the complete and consistent data of database objects, without affecting the normal access of users to the database.
|
-gs_restore
+ | gs_restore
|
-gs_restore is a tool provided by GaussDB(DWS) to import data that is exported using gs_dump. It can also be used to import files that were exported using gs_dump.
+ | gs_restore is a tool provided by GaussDB(DWS) to import data that is exported using gs_dump. It can also be used to import files that were exported using gs_dump.
|
-gds_check
+ | gds_check
|
-gds_check is used to check the GDS deployment environment, including the OS parameters, network environment, and disk usage. It also supports the recovery of system parameters. This helps detect potential problems during GDS deployment and running, improving the execution success rate.
+ | gds_check is used to check the GDS deployment environment, including the OS parameters, network environment, and disk usage. It also supports the recovery of system parameters. This helps detect potential problems during GDS deployment and running, improving the execution success rate.
|
-gds_install
+ | gds_install
|
-gds_install is a script tool used to install GDS in batches, improving GDS deployment efficiency.
+ | gds_install is a script tool used to install GDS in batches, improving GDS deployment efficiency.
|
-gds_uninstall
+ | gds_uninstall
|
-gds_uninstall is a script tool used to uninstall GDS in batches.
+ | gds_uninstall is a script tool used to uninstall GDS in batches.
|
-gds_ctl
+ | gds_ctl
|
-gds_ctl is a script tool used for starting or stopping GDS service processes in batches. You can start or stop GDS service processes, which use the same port, on multiple nodes at a time, and set a daemon for each GDS process during the startup.
- |
-
-gs_sshexkey
- |
-During cluster installation, you need to execute commands and transfer files among hosts in the cluster. gs_sshexkey is used to help users establish mutual trust.
+ | gds_ctl is a script tool used for starting or stopping GDS service processes in batches. You can start or stop GDS service processes, which use the same port, on multiple nodes at a time, and set a daemon for each GDS process during the startup.
|
diff --git a/docs/dws/tool/dws_07_0002.html b/docs/dws/tool/dws_07_0002.html
index 76bb5e1ec..44ae896b0 100644
--- a/docs/dws/tool/dws_07_0002.html
+++ b/docs/dws/tool/dws_07_0002.html
@@ -1,12 +1,118 @@
-
+
Downloading Related Tools
-- Log in to the management console and search for GaussDB(DWS). The GaussDB(DWS) console page is displayed.
Log in to the GaussDB(DWS) management console at: https://console.otc.t-systems.com/dws/
- - In the navigation tree on the left, choose Connections.
- In the Download Client and Driver area, select the tools corresponding to the cluster version based on the computer OS and download them.
You can download the following tools:
-- gsql CLI client: The gsql tool package contains the gsql client tool, GDS (parallel data loading tool), gs_dump, gs_dumpall, and gs_restore tools.
- Data Studio GUI client
- DSC migration tool
-The gsql and Data Studio client tools have multiple historical versions. You can click Historical Version to download the tools based on the cluster version. GaussDB(DWS) clusters are compatible with earlier versions of gsql and Data Studio tools. You are advised to download the matching tool version based on the cluster version.
-Figure 1 Downloading the DSC client
+Procedure- Log in to the GaussDB(DWS) console.
- In the navigation tree on the left, choose Management > Client Connections.
- In the Download Client and Driver area, select the tools corresponding to the cluster version based on the computer OS and download them.
You can download the following tools:
+- CLI client: The gsql tool package contains the gsql client tool, GDS (parallel data loading tool), gs_dump, gs_dumpall, and gs_restore tools.
- Data Studio GUI client
- DSC migration tool
+The gsql and Data Studio client tools have multiple historical versions. You can click Historical Version to download the tools based on the cluster version. GaussDB(DWS) clusters are compatible with earlier versions of gsql and Data Studio tools. You are advised to download the matching tool version based on the cluster version.
+Figure 1 Downloading the client
+ GaussDB(DWS) also supports the open source ODBC driver: PostgreSQL ODBC 09.01.0200 or later.
+
+
+
+ Overview
-Data Studio provides a graphical interface which supports essential features of the database. This simplifies database development and application building tasks.
- Data Studio allows the database developer to manage and create database objects (database, schema, functions, procedures, tables, sequences, columns, indexes, constraints, views, and tablespaces), execute SQL statements or SQL scripts, edit and execute PL/SQL statements, as well as import and export table data.
- Data Studio also allows the database developer to debug and fix defects in the PL/SQL code using debugging operations such as Step Into, Step Out, Step Over, Continue, and Terminate.
- The following figure provides the operational context of database and Data Studio.
- 
+ Data Studio provides a graphical interface which supports essential features of the database. This simplifies database development and application building tasks.
+ Data Studio allows the database developer to manage and create database objects (database, schema, functions, procedures, tables, sequences, columns, indexes, constraints, views, and tablespaces), execute SQL statements or SQL scripts, edit and execute PL/SQL statements, as well as import and export table data.
+ Data Studio also allows the database developer to debug and fix defects in the PL/SQL code using debugging operations such as Step Into, Step Out, Step Over, Continue, and Terminate.
+ The following figure provides the operational context of database and Data Studio.
+ 
+ Data Studio GUI
+ Table 1 Introduction to the GUIGUI Name
+ |
+Description
+ |
+
|---|
+
+Main Menu
+ |
+Provides basic operations of Data Studio.
+ |
+
+Toolbar
+ |
+Provides entries to common operations.
+ |
+
+SQL Terminal tab
+ |
+Executes SQL statements and functions/procedures.
+ |
+
+PL/SQL Viewer tab
+ |
+Displays the content of function/procedures.
+ |
+
+CallStack pane
+ |
+Displays the execution stack.
+ |
+
+Breakpoints pane
+ |
+Displays all breakpoints that have been set.
+ |
+
+Variables pane
+ |
+Shows variables and their values.
+ |
+
+SQL Assistant tab
+ |
+Displays suggestion or reference for the information entered in the SQL Terminal and PL/SQL Viewer.
+ |
+
+Result tab
+ |
+Displays the result(s) of an executed function/procedure, or an SQL statement.
+ |
+
+Message tab
+ |
+Displays the process output, standard input, standard output, and standard errors.
+ |
+
+Object Browser pane
+ |
+Contains a hierarchical tree display of database connection(s) and related database objects to which users can access. All created schemas, except the public schemas, are grouped under Catalogs by default, and user schemas are grouped under Schemas of the corresponding database.
+ NOTE: Object Browser displays only the objects that meet the permission requirements of the current user.
+
+ |
+
+Minimized Window Panel pane
+ |
+Used to open the Callstack, Breakpoints, and Variables panes. This pane is displayed only when Callstack, Breakpoints or Variables pane or all three are minimized.
+ |
+
+Search Toolbar
+ |
+Used to search objects from Object browser.
+ |
+
+
+
+
+
+ Performance SpecificationsThe loading and operation performance of Data Studio depends on the number of objects to be loaded in Object Browser, including tables, views, and columns.
+ Memory consumption also depends on the number of loaded objects.
+ To improve object loading performance and better utilize memory, you are advised to divide an object into multiple namespaces, and to avoid using namespaces that contain a large number of objects and cause data skew. By default, Data Studio loads the namespaces in the search_path set for the user logged in. Other namespaces and objects are loaded only when needed.
+ To improve performance, you are advised to load all objects. Do not load objects based on user permissions. Table 2 describes the minimum access permissions required to the listed objects in Object Browser.
+
+ Table 2 Minimum permission requirementsObject Type
+ |
+Permission Type
+ |
+Object Browser - Minimum Permission
+ |
+
|---|
+
+Databases
+ |
+Create, Connect, Temporary/Temp, All
+ |
+Connect
+ |
+
+Schema
+ |
+Create, Usage, All
+ |
+Usage
+ |
+
+Tables
+ |
+Select, Insert, Update, Delete, Truncate, References, All
+ |
+Select
+ |
+
+Columns
+ |
+Select, Insert, Update, References, All
+ |
+Select
+ |
+
+Views
+ |
+Select, Insert, Update, Delete, Truncate, References, All
+ |
+Select
+ |
+
+Sequences
+ |
+Usage, Select, Update, All
+ |
+Usage
+ |
+
+Functions
+ |
+Execute, All
+ |
+Execute
+ |
+
+
+
+
+ To improve the performance of the finding and replacing operations, you are advised to break a line that contains more than 10,000 characters into multiple short lines.
+ The following test items and results can help you learn the performance of Data Studio.
+
+ Recommended maximum memory (current version)
+ |
+1.4 GB
+ |
+
|---|
+
+Performance (The database contains a 150 KB table and a 150 KB view, each containing three columns. The maximum memory configuration is used.)
+ |
+
+>
+ |
+Time taken to refresh namespaces in Object Browser
+ |
+15s
+ |
+
+>
+ |
+Time taken for initial loading and expanding of all tables/views in Object Browser
+ |
+90s-120s
+ |
+
+>
+ |
+Time taken for subsequent loading and expanding of all tables/views in Object Browser
+ |
+<10s
+ |
+
+>
+ |
+Total used memory
+ |
+700 MB
+ |
+
+
+
+
+ The performance data is for reference only. The actual performance may vary according to the application scenario.
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/dws/tool/dws_07_0056.html b/docs/dws/tool/dws_07_0056.html
index 3856324ec..788800b2b 100644
--- a/docs/dws/tool/dws_07_0056.html
+++ b/docs/dws/tool/dws_07_0056.html
@@ -1,65 +1,64 @@
-
+
Handling Import Errors
- ScenariosHandle errors that occurred during data import.
+ ScenariosHandle errors that occurred during data import.
- Querying Error InformationErrors that occur when data is imported are divided into data format errors and non-data format errors.
+ Querying Error InformationErrors that occur when data is imported are divided into data format errors and non-data format errors.
-
|
|---|
|
|---|
|
|---|
|
|---|
|
|---|
|
|---|
